,**^ 
 
 
 ^ c^ N 
 
 ,0 o 
 
 
 > o c 
 
 ■•*>°: 
 
 
 
 
 • \ 
 
 
 An ~Cl 
 
 
 
 & -^ 
 
 
 ,0 0, 
 
 V AN 
 
 CO 
 
 -:' 
 
 H 'Ci- 
 
 ,0 o 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 a> -/a 
 
 
 ,& 
 
 
 '* .\\ s 
 
 ,v ^ 
 
 ■ \> - r '.- 
 
 ' 
 
 -y ^ 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 v \ v> 
 
 5 A ^/- ** 
 
 '*. *, 
 
 
 
 
 ' Va 
 
N ,0 
 
 '%. 
 
 
 !0 
 
 ,:°^ 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 A 
 
 a X 
 
 M Alo, 
 
 . V 
 
 A^ 
 
 •\* * 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 a> -/,,. 
 
 o s 
 
 
 
 -\ 
 
 v> V . 
 
 
 \\ , \ I « 
 
 '- ^ 
 
 
 
 A O 
 
 ■'- -> an *j 
 
 , X 
 
 
 
 cf-. 
 
 - .0 
 
 V r> 
 
 '- 
 
 y< -^ A p. 
 
 a> '•-> 
 
 v ^ 
 
 \V '*, 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 o %• 
 
 
 \V 
 
 
 % /'• 
 
 AN 
 
THE BOOK OF 
 
 SCHOOL AND COLLEGE SPORTS 
 
 BY 
 
 RALPH HENRY BARBOUR 
 
 AUTHOR OF 
 
 BEHIND THE LINE, WEATHERBY's INNING 
 
 ON YOUIt MARK ! ETC. 
 
 WITH THE EDITORIAL ASSISTANCE OF 
 
 RALPH D. PAINE W. A. SCHICK, Jr. 
 
 "EDWARD N. ROBINSON R. T. ABERCROMBIE 
 
 AND OTHERS 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 
 NEW YORK MCMIV 
 
£i/7, 
 
 LIBRARY t> CONGRESS 
 Two Cooies Received 
 
 MAY 81 1904 
 
 Cooyrtght Entry 
 CLASS! fe XXc. No. 
 
 n*j 8* tut- 
 
 COPY B 
 
 COPTEIGHT, 1904, BY 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 
 
 Published Map, 190$ 
 
ACKNOWLEDGMENT 
 
 In the preparation of this volume the author 
 has derived assistance from numerous books and 
 articles. He takes pleasure in acknowledging his 
 special indebtedness to A Scientific and Practical 
 Treatise on American Football for Schools and 
 Colleges, by Stagg and Williams ; A Primer of 
 College Football, by W. H. Lewis ; Football, by 
 Camp and Deland ; Track Athletics in Detail, and 
 certain volumes of Spalding's Athletic Library. 
 
 The playing rules for the several sports treated 
 of are printed herein through the courtesy of and 
 by special arrangement with the American Sports 
 Publishing Company, of New York, owner of the 
 copyrights. 
 
Better to hunt in fields for health unbought, 
 Than fee the doctor for a nauseous draught ; 
 The wise for cure on exercise depend, 
 God never made his work for man to mend. 
 
 Dryden. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 American Football , . 1 
 
 Chapter I. — Football Ancient and Modern .... 3 
 
 II. — How American Football is Played ... 9 
 
 III. — Forming a Team 16 
 
 IV.— Training 28 
 
 V.— The Fundamentals 42 
 
 VI. — Positions and How to Play Them ... 56 
 
 VII.— Signals 80 
 
 VIII.— The Team 84 
 
 Football Maxims 101 
 
 Vocabulary of Football Rules and Phrases 102 
 
 Football Records 108 
 
 Football Rules 117 
 
 Duties of Officials 137 
 
 Baseball 141 
 
 Chapter I. — The Game and How it is Played . . . 143 
 
 II.— For the Captain 149 
 
 III.— Batting 154 
 
 IV. — Base Running . . 159 
 
 V.— Fielding . . • . . . . . .163 
 
 VI.— Positions : I, The Battery . . . .170 
 
 VII.— Positions : II, The Infield . . . .178 
 
 VIII.— Positions : III, The Outfield . . . .185 
 
 IX.— Team Play 188 
 
 Vocabulary 196 
 
 Scoring 202 
 
 Baseball Records ..... 204 
 
 Additional Records 207 
 
 Baseball Rules 209 
 
 xi 
 
xii CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Track and Field Athletics 243 
 
 Introduction . 245 
 
 Track Athletics 249 
 
 Field Athletics 269 
 
 Athletic Records 286 
 
 Additional Records 295 
 
 Laws of Athletics . 297 
 
 Lacrosse . 30? 
 
 Chapter I. — The Game as it Was and Is ... . 310 
 
 II.— How to Play . 321 
 
 Lacrosse Records ..... 339 
 
 Additional Records ..... 341 
 
 Lacrosse Rules 343 
 
 Ice Hockey 353 
 
 Chapter I.— The Game 355 
 
 II.— How to Play 362 
 
 III— The Positions 375 
 
 Ice Hockey Records . . . . . 384 
 
 Additional Records ... . 385 
 
 Ice Hockey Rules 387 
 
 Lawn Tennis 391 
 
 Chapter I. — The Game and How it is Played . . . 393 
 
 II.— Using the Racket 399 
 
 III.— Serving 408 
 
 IV.— Returning . 408 
 
 V.— Tactics 416 
 
 VI. — The Court, How to Make and Maintain it . 420 
 
 Lawn-Tennis Records .... 424 
 
 Official Ranking and Lists since 1895 . 426 
 
 Rules of Lawn Tennis .... 427 
 
 Appendix 433 
 
 Harvard- Yale Athletic Agreement 435 
 
CHAPTER I 
 
 FOOTBALL ANCIENT AND MODERN 
 
 The Descent of Football can be traced back unin- 
 terruptedly to the twelfth century. Although there is 
 no proof to that effect, it is probable that the game ex- 
 isted for centuries before that time; at least we know 
 that the ancient Greeks and Romans played some sort 
 of a game in which an object was kicked along the 
 ground. Perhaps it is safe to say that the parent of the 
 modern game originated with the first inhabitants of the 
 earth, and that with the possession of legs and feet came 
 a desire to kick something about, and its gratification. 
 
 However that may be, in the twelfth century and 
 thereafter a game of football similar in essentials to the 
 sport of the present day was played in England by the 
 lower classes. Shakespeare refers somewhat contemp- 
 tuously to it and the roughness indulged in by the con- 
 testants brought about the passing of laws prohibiting 
 the game. Despite this, however, it flourished as a 
 recreation for adults until the commencement of the 
 nineteenth century, at which time it made its appear- 
 ance in the public schools of England. There were then 
 
 no hard-and-fast rules governing the playing of the game, 
 
 3 
 
4 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 and so each school proceeded to fashion its own style of 
 football. Eton evolved the " wall game/' Charterhouse 
 the " dribbling " game, Westminster and Harrow modi- 
 fications of the latter and Rugby the game which still 
 bears its name. In the " dribbling " game touching the 
 ball with the hands was forbidden and the ball was made 
 to progress only by means of the feet; tackling was also 
 forbidden. In the Rugby game both running with the 
 ball and tackling the opponents were features. 
 
 About the middle of the century football gained en- 
 trance to the universities, and in 1863 an attempt was 
 made to form in London an association of Rugby clubs, 
 an attempt which did not meet with success until 1871, 
 at which time the " Rugby Football Union " came into 
 being. Uniform rules were adopted and many objec- 
 tionable features of the game eliminated. Players of 
 the "dribbling " game had meanwhile formed the 
 "Football Association " and all efforts to reconcile the 
 differences in the rival forms of the game and to merge 
 the two unions were vain. To-day the differences are 
 greater than ever and both Association and Rugby foot- 
 ball are enthusiastically championed and played from 
 one end of Great Britain to the other. 
 
 Beside the Association and the Rugby game there 
 are, exclusive of the American Intercollegiate game, 
 three forms of football extensively played by English- 
 speaking people. In Australia the Australian or Vic- 
 torian game is enthusiastically followed, while the 
 Rugby is also played to some extent. In Canada, be- 
 
FOOTBALL ANCIENT AND MODERN 5 
 
 side the Rugby game, the Quebec, Ontario and Cana- 
 dian Unions play a game under rules of their own adop- 
 tion. In Ireland Gaelic football had its beginning sev- 
 eral centuries ago and about 1890 immigrated to this 
 country, where at present it is second in popularity to 
 the intercollegiate game. 
 
 Football in America. — Football made its appear- 
 ance in this country in the first quarter of the last cen- 
 tury, when an inflated bladder was kicked about the vil- 
 lage commons of New England. By the middle of the 
 century the colleges had adopted the sport, and finally 
 in 1873 Yale, Princeton, Columbia and Rutgers got 
 together in New York, established a set of rules and so 
 gave the first impetus to intercollegiate football. This 
 beginning, however, was a rather confused adaptation of 
 the English Association game, and the credit for intro- 
 ducing the Rugby rules, which are the foundation of the 
 present system of intercollegiate football, belongs to 
 Harvard. The Harvard players learned this game from 
 Canadian teams and in 1876 persuaded Yale to try the 
 Rugby Union Rules. These were adopted without 
 change by the two universities and the first match 
 played in the same year. The original game has been 
 modified and improved along lines which encouraged 
 team play and the development of " head work," until 
 the American college football of to-day is as far in ad- 
 vance of the old Rugby game as the railroad was ahead 
 of the stage-coach, in science and ingenuity. 
 
 In 1877 the Intercollegiate Football Association was 
 
6 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 formed, made up of Harvard, Yale, Princeton and Co- 
 lumbia. In 1884 Columbia, her gridiron prestige 
 dimmed by innumerable defeats, dropped out. The fol- 
 lowing year the association was reorganized by Harvard, 
 Yale, Princeton, Pennsylvania and Wesleyan. In 1890 
 Harvard withdrew, followed in 1893 by Pennsylvania 
 and Wesleyan, leaving Yale and Princeton only. Since 
 1877 these two colleges have played yearly games. 
 
 In the last decade, football has spread among the 
 schools and colleges of the West and South, until such 
 leaders as Michigan, Wisconsin, Illinois and Chicago 
 universities have developed standards of play equal to 
 those of the Eastern football pioneers. 
 
 The general system of scoring points now in use was 
 adopted in 1883, although alterations in the values of 
 the touch-down and goal from touch-down have since oc- 
 curred, the former being changed from four points to 
 five, and the latter from two points to one. 
 
 American football has passed through many vicissi- 
 tudes and has more than once narrowly escaped wreck- 
 ing. To-day, however, it is firmly enthroned as the most 
 popular sport of American schools and colleges and it 
 may be fairly assumed that its days of threatening hos- 
 tility are passed. The game possesses both merits and 
 demerits, but the former greatly exceed in the total of 
 wholesome and invigorating influences. Football has 
 always had its detractors and probably always will, and 
 some of their grounds for objection are well taken. Yet 
 there is no faulty feature in the game which is not capa- 
 
FOOTBALL ANCIENT AND MODEKN 7 
 
 ble of elimination by those who have the conduct of the 
 sport in hand and its welfare at heart. Moreover, it is 
 probable that all the features open to adverse criticism 
 will ultimately be done away with, since so far the prog- 
 ress of the game has always been in the right direction 
 and every change of rule has been made with an eye to 
 ridding it of unncessary roughness. 
 
 The argument most frequently advanced against 
 football is that it is dangerous to the players. Accidents 
 do happen, it is true, but they are almost all of slight 
 importance. The danger of injury to boys of average 
 health and strength is slight, if they are properly trained 
 and prepared for hard play. 
 
 Pertinent Statistics. — It is well to consider a col- 
 lection of statistics recently made by Prof. Edwin G. 
 Dexter of the University of Illinois, who conducted the 
 most accurate and thorough investigation of college foot- 
 ball ever attempted. He sent out a series of questions 
 which were answered by the presidents or other officers 
 of more than seventy colleges. It was found that in the 
 last ten years no less than 22,776 students had played 
 football in these colleges, that only 654 of that great army 
 had been injured enough to lose time from their classes, 
 that only 8 had been reported as permanently injured, 
 and that 4 of these would ultimately recover. Not one 
 death could be traced directly to football in this large 
 number of players. A large accident-insurance com- 
 pany reported to him that in the time during which they 
 had paid 43 claims for injuries in football, they had 
 
8 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 recorded 36 injuries in skating, 25 in golf, 19 in tennis, 
 71 in bowling, and 97 in swimming. It is true also that 
 whenever there had been a larger percentage of football 
 hurts in preparatory schools than in colleges it has been 
 because the younger players had not trained properly, 
 had made the mistake of playing with teams too heavy 
 for them, or had thought they could play as hard and 
 as fast and as long as the older and more seasoned mem- 
 bers of the college teams. 
 
CHAPTEE II 
 
 HOW AMERICAN FOOTBALL IS PLAYED 
 
 The Field. — American intercollegiate football is 
 played on a field 330 feet long by 160 feet wide, its 
 boundaries marked by lines of white lime. (See Dia- 
 gram A.) Two of these lines are known as " side " or 
 " touch-lines," two as " goal-lines." When the ball 
 passes outside of these lines it is " out of play " until 
 returned. The territory so enclosed is marked by lines 
 which cross the field at 5-yard intervals. 
 
 Between the two " 25-yard " lines, so called because 
 they are 25 yards from either end of the field, other 
 lines running lengthwise of the field 5 yards apart give 
 the " center section " the appearance of a checker-board. 
 Within this the rules provide for plays that are not 
 allowed inside the " 25-yard lines," and the partial 
 " checker-board " pattern is merely adopted to help the 
 referee in deciding whether these particular plays are in 
 violation of the rules. 
 
 Of the cross-lines, three have special significance — 
 
 i. e., the two " 25-yard lines " and the " 55-yard line," 
 
 the latter marking the center of the field from which the 
 
 kick-off is made at the beginning of the game and after 
 
 9 
 
10 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 a goal has been tried for from touch-down, and the "25- 
 yard lines " constituting limits beyond which the oppo- 
 nents may not advance when the side having the ball 
 has earned a " kick-out " and limiting the territory in 
 which " mass plays " may be used. In the middle of 
 each " goal-line " stands the " goal/' consisting of two 
 upright posts 18 feet 6 inches apart connected by a hori- 
 zontal bar 10 feet from the ground. To score a " goal " 
 the ball must be kicked above the cross-bar and within 
 the uprights. 
 
 The Team. — Eleven players constitute a team. 
 Seven of these are known as " rushers " or " forwards " 
 and constitute the " line." Four others are knoAvn as 
 " backs." When facing the opponents for a " scrim- 
 mage " in ordinary formation they are distributed as 
 follows : 
 
 Left 
 
 Left Left 
 
 Center 
 
 Right Right 
 
 Right 
 
 End 
 
 Tackle Guard 
 
 Left 
 Half-Back 
 
 Quarter- 
 Back 
 
 Full-' 
 Back 
 
 Guard Tackle 
 
 Right 
 Half-Back 
 
 End 
 
 The Object of the game is to get the ball, a spher- 
 ical inflated rubber bladder enclosed in a covering of 
 grain leather, 1 over the opponent's " goal-line." This 
 
 "'The term " pigskin " used to denote the foothall is now only a 
 courtesy title, since for many years the covering of the ball has been 
 made of English grain leather. 
 
Goal 
 
 Goal 
 
 Diagram A. — The football field. 
 
12 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 may be done, under certain restrictions explained in the 
 rules, by kicking the ball or carrying it. If the ball is 
 carried over the opponent's "goal-line" by a player, or is 
 secured there by such player, a " touch-down " is scored 
 and the side scoring it has earned a free " try at goal." 
 A " touch-down " counts 5 points and a goal from 
 " touch-down " 1. A " goal " may also be effected by a 
 kick from the field without first making a "touch-down," 
 provided the kick is not a " punt." A " punt " is a kick 
 made by dropping the ball from the hand and meeting 
 it with the foot before it touches the ground. A " punt " 
 never scores a point. A " goal from field " may be made 
 by means of a drop-kick — performed by dropping the 
 ball from the hand and kicking it as it rises from the 
 ground — -or a " place-kick," in which the ball is kicked 
 from a position of rest upon the ground; this is also re- 
 ferred to as a " kick from placement." 
 
 A "goal from field" counts 5 points. The only other 
 method of scoring is by a "safety." This is accomplished 
 when a player is forced to touch the ball down behind 
 his own goal-line, and counts 2 points for the opponent. 
 A " safety " is used only when the side having the ball 
 is hard pressed, in order to prevent the opposing side 
 securing the ball and scoring a " touch-down." After 
 making a " safety " the side retains the ball and is 
 allowed a " free kick " from any point short of its 25- 
 yard line. A " free kick " is a play in which the oppo- 
 nents are restrained by rule from interfering with the 
 ball until the kick is made. 
 
*• 
 
 '1 
 
 PUNTING. 
 
Goal^Birae 
 
 
 'Bi Goo.1 ' 
 FB 
 
 
 
 
 PHB 
 
 
 <J 
 
 
 
 1MB 
 - rV 
 
 \J 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 R7 
 
 25 Yard Line 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 RE 
 
 ^J^ 
 
 \j 
 
 LE 
 
 U 
 
 
 <& 
 
 
 
 VJ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 LG — 
 
 o 
 
 
 LT 
 
 LG 
 
 LHB 
 
 A if 
 
 C 
 
 •RG 
 
 RT 
 
 LE 
 
 
 QB 
 
 V 
 
 — i- 
 
 
 
 RHB 
 
 W 
 
 
 FB 
 
 1 25Yard Line 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .A's&OQl, 
 
 
 Goal Line 
 
 Diagram B. — Position of players on football field at kick-off. 
 
14 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Play is begun with the opposing teams distributed 
 as in Diagram B and the ball in the centre of the field 
 on the " 55-yard line." From there it must be kicked 
 off by means of a " place-kick " not less than 10 yards. 
 The object of the side having the ball is to kick it as 
 great a distance as possible without sending it over the 
 opponent's " goal-line " and at the same time give it 
 sufficient elevation to allow the players of that side to 
 run down the field under it and " tackle " the man who 
 secures it before he can run or kick it back. 
 
 In the present case, by way of illustration, we will 
 suppose that A's " full-back " has kicked off the ball and 
 that B's " left half-back " has received it. Desiring to 
 retain possession of it for his side, he does not " punt " 
 it back, but instead tucks it under his arm and runs with 
 it toward A's " goal," the others of his team having 
 quickly formed about and ahead of him in what is 
 termed " interference." Meanwhile the opponent (A) 
 has sped forward the instant the ball is kicked and is 
 charging down upon the man with the ball, who is called 
 the " runner." (Diagram C.) Ultimately B's " inter- 
 ference " is broken up, the " runner " is " tackled " and 
 brought to earth and the ball becomes " dead." It is 
 then B's " first down." 
 
 ]STow comes the " scrimmage " (Diagram D). The 
 two teams " line up " on either side of an imaginary line 
 passing through the axis of the ball at right angles with 
 the " side-lines " and B's " center rush " or " snapper- 
 back " stoops over the ball and at a signal from " quar- 
 
jBkGro&lj 
 
 .U±B. 
 
 Q B — ^ 
 
 
 . LHB H 
 
 * 
 
 l — ^ 
 
 • o 
 
 RHB ggg 
 C— 
 
 f 
 
 CeotreTwQp Held 
 
 F FB 
 
 Diagkam C. — Interference formed for run-back of ball after 
 kick-off. 
 
16 
 
 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 ter-back " passes it between his legs to that player who 
 may run with it, kick it or pass it to a third player, who 
 in turn may advance it by running or kicking or may 
 again pass it to yet another member of his team, or, 
 failing to do any of these, touch it to the ground, when 
 it again becomes " dead," and " second down " is called. 
 If in three consecutive " downs " the ball has not been 
 advanced 5 yards it goes to the opponent. There is, 
 however, one exception to this rule; if the side having 
 
 FE3 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 Kt\e> 
 
 O 
 
 RT R& 
 
 o o 
 
 LrtP 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 i_e 
 
 LT 
 
 LG- 
 
 o 
 
 
 c 
 
 LQ- LT 
 
 o o 
 
 L'r 
 
 o 
 
 RG 
 
 RT 
 
 RE 
 
 LW 
 
 FB 
 
 RM9 
 
 
 Diagram D. — Positions of players at scrimmage : B has the ball. 
 
 the ball wishes to retain possession of it at the sacrifice 
 of territory it may do so by taking it back. 20 yards 
 and there touching it down for a " first down." This is, 
 naturally, a play seldom used. 
 
 If in " two downs " the team with the ball finds itself 
 
HOW FOOTBALL IS PLAYED 17 
 
 unable to " make ground " or advance the ball it will 
 usually kick. In this case one of the players stands back 
 from the line, receives the ball and punts it down the 
 field. Thereupon all the players of his team are " off- 
 side." 
 
 " In a general way it may be said that ' off-side ' 
 means between the ball and the opponents' goal, while 
 ' on-side ' means between the ball and one's own goal. 
 A player is barred from handling the ball when in the 
 former predicament. When a ball has been kicked by 
 a player, all those of his side who are ahead of him, that 
 is between him and the opponent's goal, are off-side until 
 the ball has been touched by an opponent." — (Walter 
 Camp. ) 
 
 Penalties. — For this and other offenses " penal- 
 ties " are provided by the rules, these " penalties " en- 
 tailing either the loss of the ball or of territory. A 
 team may be also penalized when, if it has the ball, one 
 of its members uses his hands or arms to detain an oppo- 
 nent; if, when it has not the ball, any player uses his 
 hands or arms for any purpose other than to get an oppo- 
 nent out of the way ; if any player interferes with the 
 " snapper-back " while he is putting the ball in play ; if 
 any player trips an opponent or indulges in unnecessary 
 roughness ; if any player throws, passes, or bats the ball 
 toward the opponent's goal and if any player interferes 
 with a player of the other side when the latter is about 
 to make a " fair catch." 
 
18 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Kicking. — There are three methods of kicking the 
 ball. A " Punt " is made by dropping the ball from 
 the hand and kicking it before it reaches the ground. 
 
 A " Drop-Kick " is made by dropping the ball to the 
 ground and kicking it just at the rebound. 
 
 A " Place-Kick," or " kick from placement," is 
 made by kicking the ball while it is on the ground. In 
 the " kick-off " a " place-kick " is used, the ball being 
 " cocked " in a depression of the soil. In a " try-at- 
 goal " after a " touch-down " the " place-kick " is also 
 used, in this case the ball being pointed and so held by 
 another player. A " goal from field " may be made 
 either from a " place-kick " or a " drop-kick " ; never 
 from a "punt." 
 
 A " Faik Catch " is made by catching the ball after 
 it has been kicked by the opponent before it touches 
 the ground, at the same time making a mark with the 
 heel to signify that no attempt at running will be made. 
 A " fair catch " entitles the side making it to put the 
 ball in play by " punt," " drop-kick " or " place kick " 
 without interference by the opponent. This is termed a 
 " free kick." 
 
 The game consists of two thirty-five minute halves 
 with a ten-minute intermission, or shorter periods of 
 play may be used if mutually decided upon by the 
 captains of the contesting- teams. Time is taken out 
 while the ball is being brought out for a " try-at-goal," 
 " kick-out " or "kick-off," when the game is unneces- 
 
HOW FOOTBALL IS PLAYED 19 
 
 sarily delayed or when play is suspended by referee or 
 umpire. 
 
 The Officials are an Umpire, whose duty it is to 
 decide upon the conduct of the players ; a Referee, who 
 decides questions regarding the ball's movements; and 
 a Linesman, who, with two assistants, one representing 
 each contesting team, marks the distance gained or lost, 
 assists the other officials in penalizing violations of the 
 rules and keeps the time. 
 
 This is by no means all of football ; but enough has 
 been written to supply a foundation upon which the un- 
 initiated may build a knowledge of the subject. 
 
CHAPTEE III 
 
 FORMING A TEAM 
 
 Football a Recreation. — Before going further it 
 is well to emphasize one point in the hope that it will 
 be remembered by the reader: Football is a recreation 
 and not a profession. If you go in for the game bear 
 this in mind. Very often, if you make the team, you 
 will find yourself inclined to doubt the truth of this state- 
 ment, for nowadays the training of a football eleven has 
 become such a serious and systematized undertaking that 
 the candidate very naturally receives a wrong idea of its 
 importance. If you go in for football, put your whole 
 soul into it, as the saying is, as long as you're at play or 
 practise; but leave football behind you when you leave 
 the field ; don't take it into class, don't take it home and, 
 above all, don't take it to bed with you. When you find 
 football taking up too much of your thought or time, 
 which is especially likely to be the case just before a big 
 game, recollect that in a year no one, yourself included, 
 is going to care a button who won, or why. Football, in 
 short, is a good game — there isn't a better one — but it 
 isn't the chief thing in life nor half so important as it 
 sometimes seems. 
 
 20 
 
FORMING A TEAM 21 
 
 Laying the Foundations. — The forming of a team 
 to represent a school should be clone carefully. If the 
 school has never supported a team before the necessity 
 for care in the undertaking is largely increased. Future 
 success will depend largely upon the laying of a firm 
 foundation now, therefore don't approach the project at 
 haphazard. The first step should be to consult the fac- 
 ulty. Don't stop at getting their permission ; enlist their 
 active interest if possible. Find out what the faculty's 
 attitude is to be in regard to the use of a training table, 
 trips away from home and similar matters. In case you 
 think the faculty should make more allowances than 
 they appear willing to, call in the services of such influ- 
 ential graduates of the school as you can reach. 
 
 The next step should be the obtaining of the ap- 
 proval of the school. If possible secure a mass-meeting. 
 Get the whole student body behind the team at the very 
 start. At the meeting explain the attitude of the fac- 
 ulty; perhaps you will be able to get some member of 
 the faculty to do this for you; tell what the plans are 
 and ask the school's support. Secure the appointing of 
 a committee, to consist of three persons representing the 
 faculty, the alumni and the students, to take charge of 
 the work. This committee should at a subsequent meet- 
 ing elect a manager and with him perfect final arrange- 
 ments as to the field, the securing of games with other 
 schools, etc., and issue the call for candidates. The ap- 
 pointment of a temporary captain should follow and 
 under his direction the first two weeks of practise may 
 
22 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 be held. But by the end of the first week in October, if 
 possible, such candidates as have been selected for the 
 first and second elevens should hold a meeting and elect 
 a permanent captain. 
 
 Selecting a Coach. — Before this, however, the 
 question of the selection of a head coach will have pre- 
 sented itself for consideration, and whereas in subsequent 
 years it will be well to give the captain a voice in this 
 matter, in the present case because of the press of time 
 it, will be necessary to leave the appointment of that offi- 
 cial to the Advisory Committee and manager. If possi- 
 ble secure an alumnus. All other things being equal, 
 the fact of the coach being a graduate of the school will 
 tend toward better results. With the advent of the 
 coach football affairs will be in the hands of six persons, 
 i. e., the three members of the advisory committee, the 
 manager, the captain and the coach. 
 
 It is quite possible, however, that because of lack of 
 money or for some other reason the employment of a 
 regular coach will be out of the question, for the first 
 year at least. In that case the captain must be both cap- 
 tain and coach. But the lack of a regular coach need not 
 necessarily mean that the team is to receive no experi- 
 enced instruction. It should not be a difficult matter to 
 arrange with a number of patriotic graduates for two aft- 
 ernoons a week of coaching, and perhaps, in addition, 
 the funds in hand will allow of the engagement of a 
 good coach for a week before the important game. With 
 such assistance the captain should be able to get through 
 
FORMING A TEAM 23 
 
 the season very well. Unless the school has a regular 
 trainer the physical care of the men must be left to the 
 physical director. 
 
 To the Captain who must be his own coach the fol- 
 lowing remarks are addressed: Football is essentially a 
 game of team-play, and without team-play, no matter 
 how brilliant its members may be individually, no eleven 
 can hope to win. But at the same time, as no eleven is 
 stronger than its weakest player, the necessity for thor- 
 ough individual training is apparent. It is a fault with 
 many school teams that individual coaching is skimped in 
 order to develop team-work. This doesn't pay in the 
 long run. It is like erecting a good building on a faulty 
 foundation. 
 
 The football season is practically nine weeks long; 
 of these not less than four weeks should be devoted en- 
 tirely to individual training. The head coach or captain 
 should arrange beforehand a systematic plan for the 
 team's development and should adhere strictly to it. 
 There will come times when the captain training his first 
 team will be assailed by a veritable panic, when it will 
 seem to him that the team is wofully behind the season 
 and when the temptation to drop rudimentary work and 
 plunge into team play will be strong. This experience 
 is almost inevitable, and while it lasts it constitutes an 
 unpleasant period. The temptation must be resisted and 
 the original plan maintained. 
 
 From the first passing of the ball in a circle by the 
 candidates to the last game of the season the captain 
 
24 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 should keep his eyes busy. It will not do to depend alto- 
 gether upon the memory; a note-book is indispensable in 
 keeping track of the individual work of the candidates. 
 In this book he should keep a record of every player's 
 progress; the player who does not progress after a fair 
 interval should be dropped from the book and the squad. 
 When the time comes for the final selection of the can- 
 didates to form the first eleven the records will be found 
 invaluable. 
 
 The first day's practise should consist of passing the 
 ball, starting and falling on the ball. For passing form 
 your men into rings of a dozen or so each and see that the 
 straight-arm pass and the elbow or groin catch is per- 
 formed correctly; in case of a fumble insist that the 
 fumbler shall drop upon the ball. Next form the men 
 into line and start them either by waving your cap or by 
 snapping a ball. Quick starting is essential and too 
 much practise can not be given. In falling upon the ball 
 arrange the men in a line; in this way you will have 
 them better under your eye. Start with a ball moving 
 away from the player, then change to one moving toward 
 him. Make the first day's practise sharp and short; a 
 half-hour is sufficient. Finish it up with a brisk half- 
 mile run. 
 
 The second day's work should vary but slightly from 
 the first's. Catching and passing, starting and falling on 
 the ball should be given, and a half-hour will be suffi- 
 cient. The half-mile run may be increased to three- 
 quarters. 
 
FORMING A TEAM 25 
 
 On the third day further variations of falling on the 
 ball may be introduced; as ball moving toward player 
 from the right, toward him from the left. Kicking and 
 catching by the backs should be inaugurated with center 
 men passing the ball to the kicker. The forwards should 
 be given a stiff run of a mile and the balance of the can- 
 didates should be jogged around the field for such dis- 
 tances as their conditions require, being careful always 
 not to wind them too severely so early in the season. 
 
 The remaining variations in falling on the ball may 
 be taken up on the fourth and fifth days; ball moving 
 away from player to the left ; to the right ; ball dropped 
 at player's feet; diving for motionless ball. Blocking 
 for the forwards may be begun about the fifth day, the 
 candidates being lined up opposite each other and tak- 
 ing turns at blocking and charging, the signal being 
 given by the snapping of a ball in the hands of the cen- 
 ters. The forwards may be sent on a run of a mile and 
 a half and the others a mile at a brisk pace. 
 
 At the beginning of the second week the afternoon's 
 work will consist of about the following: 
 
 1. Falling on the ball. 
 
 2. Catching punts for all hands. 
 
 3. Blocking and breaking through for the forwards. 
 Kicking and catching for the backs. 
 
 4. Two-mile run for backs; one-and-a-half -mile run 
 for forwards, condition and weather permitting. 
 
 If a dummy is used instruction in tackling should be- 
 gin at this time and be continued daily until the practise 
 
26 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 games provide experience. It is well, however, to keep 
 the dummy handy until the end of the season, since some- 
 times players who excel in other branches are backward 
 at tackling, in which case a few minutes daily at the 
 dummy is highly beneficial. 
 
 Toward the last of the second week is time enough 
 to pick two teams and start the daily line-ups. Instruct 
 each team in from four to six simple plays, as half-back 
 between guard and center, same between guard and 
 tackle, same around his own end, full-back between 
 guard and center, same around the end. Give them sig- 
 nals, the simpler the better, and have them go through 
 the plays, at first at a walk and afterward at full speed. 
 
 Follow this up the next day with a ten-minute line-up 
 of hard playing. Start now with the instruction of posi- 
 tion playing. You will need assistance now if at any 
 time during the season, since each position ought to be 
 taught by some one who knows thoroughly how to play 
 it. But if assistance isn't to be had, do the best you can 
 and don't despair. Bemain out of the line-up as much 
 as you can without endangering your own progress and 
 study the work of each player, correcting mistakes to the 
 best of your ability and insisting on proper form at all 
 times. After some progress has been made add more 
 complicated plays and teach a more extensive code of 
 signals to each team. Signal practise may be held in- 
 doors two or three evenings a week, and when the more 
 important plays are to be learned instruction by means 
 
FOKMING A TEAM 27 
 
 of diagrams on a blackboard or on large sheets of paper 
 should precede the gridiron trials. 
 
 By the second week in October matches with out- 
 side teams will have begun. At this time of the season 
 the halves ought not to be longer than fifteen and ten 
 minutes; from now on they may be increased gradually 
 until at the game prior to the last contest they consist of 
 two thirty-minute periods. 
 
 In the first game with an outside eleven team-work 
 will probably be conspicuous for its absence. This is as 
 it should be. Individual work is the first and most neces- 
 sary thing to consider ; it is the foundation on which the 
 perfect structure is to be built. With the fundamentals 
 once hammered into the team the coach may begin on 
 team-work with a light heart; not that the rest is play, 
 but he has obtained a firm foundation, and no matter 
 how much weight of instruction he piles on top, it is 
 going to stand. 
 
 Guard against overwork; remember that a prepara- 
 tory-school player won't stand what a college man will, 
 no matter how willing and ambitious the former may 
 be. On the other hand, watch out for indications of 
 staleness. The key-note of good condition is regular 
 work, but not too much at a time. 
 
 Ten minutes of dumb-bell exercise should be taken 
 by the entire squad every day before outdoor practise 
 to limber up the muscles. This exercise will prevent 
 many of the minor strains which often delay the progress 
 
28 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 of a team at the beginning of the season, and should be 
 continued for about five weeks. Don't allow any can- 
 didate to shirk it. Stiff or strained muscles are useless 
 on the gridiron. 
 
 Study your men. When the time for forming the 
 provisional first and second elevens comes give consid- 
 eration to the spirit of the candidates. Beef is good; so 
 is brawn; but without the right spirit it is " dead wood." 
 The most brilliant player on the team sometimes proves 
 a " quitter " when the supreme trial comes, and seventy 
 minutes of fierce, grueling play will occasionally make 
 cowards of the brawniest of men. 
 
 Maintain discipline during practise. Permit no loaf- 
 ing. Plan the afternoon's work ahead so that every one 
 will have something to do all the time. 
 
 Insist upon being addressed respectfully by the play- 
 ers. Don't be " Jim " or " Tom " or " Dick " during 
 practise hour. You're in command; make that under- 
 stood at the start. As long as you are head coach you 
 are entitled to be addressed respectfully as " Coach " or 
 "Mr. Coach." 
 
 Don't wind your men. Lung endurance is a valuable 
 asset in the football player and its development is a mat- 
 ter of gradual work. A player will have twice the 
 lung power at the end of the season than at the first if 
 he is not overtaxed severely. "When a man is winded 
 take him out and let him rest ; then send him back again 
 into the game. 
 
 Penalize high tackling by taking the offender out 
 
FORMING A TEAM 29 
 
 of the game for the rest of the day. This is an effectual 
 method of getting rid of a dangerous fault. 
 
 Insist that players drop on the ball whenever it is 
 dropped. Never allow them to stoop for it. 
 
 In unimportant games instruct your team, after 
 making its first score, to make succeeding scores through 
 the strongest point in the opposing line. This will aid 
 in developing the fighting spirit without which a team is 
 incapable of commanding victory. 
 
 Remember that a simple, ground-gaining play is bet- 
 ter than any number of involved and difficult tricks 
 which may look brilliant in diagram but which only suc- 
 ceed in tying the team into knots. School teams very 
 frequently waste much precious time prior to a final con- 
 test trying to perfect themselves in three or four spec- 
 tacular " sky-rocket " plays which when tried against the 
 opponent only look ridiculous and possibly lose the ball. 
 One or two good tricks are not to be despised, but they 
 should be used sparingly and advisedly. Trick plays 
 belong of right to advanced teams, and while the uni- 
 versity team may use a large number of them to ad- 
 vantage the school team would do better to confine its 
 attack to straightforward plays in which as few men as 
 possible are concerned and the risk of confusion is slight. 
 
 Encourage your men to " get together " at all times; 
 foster the spirit of camaradarie; take the team into your 
 confidence whenever possible; when a policy is decided 
 upon tell them what it is and why it was chosen. Let 
 it be " shoulder to shoulder " in every-day life as well as 
 
30 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 in the contests, so that when the final battle comes it will 
 be a case of " eleven men working as one." 
 
 To the Player. — Every boy, barring physical in- 
 firmity, can learn to play football well enough to become 
 more or less of a factor in the football situation. If he 
 fails to make the first team, there is the second; if he 
 doesn't get on to the second, there are the class teams 
 and the scrub elevens. There the glory to be gained is 
 less gorgeous, but still glory ; and bear in mind that from 
 a class team to the second eleven is an easy step and that 
 this year's, second will be next year's first, to a large 
 extent. 
 
 But the boy who has true sportsmanship in him will 
 play for the mere love of playing without dwelling over- 
 much upon whether or not the honor of fighting for the 
 school in the championship contest is to fall to his share. 
 And that boy is very likely to make the team. The hard 
 knocks and the aching muscles that will become the be- 
 ginner's portion at first will bring dismay; and the dis- 
 covery that instead of knowing, as he supposed, the game 
 from A to Z he has almost everything to learn, is likely 
 to discourage him for a while. But if he possesses that 
 mysterious something called " football instinct " to any 
 degree discouragement will pass quickly, the bruises will 
 heal and his knowledge of the finer points of the game 
 will increase with leaps and bounds, proving that he 
 " has it in him." 
 
 " Football instinct " is something more than a mere 
 ability to learn the rules and remember them, to run 
 
<y 
 
FORMING A TEAM 31 
 
 high, tackle low and keep the eye on the ball; it is some- 
 thing not every player has, but when he has it it makes 
 itself apparent early in the season and that player is 
 pretty likely to find himself, sooner or later, wearing 
 the coveted letter on his sweater. 
 
CHAPTER IV 
 
 TRAINING 
 
 Physical Fitness Essential. — Every boy realizes 
 that a good physical condition is essential if success is to 
 be won in any branch of athletics. Football, of all the 
 athletic sports indulged in, except rowing, is probably 
 the most exacting on muscular strength, endurance and 
 nervous energy. Careful training, therefore, is of first 
 consideration. But there is a vast difference between 
 careful training and overtraining, a fact which is at 
 length being recognized. The old methods of exhaust- 
 ing practise on a diet of raw beef have fortunately 
 given place to more common-sense systems, and nowa- 
 days a man may play football without living like a 
 freak in a circus side-show. There still exists, however, 
 much difference of opinion between the various authori- 
 ties as to the best means of training for football. But 
 at the same time there are certain rules which expe- 
 rience has proved to be good, and it is on those that this 
 chapter is based. 
 
 If the material which comes to the hands of the 
 trainer or coach at the beginning of the season consisted 
 of from thirty to sixty fellows each in hard, fit physical 
 condition his task would be comparatively simple. But 
 
TRAINING 33 
 
 this is never the case. There may be among the can- 
 didates a very few who have kept in training from the 
 previous season and some who have led healthful out- 
 door lives during the summer months, but the great 
 majority will be fellows who have never trained in their 
 lives and who have given but the scantiest consideration 
 to physical well-being. Before the coach can make foot- 
 ball players of such he must first turn them into athletes ; 
 that is, he must, by a careful regime of calisthenics, out- 
 door exercise and proper diet strengthen their bodies and 
 clear their brains. As his material does not come to 
 him until the beginning of the football season, it follows 
 that the first two or three weeks are a period of physical 
 preparation rather than of instruction in the game. To 
 be sure, the game is taught during that period, but only 
 as the condition of the players permits, slowly and with 
 the utmost caution. If the candidates were in good 
 physical shape when taken in hand by the trainer or 
 coach the latter would be spared much trouble and 
 worry and would be able to teach a great deal more foot- 
 ball during the nine weeks than he can now. 
 
 Avoid Overworking. — During the period of phys- 
 ical hardening, which may last from two to three weeks, 
 the player is far more liable to injury than later in the 
 season; his muscles are not yet working smoothly; his 
 flesh has not hardened ; his lung-power is not fully devel- 
 oped and he is easily tired. A wearied player is much 
 more liable to injury than a fresh one, and many of the 
 minor sprains and bruises so common at the beginning of 
 
34 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 the season are due entirely to overexertion. It has fre- 
 quently happened that teams have had so many players 
 placed upon the hospital list from early-season accidents 
 that they have been unable to line up in full strength 
 before the last week in October. There is one axiom, 
 then, upon which too much emphasis can not be laid, 
 and that is: Go easy for the first three weeks. 
 
 But even after the three weeks is up there is still 
 necessity for moderation as to the amount of work. A 
 well-known and successful trainer has laid down the rule 
 that two hours of football each working-day, whether in 
 gymnasium, on the field or in the lecture-room, are suffi- 
 cient for any college team. If we accept that as correct, 
 then an hour and a half should limit the work of a pre- 
 paratory-school team even at the end of the season. 
 There is no doubt but that overtraining is still prevalent 
 among school teams and is largely accountable for the 
 injuries reported. Trainers and coaches are apt to lose 
 sight of the fact that their charges have not the physical 
 stamina that they have. Even if the overtrained player 
 escapes injury, he is still of doubtful value to his team 
 — in fact, the average coach will choose an undertrained 
 player rather than one who is overtrained. Therefore if 
 you are coach or captain avoid overtraining your men. 
 If you are a player avoid becoming overtrained; take 
 warning by the first continued spell of lassitude or 
 " don't careishness " and report your condition to the 
 trainer; don't wait for him to find it out. 
 
 No harm can come from playing the men hard ; push 
 
TRAINING 35 
 
 them all you want to ; fast, snappy practise is what they 
 expect and want; but learn when to stop. The danger 
 lies in keeping at it too long. 
 
 Overwork is especially liable to fall to the lot of 
 heavy line men, notably centers and guards. Usually 
 these will commence practise with anywhere from 10 to 
 30 pounds of useless weight, which must be worked off. 
 Until it is worked off it is a serious encumbrance and it 
 is not wise to require the same amount of work from 
 these heavy-weights as from men who are in fair condi- 
 tion. The extra weight tells and they are easily over- 
 taxed. Their work should be light at first, gradually 
 increasing as their condition betters. To play such men 
 a small portion of each day is all that should be attempted. 
 
 Practise alone will not take off their superfluous 
 weight and running must be resorted to. Here short 
 sprints at good speed are what are required and not long 
 runs. Thirty- or 40-yard dashes at a pace something 
 under their best, with walking between, will soon elimi- 
 nate the undesirable weight. With this a certain amount 
 of setting-up work in the gymnasium may be resorted to. 
 
 The backs, too, are liable to receive rather too much 
 attention from the coach. To use the same trio all 
 through a thirty-minute practise risks disaster both for 
 them and for the team. A man should leave the field 
 with something left in him and not all tuckered out. 
 After a back has learned the lesson you are teaching and 
 has proved it to you by his playing it is far better to take 
 him out than to keep him hammering at the line or run- 
 
36 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 ning the ends until lie is tired out and the work has 
 begun to seem distasteful. 
 
 " Make haste slowly " is one of the best maxims that 
 a football coach can paste in his hat. 
 
 What to Eat. — As to diet, the best rule is to eat 
 what agrees with you. As, however, players in training 
 can not, unfortunately, be trusted to observe this rule, 
 a little advice for the guidance of those in charge of their 
 dietary welfare may be of service. 
 
 The food should be well and plainly cooked and 
 attractively served. Variety should be sought after. 
 The men should have enough, but overeating should be 
 carefully guarded against. See that plenty of time is 
 taken; rapid eating is the worst offense one can perpe- 
 trate against the stomach. Avoid much water at meal- 
 times, but drink often when away from the table and 
 always before retiring and on arising. Never take 
 water, save to rinse the mouth out, from the time you 
 dress for play until you are once more in street clothes. 
 
 Use no alcoholic drinks unless prescribed by the 
 physician. Do not smoke. Never eat between meals. 
 
 Beef, roasted or broiled, mutton, roasted, boiled or 
 broiled, chicken and turkey are the meats to eat. Fish 
 should be used occasionally. Eggs cooked in any man- 
 ner are desirable. Eat no hot bread. Cereals, especially 
 the less starchy ones, are valuable so long as they do not 
 satisfy the appetite to the exclusion of meat and vege- 
 tables. Vegetables should be eaten freely, and also fresh 
 
TRAINING 37 
 
 and dried fruits. Substitute boiled rice for potatoes at 
 least three times a week. Avoid pastry. 
 
 Regularity in Daily Life is an important factor. 
 The time of rising, of meals, of practise and of retiring 
 should be on schedule during the training season. 
 Plenty of restful sleep is essential, but it is impossible to 
 lay down any rule as to the length of sleeping which may 
 apply to all cases. Some persons find seven hours all 
 that they need, while others can not be refreshed by less 
 than nine. Bedtime should be fixed at no later than ten 
 o'clock, however, and if breakfast is at 7.30 there will 
 intervene sufficient time to accommodate long sleepers 
 and short sleepers alike. 
 
 Overtraining. — An ounce of prevention is worth a 
 pound of cure, and it is much better to prevent over- 
 training than to cure it. But if the trouble does occur, 
 rest and change form the best remedy. Lay the player 
 off for two or three days, let him take his meals away 
 from the training-table and instruct him to keep his 
 mind away from football. He should spend all the time 
 possible out of doors, taking walks of from two to four 
 miles at a pace brisk enugh to keep his muscles in com- 
 mission. If the player's home is not too far away, and 
 it is possible to send him there for a day or two, do so by 
 all means. Change of scene and associations is an ex- 
 cellent antidote. 
 
 The use of chewing-gum during practise, to keep the 
 mouth moist, is not advisable save possibly in early sea- 
 son on extremely warm days. After you have become 
 
38 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 accustomed to the work you will find that your mouth 
 is sufficiently moist without gum. 
 
 Those having preparatory-school teams in charge 
 should be careful not to allow their players to meet teams 
 much excelling them in weight and strength. Many of 
 the injuries sustained by young players are due to such 
 ill-advised encounters. 
 
 Attiee. — Too much attention can not be given by 
 coach, captain and player to the subject of proper attire. 
 Every player should dress so that he can do his part well 
 and so that he will be as little liable to injury as possi- 
 ble. Those in charge should insist that protective armor 
 is worn whenever in their estimation it will lessen the 
 chances of accident. Knee, thigh, elbow and shoulder 
 pads are essential. A light leather anklet or any satis- 
 factory brace is an excellent thing for ends, backs or 
 players whose ankles are in the least inclined toward 
 weakness. A head harness is a necessity for any player 
 who is required to carry the ball, while shin-guards more 
 than atone for their discomfort by the protection they 
 afford. Nose-guards are hard to breathe through, but 
 should be worn when possible. 
 
 Shoes should not only fit the wearer, but should be 
 exactly right as regards weight. They should afford 
 ample protection to the ankle-bones and should not chafe 
 in any part. A tongue of undressed leather will better 
 save the instep from the discomfort of tight lacings. 
 Much kicking will necessitate a box toe. Cleats should 
 be looked after frequently. 
 
TRAINING 39 
 
 After the first half of a game a thorough change 
 of clothing is advisable; failing that, clean, dry under- 
 wear should take the place of the perspiration-soaked 
 garments. 
 
 Cleanliness is a necessity. Hot baths should al- 
 ways precede the cold ones, and only a free use of pure 
 soap will thoroughly remove the perspiration from the 
 skin. Avoid long hot baths, however; they are weak- 
 ening and depressing. And do not overdo the cold 
 shower. Some persons are unable to stand the shock of 
 the icy water immediately after the hot. These should 
 either have the chill removed from the water or allow the 
 body to return to its normal temperature after the hot 
 bath and before the cold. Remaining under the cold 
 shower for any length of time is in any case ill advised. 
 
 Sweaters and blankets should always be in readiness 
 on the side line and the trainer should see that they are 
 at once donned after playing. Players should not be 
 allowed to sit upon the ground as long as benches are 
 possible. 
 
 Injukies. — Many of the injuries which occur every 
 autumn could be avoided by care. There are a few 
 simple and easily remembered rules which if adhered to 
 will keep the player off the hospital list. 
 
 Keeping the body well forward with arms extended 
 to ward off opponents will prevent injuries by opposing 
 interferers. Do not let an interferer touch you; use 
 your arms and keep him off. 
 
 In mass plays get off your feet. Dive into the plays 
 
40 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 and lie low. Never try to stop mass plays by standing 
 up against them; that may mean a broken limb. 
 
 When thrown do not attempt to save yourself by 
 reaching out; that too may mean a break or sprain. 
 Keep your legs straight and fall limp. As long as you 
 lie flat you are safe no matter how many pile on; you 
 may find the position a bit uncomfortable, but you can't 
 be hurt. 
 
 When you tackle break your fall with the other fel- 
 low, keeping legs behind you. If you are tackled fall 
 forward and on the ball. 
 
 Collisions result only from stupidity; look where 
 you are going. 
 
 In diving for the ball be careful not to go at it in 
 such a way as to strike the ground with the point of the 
 shoulder. Never attempt to fall flat upon the ball; if 
 you do this you stand an excellent chance of injuring 
 the chest, or at least of having your wind knocked out. 
 Use elbows or knees to break the fall. 
 
 In bucking the line the player should keep the mus- 
 cles of the neck tense and the chin well down against it 
 to prevent wrenches. 
 
 Finally, remember that it is the slow, indecisive 
 player who gets hurt, so use dash and ginger. 
 
 Speains and Beuises. — If possible every injury to 
 a player should be looked after at once by a physician. 
 At the same time there are numerous casual hurts which 
 may be attended to by the trainer or coach. A simple 
 bruise should be at once protected by a pad of cotton or 
 
TKALNTOG 41 
 
 wool. If tlie knee is bruised a moistened sponge bound 
 beneath the knee-cap will afford temporary relief and 
 protection. As soon as possible the part should be bathed 
 well with hot water and then covered firmly with a hot 
 compress. In a day or two gentle rubbing and manipu- 
 lation should follow to reduce the swelling. 
 
 A simple sprain need not necessitate the withdrawal 
 of the player from an important game. If the part is 
 snugly bandaged or fitted with a leather cap it will do. 
 In the case of a sprained finger protect the joint by 
 strapping the injured member to its next neighbor. 
 After the game, however, the injury should be seen to 
 by a surgeon. 
 
 The inflammation of the anterior thigh muscles 
 known as " Charley-horse " and caused by repeated 
 bruising or overstrain requires hot applications with 
 pressure, complete rest and, later, massage of the affected 
 muscles. Shin-guards sewn into the trousers over the 
 fronts of the thighs are excellent preventives of this 
 very common complaint. 
 
 Breaks and dislocations are matters for speedy atten- 
 tion on the part of the surgeon. 
 
CHAPTEK V 
 
 THE FUNDAMENTALS 
 
 Handling the Ball 
 
 Before it is possible to play a good game of foot- 
 ball it is necessary to have a thorough knowledge of the 
 fundamentals. The fundamentals may be roughly 
 classed as Handling the Ball, Kicking and Using the 
 Body. ISTone of these things can be learned from a book; 
 practise is the royal road to success; yet certain expla- 
 nations and suggestions may be laid down here which 
 will prove of assistance to the beginner. 
 
 Falling on the Ball. — There are four methods of 
 
 falling on the ball in common use, each of which 
 
 should be mastered. If the ball is coming toward you 
 
 from the front, throw the body to the ground sidewise 
 
 at right angle to its path and gather it to your chest with 
 
 the arm, rolling over upon it sufficiently to protect it 
 
 with the body. If the ball is coming toward you from 
 
 the right, follow the same methods, throwing the body 
 
 upon the left side; if the ball is coining from the left, 
 
 drop upon the right side. If the ball is moving away 
 
 from you, drop forward, breaking the fall with the 
 
 42 
 
THE FUNDAMENTALS 43 
 
 knees, gather the ball to the chest and snuggle it there 
 tightly. Always break your fall with knees or elbows. 
 
 If the ball is fumbled during the scrimmage and 
 rolls within your reach, quick action is necessary. 
 Without moving from your position throw your legs 
 into the air behind you and drop upon the ball with 
 your chest, breaking the fall with the elbows. These 
 three methods apply to a moving ball. A motionless 
 ball or one very nearly motionless may be taken in any 
 of these ways and in one other, i. e., by diving. Usually 
 diving is resorted to only when the ball is threatened by 
 an opponent and it becomes necessary to reach it in the 
 shortest possible time. Having reached a point from 8 
 to 10 feet from the ball, launch the body forward, land- 
 ing upon the ball with elbows to the ground. Avoid 
 leaping into the air, which would increase the fall as 
 well as the distance of flight. Virtually the dive is a 
 forward fall accompanied by a quick propulsion by the 
 feet as they leave the ground. There is a knack to 
 diving, whether to reach the ball or to tackle the runner, 
 which must be solved by practise. It is, however, a 
 necessary as well as spectacular accomplishment and will 
 repay for the learning. 
 
 A rolling ball, unless its motion is very slight, should 
 never be dived for, since it is an erratic object and nine 
 times out of ten will alter its course sufficiently after the 
 diver is off his feet to escape capture. 
 
 Never stoop and pick up a rolling ball; drop on it; 
 it's a hundred per cent safer. 
 
44 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Passing. — There are six methods of passing the 
 ball: the straight-arm throw, the overhand throw, the 
 underhand throw, the toss, the long pass, and handing. 
 
 The Straight- Arm Throw consists of holding the 
 ball lengthwise in the curved palm of the hand with 
 the fingers grasping one end, the arm held back at about 
 right angles to the body, then swinging arm and body 
 about on the foot farthest from the ball and letting the 
 latter go when in range with the target, giving it a quick 
 snap as it leaves the fingers. In this flight it turns upon 
 the shorter axis and is an accurate as well as a speedy 
 throw. This throw may be varied as to elevation of 
 flight by the position of the arm. 
 
 The Overhand Throw is of less value in actual 
 playing. The ball is grasped as before, the arm describ- 
 ing an arc above the shoulder, and released when about 
 on a level with the eyes. It is a straight swift throw, 
 but not so accurate as either the straight-arm or the 
 underhand. 
 
 The Underhand Throw consists of grasping the 
 ball with the hand as for the straight-arm throw, the 
 thrower directly facing the target and raising the arm 
 holding the ball behind him until very nearly at right 
 angles to the body, which is bent forward, the foot far- 
 thest from the ball being well in advance of the other. 
 At the throw the hand holding the ball swings down and 
 forward, the ball leaving the hand just as the latter 
 passes the lowest point of its arc. 
 
 The Toss is used by" the quarter-back when the ball 
 
THE FUNDAMENTALS 45 
 
 goes to a runner whose point of attack is outside of the 
 center. It is merely a quick, short throw, and should 
 whenever possible be made with both hands. 
 
 The Long Pass is made by center straight into the 
 hands of the back who is going to kick, or, in case of a 
 try-at-goal from placement, into the hands of the player 
 who is to hold the ball for the kicker. The long pass has 
 superseded in recent years the former method of pass- 
 ing with quarter-back intervention and is a gain in time 
 and certainty. The center should assume practically 
 the same position as for snapping back, being careful to 
 find a firm balance. Lie may bend a little lower, since it 
 is necessary for him to see perfectly between his legs 
 the player to whom the ball is going. He should hold the 
 ball away from him as far as possible without cramping 
 in order to obtain a long swing, its farther end resting 
 lightly on the ground and the nearer end being held by 
 the hands on either side, the ball being poised at an 
 angle of about 45 degrees. When the pass is to be made 
 the ball is lifted slightly, swung forward to the limit of 
 easy reach and then back sharply, being released as the 
 hands reach the limit of their pendulum-like swing. 
 The center should make his observations before sending 
 the ball away, and must not attempt to watch its flight 
 as all his attention will be required for his opponent. 
 The distance between center and kicker will vary from 
 10 to 15 yards, and in order that the ball shall cover 
 that distance quickly it is necessary that its line of 
 flight be as direct as possible. Llence the center's aim 
 
46 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 should be to pass the ball to the kicker with the least 
 trajectory and the fewest possible revolutions on the 
 shorter axis. The price of success is constant practise. 
 
 Handing the ball is done by the quarter when a 
 back plunges at the center of the line. Here, again, both 
 hands should be used, and the ball should be placed 
 against the back's body wherever he can best hold it, 
 usually against the groin. 
 
 Catching. — There are several methods of catching 
 the ball. Two of them are good, the rest are not. These 
 two may be called respectively the elbow catch and the 
 groin catch. 
 
 The Elbow Catch should, as a rule, be used when 
 the ball is to be carried for a run. In this the ball is 
 caught on either side in front of the elbow, the arm being 
 under it. The other hand is clasped sharply over it as it 
 lodges. The ball is then in a cradle formed by the arm, 
 the side of the body and the two hands. To secure it 
 for a run it is only necessary to tuck it back quickly. 
 
 The Gkoin Catch, as its name signifies, is made by 
 letting the ball drop to the groin, securing it there with 
 both hands and bending the body over it. For a plunge 
 through the line the ball is then in good position ; while 
 for a punt it can be easily handled. 
 
 The player himself, however, will have to determine 
 by experiment which style of catch he can use to the 
 best advantage. But he should guard against making 
 the catch against the chest, which is an uncertain mode, 
 as the ball is likely to bound away from the body before 
 
THE FUNDAMENTALS 47 
 
 the hands can be hooked about it or go through them to 
 the ground. Experience seems to show, also, that the 
 chances of misjudging the ball when taken against the 
 chest are, greatly increased; while it is certainly not in 
 a position to resist a hard tackle by an opponent. Ke- 
 member that you can not be tackled by an opponent 
 who is off-side until you have touched the ball; there- 
 fore don't reach up for it; keep your arms down and 
 wait until the ball has lodged against the groin and then 
 hook it sharply and hold on for dear life, doubling your 
 body over it. If you do that the fiercest sort of a tackle 
 will fail to lose you the ball. 
 
 Kicking 
 
 Of recent years kicking has increased in importance 
 with every season, which is as it should be, since the foot- 
 ball was intended to be kicked, else it might as well be 
 filled with sawdust or rags as with air. Every player 
 should know how to kick, although as a general thing 
 only the four members of the back field will be called 
 upon. The quarter-back, the two half-backs and the full- 
 back should be good punters, drop-kickers and kickers 
 from placement. If, however, besides these there is a 
 good kicker in the line no harm is done; no team has 
 ever yet suffered from having too many good kickers in 
 its ranks. 
 
 The best way to learn how to kick is to kick. To 
 kick it is necessary to strike the ball with the foot. The 
 
48 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 beginner will find that this is not nearly so simple as it 
 sounds. Begin by putting the ball on the ground and 
 kicking it about without taking it into the hands* If 
 you can find the side of a tall building to receive the ball 
 and bound it back to you you will be saved a lot of 
 chasing. But don't essay punting or drop-kicking until 
 you are able to send a good straight ball for a consider- 
 able distance. When you have learned that accomplish- 
 ment try punting. 
 
 Punting. — There are two methods of punting, the 
 straight kick and the side kick. So long as you do it 
 well it doesn't matter which method you use. 
 
 The Straight Kick is made with a straight upward 
 swing of the foot, the kicker directly facing the place 
 where the ball is to go. Stand with the right leg back, 
 the knees slightly bent and the body inclined a little 
 forward. The position should be well balanced and per- 
 fectly easy. Hold the ball in both hands, with its ends, 
 pointing to and from the body and the lacing upward, 
 about the level of the waist. Take a short step with 
 the left foot, drop the ball and bring the kicking foot 
 sharply forward so that it will strike the ball when about 
 knee high. The ball should be struck squarely with the 
 instep. In dropping be careful not to alter the position 
 of the ball. Begin by kicking easily and increase the 
 force of the kick as you gain certainty and quickness. 
 The whole leg should be used and not merely that por- 
 tion of it below the knee. Let the hip be the axis and 
 swing the whole leg forward with muscles taut and toe 
 
THE FUNDAMENTALS 49 
 
 pointed, thus getting the benefit of the abdominal mus- 
 cles. As the leg rises toward the ball lock it at the knee. 
 
 The Side Kick is an attempt to put the weight of 
 the body into the swing of the leg, which, instead of 
 being a straight forward and upward motion is outward 
 as well. Unlike the straight kick the side kick can not 
 be made from the position in which the ball is caught, 
 but necessitates two or three steps to the right and for- 
 ward, the ball being dropped at the right of the center 
 of the body and the leg brought around like a swinging 
 blow with the arm, ball and instep meeting about 18 
 inches from the ground. 
 
 The angle at which the ball is to be kicked can be 
 regulated by raising or lowering the forward point or 
 by dropping the ball so that the height at which it is 
 struck by the foot shall regulate the direction. Thus a 
 high kick may be made by dropping the ball so that it 
 is struck by the foot when knee high or over, and a low 
 kick by allowing the ball to get nearer the ground before 
 meeting the foot. 
 
 Holding the Ball. — For the straight kick the ball 
 may be held in any of the following ways: 
 
 1. Point Up. — Left hand over the upper end of the 
 ball, right hand under the lower, ball pointing almost 
 straight up and down but lower end being a trifle nearer 
 the body. 
 
 2. Point Out. — Hands on each side of the ball, 
 lacing up, side seams at an angle of about 50 degrees, 
 outer end a trifle higher than inner. 
 
50 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 3. Point Down. — Same as 2 save that slant of ball 
 is reversed, inner end being higher than outer. 
 
 For the side kick the first method of holding the 
 ball is generally considered the best, although all three 
 methods are used. 
 
 When a back receives the ball from the center or 
 quarter for a kick he should not toss it in the endeavor 
 to get the lacing uppermost. " Juggling " is unneces- 
 sary and may lose him possession of the ball. Having 
 received it in both hands, he should keep a firm hold on 
 it and merely by turning it, hands and all, bring it into 
 position for kicking. 
 
 Drop-Kicking. — In the drop-kick the ball is dropped 
 on its end and struck with the toe just as it begins its 
 rebound from the ground. The part of the ball at which 
 the kick is to be made depends largely on the elevation 
 desired, as does the manner of holding and dropping it. 
 For the beginner the best hold is probably that in which 
 the ball is clasped at each side, lacing up, the longer axis 
 passing about parallel with the line of the body when in 
 kicking position. Be careful to allow the ball to begin 
 its rebound before kicking it. 
 
 Kicking from Placement. — In a place-kick at the 
 kick-off a depression is usually made with the heel and 
 the ball set in it and aimed by the kicker. In a place- 
 kick at goal the ball is held by one player and kicked by 
 a second. The success of the effort depends about as 
 much on one as the other. 
 
THE FUNDAMENTALS 51 
 
 The holder should lie on his stomach, the upper part 
 of his body supported on his elbows, and should be per- 
 fectly comfortable. The rules allow the holder to be off- 
 side or even out of bounds if necessary. The fingers of 
 the right hand should be placed under the lower end of 
 the ball and two fingers of the left hand over the upper 
 end. The ball should then be aimed in obedience to the 
 kicker's directions, the matter of " cocking " depending 
 on several things, such as the distance from goal, the 
 direction and velocity of the wind and the kicker's pref- 
 erence. In placing the ball on the ground the fingers un- 
 der the lower end are removed and every care should be 
 taken in doing this not to alter the position of the ball. 
 Be careful not to allow the ball to touch ground until the 
 kicker gives the word, else the kick will probably be 
 spoiled by the opponent's charge. 
 
 The kicker should use all care and deliberation; there 
 is no rule defining the time which may be taken in 
 making a try-at-goal, beyond the general one prohibiting 
 unnecessary delay, so there is no reason why the kicker 
 should fail at the try from want of time. Most kickers 
 try to boot the ball with the toe just under the lacing, 
 but there can be no hard-and-fast rule as to this, since 
 much depends upon the way the ball is canted. This is 
 equally true of approaching the ball; many players stand 
 as much as 6 yards away and take as many steps before 
 kicking, while others are content with one long step 
 before kicking. 
 
52 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Using the Body 
 
 Blocking. — In blocking the position of the body is 
 everything. The general rule is that the toe of the rear 
 foot should be on a line with the heel of the front foot, 
 yet this rule should be modified to fit the requirements 
 of the individual player. The result sought for is the 
 strongest position possible; one that will allow you to 
 remain steady against the pushing and pulling of the 
 opponent and at the same time allow you to move in any 
 direction readily and forcibly. Find what this position 
 is in your case and then stick to it. Above all, don't 
 stand back on your heels; forget you have any; and don't 
 straddle; if you do you'll find yourself anchored. Face 
 your man squarely, keep as close to him as you can, fol- 
 low every movement he may make. Remember that 
 you have this advantage over him: that while he must 
 keep his eyes on the ball you are free to keep your eyes 
 on his. Follow the game of the fencer and sparrer and 
 watch your opponent's eyes and not his arms or legs. 
 
 Play low. Stand with the knees well bent, the body 
 forward and the head up. Strive to play lower than your 
 opponent, yet not so low that he can pull you off your 
 feet and go over you. If you are low he can not strike 
 you in the chest. When the ball is snapped plunge into 
 and under him, shoulder against groin, and lift him up 
 and back. If the play is through your position, don't 
 merely put him out of the line, put him away out ; make 
 the hole as broad as possible and see that he doesn't get 
 
THE FUNDAMENTALS 53 
 
 Lack into the play. Avoid getting your body too far in 
 advance of your feet; keep your feet under you so that 
 you can work in any direction and be on the jump every 
 instant. Always block away from the play; that is, if 
 blocking a guard for a run outside of tackle put your 
 opponent inside of you so that he will have to go around 
 you in order to reach the runner. 
 
 Breaking Through. — Just as the primary object 
 of the offense is to guard the runner until he is free of 
 the line, so the primary object of defense is to capture 
 the runner before he has reached the line. To do this it is 
 necessary to break through. The position should be that 
 best adapted to the individual. In most cases the crouch- 
 ing position, one foot braced firmly behind the other and 
 one or both hands steadying the body on the ground, 
 after the manner of the " kangaroo start " of the sprinter, 
 yields a quicker attack. Keep yourself at arm's length 
 from your opponent, watch the ball and go through the 
 instant it starts. With experience comes the ability to 
 keep the eyes on the ball and yet know every instant 
 what your opponent is doing; until that ability is yours 
 give your attention to the ball first, for the ball is what 
 you are after; the opponent is of secondary consider- 
 ation. 
 
 When the ball is snapped go through on the instant 
 and avoid the opponent; don't let him stop you and 
 don't stop yourself to try conclusions with him; your 
 place is where the ball is. Observe your opponent's play, 
 try to find out what he is likely to attempt and gov- 
 
54 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 ern your own play accordingly. Be snappy but not 
 "scrappy"; aggressiveness is half the battle, but any- 
 thing that draws your attention from the ball while on 
 the defense is a good thing to avoid. Vary your meth- 
 ods from time to time, go through with stiff arms to meet 
 interference and don't circle wider than possible. The 
 methods of breaking through given below do not nearly 
 exhaust the possibilities. 
 
 1. Strike the opponent on the chest with both arms 
 stiff. This will unsteady him and you can go by on 
 either side. 
 
 2. If the opponent's chest is not exposed, play low 
 yourself and at the instant of the snapping of the ball 
 bring both hands up and forward as forcibly as possible, 
 striking the opponent with open hands high on the chest. 
 This should disturb his balance long enough for you to 
 get by. 
 
 3. Spring to one side and clutch the opponent's out- 
 side arm. Usually in trying to free himself he will drag 
 you forward and through. 
 
 4. If the opponent is playing very low put both 
 hands on his neck and pull him forward to one side. 
 
 5. If the opponent plays very high dart under his 
 arm. 
 
 6. Make a feint as though to go on one side and then 
 quickly go through on the other. 
 
 7. Strike the opponent on the shoulder with both 
 arms extended stiffly. If he gives on that side, follow 
 through; if he meets you, the outer arm is exposed. 
 
THE FUNDAMENTALS 55 
 
 8. Try to throw him off his balance by knocking 
 his lower arm down by a quick, hard blow with both of 
 your arms held close together. 
 
 Tackling. — There are two kinds of tackles, the lift 
 and the dive. In the former the tackier gets within 
 reach of the runner, pins his knees together, lifts him off 
 his feet and throws him backward toward his goal. In 
 the dive tackle the tackier runs to within his own length 
 of the runner and then dives for him, aiming for a point 
 between hips and knees. He should grasp tightly and 
 not let go until the runner is down. In making the dive 
 tackle from the side care should be taken to get the body 
 in front of the runner, blocking his progress, and to lock 
 his knees together, so bringing him down promptly. 
 Tackle low and hard every time. -Ability to tackle well 
 and surely is one of the hall-marks of a good player. 
 
CHAPTEE VI 
 
 POSITIONS AND HOW TO PLAY THEM 
 The Center 
 
 The center is the pivotal position of the team. With 
 a poor center the strongest team will fall to pieces. The 
 position is possibly the most important and absolutely 
 the most thankless. The center rush has more petty 
 annoyances to contend with, receives more hard knocks 
 and has fewer opportunities for spectacular playing than 
 any other member. Bear these facts in mind when the 
 selection of a man to fill this position is to be made. The 
 ideal center would be a man who combined the physical 
 qualities of weight and strength and activity with the 
 mental qualities of coolness, alertness, good humor, com- 
 bativeness and self-control. But the man who possesses 
 all these things and knows besides how to play his posi- 
 tion is a rara avis. 
 
 The center should be steady on his feet, and for this 
 
 reason the nearer to the ground his weight is the better. 
 
 For the same reason he should be particularly strong in 
 
 the back and legs. He must have brains as well as 
 
 brawn, good nature as well as fighting qualities, for in 
 
 56 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 57 
 
 the opposing center trio lie faces three men each of 
 whom is always on the alert to spoil his play or try his 
 temper. If the center has speed he is still better fitted 
 for his position. 
 
 On Offense. — The center should find for himself 
 what poise is best adapted to his case. When he has 
 found it he should practise it until he is able to keep it 
 against any ordinary pushing, jostling or lunging. Since 
 he may not, while on the offensive, make use of his arms 
 to maintain his equilibrium, too much practise of this 
 sort can not be had. He should stand with feet well 
 apart, one foot placed behind him from 16 to 20 inches 
 to act as a brace. He should learn to stand as well with 
 one foot back as with the other and should vary his posi- 
 tion in this respect frequently during a game, unless, 
 which sometimes happens, the quarter-back has a pref- 
 erence for one position. In snapping-back the center's 
 back should be about parallel with the ground, his head 
 up, however, in order to watch the movements of the 
 opposing forwards. His knees should be bent sufficiently 
 to allow him to reach the ball comfortably, yet not so 
 much as to make a quick start impossible. His balance 
 must be so nice that he can not be pulled forward on to 
 his knees or sprawled backward, no matter how fierce or 
 unexpected the attack. 
 
 The matter of snapping back the ball is one for the 
 center and quarter to decide upon. These two players 
 should practise the work on every possible occasion and 
 after trying all methods and styles decide upon the .■> 
 
58 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 which best suits them. Accuracy is the first desider- 
 atum ; speed the second. Practise snapping back until it 
 becomes a machine-like process with not one fumble in 
 twenty tries. Even then there is no knowing what may 
 happen in a contest, for snapping back is a difficult trick 
 when the opposing center is doing all in his power to 
 wreck your play. One thing there is, however, that the 
 center may and should do, and that is insist upon being 
 allowed to get the ball away without interference. The 
 Rules declare that " the snapper-back is entitled to full 
 and undisturbed possession of the ball." (Rule 16, a.) 
 A good referee will see that this rule is enforced, so don't 
 hesitate to call his attention to the slightest infringement 
 of it. 
 
 The ball snapped, the center should get into the 
 blocking instantly. There must be no hesitation on his 
 part. He should decide beforehand in what way his 
 opponent is to be handled and then make the act of snap- 
 ping back and blocking as nearly one movement as pos- 
 sible. For this it is necessary that he play constantly 
 upon his toes. He may lunge 'into his opponent, carry- 
 ing the latter straight before him; he may turn him to 
 right or left; he may bring him to earth if playing too 
 low or he may get under him, if the contrary is the case, 
 and lift him up and back. But the center must keep his 
 feet and must pattern himself as closely on a streak of 
 lightning as he can. Once past his man he should be — 
 and very often is — able to get down the field under a 
 
 Xl \ almost as soon as the ends, 
 bras 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 59 
 
 On defense the center may play a few inches far- 
 ther back, without, however, getting too far from the 
 opposing center ; for while he is primarily responsible for 
 gains made on either side of him, yet his prey is essen- 
 tially the opposing snapper-back, and it is to the latter 
 he should direct most of his attention. He should " keep 
 him guessing " every second until the ball is in play and 
 then go at him like a flash. If once or twice during a 
 game he succeeds in throwing his opponent back on to 
 the quarter he has earned almost honor enough. Fail- 
 ing this, it is possible for him to pull the opponent for- 
 ward and go over or by him, or to turn him to right 
 or left. Or, if he has been playing high, the defense 
 center can get under him and push him back, in this 
 way often bringing a play to grief by spoiling a pass. 
 "When the opponents are going to kick the center should 
 use all his efforts to spoil the pass or block the kick. He 
 should let the guards spread out and seize his opportunity 
 to get through. 
 
 The center should be answerable for the generalship 
 of the center trio ; he should keep himself and the guards 
 cool, steady and cheerful ; he should not be satisfied with 
 putting his weight alone into a play but should use his 
 muscle and his brain besides ; he should be ready to play 
 the next position as well as his own; to be entirely suc- 
 cessful he should be versatile — that is, capable of doing a 
 thing several different ways and so bewildering his oppo- 
 nent ; he should see that the ball is played from the right 
 spot every down and when the opposing center has the 
 
60 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 ball he should keep beside him when the ball is being 
 brought to the 25-yard line in order to prevent an unex- 
 pected play; finally he should keep his temper under all 
 circumstances. 
 
 The Guard 
 
 For the guard a man with activity and weight; 
 weight is essential, but activity doubly so. 
 
 On defense he has two openings to look after, that 
 between himself and center and that between himself 
 and tackle, the latter being his most important charge. 
 But in attending to this opening he must take care not 
 to be drawn out and thus weaken the center of his line. 
 The guard should be the most effective charger on the 
 team. On his toes, feet far enough apart to insure per- 
 fect balance, shoulders low, arms hanging free, the guard 
 should watch the ball and his opponent as a cat watches 
 a mouse. The instant the ball is played he should 
 charge, putting every ounce of weight and strength into 
 the effort and moving like a flash. Theoretically he 
 should move forward coinstantaneously with the ball; 
 practically this is not possible, save by an occasional 
 chance, since he must see the ball in motion from center 
 to quarter before he can move himself. And he must 
 beware of making a false start and so acquainting the 
 opponent with his real intentions, although a " fake " 
 start will sometimes work for his good by deceiving the 
 opponent. The fundamental law of defense is to stop 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 61 
 
 the runner before lie reaches the line, not after he has 
 reached it. The line once reached, the runner is prac- 
 tically certain of a gain. Therefore it is necessary to 
 stop the runner behind the line before his interference 
 has formed in working order and before the weight of 
 the team is behind him pushing him forward. And to 
 the guard and tackle this duty falls. Again speaking 
 theoreticallv. it is the guard's work to break through 
 and read. quarter before he can pass. Practically 
 
 he will not succeed at this once in fifty attempts. But 
 his work doesn't stop there; if too late for the quarter 
 he must try for the runner; come what may, he should 
 break up the interference in so far as it affects the center 
 of the line. 
 
 The inexperienced player, however, should be 
 warned against defeating his own end through over- 
 anxiety. He must remember that his place in the line 
 must be defended against assault before he is at liberty 
 to leave it and break through; otherwise the play may 
 be directed against the position left open. The oppo- 
 sing guard will sometimes let him go through merely to 
 get him out of the way, in which case, it is safe to say, 
 his value to the team as regards that particular scrim- 
 mage is somewhat less than 0. The beginner, therefore, 
 should temper zeal with caution. Only experience — an 
 experience notable maybe for many mistakes — can 
 teach him to recognize instantly the moment when re- 
 sistance against attack may give place on his part to the 
 effort to break through. 
 
62 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Ox offense the guard's first duty is to protect his 
 quarter until the pass is made, blocking hard so that the 
 opponent can not reach the runner. His next duty is to 
 either make the opening, if the play is within his jurisdic- 
 tion, or when the play is on the other end of the line to 
 protect the runner from tackles from behind. He should 
 always get into the interference if possible, as his weight 
 and strength if combined with a fair amon of speed 
 will enable him to do much either by bo"\\ over ad- 
 
 vancing tacklers or by pulling the runner alohg for gains 
 after he has been tackled. 
 
 It may be that he will be called upon to leave his 
 position and get into the interference for a run on the 
 far side of the line. This necessitates the quickest kind 
 of a start, yet it will not be possible for him to take any 
 poise different from his usual one lest his opponent should 
 surmise his intention. He must stand about as ordi- 
 narily, block sharply, and then leave his place quickly. 
 Usually a long step backward with one foot and a sharp 
 turn will prove the most effectual method, but the guard 
 will have to discover for himself what method best suits 
 his case. But every effort should be made to conceal the 
 play from the opponent. A deal of practise alone can 
 make such a play a success, while without cool judg- 
 ment on the part of the guard it had much better be left 
 carefully alone. "When the guard leaves his position it 
 becomes the tackle's duty to look after the opposing 
 guard and prevent his following. The guard will some- 
 times be drawn back to take part in a tandem play, in 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 63 
 which case he practically becomes a back for the time 
 and should follow the back's methods. 
 
 The Tackle 
 
 The tackle is the team's Jack-of-all-trades. He is 
 " soldier and sailor too " ; or, to leave Kipling and 
 metaphors alone, he is at once forward and back and 
 must take his turn at playing every style of play and 
 meeting every kind of trick. On one side he has to help 
 the guard block the plunges at the center; on the other 
 side he must work smoothly with the ends on plays be- 
 tween them or around them. So much for defense. On 
 the attack he must run with the ball while a tired back 
 regains his breath, form into fast interference, become 
 one of the components of a tandem and, under a kick, 
 try to beat the end at his own work and get down the 
 field before him. The tackle has his work cut out for 
 him. 
 
 He should first of all have a clear, active brain, be 
 willing to do his own share and some of everybody else's, 
 be strong, quick as a weasel and have plenty of weight 
 well distributed. Stockiness is a prime factor in the 
 make-up of a good tackle. 
 
 On Defense. — It is impossible to lay down any 
 hard-and-fast rule for the tackle's guidance as to the dis- 
 tance he should stand from guard. Everything depends 
 upon the play he is to meet. If he allows himself to be 
 drawn out too far he will find himself blocked out of a 
 
64 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 play at center; if he hugs his guard too closely a play 
 inside end will get by him nine times out of ten. He 
 must watch the opposing tackle, and to a lesser degree, 
 the opposing end. Remember that they know what the 
 play is to be; study their movements; above all, remem- 
 ber that the longer the line is the weaker it is. There 
 are times when it is best for the tackle to play up in the 
 line and times when a position a little back of it will be 
 better. Be always on the alert, don't get anchored, 
 keep your opponent guessing and watch the ball. The 
 instant it is snapped get into the game. First put your 
 opponent out of the way so that in case the play is be- 
 tween you and guard you may have a chance at the 
 runner as he goes past. To do this drive him back; all 
 you need is an instant; when you have it act quickly 
 and tackle low. If the play is outside you get through, 
 putting your opponent out of the game long enough to 
 secure a momentary respite from his attentions. Re- 
 member that if the play is to be stopped for no gain it 
 is necessary for you to reach the runner, or, failing that, 
 to pile up the interference before the runner has turned 
 in toward the line. To defeat an end play it 
 is necessary that tackle and end work together like a 
 machine. 
 
 When the play is toward the other end of the line 
 the tackle should go back and get in front of the play. 
 When the attack is directly at his position the tackle 
 should meet it stiffly and if possible shove it back; fail- 
 ing that he should go down in front of it and pile it up, 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 65 
 
 relying on the secondary defense to hold it there. When 
 the opponent kicks the tackle should leap into the air 
 with arms extended. If he is fortunate enough to block 
 the kick and the ball bounces back his one aim should 
 be to reach it no matter what happens or who is in the 
 way. If he has kept his eyes on it as he should, he knows 
 the direction of it and its probable location better than 
 any one else. 
 
 On offense the tackle's first thought should be to 
 make his holes wide and clean ; after that he should block 
 low and hard. As a rule he must keep close to the 
 guard, since the center of his line, being nearest to where 
 the play begins, is the most important to protect. Very 
 often he will find himself confronted by a back who has 
 come up into the line between guard and tackle. In 
 this case he must not allow himself to be drawn out. 
 When the ball is snapped he must block one opponent 
 with his arm and the other with head or shoulder. Re- 
 member in case your opponent gets by you that you are 
 not yet through with him; follow him up and keep him 
 away from the ball. When his side kicks the tackle 
 should block only long enough to keep the opposing 
 tackle from spoiling the kick and then should get down 
 the field as quickly as his legs will take him. 
 
 When the tackle has to take the ball from his posi- 
 tion in the line he must keep his opponent in the dark 
 as to his intention until the last moment. What has 
 been said as to a guard's duties when leaving the line 
 applies equally to the tackle in this case. And, like the 
 
66 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 guard, when drawn back for a tandem play lie becomes 
 for the time a back and should play the back's game. 
 
 The End 
 
 The end is the free-lance of the team. He is under 
 fewer restrictions as to positions and course of action than 
 any other member of it. Moreover, he has larger terri- 
 tory to cover, is thrown on his own resources more often 
 and receives less assistance. For these reasons he should 
 possess good judgment and the sort of brilliant courage 
 that takes men into tight places — and out again. Be- 
 sides, he must have lots of speed and endurance and 
 agility. An end need not of necessity have weight, al- 
 though, all other things being equal, the man with weight 
 is the one to choose, since weight is always a factor in 
 stopping interference. Like the tackle he is virtually 
 part rusher and part back. 
 
 0^" offense the end may choose his own position. 
 The usual position is about two yards from tackle and a 
 little back from the line. But wherever the end stands 
 he should not become anchored. When playing in the 
 line the end will find many opportunities to aid the 
 tackle, as when the play is to be made through tackle 
 or end by helping tackle to block off opposing tackle. 
 When the play is to be between guard and tackle the 
 end may himself engage opposing tackle and so cause a 
 diversion that will aid his own tackle in making the 
 hole. When the tackle runs with the ball the end 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 67 
 
 should look after the opposing tackle and see that he 
 does not follow. Very often, however, the play will 
 require him to block his own man sharp and follow the 
 tackle around, helping him at the turn, steering him 
 into the opening and at the same time protecting him 
 from the rear. When in the line the end should remem- 
 ber to give his attention to the inside man as being near- 
 est to the play. 
 
 On kicks by his own team the end should play a 
 trifle farther into the field. Unless he is unusually fleet 
 he should not delay his run down the field by attempting 
 to put out opposing end or backs, but should leave this 
 to his half-back and put all his work into the running. 
 He should study the movements and faces of the op- 
 posing backs in order to learn the direction of the ball 
 rather than turn his head at the kick. In most cases it 
 is possible to advise the ends of the direction of the kick 
 by signal. The end should be the first man down the 
 field under the ball. When he has located it and the 
 man who is going to make the catch he should lose no 
 time, but, on the other hand, should be careful not to 
 overrun. Always go down on the player who is to re- 
 ceive the ball from the outside, so that in trying to 
 avoid you he will be forced toward the other rushers. 
 Ascertain that there is no other player near to whom the 
 catcher will be likely to pass the ball. Slacken your 
 pace so as not to overrun. If there is no interference 
 threatening you allow the opponent to catch and start; 
 then tackle hard and watch out for a fumble; perhaps 
 
68 AMEKICAJST FOOTBALL 
 
 you've a touch-down coming to you. If when the op- 
 ponent runs he starts back to .avoid you, don't close with 
 him as long as he is continuing toward his own goal, but 
 use every effort to drive him back. Keep within tack- 
 ling distance, and tackle the moment he begins to recover 
 ground. When the kick is into touch the end should 
 " dog " the opponent watchfully and be on the lookout 
 for side-line tricks. 
 
 On defense the end is a highly important member 
 of his team. It is his duty to stop long runs around the 
 end of the line and to get into and break up open plays. 
 When a play comes his way his first thought should be 
 to turn the runner in toward the tackle. To do this he 
 should get around the opponent's line at as sharp an 
 angle as possible, with his arms straight in front of him 
 and tightly locked to ward off interference. The mo- 
 ment the turn is begun he should tackle the runner. To 
 do this it will be necessary for him to keep outside of 
 the interference, unless he is certain that his half-back 
 is also turning the interference in, in which case he may 
 go through it. With his man once within reach, a 
 quick, hard tackle is all that remains. 
 
 The end should always have his eyes open for a 
 fumble either by his own backs or the opponent's. He 
 should keep out of plays by the opponent in the center 
 of the line and out of pile-ups, his duty then being to 
 watch sharply lest the runner worm through. Above 
 all, he should keep on his toes, watch the ball, and use 
 his wits. 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 69 
 
 The Quarter-Bach 
 There is a very general theory among football men 
 to the effect that quarter-backs are born and not made. 
 To describe the ideal quarter would be merely to cata- 
 logue all the virtues, and use much space. Perhaps it 
 is sufficient to say that he must know the game thor- 
 oughly, not merely the rules, but the science and the 
 possibilities; that he must be cool, with the ability to 
 think quickly and act quickly; that he must be " sandy " 
 clear through and possess a positive love of hard work 
 and hard knocks — for he will get plenty of both. Phys- 
 ically the requirements are not difficult to fill. The 
 quarter is generally the lightest and smallest member 
 of the team, not because size and weight are barred, 
 but because the nature of his work requires extreme 
 activity and a certain nervous energy not usually found 
 in large men. 
 
 He is practically the captain ex officio. His is the 
 duty of running the team and upon him falls more re- 
 sponsibility than upon any other player. Prom him the 
 rest of the team will very likely take the cue of cheer- 
 fulness or discouragement, hope or despair; and for this 
 reason he must always maintain confidence and cour- 
 age. The team that goes into its final contest built 
 around a steady center and a brilliant quarter is in a 
 good way to win out. About once in three years 
 a born quarter-back bursts into view ; the supply is lim- 
 ited. 
 
 6 
 
70 AMEKICAtf FOOTBALL 
 
 On Offense. — In taking the position to receive the 
 ball from center, the quarter should consult first of all 
 the success of the team ; that is to say, he should find out 
 by constant experiment what position will enable him to 
 handle the ball most expeditiously and safely, and accom- 
 modate himself to it. As has been said previously in this 
 chapter, the method of snapping back the ball should 
 be agreed upon by the center and quarter after every 
 method has been tried; the decision once made, these 
 two players should practise snapping back on every pos- 
 sible occasion; practise makes perfect, and it isn't pos- 
 sible to be too perfect at this accomplishment. Some 
 quarters prefer the position facing and directly behind 
 center, both feet in a straight line parallel to the rush- 
 line. Others stand very nearly sidewise, the left foot 
 about twenty-eight inches back from the right. In this 
 position the quarter has the back field always in sight 
 without turning. The quarter should take the same po- 
 sition for every play, avoiding "favoring" that side of his 
 line to which the ball is going. Whatever position is 
 used it should be one which allows the other backs a 
 good view of the ball. The pass from center through 
 quarter to runner should be made as nearly as possible 
 on one unbroken line; that is, the quarter should not 
 take the ball to him and then pass to the runner, but 
 should speed it on from snapper-back to runner without 
 a perceptible hitch. In case of a fumble quarter should 
 fall on the ball instantly and not attempt to recover it 
 and put it into play. It is better to lose a down than to 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 71 
 
 lose the ball. The quarter should be equally certain in 
 passing to one side as to the other. 
 
 When the pass is to be made to a runner going out- 
 side of guard the ball should be tossed, and whenever 
 possible both hands should be used, since more accuracy 
 is so insured. When the runner is making a plunge 
 through the center of the line a hand pass should be 
 made. Remember that the back has no time in this 
 case to handle the ball, so place it where he wants it, that 
 is, against the pit of the stomach, necessitating only a 
 single clutching movement on his part to secure it. Re- 
 member, too, that your work is not finished when the 
 ball is out of your hands; follow up the runner; if the 
 plunge is through center steady the runner; if the try 
 is at the flank of the line get into the interference. 
 
 When called upon to kick the quarter should wait 
 until the last possible moment before going back to his 
 position, since by so doing he may be able to get the ball 
 away before the opponent has covered his field. On the 
 pass he should catch the ball in his hands and not against 
 his body, as he will be able to get it away much 
 quicker so. 
 
 When the quarter is to run with the ball it is highly 
 necessary that his intention be hidden until he has 
 started. The chief merit of this play is its unexpected- 
 ness; aside from that it has little advantage over a run 
 by any other back. Therefore he should take his posi- 
 tion as usual, receive the snap-back as in any other play 
 and make the turn as if to pass before straightening up 
 
72 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 for the run. The quarter-back must remember that he 
 can not run with the ball unless he crosses the line of 
 play at least five yards from where he received it from 
 the center rush. In other words, he must run at least 
 five yards across the field before he tries to go ahead, 
 and so he must not forget to keep an eye on the length- 
 wise lines when he is ready to run with the ball. 
 
 On defense the quarter will generally play back; 
 how far back depends on the ability of the opposing 
 kicker. Generally the distance between his position on 
 defense and his line will be from twenty to thirty yards, 
 except when a kick is expected, in which case he will 
 play from thirty to forty yards back. It is better to play 
 too far back than too far forward: in the latter case a 
 long punt may go over his head or a quick end run may 
 get by him. Once past his own 25-yard line he should 
 halve the distance from his team to the goal-line, since 
 a punt is practically out of the question. If a runner 
 breaks through the quarter should not wait for him, but 
 should advance and tackle him as far from the goal as 
 possible, and then hard and sure. 
 
 At all times he should be on the lookout for a fumble 
 by the opposing quarter. He should give his signals 
 quickly and distinctly and should see that they are un- 
 derstood. He should keep center and guards up to their 
 work every moment and use every art to keep them 
 steady and to stimulate them. 
 
 The quarter should not overwork any one of the 
 backs, unless a gain is absolutely imperative. In that 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 73 
 
 case call on the surest man. Keep a sharp watch on the 
 opponent's line ; study the conditions of the players. If 
 a tuckered-out man is discovered try a play at his posi- 
 tion; if a man is playing wide send a play there. As 
 long as gains continue at a certain place, hammer away 
 there ; time enough to change when the gains stop. 
 
 Some of the qualities that make a first-class quarter- 
 back are vividly pictured in this tribute to Rockwell, of 
 Yale, as one of the 1902 coaches viewed him: 
 
 " P. H. Rockwell, a schoolboy player who in the 
 early part of the season knocked around on the scrub, 
 about mid-season began to come into the running and 
 before he finished he displaced all candidates ahead of 
 him. He quickened up the entire line, as well as the 
 backs, and this quality stands out as superior to that of 
 any quarter that has run our back teams for many years. 
 He could put a big team up to such a pitch as to have 
 them blowing like porpoises in five minutes, and any 
 one who thinks that an easy thing to do has had very 
 little experience in quarter-back play. Best of all, when 
 he was sending the team fast, his judgment seemed to 
 be most unerring on the plays he ought to use, and where 
 to attack the opposing line. While still on his back be- 
 neath the scrimmage, the words of his signals would 
 begin to pipe out, and by the time he was landed on his 
 feet he would be ready for the ball to come. On de- 
 fensive work, Rockwell was kept up behind the line, 
 instead of going back to receive kicks, and no man had a 
 keener eye for detecting the play of the opponents than 
 
74 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 he. His tackling was certain and his ability to keep the 
 big men up to their work was phenomenal. He never 
 fumbled and almost invariably put the ball into the 
 hands of even an uncertain back so that the man could 
 not drop it. Rockwell is only five feet eight inches tall, 
 and weighs a hundred and forty-eight pounds." 
 
 The Half -Bach 
 
 The two half-backs together with the full-back are 
 the principal ground gainers. These three should work 
 together in perfect unison. The half-back may play one 
 of two styles of the game; that is, he may be a " dodger " 
 or a " plunger "; he should not combine the two, since it 
 is seldom possible for him to do both well. A team 
 should have one half-back of each kind. 
 
 The half-back should be quick to start, a hard, fast 
 runner, a good dodger and should have endurance and 
 courage in about equal proportions. He must be capable 
 of being sent into the line or around it time after time 
 without rest; he must be quick to think and quick to act. 
 As for weight, a plunging back can stand more of it than 
 a dodger, although the latter should not be so light as to 
 be easily carried off his feet. 
 
 On Offense. — The positions to be assumed by the 
 backs on the offense will depend upon the style of attack, 
 but whatever the formation, they should take up as near 
 as possible the same relative positions as regards each 
 other and the ball, thus giving the opponent no hint of 
 
POSITION'S— HOW TO PLAY THEM 75 
 
 the point or nature of attack. Every care should be 
 taken not to indicate the direction of the play either by 
 glances, false starts or by leaning. The ability to start 
 quickly is one of the first essentials, almost the most 
 important. No matter how fast a man may be able to 
 run after he is going he will not make a good back until 
 he has learned to start quickly. Starting from a pistol in 
 the hands of a coach is one of the best methods of per- 
 fecting himself in this. As soon as the team lines up 
 the half-back should get on his toes and stay there until 
 the ball is snapped. He should stand with one foot be- 
 hind the other, body and weight forward, much as the 
 sprinter poises himself for a standing start. The instant 
 the ball is snapped he should dig his toes and throw him- 
 self forward, recovering his equilibrium by fast use of 
 his feet. 
 
 His position must be such as to allow him to run 
 straight ahead, to left or to right with equal facility. 
 Some men will find themselves capable of starting in one 
 direction and of running in that direction better than 
 in another, and this fact should govern their location in 
 the back field; a man who can do better work at left half 
 than at right should be placed there and kept there. 
 Do not expect a man who has been playing at left all 
 season to do as good, work if switched over to the other 
 side. 
 
 The back who is going at the center of the line 
 should receive the ball against the pit of the stomach 
 and hold it there with both hands; he won't need his 
 hands and he will need the ball. He should keep his 
 
76 AMEKlCAN FOOTBALL 
 
 feet and run high if the hole is awaiting him. If it is 
 not he should either hurdle, trusting to go over, or buck 
 it hard. At all events, he should keep his eyes open. 
 Short steps are best, as they enable the back to recover' 
 his equilibrium quickly. His legs should be bent as the 
 line is reached, as in this case he is capable of a certain 
 amount of lifting power if it is needed. When the back 
 is to go outside of guard or circle the end he will need 
 one arm for interference and so should carry the ball 
 under the arm farthest from the enemy. He should be 
 able to carry the ball as well under one arm as under the 
 other. The arm not engaged with the ball should be 
 held straight and stiff to ward off interferers; a nice use 
 of this arm will gain many a yard. 
 
 In around the end work the back must keep his eyes 
 open and his feet under him. A runner who goes like 
 the wind and dashes blindly into a mass of interference 
 isn't nearly as valuable as a slower man who looks where 
 he is going. In the same way a back who loses his feet 
 the first time he is jostled isn't as good a ground gainer 
 as the less brilliant player who keeps his feet under him 
 and so gives his interference a chance to shove him along. 
 The back must not allow himself to be forced toward his 
 own goal; it is better for him to drop in his tracks with- 
 out gain than to lose territory. He should not follow so 
 close to his interference as to be unable to clear the inter- 
 ference in case it is upset. He should run low as long as 
 possible — very often he can do so until he reaches the 
 line. The idea in this is to escape detection. 
 
POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 77 
 
 When tackled he should always fall forward with the 
 ball clasped tightly under him. The difference between 
 a forward fall and a backward fall is anywhere from one 
 to three yards. When you are certain that by extending 
 the ball in front of you you can gain the required dis- 
 tance it is well enough to risk it, but as a general rule 
 it is better to sacrifice a yard of territory and make sure 
 of keeping the ball. The ball held in front is usually 
 easy prey for the opponent and a great many games have 
 been won by a stolen ball. 
 
 When his side is kicking the half-back should form 
 into defense for the kicker and should block hard. 
 
 On defense the half-back should usually stand be- 
 hind the guard-tackle hole, from which position he is 
 able to throw himself into a repulse of an attack upon 
 the center of the line as well as to keep a sharp watch on 
 the flank. He will sometimes be called upon to go into 
 the line between guard and tackle or between tackle 
 and end. The back is a part of the secondary defense 
 and should not go through the line. The back should 
 stand high enough to watch the play and as soon as he 
 decides what it is to be should get to it as fast as his legs 
 will take him. In stopping end runs he should never 
 allow himself to get hit but should keep the opponent 
 off with his arms. In stopping a mass play he should 
 try to upset it or turn it aside and not strive to tackle 
 any single member of it. When the other side kicks, 
 either a half-back or the full-back should go up the field 
 to help the quarter. Which is to do this should, of 
 
78 AMEKICAN" FOOTBALL 
 
 course, be settled upon before the game, and equally as 
 a matter of course the one chosen should be the surest 
 catcher and best runner. 
 
 The Full-Bach 
 
 What has been said of the half -back will apply very 
 nearly as well to the full-back. His duty is to advance 
 the ball by " bucking " the line, hurdling it or running 
 around the end. He should be equally effective as a 
 hard, speedy runner and a fierce line plunger. If he is 
 also a good hurdler he should be a valuable man for the 
 place. As a general thing his weight may exceed that 
 of the half; if he is to be used principally for plunges 
 at the center of the line he may, in fact, weigh as much 
 as a tackle just so long as he is quick and active. 
 
 On Offense. — From the kicking back of ten years 
 ago the full has developed into a sort of human batter- 
 ing-ram, a man to be depended upon at a crisis, one who 
 can take the ball on a third down and smash himself 
 through or under or over the line for the required dis- 
 tance. He must be a hard, desperate fighter, one whose 
 courage is at once cool and reckless, and a man quick to 
 judge the exigencies of a situation and quick to act upon 
 his judgment. He will often find himself rushing head- 
 long into a line in which the expected hole is not to be 
 seen. He will need his wits then. One thing he must 
 not do, and that is stop. There's a yard to be gained and 
 he's there to gain it. There must be no slacking up, no 
 

POSITIONS— HOW TO PLAY THEM 79 
 hesitation; he must decide what to do between the re- 
 ceiving of the ball and the striking of the line and then 
 do it just as hard as he knows how, summoning every 
 ounce of weight and strength to his aid. If he decides to 
 buck he should get low with head down and use his legs 
 for all that's in them. If he chooses to hurdle he will 
 secure the ball with one hand only, since he will require 
 the use of the other arm in leaping and in balancing his 
 body. Hurdling the line is an art in itself and can be 
 acquired only by practise. It is not as dangerous as it 
 looks from the side-lines, and, when performed by a good 
 exponent of the art, is an almost certain ground gainer. 
 The full-back will sometimes find an opening in the line 
 which while not clean enough to allow him to go through 
 on his feet is yet big enough to take him head first. In 
 that case he should dive, launching himself forward 
 much as a base-runner does when about to slide for the 
 bag. 
 
 The full-back who can take part in the kicking is a 
 valuable player, since because of his weight and size he 
 will naturally possess the strength to make long punts. 
 
 Osr defense the full-back is an important member 
 of the secondary line. 
 
CHAPTER YII 
 
 SIGNALS 
 
 Simple Signals Best. — Signals are intended to con- 
 vey information and not to cause brain-fag. Therefore 
 make your signals simple; mystify the other team, not 
 your own. Some players may be able to work mind and 
 body hard at the same time, but most are not. For prac- 
 tise a two-number system will answer; even when you 
 meet the enemy three numbers should serve as well as 
 five or six. 
 
 Your system, once decided on, should be learned 
 thoroughly by every member of the team. Signal drill 
 may be given indoors a couple of evenings a week as sup- 
 plementary to the regular outdoor work. The team 
 ought to become so well acquainted with the signals as 
 to comprehend them instantly without apparent effort of 
 the mind. When every man knows them thoroughly, 
 as he should, there will be no more frenzied cries of " Sig- 
 nal! Signal! " to the quarter-back, no more false starts 
 and no more ragged interference. More than half the 
 misplays of an afternoon's practise in mid-season may be 
 traced to imperfect knowledge of signals. The remedy 
 
 is DRILL. 
 
 All kinds of systems are possible; you may use let- 
 80 
 
SIGNALS 81 
 
 ters of the alphabet, words, signs and numbers; you 
 might even manage to get up a satisfactory system of 
 whistling; but in the opinion of most coaches it is sim- 
 plest and best to make the entire signal code of numbers. 
 For School Teams and younger players generally 
 the following system will prove all that can be desired, 
 combining as it does perfect simplicity, safety and 
 variety. Begin by numbering each opening on the right 
 of center from 2 to 8 inclusive and on the left from 3 
 to 9 inclusive. Then number each position as follows: 
 RG 2, RT 4, RE 6, RHB 8, LG 1, LT 3, LE 5, LHB 7, 
 QB 9, FB 10. The following diagram will aid : 
 
 9©? ®5® i CU©4 © 60S 
 
 © © ® 
 
 Diagram E. — Positions and openings numbered for signal 
 system. 
 
 In giving the signal use three numbers, letting the 
 first be a " bluff " or useless number, the second indicate 
 the player who is to take the ball and the third indicate 
 the opening through which he is to carry it. Thus: the 
 signal called is "5, 8, 6!" The five is the "bluff" 
 number and there only to confuse the opponent; the 
 8 indicates the right half-back; the 6 indicates the open- 
 
82 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 ing between right tackle and end. The signal " 5 ; 8, 6," 
 then, calls for a plunge by right half outside of right 
 tackle. 
 
 In case the opponent solves one or more of the sig- 
 nals the entire system may be changed at once by letting 
 the first number indicate the player, the second number 
 be the " bluff " and the third number indicate the open- 
 ing. The three numbers allow of six variations; at least 
 three of them should be thoroughly mastered by the 
 team. 
 
 A more complicated system is the following: 
 Number the openings from 1 to 8, beginning at the left 
 
 l©2©3®4l~35®6©?©8 
 © _ © 
 
 Diagram F. — Another arrangement of numbers. 
 
 (Diagram F). Number the positions from 1 to 9, work- 
 ing from left to right. Use three numbers in the signal, 
 one of them being a " bluff " number. Supposing the 
 "bluff" number comes first; then let the second digit 
 of the second number indicate the player who is to re- 
 ceive the ball and the second digit of the third number 
 the opening. 
 
 Thus: If the signal called is "23, 39, 15," 23 
 has no meaning, 39 indicates the full-back and 15 
 
SIGNALS 83 
 
 indicates the opening between right guard and center. 
 In this system the quarter-back is not numbered, but any 
 number above 50 and under 100 would indicate that 
 he was to advance the ball; thus, " 17, 56, 22 " would 
 call for quarter to take the ball for a dash into the line 
 outside of left tackle. 
 
 In either of the above systems the "bluff " numbers 
 may be increased to two, three, or even four if desired. 
 Ordinarily one " bluff " number is sufficient and little 
 is gained by addmg\oiore. The danger of confusing 
 your own team is the first thing to guard against. 
 
 In each of the systems a kick may be indicated by 
 any number over 100. 
 
 Any formation other than the regular one should be 
 called for by the quarter before he gives the signal, as 
 "left tackle back!" "right guard back!" "left end 
 and tackle over! " etc. 
 
 If a starting signal is desired it may be included in 
 • the number signal in a variety of ways, but it is of du- 
 bious value, since, once discovered, it gives the oppo- 
 nent a tremendous advantage. 
 
 Sequences, that is to say a number of plays which 
 can succeed each other without signals, are of value. 
 They should not, however, as a rule comprise more than 
 three plays, and should be used sparingly. 
 
 The quarter should give his signals plainly, loudly 
 and commandingly and once only, unless called upon for 
 a repetition by one of his side. After the signal he 
 should get the play off as quickly as possible. 
 
CHAPTEK VIII 
 
 THE TEAM 
 
 The members of the team having been taught to 
 play as individuals, the next duty is to teach them to 
 play in unity. Team-play is the concerted action of 
 eleven men having the same object in view. It is the 
 final accomplishment and a difficult one to teach, but 
 without it the team is a ship without a rudder. 
 
 Offense 
 
 Plan the Contest. — Every important contest 
 should be planned beforehand by captain and coaches. 
 In so doing everything should be taken into considera- 
 tion; weather, wind, condition of field, strength of your 
 team and strength of the enemy's. By keeping track of 
 the opponent's work in preceding games it is not difficult 
 to surmise very nearly what style of offense you will 
 be called upon to meet and what manner of game will 
 succeed best against him. Map out your battle accord- 
 ingly, deciding what line of action is to govern the day, 
 and what is to be done under certain conditions. This 
 is generalship. Good generalship has won many a game 
 before the toss-up. 
 
 Whatever plans you may lay out for the opponent's 
 84 
 
THE TEAM 85 
 
 undoing be guided by the rule that " straight football " 
 is the basis for every successful attack. 
 
 Starting the Game. — At the kick-oif let the kick 
 be made by the best kicker irrespective of position. 
 Place the ends on the wings of the line, two swift backs 
 in the center and keep the surest catcher at the 40- 
 yard line to look after a return punt. (Diagram B.) 
 The team should know beforehand the direction of the 
 kick; this information can be conveyed to them by the 
 captain by means of prearranged signals. Every man 
 save the one nearest goal should get away instantly as 
 soon as the ball is kicked. 
 
 Kick as far as possible without kicking the ball into 
 touch or over the line; although there are certain con- 
 ditions under which the latter may be desirable. If you 
 kick into touch you will have to do it over again ; if you 
 do it a second time the ball goes to the opponent for a 
 kick-off. It is better to let the opponent have the ball 
 near his goal than to have it yourself near your own 
 goal. If the ball is kicked over the goal-line it goes to 
 the opponent on his 25-yard line for a free kick. If the 
 opponent is known to be weak at kicking and possession 
 of the ball is desired a kick over the goal-line will prob- 
 ably restore the ball to you at about the middle of the 
 field. However, the result of such an attempt is at all 
 times uncertain. 
 
 It is the duty of the ends to stop the return of the 
 ball by tackling the catcher of it. This is so of the other 
 players as well, but the ends, because of their speed, 
 
86 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 stand a better chance to succeed. Tailing to stop the 
 man with the ball, the ends should drive him toward the 
 middle of the field, where the other players of their side 
 are ready to break up the interference and get him. 
 
 The Scrimmage. — When the ball is down it must be 
 put in play either by snapping it back or kicking it for- 
 ward. The latter means is seldom used, since it almost 
 invariably means loss of the ball. There are three meth- 
 ods of advancing the ball from a down, i. e., Direct At- 
 tack or " straight football," Indirect Attack or trick 
 play and Kicking. 
 
 Direct attack should form the basis, as has been 
 said, of every offense. Direct attack represents force as 
 opposed to strategy and is more easily executed than 
 indirect attack, since it is simple both in formation and 
 execution and does not entail mental as well as physical 
 exertion. The following examples of direct attack are 
 mostly " standard " plays and are as simple as they are 
 effective. It must be remembered, however, that in 
 these as in all other plays success lies in the perfection of 
 execution. 
 
 Left Half-Back between Guard and Center on 
 ins Own Side. — This play is from ordinary formation 
 — that is, a formation where the seven forwards are in the 
 line, the quarter-back is close behind center, the half- 
 backs about three yards back of the line and just outside 
 of guards and the full-back about four yards back of the 
 line and directly behind quarter. The ends play in the 
 line about one and a half yards from the tackles. 
 
THE TEAM 87 
 
 At the instant the ball is snapped LIT, RIT and FB 
 dash for the center-guard hole on the left of the line. 
 At the same instant C lifts his opponent back and to the 
 right, LG lifts his opponent back and to the left, thus 
 forming the opening. The ball goes to LH on a hand 
 pass from Q, who steadies him as he strikes the line at 
 full speed, head down and ball clasped with both hands 
 to his stomach. FB and RH follow him closely and push 
 with all their might as he reaches the hole. They should 
 be careful to apply the pressure below the waist and not 
 above it, since what is wanted is to keep the runner on 
 his feet and not push him down. When the ball is 
 snapped RE and LE pass through the line outside of 
 tackles to interfere for the runner in case he gets 
 through. RT goes through between guard and tackle 
 for the same purpose. QB follows the play, pushing 
 behind FB and RH. Don't stop pushing until the last 
 inch is gained. The same play may be made by RH on 
 his own side or the opposite side and by LH on the oppo- 
 site side. 
 
 Left Half-Back between Guard and Tackle on 
 his Own Side. — Formation as in previous play. At 
 the instant the ball is put in play LH, FB and RH dash 
 for the guard-tackle hole on the left of the line. LT 
 lifts his man out and to the left, LG lifts his man out 
 and to the right, making the opening. 
 
 LH receives the ball from QB when about a yard 
 from the line on a short pass, clasps it to his stomach and 
 plunges between guard and tackle with head down. 
 
88 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 FB, RH and QB follow behind and push him for- 
 ward. 
 
 LE leaves his position the instant LH reaches the 
 line — his duty until that time being to prevent attack 
 from his end — and goes through outside of tackle, put- 
 ting out the first man behind the opposing line. 
 
 RT and RE go through guard-tackle and tackle-end 
 holes to interfere for the runner if he gets through the 
 line. 
 
 This play can be made by LH on the opposite side 
 and by RH on his own and opposite side of the line. 
 
 Left Half-Back around his Own End. — Prece- 
 ding formation. At the instant the ball is snapped LH, 
 FB and RH start for the left end of the line, LH receiv- 
 ing the ball on a long pass from QB after he has started 
 and while at a point about back of LT. LE forces his 
 man in toward center, while LT must see that his man 
 does not get through to tackle the runner. 
 
 RH and QB take a course parallel to LH and FB, 
 but nearer the line passing inside of LE and seeking to 
 get through in time to interfere for LH as he goes down 
 the field. FB follows and protects the runner from the 
 rear. 
 
 RT and RE get through inside their men to join the 
 interference, their especial duty being to repulse attacks 
 from the opposing backs. This play may be made around 
 either end of the line by either half-back. 
 
 Full-Back between Center and Right Guard. — 
 For this play a slightly different formation is used. 
 
THE TEAM 89 
 
 Half-backs stand directly behind guards about three 
 yards back; full-back stands four yards behind center; 
 ends stand one yard back from the line and a yard and a 
 half outside of tackles. 
 
 At the instant the ball is snapped FB, LH, RH, LE 
 and RE dash for the center-guard hole. LH goes first, 
 clearing out the hole made by C and RGr, and putting 
 out the first opposing member of the secondary defense. 
 EB receives the ball from QB at a hand pass, holds it 
 with both hands against his stomach and follows -close 
 behind LH. LE, RH, RE and QB go in behind FB, 
 putting all their weight against him. LT goes through 
 inside his opponent without stopping to block and goes 
 down the field ahead of the runner as advance interfer- 
 ence. LG and RT must see that the opposing forwards 
 do not break through before FB reaches the line. 
 
 This play may be made through the left of the line 
 as well. 
 
 Straight plays with any one of the backs holding the 
 ball may be made through any hole in the line; conse- 
 quently there are as many straight plays as there are 
 holes in the line, that is eight. In the same way, straight 
 wedge plays may be directed against any position in the 
 line from tackle to tackle. 
 
 Plays in which a line man is brought back either to 
 head the interference or carry the ball may rightfully be 
 classed as straight football. 
 
 Indirect Attack. — In this strategy forms the basis 
 of the plays. The attack appears to be directed at one 
 
90 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 point, but concentrates at another. Trick plays were in 
 their zenith from 1892 to 1895. Of late years the tend- 
 ency has been rather toward straight football. The 
 number of trick plays possible is practically unlimited; 
 a coach or captain can readily evolve them for himself, 
 the only things necessary being a pencil, paper and a 
 thorough knowledge of the Rules. There is just one 
 way, however, in which to decide upon the merits of 
 any play, and that is to watch it in operation against a 
 good opponent. 
 
 Examples of the best of strategic plays are the va- 
 rious crisscrosses, the double passes other than criss- 
 crosses, the delayed pass, the scrimmage kick, the half- 
 back run from a kicking formation, the ordinary " fake 
 kick," the quarter-back run after a pretended pass and 
 the quarter-back kick. There are besides several trick 
 plays of more than doubtful respectability, notably that 
 seen on Soldiers' Field, Cambridge, in 1903, when Har- 
 vard's opponent secured the ball on a kick-off, formed a 
 wedge formation, tucked the ball under the sweater of 
 one of their number, where it was held in place by an 
 elastic band, and scattered. The player under whose 
 sweater at the back the pigskin was secured romped 
 down the field for something over a hundred yards and 
 was not molested until the goal-line was almost reached. 
 The trick was successful, earned six points, and was al- 
 lowable under the rules; at the same time it was not 
 good football from any point of view and even its in- 
 ventor was moved to offer apologies for it. 
 
THE TEAM 91 
 
 Trick plays have their uses; many a game has been 
 won by a clever bit of strategy, but not until the way for 
 it had been paved by simple straight football. Four 
 good trick plays at the most will suffice for a team. 
 
 Kicking. — Kicking is an easy and practically certain 
 method of advancing the ball, entailing, however, the 
 loss of it by the kicking team. It means hard work for 
 the ends and the man who does the kicking, but light 
 work for the balance of the players. As a method of 
 offensive play its value is greater than that of trick foot- 
 ball. Oi recent years it has been steadily gaining in 
 use and importance, but even yet the full possibilities of 
 the kicking game have not been displayed. 
 
 Let us suppose that teams A and B are very evenly 
 matched on offense and defense. At the kick-off A 
 secures the ball on her 10-yard line, runs it back to her 
 20 and from there begins a rushing game. She is 
 practically 60 yards from scoring distance. By straight 
 football diversified by an occasional trick she advances 
 the ball to B's 40-yard line, a none too easy perform- 
 ance, and there loses it. B is practically 50 yards from 
 scoring distance of A's goal. Therefore she kicks on 
 first down. There is the possibility that A's backs will 
 fumble. But even if they do not B has gained, let us 
 say, 40 yards at no expense of offensive strength. She 
 has lost the ball, but is in fresher condition than A, and 
 if she can wrest the ball from her opponent will be with- 
 in striking distance of the latter's goal. If A manages 
 to retain possession of the ball until she has once more 
 
92 AMEKICA^ T FOOTBALL 
 
 crossed into B's territory it is probable .that the limit of 
 her advance will be farther from B's goal than before. 
 We will suppose that B gains possession of the ball on 
 her own 45 yards. Again she kicks on first down and 
 A's back secures the ball on her 25-yard line. Again 
 A is in possession of the ball, but in a territory where 
 possession of it is almost valueless. She is weakened 
 by two long rushes aggregating 75 yards, while B, on 
 the other hand, is in far better physical shape, since 
 she has played almost entirely on the defensive. The 
 chances are now all in favor of B's being able to hold A 
 and secure the ball within scoring distance of A's goal. 
 In which case B's better physical condition will undoubt- 
 edly earn a touch-down. 
 
 In short, the possession by you of the ball inside your 
 own 30 yards is not so promising of a score for you as 
 the possession of it by the opponent inside his 30. 
 
 It is well to plan your kicking game after considering 
 the relative strength of your rushing and kicking ability. 
 The wind enters largely into the question also. If the 
 wind is with you kicks will naturally be more frequent 
 in your game than they would were the wind favoring 
 the opponent, although a strong punter who is able to 
 kick low and long will make the chances very nearly 
 even. If you have not such a punter then it is still pos- 
 sible to rush the distance the wind handicaps the kick 
 and then punt. In the same way you can offset any ad- 
 vantage over your own punter held by the rival player. 
 
 As a general rule — to which there are always ex- 
 
THE TEAM 93 
 
 ceptions — it is best, rival kickers being nearly equal in 
 ability and the wind being in your favor, to kick on 
 first down when between your 15- and your 40-yard 
 lines; on second down between your 40 and the op- 
 ponent's 40; on third down from opponent's 40 to his 
 goal. Do not get into the habit of waiting for the third 
 down before kicking;- your opponent is looking for a 
 kick then. 
 
 Don't kick from directly under your goal. If you 
 do the ball may hit an upright or the cross-bar. Work 
 the ball toward the side of the field on an end run first. 
 
 Do not, when kicking from a point back of your own 
 15 yards, punt the ball straight down the field, as it 
 may fail of the expected distance and go to the opponent 
 on a fair catch within place-kicking distance of your 
 goal. Always kick into touch in this case, thus prevent- 
 ing any run back of the ball. 
 
 On the other hand, when kicking from any point bet- 
 ter than your 20 yards strive to send the ball straight 
 down the field in front of the opponent's goal. 
 
 Once past the middle of the field and into opponent's 
 territory try to send the ball into touch as near oppo- 
 nent's goal-line as possible. A straight kick might send 
 the ball over the goal-line and give the opponent a free 
 kick from his 25-yard line. 
 
 Finally the kicker should bear in mind that merely 
 to kick the ball as hard as he knows how is not the first 
 consideration. He should remember that he is kicking 
 for a purpose; he should recognize that purpose and use 
 
94 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 his skill accordingly. In short, each kick should be made 
 to the advantage of the team. He should take into ac- 
 count the speed of the ends and the others of the rush- 
 line. There is little gained if a back kicks 60 yards 
 and the ball is run back 40 yards or punted back 50. 
 He must give his ends time to get down the field, ele- 
 vating his kicks accordingly. Always he should strive 
 to put the ball where it will be most difficult for the op- 
 posing backs to get it; by observing the opponent's ar- 
 rangement of players he will often find a portion of the 
 field poorly covered; or if the opponent has a back who 
 is notably uncertain on catching it will be well to drop 
 the ball in the territory covered by him on the chance of 
 a fumble. 
 
 If it is possible to signal the direction of the kick to 
 the rest of .the team beforehand it should be clone. 
 
 Defense 
 
 There is a football truism to the effect that the team 
 with a perfect defense can never be scored on, and there- 
 fore never defeated. It is a statement worth consider- 
 ing as it gives some idea of the immense value of team 
 defense. At the present day the relative values of de- 
 fense and offense are practically in the ratio of 3 to 2. 
 
 Defense at Start of Game. — There is no rule gov- 
 erning the arrangement of players on the kick-off which 
 can be universally applied. The placing of the men will 
 depend on individual ability and style of work. Diagram 
 B shows one method of arranging the field; in many 
 
THE TEAM 95 
 
 cases other arrangements will doubtless serve better. 
 The principal thing to strive for is to cover the field in 
 such a way that no matter where the kick-off puts the 
 ball it can be quickly taken and returned, either by punt 
 or run back. In every arrangement it is advisable to 
 place the three heaviest men, center and guards, along 
 the 40-yard line to look after short ground kicks and, 
 when the ball goes past them, to block the first man. 
 The 30-yard line is usually a good position for the quar- 
 ter. He should watch for short kicks, and in general 
 guard the middle of the field. The end should see that 
 kicks dropping near the side lines do not go into touch. 
 If the tackles come next they will be in position to form 
 into heavy interference for any of the backs, who cover 
 the remaining territory. If either of the three backs get 
 the ball the tackles should lead the way up the field, the 
 other two backs guarding the runner closely and the bal- 
 ance of the players joining the interference as quickly as 
 possible. 
 
 Always give the ball a chance to go over the goal- 
 line so that you will earn a free kick from your 25-yard 
 line. Ninety-nine times out of a hundred it is better 
 to run the ball back on the kick-off than to return the 
 kick. If you are playing a kicking game you. can kick 
 just as well from a down, unless your line is unusually 
 weak, as on the catch, and you might as well have to 
 your credit what ground you can gain by running the 
 ball back. 
 
 Defense from a Down. — The principles underlying 
 
96 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 this are: (1) meet the play before it reaches the line, 
 (2) put more players against it than the opponent can 
 put into it, and (3) strengthen your line by making it 
 compact. 
 
 As to the first principle, a moment's thought will 
 convince you of its soundness. The duty of defense is 
 not only to keep the opponent from gaining ground, but 
 to make him lose ground when possible. The latter is 
 more effective than the former. If you wait until a 
 play reaches the line before meeting it you may be able 
 to stop it, but not before it has gained ground. On the 
 other hand, if you meet a play on your opponent's side 
 of the line you will be able to stop it quicker — since it 
 has gathered less momentum — and will not only have 
 prevented gain, but will have stopped the opponent for 
 a loss. A runner becomes harder to stop with every 
 foot of ground covered, since every foot means an in- 
 crease of momentum as well as an added perfection of 
 interference. 
 
 The s*econd principle needs no explaining. If it were 
 possible to always meet a play with more men than the 
 play contained there could be no advance against your 
 defense so long as the two teams were anywhere equal 
 in weight and strength. 
 
 The third principle is founded on the fact that it is 
 easier and simpler to protect a territory 15 feet in width 
 than one 50 feet in width. There is always a tendency 
 on the part of the forwards to break through on defense 
 outside of their opponents, thus pulling the line open 
 
THE TEAM 97 
 
 and lengthening it materially. As a result the opponent 
 finds lots of holes quite to his liking and has his work 
 vastly simplified for him. A short line of seven men is 
 stronger than a long line of the same number. 
 
 Half-Cikcle Defense. — The best system of de- 
 fense on a scrimmage that a school team can use is that 
 which seeks in theory to pocket the opponent inside a 
 half circle. 
 
 For example: The rush-line is standing in a straight 
 line across the field. To form the half-circle center ad- 
 vances straight ahead one yard, the guards two yards and 
 a trifle toward center, the tackles three yards diagonally 
 and the ends four yards diagonally. The line has now 
 become an arc. Suppose now that all turn toward a man 
 originally standing four yards in front of center and now 
 three yards in front of him. That man, representing the 
 offense, is now in the center of the chord of the arc with 
 the arc in front of him. The members of the circle are 
 somewhat less than two arms' length apart and two of 
 them can reach the man without leaving their posi- 
 tions if he tries to break through. The theory of 
 this system is to tear the offense into fragments, to 
 meet the play on the opponent's side of the line and 
 to have two men meet the runner no matter which way 
 he turns. 
 
 The Backs are a valuable feature of this defense and 
 must be especially wide-awake and keen to discover the 
 direction of the attack and quick to plug any holes which 
 may appear. The territory to be covered should be dis- 
 
98 AMEKICAST FOOTBALL 
 
 tributed among the three; let one back watch all holes 
 from outside of left end to left guard, another all holes 
 from outside right end to right guard and the third from 
 tackle to tackle. This arrangement should bring two 
 men to the repulse of any attack on the tackle positions. 
 It is, of course, not arbitrary. A weak center will de- 
 mand a plan whereby two backs can be brought in- 
 stantly to his relief, while with the opponent playing 
 an end running game the center of the line must be 
 guarded less carefully than the wings. 
 
 To teach this or any other system of defense it 
 should first be diagramed on the blackboard and each 
 player's duties thoroughly explained. On the field the 
 men should be made to walk to their positions, then trot 
 and then get there as quickly as they know how. The 
 next step should be to introduce an offence which at first 
 offers no resistance. The defense forwards should learn 
 to get by their opponents on the inside and get sharply to 
 their positions. Now let the offense make resistance and 
 finally execute some straight plays. By this time the 
 defense should be in good enough working order to be 
 used in a regular game with the second team. 
 
 When the opponent is going to kick from any point 
 between the two 40-yard lines the ends should take posi- 
 tions back of the line and about five yards out from 
 tackle. In case of a fake kick they are then in position 
 to get back and tackle an end runner, and if the kick is ' 
 really made they can readily get down the field to pro- 
 tect the back making the catch. On a kick by the oppo- 
 
THE TEAM 99 
 
 nent inside his own 40 yards the ends should join the 
 other forwards in breaking through to block the ball. 
 
 Certain plays require special means of defense, as, 
 for instance, a mass formation on center. In this case 
 the center trio should meet the advance with heads and 
 shoulders and use every effort to push the apex in, thus 
 smashing the play and forcing the runner out. The 
 formation once broken, the center trio should prevent 
 farther progress through their positions by falling flat 
 and leaving the runner to the mercies of the men on 
 the wings and secondary defense. 
 
 To stop a close mass play it is necessary to meet it 
 hard and low with the shoulders and then drop flat. If 
 you drop without first forcing the play back it will prob- 
 ably pass right over you. These tactics will not answer 
 with a loose mass play. There it is necessary to tear the 
 formation apart and reach the runner. There is no use 
 in throwing yourself in front of such a play. 
 
 The same applies to the old revolving wedge and all 
 variations of it. It is necessary to get through the inter- 
 ference and reach the runner. 
 
 There is one rule which applies to the stopping of 
 all plays: Watch the ball and reach the runner. 
 
 Defense according to Territory. — Once inside 
 its own 20-yard line the team on the defensive is called 
 upon for its utmost efforts. !No matter how fiercely and 
 determinedly it has been playing before, now is the time 
 for a desperate rally. Football history shows that the 
 last few yards are at least twice as hard to gain as any 
 
 LofC. 
 
100 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 other ten. Every effort should be made by the defense 
 not merely to stop the enemy's advance, but to wrest the 
 ball away from him on every play. The center trio and 
 the back behind them should play for the ball. The 
 guards should take turns in assisting the center to make 
 holes through which the back may plunge in an effort to 
 get the ball if possible, and if not to break up the oppo- 
 nent's play. Remember that the opponent is probably 
 just as tired as you are and more nervous, and play as 
 though fortune were on your side and you knew it. 
 
 Watch the short side of the field when the teams are 
 close to the side lines. Try to force the runner into 
 touch and deprive the offense of its first down. When 
 forced into a corner of your territory watch the long side 
 of the field for a dash around that end. 
 
 If forced to kick from behind your own goal-line 
 use judgment. If the forwards are through and on to 
 the kicker before he has a chance to get the ball safely 
 away he should make a safety rather than allow the 
 opponent to make a touch-down. It is better to have 
 two points scored against you than five or possibly six. 
 
 If kept on the defensive most of the time kick when- 
 ever the result of a rush is at all doubtful. 
 
FOOTBALL MAXIMS 101 
 
 FOOTBALL MAXIMS 
 
 Line up quickly. Trot to your position,- don't crawl. 
 
 "When you tackle throw your man hard and always 
 toward his goal. 
 
 Don't talk to your opponent during play. Keep 
 your breath and thought for your work. 
 
 Don't " slug." It isn't good football. Keep your 
 head and your temper. 
 
 Don't offer excuses when criticized by the coaches. 
 Listen to what you are told and play accordingly. 
 
 If you miss a tackle don't give up the running. Fol- 
 low your man and try to reach him. again. 
 
 Don't wait for the runner to come up to you; go 
 down for the runner. 
 
 Get into every tackle in your neighborhood. Don't 
 let go until the whistle blows. 
 
 When tackled yourself squeeze the ball and fall 
 toward the opponent's goal. 
 
 Be first down the field under kicks. 
 
 Don't lose your nerve no matter how badly things 
 are going ; if you do they'll go worse. 
 
 Finally, watch the ball, play hard and fast and grin 
 whether you win or lose. 
 
102 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 VOCABULARY OF FOOTBALL WORDS AND 
 PHRASES 
 
 Back Field. — The players behind the rush-line; the immediate 
 territory occupied by them. 
 
 Backs. — All players behind the rush-line. 
 
 Blocking. — Obstructing the opponent with the body. 
 
 Blocking Off. — Protecting a runner from attack by interposing 
 the body. 
 
 Body Checking. — A form of blocking designed to check the oppo- 
 nent temporarily rather than to put him finally out of the 
 play. 
 
 Break Through. — To penetrate the opponent's line. 
 
 Bring In. — To return the ball from " touch." 
 
 Center. — The snapper-back or middle man of the rush-line; also 
 the spot in the field from which the kick-off is made. 
 
 Center Section. — That portion of the field between the two 
 25-yard lines which is marked longitudinally. 
 
 Center Trio. — The center and the two guards. 
 
 Charge. — To rush forward. 
 
 Cock. — To point or cant the ball. 
 
 Corkscrew. — A kind of kick by which the ball is made to re- 
 volve with a swaying motion on its short axis during its 
 flight. 
 
 Cross-Bar. — The horizontal bar connecting the two uprights of 
 the goal. 
 
 Dash. — A short, fast run; spirited play. 
 
 Dead. — Out of play as refers to the ball. The ball is said to 
 be dead when an official blows his whistle; when a goal 
 has been tried for; when a touch-down, touch-back or safety 
 has been made; when a fair catch has been made or when the 
 • ball goes out of bounds after a kick before touching a player 
 who is on-side. 
 
VOCABULARY OF FOOTBALL WORDS 103 
 
 Defense. — The science of defending against the attack of the 
 opponents. A team is said to be on the defense when the 
 opponents have the ball. A method of play designed to resist 
 attack. 
 
 Down. — The ball is down when the player having it is unable 
 to advance it farther, and the referee declares it " down." 
 
 Drop-Kick. — A kick made by dropping the ball from the hands 
 and kicking it the instant it rebounds from the ground. 
 
 End Rusher, End. — The last man on either end of the rush- 
 line. 
 
 Fair Catch. — A catch of an opponent's kick or of a punt-out 
 in which the catcher signifies his intention not to run with 
 the ball. 
 
 Fake. — A trick play in which an attempt is made to advance the 
 ball in another way from that for which preparations are 
 seemingly made. A Fake Kick is a run made from a forma- 
 tion intended to make the opponents believe a kick is in- 
 tended. 
 
 Fall on the Ball. — To secure the ball by dropping on it with 
 the body. 
 
 Field Kick. — A try-at-goal from a drop-kick or from placement. 
 
 Fifty-five-Yard Line. — The seventh transverse line from each 
 goal-line, marking the center of the field longitudinally. 
 The line from which the ball is kicked off. 
 
 First Down, Second Down, Third Down, Fourth Down: See 
 Doicn. — Terms indicating the number of the attempt to ad- 
 vance the ball. If after three successive attempts the ball 
 has not been advanced five yards, the fourth down is reached 
 and the ball is forfeit to the opponent. 
 
 First Half. — The first period of play. 
 
 Forward Pass. — An unlawful advance of the ball made when a 
 player passes the ball to another player of his side between 
 him and the opponent's goal. 
 
 Forwards. — Players in the rush-line. 
 
 Foul. — Any violation of a rule. 
 
 Free Kick. — A kick in which the opponent is prohibited from 
 interfering. 
 
104 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Full-Back. — The fourth member of the back field. 
 
 Fumble. — To drop the ball when it is in play. 
 
 Get Down, Get Down the Field. — To go forward toward the 
 opponent's goal, especially under a kick. 
 
 Get Through. — To break through the opponent's line in the 
 scrimmage. 
 
 Goal. — The uprights and cross-bar in the middle of the goal- 
 line; the result of kicking the ball over the cross-bar; the 
 territory back of the goal-line. 
 
 Goal-Line. — The line marking either end of the field and upon 
 which the goal-posts are erected. 
 
 Geidieon. — The field of play; a term which partly lost its sig- 
 nificance with the advent of longitudinal lines. 
 
 Geound Gainee. — Applied to a player who, or a play which, ad- 
 vances the ball. 
 
 Guaed. — The player on either side of the center. 
 
 Half-Back, Half. — A member of the back field generally used 
 to advance the ball by runs. There are two half-backs, desig- 
 nated as Right Half and Left Half. 
 
 Heel. — To mark a fair catch by digging the heel into the ground. 
 
 Held. — Applied to a player or a team when its progress is 
 stopped. 
 
 Holding. — Unfair use of the hands in the rush-line. 
 
 In Goal. — Back of the goal-line. 
 
 In Play. — The ball is said to be in play when it may be lawfully 
 advanced by the side in possession; opposed to out of play 
 and dead. 
 
 Inteeference. — The warding off of an opponent from the runner 
 by interposing the body between them; the assistance given 
 to the runner by players of his side. 
 
 Inteemission. — A period of ten minutes for rest dividing the 
 playing time. 
 
 In Touch. — Out of bounds. 
 
 Kick-Off. — The place-kick from the center of the field which be- 
 gins the play at the commencement of each half and after 
 each touch-down. 
 
 Kick-Out. — A kick made by a player of the side which has made 
 a touch-down. 
 
VOCABULARY OF FOOTBALL WORDS 105 
 
 Lacing. — The leather string which fastens the cover of the ball. 
 
 Leather. — A term for the ball. 
 
 Line. — The rush-line; any one of the lines dividing the field 
 transversely or longitudinally at 5-yard periods. 
 
 Line Breaking. — Advancing the ball through the opponent's 
 line. 
 
 Line Bucking. — Advancing against the opponent's line with the 
 ball. 
 
 Line Men. — The forwards or rushers. 
 
 Linesman. — An official who marks the distance gained or lost. 
 
 Line Up. — The taking of position by each team before a play; 
 a list of the players and their positions. 
 
 Miss. — To fail to make a catch or secure a runner by tackling. 
 
 Offense. — The science of attacking the opponent in order to 
 advance the ball. A team is said to be on the offense when 
 in possession of the ball. A method of play designed to 
 advance the ball. 
 
 Off-Side. — In advance of the ball ; i. e., between the ball and 
 the opponent's goal-line. 
 
 On-Side. — Behind the ball ; opposed to off-side. 
 
 Out of Bounds. — The ball is out of bounds when it touches the 
 ground on or outside the side line or side line extended, 
 or when any part of the player holding it touches such 
 ground. 
 
 Pass. — To throw or hand the ball, specifically from the quarter- 
 back to the runner. 
 
 Penalty. — A punishment for transgression of the rules inflicted 
 by the referee or umpire usually involving the loss of terri- 
 tory or of the ball or both. 
 
 Pigskin. — The ball. 
 
 Piling Up. — Falling upon the runner after the referee has blown 
 his whistle, which constitutes a foul. 
 
 Place-Kick. — A kick made by kicking the ball while it is on the 
 ground, as at the beginning of a period or for a try-at-goal 
 from the field. 
 
 Play. — An operation for the purpose of advancing the ball or 
 of preventing its advance. 
 
106 AMEBICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Points. — The numerical value of scoring plays as expressed in 
 the score. 
 
 Punt. — A kick made by dropping the ball from the hands and 
 kicking it before it touches the ground. 
 
 Punt-Out. — A kick from behind the goal-line to a player of the 
 same side. 
 
 Quabtek-Back, Quarter. — The first member of the back field, 
 whose duty it is to take the ball from the center. 
 
 Keferee. — The official whose duty it is to judge of the progress 
 of the ball. 
 
 Kun. — An advance by a player carrying the ball. 
 
 Runner. — The player who has the ball during an attack. 
 
 Rushers. — The forwards. 
 
 Rush-Line. — The forward line composed of the center, guards, 
 tackles and ends. 
 
 Safety. — A play scoring two points for the opponents. It is 
 made when a player touches the ball down behind his goal- 
 line, thus relieving the pressure of the attack and acquiring 
 the right to take the ball out for a kick. 
 
 Score. — To make points against the opponent; the tally. 
 
 Scrimmage. — A scrimmage occurs when the teams line up and 
 the ball is put in play by the center rush. 
 
 Second Half. — The last period of play. 
 
 Series. — A number of plays which succeed each other according 
 to predetermined order, usually without signals being called 
 after the beginning. 
 
 Side Line. — The line marking either side of the field. 
 
 Signal. — A message conveyed by voice or motions indicating 
 what the next play is to be; signals are usually given to 
 the team by the quarter-back. 
 
 Slugging. — Specifically striking with the clenched fist; any in- 
 tentionally rough playing. 
 
 Snap-Back. — The act of sending the ball back to the quarter- 
 back by the center rush. 
 
 Snapper-Back. — The center rush. 
 
 Tackle. — The player occupying the position in the rush-line be- 
 tween guard and end; to seize a runner. 
 
VOCABULAKY OF FOOTBALL WORDS 107 
 
 Tackle Back. — A play in which the tackle is drawn back of the 
 
 line. 
 Tandem — An attacking formation wherein the runner is followed 
 
 or preceded by one or more interferers in direct line of his 
 
 body; a play from the above formation. 
 Team-Play. — Systematic cooperation of all players, as opposed 
 
 to individual play. 
 Time. — A call by the referee stopping the game. 
 Time Out. — Time taken out at direction of the referee during 
 
 which the ball is not in play. 
 Touch-Back. — A non-scoring play made when a player touches 
 
 the ball down behind his own goal-line, the impetus which 
 
 carried the ball across having been given by an opponent. 
 Touch-Down. — A scoring play made by touching the ball down 
 
 behind the opponent's goal-line. A touch-down gives five 
 
 points to the team making it. 
 Touch in Goal. — Out of bounds and past the goal-line. 
 Trick. — A play designed to deceive the opponent. 
 Tripping. — Tackling a runner below the knees. 
 Try-at-Goal. — An attempt to kick the ball over the cross-bar 
 
 of the opponent's goal. 
 Twenty-five- Yard Line. — The fifth transverse line from the 
 
 goal-line. 
 Twister. — Same as Corkscrew. 
 Umpire. — The official whose duty it is to judge of the conduct 
 
 of the players. 
 Wedge. — A form of grouping for interference for the runner. 
 
108 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 FOOTBALL RECORDS 
 
 Games of 1903 
 EAST 
 
 Princeton beat Swarthmore 34-0; Georgetown 5-0; Gettys- 
 burg 68-0; Brown 29-0; Lehigh 12-0; Carlisle 11-0; Bucknell 
 17-0; Dartmouth 17-0; Cornell 44-0; Lafayette 11-0; Yale 11-6. 
 
 Yale beat Wesleyan 33-0 ; Holy Cross 36-10 ; Penn State 
 27-0; West Point 17-5; Columbia 25-0; Syracuse 30-0; Harvard 
 16-0; lost to Princeton 6-11. 
 
 Harvard beat Williams 17-0; Maine 6-0; Wesleyan 17-6; 
 West Point 5-0; Brown 29-0; Carlisle 12-11; Pennsylvania 
 17-10; lost to Amherst 0-5; Dartmouth 0-11; Yale 0-16. 
 
 Pennsylvania beat Lehigh 16-0; Penn State 39-0; Brown 
 30-0; Bucknell 47-6; Cornell 42-0; lost to Columbia 6-18; Har- 
 vard 10-17; Carlisle 6-16. 
 
 Columbia beat Wesleyan 10-0; Williams 5-0; Swarthmore 
 5-0; Amherst 12-0; Pennsylvania 18-6; Cornell 17-12; lost to 
 Yale 0-25. 
 
 Cornell beat Hobart 12-0; Rochester 11-0; Colgate 12-0; 
 Bucknell 6-0; tied Lehigh 0-0; lost to Princeton 0-44; Columbia 
 12-17; Pennsylvania 0-42. 
 
 Dartmouth 'beat Holy Cross 18-0; Vermont 36-0; Union 
 34-0; Williams 17-0; Wesleyan 34-6; Amherst 18-0; Harvard 
 11-0; Brown 62-0. 
 
 Carlisle beat Gettysburg 46-0; Swarthmore 12-5; Bucknell 
 12-0; Georgetown 28-6; Pennsylvania 16-6; Northwestern 28-0; 
 tied Virginia 6-6 ; lost to Princeton 0-1 1 ; Harvard 1 1-12. 
 
 West Point beat Dickinson 12-0; Chicago 10-6; Annapolis 
 40-5; tied Colgate 0-0; lost to Harvard 0-5; Yale 5-17. 
 
 Annapolis beat Virginia 6-5; Dickinson 5-0; lost to Lafay- 
 ette 5-6; Penn State 0-17; Bucknell 5-23; Virginia M. I., 0-11; 
 West Point 5-40. 
 
FOOTBALL RECORDS 109 
 
 Lafayette beat Gettysburg 11-0; Annapolis 6-5; New York 
 8-6; lost to Princeton 0-11; Lehigh 6-12; Dickinson 0-30. 
 
 Brown beat Colby 23-0; Wesleyan 11-0; Williams 22-0; 
 Vermont 24-0; Syracuse 12-5; lost to Princeton 0-29; Pennsyl- 
 vania 0-36; Harvard 0-29; Dartmouth 0-62. 
 
 Amherst beat Colby 23-0; Harvard 5-0; Union 16-0; lost to 
 Columbia 0-12; Holy Cross 0-36; Dartmouth 0-18. 
 
 Lehigh beat Dickinson 17-0; Lafayette 12-6; Georgetown 
 12-6; tied Cornell 0-0; lost to Princeton 0-12. 
 
 Rochester beat Buffalo 47-0; Union 17-6; Hobart 16-5. 
 Hamilton beat Hobart 16-0; lost to Colgate 5-23. Colgate beat 
 Syracuse 10-5; Hamilton 16-0; Rochester 23-5; lost to Williams 
 0-6; Cornell 0-12. Wesleyan tied Williams 5-5; lost to Dart- 
 mouth 6-34. Maine beat Colby 6-5; New Hampshire 27-0; Bow- 
 doin 16-0; lost to Holy Cross 0-5. Holy Cross lost to Dart- 
 mouth 0-18. Dickinson beat Penn State 6-0; Baltimore Medical 
 12-0; Lafayette 30-0; lost to West Point 0-12; Annapolis 0-5; 
 Lehigh 0-17. Penn State beat Washington and Jefferson 23-0; 
 lost to Dickinson 0-6. 
 
 WEST 
 
 Michigan beat Drake 47-0; Case 31-0; Beloit 79-0; Indiana 
 51-0; Ohio State 36-0; Wisconsin 16-0; Oberlin 42-0; Chicago 
 28-0 ; tied Minnesota 6-6. 
 
 Minnesota beat Iowa 75-0; Beloit 46-0; Grinnell 40-0; Illi- 
 nois 32-0; Wisconsin 17-0; tied Michigan 6-6. 
 
 Chicago beat Illinois 18-6; Indiana 34-0; Purdue 22-0; Wis- 
 consin 15-6; Haskell Indians 17-11; tied Northwestern 0-0; lost 
 to Michigan 0-28. 
 
 Wisconsin beat Beloit 87-0; Knox 54-6; Oshkosh 53-0; tied 
 Northwestern 6-6; lost to Michigan 0-16; Minnesota 0-17; Chi- 
 cago 6-15. 
 
 Notre Dame beat De Pauw 56-0; tied Northwestern 0-0. 
 Northwestern beat Cincinnati 35-0; Illinois 12-11. Illinois 
 beat Knox 17-0; Purdue 24-0. Purdue beat Beloit 17-0. Iowa 
 beat Illinois 12-0; Drake 22-0; Washington (St. Louis) 12-2; 
 Missouri 6-0; Grinnell 17-0. Nebraska beat Iowa 17-6; Haskell 
 
110 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Indians 5-0; Denver 10-0; South Dakota 23-0; Colorado 31-0; 
 Knox 33-5; Kansas 6-0; Illinois 16-0. Washburn beat Kansas 
 5-0. Kansas beat Missouri 5-0. Washington beat Cincinnati 
 23-11; tied Missouri 0-0. Haskell Indians beat Kansas 12-6; 
 Missouri 12-0. Indiana beat Ohio 17-16. Ohio beat Oberlin 
 27-9; Kenyon 59-0. Kenyon beat Cinicinnati 18-0. Oberlin 
 beat Western Reserve 63-0. Purdue beat Oberlin 18-2. Drake 
 beat Grinnell 32-0. 
 
 PACIFIC COAST 
 
 California tied Leland Stanford 6-6. Washington beat Ore- 
 gon 6-5; Nevada 2-0; Idaho 5-0. 
 
 SOUTH 
 
 Vanderbilt beat Mississippi 35-0; Georgia 35-0; Sewanee 
 10-5. Clemson beat Georgia Technical 73-0; tied Cumberland 
 11-11. Alabama beat Tennessee 24-0. Tennessee beat Nash- 
 ville 10-0; Georgia Technical 10-0. Auburn beat Georgia Tech- 
 nical 10-0. 
 
 Seavanee beat Tennessee 17-0. Kentucky beat Miami 47-0. 
 Mississippi beat Louisiana 11-0. Tulane beat Richmond 18-5. 
 Texas beat A. & M. Texas 29-6. Georgia beat Georgia Technical 
 33-0; Tennessee 5-0; Auburn 22-13. South Carolina beat 
 Georgia 17-0; Georgia Technical 16-0; lost to North Carolina 
 0-17. Virginia beat Kentucky 6-0; St. John's 48-6; tied Car- 
 lisle 6-6. North Carolina beat South Carolina 17-0; Virginia 
 Military Institute 28-6; Clemson 11-6; Virginia 16-0; lost to 
 Virginia Polytechnical 0-21. Virginia Polytechnical beat 
 North Carolina 21-0. Georgetown beat North Carolina 33-0; 
 lost to Carlisle 6-28. 
 
 PREPARATORY SCHOOLS 
 
 Dean beat Groton 11-0. Worcester beat St. Mark's 17-0. 
 St. Paul beat Lawrenceville 6-0. Andover beat New Hamp- 
 shire 27-0; Williston 24-0; Tufts 15-15; Harvard Freshmen 
 43-0; Yale Freshmen 23-0; Lawrenceville 23-0; lost to Exeter 
 11-14. Exeter beat Bowdoin 18-0; Andover 14-11. 
 
FOOTBALL KECOKDS 
 
 111 
 
 RANKING OF PRINCIPAL COLLEGE ELEVENS FOR 1903 
 ( Caspar Whitney in Outing) 
 
 1 Princeton 
 
 12 Dickinson 
 
 23 Exete,r 
 
 2 Dartmouth 
 
 13 Penn State 
 
 24 Andover 
 
 3 Yale 
 
 14 Lafayette 
 
 25 Northwestern 
 
 4 Minnesota 
 
 15 Wisconsin 
 
 26 Iowa 
 
 5 Michigan 
 
 16 Annapolis 
 
 27 Notre Dame 
 
 6 Harvard 
 
 17 Haskell 
 
 28 Vanderbilt 
 
 7 Carlisle 
 
 18 Cornell 
 
 29 Missouri 
 
 8 West Point 
 
 19 Amherst 
 
 30 Texas 
 
 9 Columbia 
 
 20 Brown 
 
 31 Colorado 
 
 10 Pennsylvania 
 
 21 Wesleyan 
 
 
 11 Lehigh 
 
 22 Kansas 
 
 
 ALL- AMERICA ELEVEN FOR 1903 
 (Caspar Whitney in Outing) 
 
 Mitchell (Yale) full-back 
 
 Kafer (Princeton) and Heston (Michigan) half-backs 
 
 Witham (Dartmouth) quarter and captain 
 
 Rafferty (Yale) and Henry (Princeton) ends 
 
 Schacht (Minnesota) and Knowlton (Harvard) tackles 
 
 De Witt ( Princeton ) and Bloomer ( Yale ) guards 
 
 Hooper (Dartmouth) center 
 
 Substitutes 
 
 Prince (West Point) full-back 
 
 Farnsworth (West Point) and Vaughan (Dartmouth) 
 
 half-backs 
 
 Johnson (Carlisle) quarter 
 
 Shevlin (Yale) and Bowditch (Harvard) ends 
 
 Turner (Dartmouth) and Maddock (Michigan) tackles 
 
 A. Marshall (Harvard) and Gilman (Dartmouth) guards 
 
 Short (Princeton) center 
 
112 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 CHAMPIONSHIP GAMES FROM 1876 TO DATE 
 
 HARVARD — YALE 
 
 1876 — Yale, 1 goal; Harvard, 2 touch-downs. 
 
 1877 — No game. 
 
 1878— Yale, 1 goal; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1879 — Yale, 2 safeties; Harvard, 4 safeties. (Tie game.) 
 
 1880 — Yale, 1 goal, 1 touchdown; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1881 — Yale, safeties; Harvard, 4 safeties. 
 
 1882 — Yale, 1 goal, 3 touch-downs; Harvard, 2 safeties. 
 
 1883 — Yale, 4 goals; Harvard, 1 touch-down, 1 safety. 
 
 1884 — Yale, 6 goals, 4 touch-downs; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1885 — No game. 
 
 1886 — Yale, 5 goals; Harvard, 1 touch-down. 
 
 1887 — Yale, 3 goals, 1 safety; Harvard, 1 goal. 
 
 1888— No game. 
 
 1889— Yale, 1 goal; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1890 — Harvard, 2 goals; Yale, 1 goal. 
 
 1891 — Yale, 1 goal, 1 touch-down; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1892— Yale, 1 goal; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1893 — Yale, 1 goal; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1894— Yale, 12; Harvard, 4. 
 
 1895 — No game. 
 
 1896— No game. 
 
 1897— Yale, 0; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1898— Harvard, 17; Yale, 0. 
 
 1899— Yale, 0; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1900— Yale, 0; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1901— Harvard, 22; Yale, 0. 
 
 1902— Yale, 23; Harvard, 0. 
 
 1903— Yale, 16; Harvard, 0. 
 
 PRINCETON — YALE 
 
 1876 — Yale, 2 goals; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1877 — Yale, 2 touch-downs; Princeton, 0. 
 
FOOTBALL EECOEDS 113 
 
 1878 — Princeton, 1 goal; Yale, 0. 
 
 1879 — Yale, 2 safeties; Princeton, 5 safeties. 
 
 1880 — Yale, 5 safeties; Princeton, 11 safeties. 
 
 1881— Yale, 0; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1882 — Yale, 2 goals, 1 safety; Princeton, 1 goal, 1 safety. 
 
 1883 — Yale, 1 goal; Princeton, 0. 
 
 *1884 — Yale, 1 goal; Princeton, 1 touch-down. 
 
 1885 — Princeton, 1 goal from touch-doAvn; Yale, 1 goal from field. 
 
 *1886 — Yale, 1 touch-down; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1887 — Yale, 2 goals; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1888— Yale, 2 goals; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1889 — Princeton, 1 goal, 1 touch-down; Yale, 0. 
 
 1890— Yale, 32 points; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1891 — Yale, 2 goals, 2 touch-downs; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1892— Yale, 2 goals; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1893— Princeton, 1 goal; Yale, 0. 
 
 1894— Yale, 24; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1895— Yale, 20; Princeton, 10. 
 
 1896— Princeton, 24; Yale, 6. 
 
 1897— Yale, 6; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1898— Princeton, 6; Yale, 0. 
 
 1899— Princeton, 11; Yale, 10. 
 
 1900— Yale, 29; Princeton, 5. 
 
 1901— Yale, 12; Princeton, 0. 
 
 1902— Yale, 12; Princeton, .5. 
 
 1903— Princeton, 11; Yale, 6. 
 
 HARVARD — PENN STLVANIA 
 
 1883 — Harvard, 4; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 1884 — Pennsylvania, 4; Harvard, 0. 
 1885 — No game. 
 
 1886 — Harvard, 28; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 1887 — Harvard, 42; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 1888 — Harvard, 28; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 1889 — Harvard, 39; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 1893 — Harvard, 26; Pennsylvania, 4. 
 
 * Game unfinished. 
 
114 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 1894 — Pennsylvania, 18 ; Harvard, 4. 
 1895 — Pennsylvania, 17; Harvard, 14. 
 1896 — Pennsylvania, 8; Harvard, 6. 
 1897 — Pennsylvania, 15; Harvard, 6. 
 1898 — Harvard, 10; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 1899 — Harvard, 16; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 1900 — Harvard, 17 ; Pennsylvania, 5. 
 1901 — Harvard, 33; Pennsylvania, 6. 
 1902 — Harvard, 11; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 1903 — Harvard, 17; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 
 WEST POINT — ANNAPOLIS 
 
 1890— Annapolis, 24; West Point, 0. 
 1891— West Point, 32; Annapolis, 16. 
 1892— Annapolis, 12; West Point, 4. 
 1893— Annapolis, 6; West Point, 4. 
 1894 — 1898, inclusive, no game. 
 1899 — West Point, 17; Annapolis, 5. 
 1900— Annapolis, 11; West Point, 7. 
 1901 — West Point, 11; Annapolis 5. 
 1902 — West Point, 22; Annapolis, 5. 
 1903 — West Point, 40; Annapolis, 5. 
 
ADDITIONAL RECORDS 
 
FOOTBALL RULES 117 
 
 FOOTBALL RULES 
 
 (By permission of the American Sports Publishing Company, owner of the copyright) 
 
 EQUIPMENT, OFFICIALS, ETC. 
 Rule 1 
 
 (a) The game shall be played upon a rectangular field, 330 
 feet in length and 160 feet in width, enclosed by heavy white 
 lines marked in lime upon the ground. The lines at the two 
 ends shall be termed goal-lines. The side lines shall extend be- 
 yond their points of intersection with the goal-line. The goal 
 shall be placed in the middle of each goal-line, and shall consist 
 of two upright posts exceeding 20 feet in height and placed 18 
 feet 6 inches apart, with horizontal cross-bar 10 feet from the 
 ground. 
 
 (6) The game shall be played by two teams of eleven men 
 each. 
 
 (c) The officials of the game shall be a referee, an umpire and 
 a linesman. 
 
 NOTE — The duties of each official are stated in Rule 29. 
 
 (d) The football used shall be of leather, enclosing an in- 
 flated rubber bladder. The ball shall have the shape of a prolate 
 spheroid. 
 
 NOTE — It is desirable to have two stop-ivatches and two 
 whistles for the officials. It is also desirable to have the field 
 marked off xcith white lines every five yards, parallel to the 
 goal-line, for measuring the five yards to be gained in three 
 dozens, and to provide two light poles about six feet in length 
 and connected at the lower ends by a stout cord or chain exactly 
 five yards long. In addition to this the middle section of the 
 field, that is, the ground between the two twenty-five-yard lines, 
 should be marked off with white lines five yards apart, parallel 
 to side lines, in order to assist the officials in judging whether 
 
118 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 the first man who receives the ball crosses the scrimmage line a 
 sufficient distance from where the ball teas put in play. 
 
 In measuring, the fonoard point of the ball, not its center, 
 shall be taken as the determining point. 
 
 DEFINITION OF TERMS 
 
 Rule 2 
 methods of kicking the ball 
 
 (a) A Drop-kick is made by letting the ball drop from the 
 hands and kicking it the instant it rises from the ground. 
 
 (b) A Place-kick is made by kicking the ball after it has 
 been placed on the ground. 
 
 (c) A Punt is made by letting the ball drop from the hands 
 and kicking it before it touches the ground. 
 
 (d) A Kick-off is a place-kick from the center of the field of 
 play, and can not score a goal. (Rule 8.) 
 
 (e) A Kick-out is a drop-kick, place-kick or punt made by a 
 player of the side which has made a safety or a touch-back. 
 
 ( f ) A Free Kick is a term used to designate any kick when the 
 opponents are restrained by rule from advancing beyond a certain 
 point before the ball is put in play. 
 
 NOTE — Under a Free Kick are included Kick-Off (Rule 2, d) , 
 Kick-Out (Rule 2, e) , Punt-Out (Rules 5 and 25); Kick from 
 a Fair Catch (Rule 7), and Place-Kick for Goal after a touch- 
 down (Rules 4 (a) and 25). Any player of the side having the 
 Free Kick may put the ball in play. 
 
 Rule 3 
 out of bounds 
 
 (a) The ball is Out of Bounds when it touches the ground on 
 or outside the side line or side line extended, or when any part 
 of the player who holds the ball touches the ground on or out- 
 side the side line or side line extended. 
 
 (b) If the ball is kicked so that it goes out of bounds before 
 crossing the opponents' goal-line, it shall belong to the opponents 
 
FOOTBALL BITLES 119 
 
 at the point where it crossed the side line. If, however, it strikes 
 any player who is on side and then goes out of bounds, it shall 
 belong to the player who first obtains possession of it. 
 
 Rule 4 
 touch-down, touch-back and safety 
 
 (a) A Touch-down is made when the ball in possession of a 
 player is declared dead by the Referee, any part of it being on, 
 over or behind the opponents' goal-line. 
 
 ( b ) The point where the touch-down is marked, however, is not 
 where the ball is carried across the line but where the ball is 
 fairly held or called " down." 
 
 NOTE — If the ball is earned across the extension of the side 
 line it is at once dead, and the touch-down is marked at the point 
 where the side-line crosses the goal-line. 
 
 (c) A Touch-bach is made when the ball in possession of a 
 player guarding his own goal is declared dead by the referee, any 
 part of it being on, over or behind the goal-line, provided the 
 impetus which sent it to or across the line was given by an oppo- 
 nent. 
 
 (d) A Safety is made when the ball in the possession of a 
 player guarding his own goal is declared dead by the referee, any 
 part of it being on, over or behind the goal-line, provided the 
 impetus which caused it to pass from outside the goal to or 
 behind the goal-line was given by the side defending the goal. 
 Such impetus could come : ( 1 ) from a kick, pass, snap-back or 
 fumble; (2) from a kick which bounded back from an opponent; 
 ( 3 ) in case a player carrying the ball is forced back, provided the 
 ball was not declared dead by the referee before the line was 
 reached or crossed. 
 
 A safety is also made when a player of the side in possession 
 of the ball commits a foul which would give the ball to the 
 opponents behind the offender's goal-line; also when the ball, 
 kicked by a man behind his goal-line, crosses the side line ex- 
 tended behind the goal-line. 
 
120 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Rule 5 
 
 PUNT-OUT 
 
 A Punt-out is a punt made by a player of the side which has 
 made a touch-down to another of his own side for a fair catch. 
 (Rule 7.) 
 
 Rule 6 
 
 scrimmage 
 
 (a) A Scrimmage takes place when the holder of the ball 
 places it upon the ground and puts it in play by kicking it for- 
 ward or snapping it back. The scrimmage does not end until the 
 ball is again declared dead. 
 
 The ball is always put in play from a scrimmage, except in 
 cases where other specific provision is made by the rules. 
 
 NOTE — Snapping the ball means putting it back by means of 
 hand or foot ivith one quick or continuous motion from its posi- 
 tion on the ground. 
 
 (b) If, after the snapper-back has taken his position, he 
 should voluntarily move the ball as if to snap it, whether he 
 withholds it altogether or only momentarily, the ball is in play, 
 and the scrimmage has begun. 
 
 (c) When snapping the ball back, the player so doing must 
 be on side, the hand or foot used in snapping the ball excepted. 
 (Rule 10.) 
 
 Rule 7 
 
 fair catch 
 
 (a) A Fair Catch consists in catching the ball after it has 
 been kicked by one of the opponents and before it touches the 
 ground, or in similarly catching a punt-out by another of the 
 catcher's own side, provided the player, while making the catch, 
 makes a mark with his heel and takes not more than one step 
 thereafter. It is not a fair catch if the ball after the kick was 
 touched by another of his side before the catch. Opponents who 
 are off-side shall not interfere in any way with a player who has 
 
FOOTBALL EXILES 121 
 
 an opportunity to make a fair catch, nor shall he be thrown to 
 the ground after such catch is made unless he has advanced be- 
 yond his mark. 
 
 ( b ) If a side obtains a fair catch, the ball must be put in 
 play by a punt, drop-kick or place-kick, and the opponents can not 
 come within ten yards of the line on which the fair catch was 
 made; the ball must be kicked from some point directly behind 
 the spot where the catch was made, on a line parallel to the side 
 line. 
 
 Rule 8 
 
 A Goal is made by kicking the ball in any way, except by a 
 punt from the field of play over the cross-bar of the opponents' 
 goal, or as provided in rules for conversion of touch-down. If 
 the ball passes directly over one of the uprights it counts a goal. 
 
 NOTE — // the ball, after being kicked, strikes an opponent 
 and then passes over the cross-bar, it still counts a goal. 
 
 Rule 9 
 
 ciiakgisig 
 
 Charging is rushing forward to seize or block the ball or to 
 tackle a player. 
 
 Rule 10 
 
 (a) In a scrimmage no part of any player shall be ahead of 
 the ball when it is put in play. [Exception under Rule 6 (c).] 
 
 NOTE — Ahead of the ball means betieeen the opponents' goal 
 and a line parallel to the goal-line and passing through the point 
 of the ball nearest to the goal-line of the side not in possession. 
 
 (b) A player is put off-side if the ball in play has last been 
 touched by one of his own side behind him. No player, when off- 
 side, shall touch the ball except on a fumble or a muff, nor shall 
 he interrupt or obstruct an opponent with his hands or arms until 
 
122 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 again on-side. No player can, however, be called off-side behind 
 his own goal-line. 
 
 NOTE — If a player is ahead of the hall when it is kicked by 
 another of his side, he is off-side, and he shall not allow the ball 
 to touch him until again on-side. Should he break this rule, the 
 ball goes to opponents on the spot, except as specified in (d) of 
 this rule. 
 
 (c) A player being off-side is put on-side when the ball has 
 touched an opponent, or when one of his own side has run in 
 front of him, either with the ball, or having been the last player 
 to touch it when behind him. 
 
 The man who, standing back of his own line of scrimmage, 
 receives the ball from one of his own side and then kicks it be- 
 yond the line of scrimmage, may not put other men on-side by 
 running ahead of them, nor may he himself get the ball until 
 after it has touched a player of the opposing side. 
 
 EXPLANATION— The Rules Committee desires to state that 
 the reason for this prohibition is in order that there may be no 
 excuse whatever for running into the full-back after he has kicked 
 the ball. The above rule renders it impossible for him either to 
 put men on-side or himself get the ball, and this takes away all 
 excuse for roughness of this nature, and the Committee expects 
 officials to severely punish any such unnecessary roughness. 
 
 {d) If the ball, when not in possession of either side, is 
 touched when inside the opponents' ten-yard line by a player 
 who is off-side, it shall go as a touch-back to the defenders of 
 that goal. 
 
 Rule 11 
 
 ball is dead 
 The ball is Dead: 
 
 (a) Whenever the referee, umpire or linesman blows his whis- 
 tle or declares a down. 
 
 (b) When the referee has declared that a down, touch-down, 
 touch-back, safety or goal has been made. 
 
 (o) When a fair catch has been heeled. 
 
 {d) When it has been downed after going out of bounds. 
 
FOOTBALL RULES 123 
 
 (e) When the ball goes out of bounds after a kick before 
 touching a player who is on-side. 
 
 NOTE — (a) Should the ball strike an official it is not re- 
 garded as dead, out play continues exactly as if the ball had not 
 touched him. 
 
 (b) No play can be made when the ball is dead, except to put 
 it in play according to rule. 
 
 Rule 12 
 length of game 
 
 (a) The length of the game shall be seventy minutes, divided 
 into two halves of thirty-five minutes each, exclusive of time 
 taken out. There shall be ten minutes intermission between the 
 two halves. 
 
 NOTE — The game may be of shorter duration by mutual 
 agreement between the captains of the contesting teams. 
 
 ~\Yhenever the commencement of a game is so late that, in the 
 opinion of the referee, there is any likelihood of the game being 
 interfered ivith by darkness, he shall, before play begins, arbi- 
 trarily shorten the two halves to such length as shall insure two 
 equal halves being completed, and shall notify both captains of 
 the exact time thus set. Either side refusing to abide by the 
 opinion of the referee on this point shall forfeit the game. 
 
 ( b ) The game shall be decided by the final score at the end 
 of the two halves. 
 
 (c) Time shall not be called for the end of a half until the 
 ball is dead, and in case of a touch-down, the try-at-goal shall be 
 allowed. 
 
 (d) Time shall be taken out whenever the game is unnec- 
 essarily delayed or while the ball is being brought out for a 
 try-at-goal, kick-out or kick-off, or when play is for any reason 
 suspended by the referee, umpire or linesman. Time shall begin 
 again when the ball is actually put in play. 
 
 NOTE — Time is not to be taken out when the ball goes out 
 of bounds except in case of unreasonable delay in returning the 
 ball to play. 
 
124 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 (e) No delay arising from any cause whatsoever shall con- 
 tinue more than two minutes. Any delay thereafter shall be 
 penalized under Rule 27 (e) and Rule 28 (C). 
 
 Rule 13 
 
 (a) The captains of the opposing teams shall toss up a coin 
 before the beginning of a game, and the winner of the toss shall 
 have his choice of goal or kick-off. The ball shall be kicked 
 off at the beginning of each half, the kick-off at the beginning of 
 the second half being made by the side that did not first kick off 
 at the beginning of the game. The teams shall change goals after 
 every try-at-goal following a touch-down, and after every goal 
 from the field, and the side just scored upon shall have the option 
 of kicking off or of having their opponents kick off. At the 
 begining of the second half the teams shall take opposite goals 
 from those assumed at the beginning of the first half. 
 
 (6.) At kick-off, if the ball goes out of bounds before it is 
 touched by an opponent, it shall be brought back and kicked off 
 again. If it is kicked out of bounds a second time it shall go 
 as a kick-off to the opponents. If either side thus forfeits the 
 ball twice, it shall go to the opponents, who shall put it in play 
 by a scrimmage at the center of the field. 
 
 (c) At kick-off, if the ball is kicked across the goal-line and 
 is there declared dead when in the possession of one of the side 
 defending the goal, it is a touch-back. If the ball is not de- 
 clared dead, the side defending the goal may run with it or kick 
 it exactly as if it had not crossed the goal-line. If it is declared 
 dead thus in possession of the attacking side, it is a touch-down. 
 
 (d) At kick-off and on a punt or drop-kick from a fair catch, 
 the opposite side must stand at least ten yards in front of the 
 ball until it is kicked. On a kick-out, the opposite side can not 
 stand nearer the goal than the twenty-five-yard line, except on a 
 kick-out made after a drop-kick upon a first down inside the 
 twenty-five yard line, when the ten-yard line is the restraining 
 mark. [See Rule 23, exception.] 
 
FOOTBALL KULES 125 
 
 Rule 14 
 fkee kick 
 
 {a) The side which has a free kick must be behind the ball 
 when it is kicked. 
 
 NOTE — Otherwise the kick must he made again under condi- 
 tions laid down in Penalties — E. 
 
 (b) In the case of a kick-off, kick-out, kick from a fair catch 
 or kick after touching the ball in at side-line (Rule 22, a), the 
 ball must be kicked a distance of at least ten yards toward the 
 opponents' goal from the line restraining the player making the 
 kick, unless it is stopped by an opponent; otherwise the ball is 
 not in play. 
 
 Rule 15 
 lawful charging 
 
 (a) Charging is lawful, in case of a punt-out or kick-off, as 
 soon as the ball is kicked; and the opponents must not charge 
 until the ball is kicked. 
 
 ( b ) In case of any other free kick, charging is lawful : ( 1 ) 
 When the player of the side having the free kick advances beyond 
 his restraining line or mark with the ball in his possession; (2) 
 when he has allowed the ball to touch the ground by accident 
 or otherwise. 
 
 (c) If such lawful charging takes place, and if the side hav- 
 ing the free kick fails to kick the ball, then the opponents may 
 line up five yards ahead of the line which restrained them before 
 charging. In that case, the side having the free kick must kick 
 the ball from some point directly behind its mark, if the free kick 
 resulted from a fair catch, and in other cases from behind the 
 new restraining line. 
 
 EXCEPTION — If, in case of a try-at-goal, after a touch- 
 down, the ball is not kicked, after having been allowed to touch 
 the ground once, no second attempt shall be permitted, and the 
 ball shall be kicked off at the center of the field. {Rule 13.) 
 
126 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 Rule 16 
 no interference with snapper-back 
 
 (a) The snapper-back is entitled to full and undisturbed pos- 
 session of the ball. The opponents must neither interfere with 
 the snapper-back nor touch the ball until it is actually put in 
 play. 
 
 ( b ) In snapping the ball back, if the player so doing is off- 
 side, the ball must be snapped again, and if this occurs once 
 more on the same down, the opponents shall receive five yards, 
 the number of the down and the point to be gained remaining 
 unchanged. If the player is off-side for the third time on the 
 same scrimmage the ball shall go to the opponents. 
 
 (c) The man who snaps back and the man opposite him in 
 the scrimmage may not afterward touch the ball until it has 
 touched some player other than these two. If this rule is broken 
 the ball goes to the opponents on the spot of the foul. 
 
 (d) If the man who puts the ball in play in a scrimmage 
 kicks it forward, no player of his side can touch it until it has 
 gone ten yards into the opponents' territory, unless it be touched 
 by an opponent. If this rule is broken the ball goes to the oppo- 
 nents on the spot of the foul. 
 
 (e) The man who first receives the ball when it is snapped 
 back shall not (save as provided in Rule 18, c) carry the ball 
 forward beyond the line of scrimmage unless he has regained it 
 after it has been passed to and has touched another player. 
 
 Rule 17 
 
 use of hands and arms 
 
 (a) Before the ball is put in play no player shall lay his 
 hands upon, or, by the use of his hands or arms, interfere with 
 an opponent in such a way as to delay putting the ball in play. 
 Any such interference shall be regarded as delay of game. (Rule 
 28, C.) 
 
 (6) After the ball is put in play, the players of the side 
 that has possession of the ball may obstruct the opponents with 
 
FOOTBALL KULES 127 
 
 the body only, except the player running with the ball, who may 
 use his hands and arms. 
 
 (c) The players of the side not having the ball may use their 
 hands and arms, but only to get their opponents out of the way 
 in order to reach the ball or stop the player carrying it. 
 
 Rule 18 
 
 movement allowed before ball is put in play 
 
 (a) Before the ball is put in play in a scrimmage, if any 
 player of the side which has the ball takes more than one step 
 in any direction, he must come to a full stop before the ball is 
 put in play. 
 
 EXCEPTION — One man of the side having the ball may be 
 in motion toward his goal without coming to a stop before the 
 ball is put in play. 
 
 When the ball is put in play in a scrimmage at any point of 
 the central section of the field, that is, the portion bounded by 
 the two twenty-five-yard lines and the two side lines — 
 
 (o) At least seven players of the side having the ball must 
 be on the line of scrimmage. 
 
 (c) The player who first receives the ball when the scrim- 
 mage is within the above-mentioned territory, may carry it for- 
 ward beyond the line of scrimmage, provided in so doing he 
 crosses such line at least five yards from the point where the 
 snapper-back put the ball in play. 
 
 When the ball is put in play by a scrimmage at any point on 
 or between one of these twenty-five-yard lines and the nearest 
 goal-line — 
 
 (d) At least five players of the side having the ball must 
 be on the line of scrimmage. 
 
 (e) If five players, not including the quarter-back, are behind 
 the line of scrimmage, they must occupy one of the three follow- 
 ing positions, viz. : ( 1 ) All five of such players may be inside 
 the positions occupied by the players at the ends of the line of 
 scrimmage, in which case two of these players must be at least 
 five yards back of this line; or (2) if one of the said five play- 
 
128 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 ers be outside of the position occupied by the player at the end 
 of said line, then only one other of these five players must be at 
 least five yards back of this line ; but ( 3 ) all five of these players 
 may be nearer than five yards to the line of scrimmage, provided 
 two of them be outside the positions occupied by the players at 
 the ends of said line. In this rule " outside " means both feet 
 outside the outside foot of the player at the end of the line. 
 
 Rule 19 
 thbowing, passing ob batting the ball 
 
 A player may throw, pass or bat the ball in any direction 
 except toward his opponents' goal. 
 
 Rule 20 
 
 A DOWN 
 
 (a) If a player having the ball is tackled, and the movement 
 of the ball stopped, or if the player cries " down," the referee 
 shall blow his whistle, and the side holding the ball shall put it 
 down for a scrimmage. 
 
 (b) As soon as a runner attempting to go through is tackled 
 and goes down, being held by an opponent, or whenever a runner 
 having the ball in his possession cries " down," or if he goes out 
 of bounds, the referee shall blow his whistle and the ball shall be 
 considered down at that spot. 
 
 (c) There shall be no piling up on the player after the ref- 
 eree has declared the ball dead. 
 
 Rule 21 
 necessaby gain ob loss in thbee downs 
 
 (a) If, in three consecutive downs (unless the ball crosses 
 the goal-line ) , a team has neither advanced the ball five yards, 
 nor taken it back twenty yards, it shall go to the opponents on 
 the spot of the fourth down. 
 
 NOTE — " Consecutive " means without going out of possession 
 of the side holding it, except that — (1) having advanced the ball 
 beyond the point necessary for the first down or the ball having 
 
FOOTBALL KULES 129 
 
 actually passed into possession of the other side and then been 
 fumbled and lost by them before having been declared dead by 
 the referee; or, (2) by having kicked the ball they have given 
 their opponents fair and equal chance of gaining possession of it. 
 No kick, however, provided it is not stopped by an opponent, is 
 regarded as giving the opponents fair and equal chance of posses- 
 sion unless the ball goes beyond the line of scrimmage. 
 
 EXCEPTION — A team may not retain possession of the ball 
 by taking it back twenty yards a second time unless the ball in 
 the meantime has been in the possession of the opponents. 
 
 (b) When a distance penalty is given, the ensuing down shall 
 be counted the first down, unless this should result to the advan- 
 tage of the offending side, when the down and the point, or in 
 some cases (Penalties K and L) the distance to be gained for 
 first down, shall remain the same. 
 
 Rule 22 
 putting ball in play from out of bounds 
 
 If the ball goes out of bounds, whether it bounds back or not, 
 a player of the side which secures it must bring" it to the spot 
 where the line was crossed, and there either: 
 
 (a) Touch it in with both hands at right angles to the side 
 line and then kick it at least ten yards toward his opponents' 
 goal; — [Neither side need be on-side when the ball is thus put 
 in play.] — or 
 
 (6) Walk out with it at right angles to the side line, any dis- 
 tance not less than five nor more than fifteen yards, and . there 
 put it down for a scrimmage, first declaring how far he intends 
 walking. 
 
 Rule 23 
 
 kick-out after safety ob touch-back 
 
 A side which has made a touch-back or a safety must kick 
 out, from not more than twenty-five yards outside the kicker's 
 goal. If the ball goes out of bounds before striking a player, it 
 must be kicked out again, and if this occurs twice in successsion, 
 
130 AMERICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 it shall be given to the opponents as out of bounds on the 
 twenty-five-yard line on the side where it went out. At kick-out 
 the opponents must be on the tweny-five-yard line or nearer their 
 own goal, and the kicker's side must be behind the ball when it is 
 kicked. Should a second touch-back occur before four downs 
 have been played, the side defending the goal may have the 
 choice of a down at the twenty-five-yard line, or a kick-out. 
 
 EXCEPTION — Whenever a side has tried a drop-kick at the 
 goal upon a first down inside the twenty-five-yard line and the 
 result has been a touch-back, the ten-yard instead of the twenty- 
 five-yard line shall determine the position of the opponents, and 
 the kicker's side must be behind the ball when it is kicked. 
 
 Rule 24 
 try-at-goal after touch-down 
 
 {a) A side which has made a touch-down must try-at-goal 
 by a place-kick direct or by a place-kick preceded by a punt-out 
 if they so desire. 
 
 (6) After the try-at-goal, whether the goal be made or missed, 
 the ball shall be kicked off at the center of the field, as provided in 
 Rule 13. 
 
 Rule 25 
 try-at-goal by place-kick 
 
 (a) If the try be by a place-kick, a player on the side which 
 has made the touch-down shall hold the ball for another of his 
 side to kick at some point outside the goal on a line parallel to 
 the side line passing through the point where the touch-down was 
 declared. The opponents must remain behind their goal-line until 
 the ball has been placed upon the ground. The referee shall sig- 
 nal with his hand when the ball is placed on the ground. 
 
 (b) If the try-at-goal is to be preceded by a punt-out, the 
 punter shall kick the ball from the point at which the line par- 
 allel to the side line, and passing through the spot of the touch- 
 down, intersects the goal-line. The players of his side must stand 
 in the field of play not less than five yards from the goal-line. 
 
FOOTBALL KTTLES 131 
 
 The opponents may line up anywhere on the goal-line except 
 within the space of ten feet on each side of the punter's mark, 
 but they can not interfere with the punter. If a fair catch be 
 made from a punt-out, the mark shall serve to determine the 
 positions as the mark of any fair catch, and the try-at-goal shall 
 then be made by a place-kick from this spot, or any point directly 
 behind it. If a fair catch be not made on the first attempt the 
 ball shall go as a kick-off at the center of the field to the defend- 
 ers of the goal. 
 
 NOTE — Since the defending team is on-side, they may, of 
 course, charge as soon as the tall is kicked and try to get the 
 ball or interfere u'ith the catch. 
 
 (c) The holder of the ball and no other player in any place- 
 kick may be off-side or out of bounds without vitiating the kick. 
 
 Rule 26 
 
 SCORING 
 
 The following shall be the values of plays in scoring: Goal 
 obtained by touch-down, 6 points; goal from field kick, 5 points; 
 touch-down failing goal, 5 points; safety by opponents, 2 points. 
 
 NOTE — The 6 points is inclusive of the 5 points for touch- 
 down; that is, kicking the goal adds but 1 point. 
 
 Rule 27 
 no metallic substances may be woen 
 
 (a) No one having projecting nails or iron plates on his shoes 
 or any projecting metallic or hard substance on his person shall 
 be allowed to play in a match. If head protectors are worn, no 
 sole leather, papier mache, or other hard or unyielding material 
 shall be used in their construction, and all other devices for pro- 
 tectors must be so arranged and padded as, in the judgment of 
 the umpire, to be without danger to other players. Leather cleats 
 upon the shoes shall be allowed as heretofore. 
 
132 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 SUBSTITUTES 
 
 (b) A player may be substituted, for another at any time at 
 the discretion of the captain of his team. 
 
 NO UNNECESSARY ROUGHNESS NOR DELAY 
 
 (c) There shall be no unnecessary roughness, throttling, hack- 
 ing or striking with the closed fist. 
 
 (d) A player who has been replaced by a substitute can not 
 return to further participation in the game. 
 
 (e) There shall be no unnecessary delay of the game by either 
 team. 
 
 NO COACHING 
 
 (/) There shall be no coaching, either by substitutes or by 
 any other persons not participating in the game. No one except 
 the twenty-two players shall, under any circumstances, come upon 
 the field of play, save only in case of an accident to a player, and 
 then but one official representative, and he previously designated 
 to the umpire, shall have this right. Only five men shall be 
 allowed to walk up and down on each side of the field. The rest, 
 including substitutes, water-carriers, and all who are admitted 
 within the enclosure, must be seated throughout the game. None 
 of these shall come upon the field of play without permission of 
 the umpire. Breach of any part of this rule shall constitute a 
 foul, and be punished by a loss of five yards to the side whose 
 man infringes, the number of the down and the distance to be 
 gained for first down remaining unchanged. 
 
 NO TRIPPING 
 
 (g) There shall be no tripping. 
 
FOOTBALL KULES 133 
 
 PENALTIES 
 Rule 28 
 
 A foul is any violation of a rule. The penalties for fouls shall 
 be as follows: 
 
 TRIPPING 
 
 A. (1) For tripping an opponent (Rule 27, g) by either side 
 the penalty shall be the loss of twenty yards. 
 
 HOLDING, USE OF HANDS AND AEMS, OFF-SIDE 
 
 (2) For holding an opponent who has not the ball (Rule 17, 
 c) , or for unlawful use of hands or arms (Rule 17, 6 and c), for 
 violation of the rules governing off-side play (Rule 10), for vio- 
 lation of Rules 16, e, and 18, c, except where special provision 
 is made elsewhere, the penalty shall be the loss of five yards if 
 the side not in possession of the ball was the offender; if the 
 offending side was in possession of the ball it shall be the loss 
 of twenty yards, the number of the down and the point to be 
 gained for first down remaining unchanged. 
 
 EXCEPTION — An off-side play by the side in possession of 
 the ball shall be penalized by loss of ten yards, the number of 
 the down and the point to which the ball must be advanced for 
 first doivn remaining unchanged. (See also special ruling, 16, b.) 
 
 The penalties above named shall be given from the spot where 
 the foul was committed. 
 
 FORWARD PASS AND BATTED BALL 
 
 B. If the ball is thrown, passed or batted toward the oppo- 
 nents' goal, the opponents shall receive five yards, that is, the 
 ball shall be put in play at a point five yards back of the spot 
 where the man was when he made the forward pass. The point 
 for his side then to reach will be ten yards from the spot where 
 the ball is then put in play by a scrimmage, the number of the 
 down remaining unaffected. 
 
134 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 FOUL WHEN BALL IS IN POSSESSION OF NEITHER SIDE 
 
 NOTE — In case neither side was in possession of the ball 
 when any of the fouls were committed — for example, if the ball 
 was in the air from a kick or was free upon the ground after a 
 fumble, kick or pass — it shall go to the offended side at the spot 
 where the foul occurred. In case of tripping, the distance shall 
 be given in addition. 
 
 INTERFERENCE WITH SNAPPER-BACK AND UNNECESSARY DELAY 
 
 C. In the case of interference of any kind with putting the 
 ball in play (Rules 16, a, and 17, a), or unnecessary delay of the 
 game (Rule 27, e) , the offended side shall be advanced five yards. 
 
 PILING UP 
 
 D. ( 1 ) In case of piling up on a player after the referee has 
 declared the ball dead (Rule 20, c), the offended side shall re- 
 ceive fifteen yards. 
 
 INTERFERENCE WITH FAIR CATCH 
 
 (2) If a player who has an opportunity of making a fair catch 
 (Rule 7, a) is unlawfully obstructed, the offended side shall re- 
 ceive fifteen yards and the choice of putting the ball in play by a 
 free kick or by a scrimmage. 
 
 CATCHER THROWN 
 
 (3) If a player who has heeled a fair catch (Rule 7, a), is 
 thrown to the ground, unless he has advanced beyond his mark, 
 his side shall receive fifteen yards and be obliged to take a free 
 kick. 
 
 ADVANCING BEYOND THE MARK ON FREE KICK 
 
 E. (1) In any case of free kick (Rule 2, f), if the kicker 
 advances beyond his mark, before kicking the ball (Rules 7, a, 
 15, b, and 25, 6), no matter whether he then kicks or not, the 
 opponents shall be allowed to line up five yards nearer the 
 
FOOTBALL EULES 135 
 
 kicker's mark, and the kick shall then be made from some point 
 back of the first mark, and at the same distance from the side 
 line. 
 
 BALL TOUCHING THE GROUND 
 
 This shall also apply when the side having a free kick allows 
 the ball to touch the ground (Rule 15, 6, and 25, b), and then 
 fails to kick it (kick-off and try-at-goal after touch-down ex- 
 cepted). The same ruling shall be giA'en in case any player of the 
 side making a free kick is ahead of the ball when it is kicked 
 (Rule 14, a). 
 
 CHARGING BEFORE BALL IS PUT IN PLAY 
 
 (2) In the case of a free kick, if the opponents charge (Rule 
 9) before the ball is put in play (Rule 15, a), they shall be put 
 back five yards for every such offense and the ball shall be put in 
 play again by a kick from a point which may be five yards nearer 
 the opponents' goal. 
 
 STARTING BEFORE BALL IS PUT IN PLAY 
 
 F. In the case of unlawful starting before the ball has been 
 put in play for a scrimmage (Rule 18, a), provided there is no 
 infraction of Rule 10, the side thus offending shall lose five yards, 
 the number of the down and the point to be gained remaining 
 unchanged. 
 
 The same ruling shall be made in cases of infraction of Rule 
 18, b d, and e. 
 
 REFUSING TO PLAY 
 O. If either side refuses to play ivithin tivo minutes after hav- 
 ing been ordered to do so by the referee, it shall forfeit the 
 game. This shall also apply to refusing to begin a game when 
 ordered to do so by the referee. (Paile 12, e. ) 
 
 DISTANCE PENALTY NEAR GOAL-LINE 
 
 H. Whenever the rules provide for a distance penalty, if the 
 distance prescribed would carry the ball nearer to the goal-line 
 10 
 
136 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 than the five-yard line, the ball shall be down on the five-yard 
 line. If, hoivever, the foul is committed inside the ten-yard line, 
 half the distance to the goal shall be given. 
 
 EEPEATED FOULS NEAR GOAL-LINE 
 
 7. If a team on the defense commits fouls when so near its 
 own goal that these fouls are punishable only by the halving of 
 the distance to the line (Rule 28, H), the object being, in the 
 opinion of the referee, to delay the game, the offending side shall 
 be regarded as refusing to allow the game to proceed. The ref- 
 eree shall, in such case, warn the offending side once, and if the 
 offense is repeated he shall declare the game forfeited to the 
 opponents. 
 
 STRIKING AND UNNECESSARY ROUGHNESS 
 
 J. If a player is guilty of unnecessary roughness, throttling, 
 hacking or striking tcith closed fist (Rule 27, c) , he shall be at 
 once disqualified. 
 
 K. In case the game is interfered with by some act palpably 
 unsportsmanlike and not elsewhere provided for in these rules, 
 the umpire shall have the power to award ten yards to the 
 offended side, the number of the down and the point to be gained 
 for first down remaining unchanged. 
 
 L. For infringement of any part of Rule 27, f, the penalty 
 shall be a loss of five yards by the side offending, the number of 
 the down and the point to be gained remaining unchanged. 
 
 RIGHT TO DECLINE PENALTY 
 
 NOTE — Under both K and L for " point " read " distance " 
 in case offended side is in possession of ball. Whenever a foul is 
 committed which, in the opinion of the umpire, did not affect the 
 play, the offended side may decline the penalty. In case of a 
 run being made from this play, not more than twenty-five yards 
 from the spot where the foul loas committed shall be allowed. 
 
DUTIES OF OFFICIALS 137 
 
 DUTIES OF OFFICIALS 
 
 I. — The Referee 
 Rule 29 
 
 The Referee is responsible for the enforcement of Rules 1, 2, 
 3, 4, 5, G (a and i ) ; 7 ( except as relates to interference, throwing 
 catcher, and positions of players) ; 8, 11, 12, 13 (except d) ; 14, 
 b; 16, a and e; 18, c; 19, 20 (a and 6) ; 21, 22, 23 (except as 
 relates to positions of players) ; 24, 25 (except as relates to posi- 
 tions of players and interference) ; 26, 27, c. 
 
 In making his decisions the Referee must recognize and allow 
 precedence to any penalty inflicted by the umpire for a foul. 
 
 The Referee's decisions are final upon all points not specified 
 in the duties of the Umpire. 
 
 The Referee shall see that the ball is properly put in play, 
 and he is judge of its position and progress. 
 
 He is judge of forward passes, of interference with the snap- 
 back, and of the advance of the ball by the player who first re- 
 ceives it from the snapper-back when the ball is put in play from 
 a scrimmage (Rule 16, a and e), and offenses under Rule 18, c. 
 
 At the beginning of a game and in every case after time has 
 been taken out, he shall ascertain from each captain that his 
 team is ready, before ordering play to begin. 
 
 He is sole authority for the score of the game and is judge 
 of forfeiture of the game under the rules. 
 
 The Referee may appeal to both the Umpire and Linesman 
 for testimony upon all points Avithin his jurisdiction. 
 
 The Referee must volunteer testimony to the Umpire concern- 
 ing infringement of Rule 27 (f). 
 
 II. — The Umpire 
 
 The Umpire is responsible for the enforcement of all rules 
 whose infringement is punishable by a distance penalty or by 
 
138 AMEKICAN FOOTBALL 
 
 the surrender of the ball by one team to the opponents, except 
 13, o; 16, a and e; 18, c; 19 and 23, viz.: Rules 6, c; 9, 10, 13, 
 d; 14, a; 15, 16 (except a and e) ; 17, 18 (except c), 20, c; 27. 
 
 The Umpire is judge of the conduct of the players, and his 
 decision is final regarding such fouls as are not specifically placed 
 within the jurisdiction of the Referee. 
 
 The Umpire is judge of charging, and of the positions of play- 
 ers whenever the ball is put in play. 
 
 He may appeal to both the Referee and Linesman for testi- 
 mony in cases of fouls seen by them, and it shall be their duty 
 to volunteer testimony concerning violations of Rule 27 (c 
 and f). 
 
 NOTE — Captains and players, however, may not appeal to the 
 Referee or Linesman for their testimony upon the points just men- 
 tioned. 
 
 The Umpire shall not blow his whistle nor declare the ball 
 dead, nor call time, except to grant a penalty for a foul com- 
 mitted. 
 
 Whenever the Umpire notices or is informed by the Referee or 
 Linesman that a substitute or any other person not participating 
 in the game is coaching, he shall immediately exclude the offender 
 for the remainder of the game from the neighborhood of the 
 field of play ; i. e., send the offender behind the ropes or fence sur- 
 rounding the field of play. 
 
 Furthermore, he shall exact the penalty as provided in Rule 
 28 (L). 
 
 NOTE — The Referee and Umpire should use whistles to indi- 
 cate cessation of play on doivns or fouls. 
 
 III. — The Linesman 
 
 The Linesman shall, under the supervision of the Referee, 
 mark the distances gained or lost in the progress of the play. 
 
 He shall remain on the side lines and be provided with two 
 assistants, who shall remain outside the field of play and who 
 shall use, in measuring distance, the rope or chain mentioned in 
 Note under Rule 1 (d). 
 
DUTIES OF OFFICIALS 139 
 
 The Linesman shall, under the direction of the Referee, also 
 keep the time, and he should use a stop-watch in so doing. He 
 should start his watch not when the Referee blows his whistle, 
 but when the ball is put in play. 
 
 The Linesman must penalize a side for tripping, unnecessary 
 roughness to a back after a kick, and for off-side play in the line. 
 It should be his special duty to be in position to see that the 
 players are on-side when the ball is put in play in a scrimmage. 
 In case the Linesman gives a decision against one side and the 
 Umpire against the other on the same play, the penalties being 
 other than disqualification, the ball shall be brought back to the 
 point where it was put in play and played over again, the num- 
 ber of the down and the point to be gained for first down re- 
 maining the same. In case of disqualification by either official, 
 at any time, the disqualification shall stand. 
 
 The Linesman shall notify the captains of the time remaining 
 for play, not more than ten nor less than five minutes before the 
 end of each half. 
 
BASEBALL 
 
 Edited by Edward N. Eobinson, Brown, '96 
 
CHAPTEE I 
 
 THE GAME AND HOW IT IS PLAYED 
 
 Baseball has fairly earned its title of National 
 Game, not because it is of American inception, but be- 
 cause it is our most popular field sport and is thorough- 
 ly characteristic of the American people. So far as 
 origin is concerned, baseball is much less of an Amer- 
 ican game than is lacrosse, for while it may be said to 
 have been born in this country, it is of English parent- 
 age. About 1820 a somewhat modified version of the 
 old English game of rounders was played on the New 
 England commons, and twenty years later the game 
 had spread and had become " town ball." In 1833 
 the first regularly organized ball club was formed in 
 Philadelphia under the sonorous title of The Olympic 
 Town Ball Club of Philadelphia. About 1850 the 
 game gained vogue in New York. As played by the 
 Knickerbocker Club, it was known as the " New York 
 game," to distinguish it from the " Massachusetts 
 game " of New England. In 1858 the National Asso- 
 ciation of Baseball Players came into being and the 
 first set of playing rules was drawn up and published. 
 
 Such, briefly, was the beginning of the game of base- 
 
 143 
 
144 
 
 BASEBALL 
 
 ball. Since 1858 its growth, has been fast and furious, 
 and to-day, despite its English parentage, it is Amer- 
 ican from first to last. 
 
 Diagkam G. — The baseball field. For explanation see Rules 
 1 to 13. 
 
 The diamond, as the baseball field or, more proper- 
 ly, the " infield " portion of it, is called, is formed by 
 four bases, respectively known as first base, second base, 
 
THE GAME AND HOW IT IS PLAYED 145 
 
 third base and home base or home plate, which are 
 situated 90 feet from each other and form a perfect 
 square or, viewed from one of the bases, a diamond. 
 Diagram G shows the arrangement of the field. The 
 implements are a ball made of a rubber core wound 
 with yarn and covered with horsehide and a bat of 
 some hard wood well seasoned. 
 
 The playeks, nine in number, are as follows: 
 pitcher, catcher, first-baseman, second-baseman, third- 
 baseman, short-sto}}, right-fielder, center-fielder, and 
 left-fielder. Technically the pitcher and catcher are 
 known as the battery, the three fielders as the outfield 
 and the balance of the players as the infield. The game 
 is contested by two teams, which take turns " at bat." 
 The team not " at bat " is " in the field." 
 
 The purpose of the game is to determine which 
 side can make the larger number of runs. Each player 
 in turn of the side " at bat " tries to bat the ball in 
 such a way that it can not be " fielded " before the bat- 
 ter has reached first, second, third or home base. The 
 batsman becomes a runner after hitting the ball and 
 may be " put out " by any of the opposing team if 
 tagged with the ball when not touching a base, by 
 having the ball he has hit caught on the fly, by having 
 the ball played into the hands of first-baseman or sub- 
 sequent baseman before he reaches their bases and by 
 failure to observe various rules governing his conduct 
 as a base-runner. In running the bases the runner goes 
 from right to left, taking first base first and the others 
 
146 BASEBALL 
 
 in order. When a runner successfully makes the cir- 
 cuit of all the bases he scores a run. At the end of 
 the game, the team having the most runs to its credit 
 is the winner. 
 
 Eine innings constitute a game unless the um- 
 pire stops the play for some reason before the ninth 
 inning is reached or unless at the end of the ninth 
 inning the scores of the opposing teams are equal. In 
 the former case if five innings have been contested 
 before play is stopped it is a game and the side having 
 the larger number of runs to its credit at the termina- 
 tion of play is the winner; if the play is stopped before 
 five innings have been contested it is considered that 
 no game has been played. In the second case addi- 
 tional innings are played until one team has scored 
 more runs than the other or until darkness necessitates 
 the calling of the game. 
 
 An inning lasts until three players of each side have 
 been put out, the teams each being at bat for half an 
 inning and in the field for half an inning. 
 
 When a game begins one team goes into the field 
 and the other remains at bat. The home team has the 
 choice of taking the field or going to bat first. The 
 players of the team having the first inning go to bat in 
 turn, this " batting order " being observed throughout 
 the game. The batsman stands at the " plate " or home 
 base, and tries to hit the ball when delivered by the 
 pitcher. A ball which passes over any part of the plate 
 at a height between the batsman's knees and shoulders 
 
THE GAME AND HOW IT IS PLAYED 147 
 
 is, whether struck at or not, a " strike," as is any ball 
 which the batsman strikes at and does not hit. 
 
 The batsman becomes a base-runner if he hits a 
 fair ball or at the third strike, and is out if the third 
 strike is caught by the catcher before it touches the 
 ground, if he is tagged with the ball by an opponent 
 before he reaches first base or if the ball is thrown 
 to first-baseman and is caught by him before the run- 
 ner reaches that base. A ball which is not a strike is 
 a " ball " unless it touches the person of the batsman. 
 A ball which hits the batsman is called a " dead ball," 
 and the batsman is allowed to take first base, provided 
 he does not offer at the ball. If he hits at the ball on 
 his third strike and it touches his person he is out. A 
 hit ball * which falls outside of the " foul lines," i. e., 
 the lines from home base to first base and from home 
 base to third base or a continuation of them, is a " foul," 
 and unless caught before it touches the ground by a 
 player of the opposing team it counts neither for nor 
 against the batsman. If the batsman is struck by a 
 pitched ball he is required to " take his base," that is, 
 advance to first base. If the pitcher delivers four balls 
 to a batsman the batsman is required to take his base 
 in the same way. The batsman is out when a fair ball 
 or a foul ball is caught on the fly by an opponent, when 
 third strike is caught by the catcher, and when, having 
 
 * What is known as the "foul-strike rule " was in force in the Na- 
 tional, American and most professional leagues last season. This 
 rule provides that with not more than one strike called on the batsman 
 a foul hit ball, unless caught on the fly, shall count as a strike. 
 
148 BASEBALL 
 
 made a fair hit or had three strikes called on him, he 
 is tagged out or caught out before reaching first base. 
 
 A hit which allows the runner to reach first base 
 in safety is called a " base-hit " or a " single," one 
 which allows him to reach second base a " two-base- 
 hit " or " two-bagger," one which gives him third base 
 a " three-base-hit " or " three-bagger " and one which 
 allows him to reach home a " home run." 
 
 Having beached first base, the runner's object 
 is to advance to second, and this he may do at any 
 time when the game is in progress save when a foul 
 ball has been struck or when a fair ball has been caught 
 on the fly. If a foul fly or a fair ball is caught he 
 must hold his base, or, if he has started to run, must 
 return to his base before he goes on again. In case of a 
 fair ball, if an opponent having the ball touches the base 
 he has left before he returns to it he is put out. 
 
 If a player occupies first base when the batsman 
 makes a fair hit or in any other way becomes a base- 
 runner such player is " forced to second " — that is, he 
 must vacate first base and go to second. He is out if 
 tagged with the ball in the hand of an opponent or if 
 an opponent having the ball touches second base ahead 
 of him. In the same way a player on second is forced 
 to third and a player on third is forced to the home 
 plate. 
 
 The umpire is the only official. He is judge of all 
 plays and his decisions are final. 
 
CHAPTER II 
 
 FOR THE CAPTAIN 
 
 Fall training is valuable. The captain who can 
 get his players together — more especially the new can- 
 didates — for a month of out-of-door work in Septem- 
 ber and October is fortunate. Much can be taught 
 then that otherwise would have to be left to the spring, 
 and the spring, especially in northern latitudes, is none 
 too long for advanced instruction alone. With much 
 of the rudimentary work learned in the fall, the team 
 is by May likely to be a good month ahead of the team 
 whose instruction did not begin until February or 
 March. Fall work should be confined principally to 
 individual playing. Candidates for the positions should 
 be taught to catch, throw, bat, and run the bases. In- 
 struction in the finer points and subtleties of the game 
 as well as the development of team-play may well be 
 left until spring. A four-inning game should usually 
 conclude the day's practise during the fall. Ten min- 
 utes of light calisthenics should precede the work. 
 Strict training is not necessary until spring. 
 
 The captain and manager should get their heads 
 together at this time of year and arrange the schedule 
 of games, secure the services of a head coach, if this 
 
 149 
 
150 BASEBALL 
 
 has not already been done, and, in short, perfect all de- 
 tails possible. 
 
 Spuing training should be started not later than 
 the second week in February. In the North the 
 weather at that time will not permit of outdoor work, 
 but much excellent training may be obtained in the 
 gymnasium. Running on the board track may begin 
 the afternoon's work and be followed by limbering-up 
 exercises with and without the dumb-bells, giving spe- 
 cial attention to the muscles of the arms, legs, and back. 
 
 Candidates foe pitcher should be given daily work 
 in the cage or, if there is no cage, at one side of the 
 hall. Exercises with light dumb-bells should precede 
 the use of the ball. Let the candidates hold the bells 
 at arm's length in front and twist them rapidly to lim- 
 ber the wrists. Then let them shoot the bells away 
 from the body with good hard thrusts, first in front, 
 then to the sides, and then overhead. At the begin- 
 ning of the season care must be taken not to put too 
 much power into the pitching. Before the muscles 
 are stretched it is absurdly easy to sustain a strain 
 serious enough to keep one out of the game far into 
 the spring. 
 
 If the cage is large enough to permit of batting, 
 so much the better. Practise in this feature can not 
 be started too early. Fielders, too, may obtain good 
 practise at stopping grounders in the cage; in short 
 there is no end to the uses to which a good-sized cage 
 may be put in the preparation of a team. 
 
FOR THE CAPTAIN 151 
 
 During this indoor work the captain — and the 
 coach if he is on hand — should keep his eyes wide 
 open. Men who are out of the question as varsity 
 material should be dropped from the squad at once 
 so that the weeding-out process will be simplified when 
 the candidates are out of doors and, by reason of being 
 more scattered, are harder to watch. 
 
 A week or two of outdoor work before the Easter 
 vacation interrupts matters is about all that can be 
 hoped for in the North, and during that fortnight it is 
 perhaps well to confine work on the diamond principally 
 to batting and fielding. When the men once more 
 present themselves, spring training begins in earnest. 
 
 The training table should now be started and 
 
 regularity in meals, sleep and exercise insisted upon. 
 
 As when training for football or track athletics, it is 
 
 less the particular kind of food which is provided as the 
 
 way it is cooked and eaten that counts. Secure good, 
 
 plain food for your men and see that it is cooked well 
 
 and served appetizingly. And insist on variety; there's 
 
 nothing so discouraging to a man with symptoms of 
 
 overtraining than a recurrence of the same old viands 
 
 at every meal. Keep fat meats and heavy pastry of! 
 
 the table. Don't allow any man to " bolt " his food. 
 
 The dinner should come at night. Care should be taken 
 
 that the men do not overeat, especially before practise 
 
 or a game, as a load of undigested food will make the 
 
 men sleepy and lazy. 
 
 A baseball player requires plenty of sleep; as a 
 11 
 
152 BASEBALL 
 
 general rule a full eight hours and a half is none too 
 much. Players in training should observe regular 
 hours. 
 
 Don't allow your men to appear on the field for 
 any game looking less than spiek and span. Old faded 
 shirts and dirty trousers may do for practise — though 
 there are two opinions as to that — but they are not 
 allowable in a contest. The time when a disreputable 
 appearance was popularly believed to be the mark of 
 a star player has, fortunately, passed. Nowadays it is 
 good form to look like a gentleman instead of a tramp 
 — even on the diamond. 
 
 The captain or trainer should see that the men are 
 properly protected when the grounds are wet, particu- 
 larly in the early season. Stockings of wool should 
 cover the ankles and knees. Ball players are especially 
 liable to rheumatism, and wet grounds are very likely 
 to produce it. 
 
 Each man should receive a good brisk massage treat- 
 ment over the working muscles every day. The dress- 
 ing-rooms should be warm and absolutely free from 
 drafts. 
 
 The ideal position foe the captain to occupy is 
 in the infield. From there he can keep in touch with 
 his pitcher and can better keep his infield together when 
 the plays are complicated. There should also be an 
 outfield captain, who should keep the outfield up to 
 its work and direct the playing there. 
 
 The captain should have a thorough knowledge of 
 
FOR THE CAPTAIN 153 
 
 the game inclusive of the fine points of playing. He 
 should also be able to formulate strategic combinations 
 and know when to use them. He should be a hard 
 worker himself and encourage his men to work hard 
 as well. He should be unsparing of criticism and gen- 
 erous with praise. 
 
 ( 
 
CHAPTER III 
 
 BATTING 
 
 Form is an essential feature of successful batting. 
 The young player who earnestly desires to amount to 
 something as a batsman should study the work of the 
 professionals whenever possible and pattern his own 
 style of standing and hitting on theirs. To be sure, 
 all professional ball players do not bat in the same fash- 
 ion any more than do all amateurs, but the tyro will 
 be quite safe in fashioning his form on that of any one 
 of them whose last season's average was .350 per cent 
 or better. A high average is the best of recommenda- 
 tions for any style of stick work. In the present treatise 
 an attempt is made to aid the young player in attain- 
 ing proficiency with the bat, but the claim is not made 
 that the style described is absolutely the best for all 
 players ; only that it is one of many good styles and well 
 adapted to the beginner. 
 
 The position is half the battle. Whether you are 
 a right-handed or a left-handed batter, stand up to the 
 plate so that no matter where the ball comes, so long 
 as it is over any part of the rubber, you can reach it 
 without leaning. To stand far away from the plate is 
 usually a confession of weakness; to toe it requires a 
 retreat before you can handle a ball coming close in. 
 
 154 
 
BATTING 155 
 
 Stand about three-quarters facing the pitcher, hold the 
 bat well up on the handle and let it lie back easily in 
 the grasp. Do not swing it back until it is behind you, 
 but keep it in front rather than back of the body. In 
 this position — the hands being just above the level of 
 the belt — it is possible to reach every sort of delivery 
 with a minimum of exertion, in the quickest time and 
 without disturbing the balance of the body. If you are 
 a right-handed batter let the weight of the body rest 
 upon the right foot, which should be a good twenty 
 inches back of the plate, until the ball has left the 
 pitcher's hand. Then step forward with the left foot 
 in whatever direction and to whatever distance is re- 
 quired. If you are a left-handed batter reverse the 
 position and movement. 
 
 Use the "wrist motion" in hitting the ball; that 
 is, do not swing arms and shoulders back and club at 
 the ball as though you were chopping down a tree, but 
 let the motion come from the wrists and a slight swing 
 of the arms, the shoulders remaining comparatively 
 motionless. Swinging back with the whole upper body 
 disturbs the balance, makes it difficult to judge the 
 ball and renders it possible for the pitcher to do very 
 effective work with an occasional drop which this style 
 of batting is totally unfitted to meet. By using the 
 wrist motion you will be able to wait until the ball is 
 almost up to you before swinging, and so will more 
 often know what you are trying for. 
 
 If you can, learn to bat left-handed. All else being 
 
156 BASEBALL 
 
 equal, the left-handed man has a far better chance of 
 reaching first, since the very act of hitting starts him 
 in that direction, while the right-handed batsman un- 
 dergoes a moment of recovery before he can start and 
 then has a greater distance to cover. The superiority 
 of the left-hander's position is strongly shown when it 
 comes to bunting. To tap the ball and get into his 
 stride is almost one motion, and very frequently he is 
 well started before the ball has struck the ground. 
 
 When you face the pitcher look as though you had 
 confidence, whether you have or not. To show nerv- 
 ousness is playing into the pitcher's hands. Do not 
 swing your bat back and forth and do not keep shifting 
 your weight or moving your feet about. Take your 
 stand, get into an easy position, keep your eyes on the 
 pitcher until he pitches and then on the ball and don't 
 try for anything that isn't good. A common fault of 
 young players is hunting after all sorts of wild deliv- 
 eries, reaching far out for them, putting their bats 
 above their heads to pull them down and even trying 
 to scoop them out of the dirt. Their excuse is invari- 
 ably the same : " I thought if I did reach it I could 
 send it ! " The art of waiting is one of the most valu- 
 able and most difficult to acquire. Remember that you 
 are at the plate to make runs for your team, but not 
 necessarily to score them yourself. If a runner is on 
 second a base on balls is as good fate as can ordinarily 
 happen to you. Don't try to make a home run out of 
 a wild pitch. Insist on having the ball put over the 
 
BATTING 157 
 
 plate. If the pitcher puts it there try your best to hit 
 it; if he doesn't, trot to first. Play safely if you want 
 to score; a base in the hand is worth four in the bush. 
 
 Whatever you do, don't pull away from the plate. 
 Stand up to it — not necessarily on top of it, however — 
 and hit from that position. Don't pull away. Show 
 aggression. Look determined and confident, but don't 
 let overeagerness lead you astray. Be ready to hit the 
 first ball which comes; in many cases the first delivery 
 is a good honest strike, and the batter who allows it 
 to go by because unprepared finds himself half defeated 
 at the outset. "When you hit, swing quick and sharp, 
 but don't try to " kill the ball." Don't start while the 
 ball is still far off and swing around slowly in the hope 
 of connecting bat and ball, but wait until the last mo- 
 ment that safety allows and then swing with a snap. 
 In this way you have the ball under observation until 
 it is almost up to you, by which time, if it is a curve, 
 it has " broken " and you know what you are in for. 
 
 As a rule, do not advance beyond the plate toward 
 the pitcher ; sometimes, however, it is a good idea to 
 step up on a ball and meet it before it curves. 
 
 Each player should get a bat that suits him and use 
 it all the time. Nothing will injure one's confidence 
 more than to take a different bat every time he goes 
 to the plate. 
 
 Bunting is a form of batting which has great possi- 
 bilities. A good bunter, especially if he is a left-handed 
 batter, can " lay the ball down " for a base-hit four 
 
158 BASEBALL 
 
 times out of five. The principal thing in bunting is to 
 hold the bat rather loosely and to allow the ball to hit 
 it instead of having it hit the ball. If a pitcher knows 
 you are trying to bunt he will give you only high balls, 
 which are extremely hard to turn into successful bunts. 
 For this reason try to conceal your intention until the 
 delivery is made. Never, save when a desperate meas- 
 ure demands, try to bunt a ball that is not about waist 
 high and over some part of the plate. An extremely 
 low ball is almost as uncertain as a high one, while to 
 go after a wild pitch with your bat held for a bunt, is 
 a ridiculous procedure. When meeting a fast ball for 
 a bunt put the bat farther out and draw it back gently 
 so that the ball strikes the stick while the latter is 
 " giving." The bat may be held firmly, but there 
 should be no tight gripping of it. On a slow ball it 
 is best to hold the bat still and deaden the impact by 
 grasping it so loosely that there will be considerable 
 recoil. 
 
 Get all the practise you can, and — in practise, not 
 in playing — don't be too particular what sort of a ball 
 is handed you; the ability to hit a poor delivery once 
 in a while is a great advantage, and besides it is only 
 by becoming acquainted with all sorts that you will 
 be able to distinguish readily the good from the bad. 
 
 In a game study the pitcher; remember that he 
 will probably try to give you what he thinks you are 
 not expecting; fool him by expecting something else. 
 Keep a sharp watch out for curves. Have confidence 
 in yourself. 
 
CHAPTEE IV 
 
 BASE-RUNNING 
 
 The best base-runner is not necessarily the man 
 who takes the biggest risks nor the fastest runner. 
 Results are what count. Care is just as essential in 
 running bases as in batting; the player who swings at 
 every ball thrown him will have very few hits to his 
 credit, and in the same way the player who tries to 
 steal a base whenever there's one handy will score few 
 runs. As a general thing, it is the man who keeps his 
 eyes wide open, who is quick on his feet, who can run 
 fast and who is not afraid to slide head first or feet 
 first that makes the successful base-runner. The man 
 who really has his eyes wide open is a man who uses 
 care. 
 
 Getting to First. — In the first place, get to first 
 
 base. Unless you do you'll find difficulty in doing much 
 
 running. If you have hit to the infield don't jump to the 
 
 conclusion that you are out. Get to first as fast as your 
 
 legs will carry you and don't stop until you have crossed 
 
 it. Even if you see the ball slam into the baseman's 
 
 mitt don't slow up; run faster; maybe he will drop it; 
 
 they often do. If your hit has been a poor one there's 
 
 all the more reason that your run to first should be a 
 
 159 
 
160 BASEBALL 
 
 good one. It often happens that the best infielder is 
 rattled by being hurried, and when you remember that 
 the fielder must pick up your hit and throw it accu- 
 rately and that first-baseman must catch it and get one 
 foot on the base before you reach it, your chance of 
 getting safely to first doesn't look so dim. Never take 
 it for granted that you are out. 
 
 When running to first you are confronted by the 
 question whether to overrun that base or turn for a try 
 for second. If you turn you stand a chance of being 
 put out if first-baseman has the ball before you get back 
 to the bag; moreover, you will have to slow down a 
 little in order not to lose ground on the turn. Unless 
 you know where the ball is, play it safe and overrun. 
 Usually, however, you will have a pretty fair idea of 
 the ball's location and can govern yourself accordingly. 
 On an infield hit hold first. On a fly to outfield turn 
 short and be prepared to go on to second in the event 
 of a muff by the outfielder. On a long drive into left 
 outfield you will usually be safe if you make the turn, 
 while on a similar drive into right outfield you had 
 better overrun, since in the latter case the distance the 
 ball has to cover to reach first is much less. But on 
 all hits that seem to you good for two bases make your 
 turn at first and be ready to go on or retreat as devel- 
 opments require. As a rule do not slide for first base; 
 you can run it out quicker. But if you do, go head 
 first, as it will sometimes make the decision look so 
 close that the umpire will favor you. 
 
BASE-KUNNING 161 
 
 Getting to Second. — In starting for second don't 
 take too much lead. Stand back from the line, get 
 where you are certain of being able to retreat to first 
 ahead of the ball and poise yourself so that you are in 
 good position to either go forward or back. Keep on 
 your toes and don't become " anchored " for an in- 
 stant. This does not mean that it is necessary to keep 
 jumping up and down like an Indian in a war-dance; 
 that wears you out more than the pitcher. Simply 
 keep your eyes open and be ready any moment to go 
 on to second or back to first. When you return on a 
 throw go back of the baseman and get your right hand 
 on the bag. Move down with the pitcher's arm and 
 back when the catcher receives the ball. Watch out 
 for an. unexpected throw to first by the latter. When 
 once started — and a great deal depends, as in a sprint, 
 on that start — never look back; put your eyes on the 
 second-baseman and watch for his catch. If he is stand- 
 ing in front of the bag prepared to make the catch in 
 front of him, slide, if you have to slide, around back, 
 getting the left hand on to the base. In such a case go 
 head foremost. If the baseman has his arms overhead 
 to take a high throw, slide inside of the bag feet fore- 
 most. As in running for first, don't take anything for 
 granted ; recover instantly, so that in case of a muff you 
 can start out for third. It is in seeing just such chances 
 and making the most of them that good base-runners 
 win out. 
 
 Getting to Thied. — If the runner on second takes 
 
162 BASEBALL 
 
 a good lead and watches third-baseman carefully third 
 base is not hard to steal; and once there the runner 
 can score on a passed ball or outfield fly. The average 
 pitcher is bothered by the presence of a runner on 
 third base. 
 
 Coaching. — Base-running depends largely for its 
 success on the coachers. It is customary for a runner 
 on first to watch the pitcher's arm while the coacher 
 keeps an eye on the baseman. But while the coacher 
 is of great aid to the runner in guarding against a put- 
 out at first on a throw from pitcher or catcher, yet the 
 runner should himself be the judge of the opportunity 
 for a steal, unless, of course, the batsman has signaled 
 for it. With the runner on second the coacher, either 
 from first or third, again gives his attention to the base- 
 man and also to short-stop while the runner watches 
 the ball. The best place from which to coach second is 
 back of third, since the runner's gaze is naturally in 
 that direction and a motion of the coacher's hands is as 
 readily understood as verbal directions. The coach at 
 third may be of assistance to the runner when the latter 
 makes the turn to run for home by bracing him at the 
 base. 
 
 Signals well understood by all the players are a 
 necessity and are most valuable in allowing the base- 
 runners and the batsman to work together. 
 
CHAPTEK V 
 
 FIELDING 
 
 Fielding is the defensive side of baseball. A game 
 could not be won by fielding only, yet, on the other 
 hand, with an absolutely perfect exhibition of fielding 
 a team could prevent the opponents from winning. 
 Team batting, in which the batsman and the base-run- 
 ners work together, is the perfection of the offensive 
 game; team fielding, in which the battery and the field- 
 ers work together, is the perfection of the defensive 
 game. Every man has a duty to perform on every play 
 no matter how far distant from his position that play 
 may be. In the same way every man should know what 
 every other man will do on every play. It is this know- 
 ing beforehand what to do yourself and what to expect 
 of your fellow players that constitutes team-play; and 
 it is team-play that wins the game. 
 
 The theory of fielding is to get as many men as 
 possible where the attack is; there is strength in num- 
 bers. When the ball is hit every fielder save those 
 whose duty it is to " back up " should move in the di- 
 rection in which the ball is going. This does not mean 
 that they are to leave their own positions unprotected, 
 
 only that they are to shift slightly toward where the 
 
 163 
 
164 BASEBALL 
 
 play is, thus concentrating the team's strength where 
 it will be required. The accompanying diagrams illus- 
 trate this principle of concentration, the black dots 
 showing the regular positions of the men, the dotted 
 lines and the circles their movement and positions when 
 the ball is fielded and the arrow the direction and 
 length of the hit. 
 
 --o 
 
 Diagram H. — A fly to right field. 
 
 In Diagram H the hit is a fly into right field. The 
 ball is right-fielder's, but as one man should never be 
 left to field the ball alone center-fielder goes after it 
 also. Presuming that there are no runners on bases, 
 second-baseman starts in the direction taken by the 
 ball and only stops when he sees it safely fielded. Left- 
 fielder also moves toward the ball, since there is no 
 
FIELDING 165 
 
 possibility of its coming into his territory, and if lie is 
 nearer the scene of action he may find a chance to 
 make himself useful. Short-stop covers second base, 
 and third-baseman moves over to back him up. Pitcher 
 backs up first base and catcher runs into the infield 
 where he is in position to go to the assistance of any 
 player thereabouts. This is only one arrangement of 
 the team for a play of this sort; several others are 
 possible, and every coach has his own ideas on the sub- 
 ject. 
 
 With men on the bases the situation would be al- 
 tered. For instance, with a runner on second, second- 
 
 Diagram I. — A ground hit, 
 
 baseman would cover his bag and third-baseman would 
 cover his. With a man on third, the catcher would 
 have to guard the plate. 
 
166 BASEBALL 
 
 In Diagram I the Lit is a grounder to third-base- 
 man. Short-stop goes to his assistance, supposing as 
 above that the bases are empty. Left-fielder runs in 
 to take the ball in case it gets by the infield. Center- 
 fielder moves toward the play. Pitcher backs up first, 
 and so does right-fielder. Catcher runs into the in- 
 field. 
 
 -.-a. * or' 
 
 Diagram J. — An infield fly. 
 
 In Diagram J the hit is an infield fly to first-base- 
 man. Second-baseman goes to his aid, as does right- 
 fielder. Pitcher covers first and catcher backs him up. 
 Center-fielder and left-fielder move toward the play. 
 Short-stop covers second base and third-baseman runs 
 into the infield. 
 
 In Diagram K the hit is a slow bunt toward third. 
 
FIELDING 167 
 
 Third-baseman gets the ball. Short-stop goes to aid. 
 Left-fielder comes in, as does center-fielder. Second- 
 baseman covers his bag. Pitcher backs up first and 
 right-fielder comes in for the same purpose. Catcher 
 runs into the infield, being careful not to get into the 
 way of the throw to first. 
 
 Diagram K. — A bunt toward third base. 
 
 Unison of field play is everything; without it there 
 can be no real success. 
 
 There can be no arbitrary apportionment of terri- 
 tory among the nine players, but each of them has a 
 certain district to cover which may be said to be his 
 and for the guarding of which he may be held account- 
 able. In a general way these districts are arranged as 
 
 in Diagram L. The catcher is required to look after all 
 12 
 
168 BASEBALL 
 
 balls " laid down "■ in front of the plate and all fouls 
 about the plate and ^behind it. Pitcher fields flies and 
 bunts as indicated by the arcs, his territory having espe-. 
 cially variable boundaries where it adjoins those of 
 
 Diagram L. — Approximate apportionment of territory of baseball 
 
 players. 
 
 first-baseman and third-baseman. As a general rule 
 it may be said that any ball that may be obtained by 
 the pitcher while occupying his position or by moving 
 to the right and forward or to the left and forward up 
 to a distance of ten feet from the plate belongs to 
 him. 
 
 First-baseman takes all fair balls from the foul line 
 to the second-baseman's territory, and from about ten 
 feet in front of base to fifteen feet back of it. First-base- 
 man and third-baseman should take all fouls not plainly 
 
FIELDING 169 
 
 belonging to the fielders behind them or to the catcher. 
 As a general thing it is best for the pitcher never to 
 try for fouls. The territories of the other players are 
 indicated by the diagram. It is not good policy for 
 the second-baseman or short-stop to go much behind 
 the base-lines for flies. 
 
 In every case of a fly ball the man to whom it be- 
 longs should be called, if in the infield by the infield 
 captain and if in the outfield by the outfield captain. 
 With a player once called the ball is his and no other 
 player should attempt the catch or claim it, no matter* 
 what his opinion in the matter may be. 
 
 "When throwing to bases fielders should try to put 
 the ball below the baseman's shoulder. A high catch 
 necessitates a long downward motion before the ball 
 can be put on the runner, and besides that is more diffi- 
 cult to catch, and if it does go over the baseman's head 
 means another base for the runner unless the baseman 
 is well backed up. 
 
 In stopping grounders place the heels together 
 and spread the feet at a wide angle. If you miss the 
 ball the chance of its going between your legs is slight. 
 Outfielders in throwing to the plate should try to get 
 the ball into the catcher's hands on a long bounce un- 
 less they are sure of getting it to him safely on the fly. 
 Throw to a point inside of the plate; never make the 
 catcher move outside of the foul-lines to catch it. 
 
CHAPTER VI 
 
 THE POSITIONS— I. THE BATTERY 
 
 The pitcher shares with the catcher the honor of 
 being the most important member of the nine, while 
 the title of being the hardest-worked member is his 
 without protest. A man who is able to pitch good 
 ball is not necessarily as good a man for the position 
 as one who can pitch not quite so well; there are other 
 things besides pitching ability entering into it. Cool- 
 ness under the most exciting circumstances, steadiness 
 under all provocation and good judgment in the selec- 
 tion of deliveries are prime essentials. Good nature 
 is not insisted upon, for good nature is very likely to 
 be synonymous with indifference and even laziness. A 
 spice of temper is an excellent thing in a pitcher, just 
 so long as he doesn't let it get the better of him. 
 
 It is not possible for any one to learn from a book 
 how to pitch well. Instruction from some one who 
 knows how and constant, patient practise are what are 
 necessary. At the same time it is possible to give here 
 certain instructions which may be advantageously stud- 
 ied by beginners. 
 
 The muscles most concerned in pitching are the 
 arm, shoulder and back muscles. Don't develop a style 
 
 170 
 
THE BATTEKY 171 
 
 which depends entirely upon the arm; if you do you 
 will never make a strong pitcher, but will ultimately 
 give out. Make the back share the work with the arm. 
 Don't go through any more evolutions than necessary; 
 find a position that will allow you to maintain your 
 balance every instant until the ball has left your hand 
 and that will then allow you to recover it at once. If 
 you are not back in position by the time the ball reaches 
 the batter your chance of fielding a ball coming into 
 the box is very small. It is not the contortions gone 
 through with before the delivery that make a pitcher's 
 work effective ; skill, strength and control over the ball 
 are what count. 
 
 Learn one style and stick to it. Let the swing be 
 long enough to enable you to put speed into the de- 
 livery and yet not so long that, when the batsman 
 reaches the base, you must shorten it to hold him 
 there. 
 
 Control of ball is the first thing to learn. The 
 pitcher who has this, even if his curves are not espe- 
 cially dangerous, will average up better at the end of 
 the season than the brilliant " twirler " who is never 
 quite sure what his delivery is going to be. Speed is 
 effective at times, slowness at other times. Diversify 
 your delivery and puzzle the batsman. For the be- 
 ginner the out curve, both fast and slow, the in curve, 
 the drop and the slow ball are sufficient when varied 
 with a speedy straight ball. 
 
 The out curve is obtained by holding the back of 
 
172 BASEBALL 
 
 the hand down, the ball being securely held with the 
 thumb and the next two fingers. The motion is a 
 sweeping side "arm motion, the ball leaving the hand 
 over the tip of the first finger. The palm is turned 
 up as the ball leaves it. In the slow out curve the 
 ball is momentarily gripped tightly just as it is re- 
 leased. In the fast out curve the ball is sent away with 
 a snapping motion of the wrist. This ball, sent high, 
 is usually effective against a left-handed batsman. 
 
 The in curve is obtained by gripping the ball as 
 for the out curve, but holding the hand with the little 
 finger toward the ground. The side arm motion is used 
 and the ball goes away under the first two fingers, the 
 palm being brought slightly up. 
 
 The Dkop is obtained by holding the ball in the 
 hand as for the out curve, the back of the hand being 
 perfectly flat with relation to the ground. The motion 
 is a distinct overarm motion, the sweep being made 
 above the shoulder and the ball leaving the hand over 
 the tips of the first two fingers. At the moment of 
 delivery the palm is turned sharply down. It is possi- 
 ble by combining a snapping motion of the arm with 
 the wrist turn to make the drop an out curve as well. 
 
 The Slow Ball. — Recently what is known as the 
 slow ball has been made to do great execution by some 
 pitchers. It is especially effective when following two 
 or three fast balls, as the change of pace is so great as 
 to fool even the most experienced batters. For this 
 the ball is held far back in the palm. The ordinary 
 
THE BATTEEY 173 
 
 motion for a fast ball is used, but a retarding grip with 
 the fingers as it leaves the hand causes it to revolve 
 rapidly and the friction with the air lessens its speed. 
 
 The pitcher should study the batsman in every case. 
 If he is timid and undecided a few fast straight balls 
 may send him back to the bench. If he is experienced 
 and determined you will need all your cunning. For 
 a left-handed batsman high curves close in with an 
 occasional slow ball make excellent medicine. When 
 the batsman is looking for a sacrifice keep the ball high, 
 change the pace often and try a slow ball in the hope 
 of having him knock up an infield fly. If he is after 
 a bunt see that the ball never goes to him waist high; 
 offer him everything save that. 
 
 Don't depend too much on curves; command a good 
 swift straight ball and rely upon change of pace to re- 
 lieve you in a tight place. Remember that what you 
 are trying for is to compel the batsman to hit just the 
 ball he doesn't want to. Don't lose sight of the fact that 
 you have a number of men behind you who are waiting 
 for something to do. Don't be afraid to allow hits; 
 it is better to have a batsman fielded out at first than 
 to give him his base. Try to make your first delivery 
 tell; every batsman acknowledges the spice of discour- 
 agement that follows upon having the first delivery 
 scored against him. 
 
 Fielding. — A pitcher's duty does not end with 
 pitching the ball; he is also, to some extent, a fielder, 
 and while in this line his work should be as light as 
 
174 BASEBALL 
 
 possible yet what he has to do should be done well. 
 His territory is not large, but it is important. On any 
 hit outside of his territory he should run to first base, 
 crossing the base-line ahead of the runner, in order to 
 back up the baseman. This is an important duty. If 
 he has pitched wild or in case of a passed ball he should 
 move toward the plate and cover it instantly when nec- 
 essary. As a general thing he should not attempt to 
 handle bunts in the direction of third base, since he 
 must turn before he can throw to first. Bunts toward 
 first, unless very short, should be left to that player. 
 On any hit that takes the first-baseman far from base 
 the pitcher should cover first. 
 
 Unless an infield hit is where he can get it surely 
 the pitcher should let it alone. If he tries for it and 
 merely succeeds in deflecting it from its course he does 
 more harm than good. Discretion in fielding is very 
 necessary on his part; what to try for and what to let 
 alone is something that will bother him a great deal — 
 at all events, until he has gained some experience. After 
 he has worked with his infielders for a season he will 
 know instantly what to do in any contingency. Until 
 then a good rule to follow is: When in doubt let it go. 
 
 The catcher is of scarcely less importance than 
 the other member of the battery. His position is an 
 extremely exacting one and calls for the exercise of 
 much steadiness, good humor, quick judgment and gen- 
 eralship. A cool, steady catcher will often save the 
 day for his team when the pitcher and the entire in- 
 
THE BATTERY 175 
 
 field are " up in the air." Becoming " rattled " is the 
 one unpardonable sin that a catcher can commit. The 
 more the catcher resembles an inanimate back-stop the 
 more useful he is; a brilliant man is nine times out of 
 ten erratic, and back of the plate is the last place to 
 put an erratic player. Of two men, one of whom is 
 capable of brilliant plays but uncertain withal and the 
 other of whom is slow but practically certain to stop 
 every ball pitched, choose the latter. "When certainty 
 in catching is coupled with speed in throwing to bases 
 the ideal catcher is in sight. If besides these merits 
 he is also a man who will not get rattled with three 
 men on bases and the pitcher going to pieces he is a 
 gift from the gods. 
 
 Throwing to Bases. — The good catcher must have 
 a strong throwing arm and be able to use it quickly 
 and with certainty; throwing to bases is almost as im- 
 portant as catching the deliveries. Take a position 
 well under the bat. Experience has shown that this 
 position is much less dangerous than the old one, where 
 the catcher stood some two paces back, and that it ren- 
 ders a pitcher's work more certain. In football it is 
 always the careful player who gets hurt; in the same 
 way it is likely to be the careful catcher, the one who 
 tries to save himself, when the runner comes to the 
 plate, for instance, who is injured. Be aggressive. 
 Keep your left foot slightly in advance of the right, 
 so that by straightening up and taking one step forward 
 with the latter foot you will be in position to throw to 
 
176 BASEBALL 
 
 base. The throw to first or third should be a short, 
 quick snap, while to get the ball down to second it is 
 necessary to steady yourself well and make a high over- 
 arm throw, starting the ball with sufficient elevation 
 to have it carry. Of course, if possible, the ball should 
 reach the baseman low enough for him to tag the run- 
 ner instantly. But the main thing is to get the ball 
 down to him as quickly as you can, and if you do this 
 so that the ball reaches him in time for a put-out he 
 will forgive you much in the matter of location. 
 
 Except when a runner has started to steal the 
 catcher should not throw to base unless signaled by the 
 baseman to do so. Don't throw to bases just to be 
 doing it. It is not always necessary to respond to a 
 baseman's call. Use your own judgment in the matter 
 and save your arm whenever you think the situation 
 does not warrant a throw. 
 
 Signaling. — As a general thing it is best for the 
 catcher to give the signals to the pitcher, although there 
 are pitchers who insist on doing the signaling them- 
 selves. The catcher and pitcher should work together 
 like two cog-wheels no matter where the signals ema- 
 nate. It very often happens that when the signals are 
 given by the catcher the pitcher wants to please him- 
 self on some delivery, and so refuses the catcher's signal 
 and sends a signal of his own. In this case the only 
 thing to be careful about is to see that the catcher really 
 understands what is coming. Between two players who 
 have worked together for some time mistakes are not 
 
THE BATTERY 177 
 
 likely to occur, but where a catcher and a pitcher come 
 together for the first time, even if the signals have been 
 agreed upon between them, occasional mix-ups are not 
 unlikely. In signaling the catcher should use the finger 
 code and hide the fingers from the batsman by putting 
 the right hand between the knees while stooping and 
 placing the mitten above it. 
 
 Aid the Pitcher. — It is often a great assistance 
 to the pitcher when inclined to be wild if you will hold 
 the hands above the plate as a target for which he can 
 aim. If a pitcher shows signs of going to pieces call 
 a halt by walking down to him and handing him the 
 ball instead of throwing it, speaking cheerfully and 
 encouragingly as you do so. If the pitcher has got into 
 a streak of throwing wide move over farther toward 
 the batsman, make a target of your hands and, as a 
 general thing, in aiming for them he will get his deliv- 
 eries over the plate again. 
 
 Study the batsman and find out what kind of a 
 ball he wants. Then make sure that he doesn't get 
 it. Keep the body in front of the ball so that you will 
 not have to reach out one way or the other. With the 
 body in front of it the ball will very seldom get by you 
 even if you fail to get your hands on it. 
 
CHAPTEE YII 
 
 THE POSITIONS {Continued)— II. THE INFIELD 
 
 Fikst Base. — Baseball authorities differ widely as 
 to the difficulties of this position. Some state that it 
 is the easiest of the infield points to cover; others that 
 it is the hardest. It is probably neither one nor the 
 other. 
 
 The first-baseman should have height and reach, 
 ability to handle every kind of ball ever thrown or 
 batted and that peculiar mixture of courage and reck- 
 lessness known as " sand." No special mention is made 
 of quickness, since that is a quality necessary to every 
 member of the infield. 
 
 With the bases empty the usual position for the 
 first-baseman is about twelve feet back of the base-line 
 and about twenty feet from the foul-line. With a man 
 on first his position is inside of base, where he is able 
 to look after bunts and at the same time take throws 
 from catcher or pitcher. With men on both first and 
 second his position should be a little back of the base- 
 line and about eight feet from first. On a throw from 
 catcher he should take the ball while on the run and 
 block off the runner. He should at all times take 
 ground balls coming into his territory and depend upon 
 
 178 
 
THE INFIELD 179 
 
 the pitcher to cover first. In the same way, on hits 
 into short right field it is the pitcher's duty to take the 
 base. First-baseman should keep a sharp watch for 
 drives along the base-line, which, if allowed to get by 
 him, are usually good for two bases. 
 
 On throws from the outfield to the plate the first- 
 baseman should, whenever possible, back up the catcher. 
 On throws to second from the other side of the outfield 
 he should back up second-baseman. 
 
 The first-baseman should take all flies between his 
 base and pitcher unless they are palpably the property 
 of the latter. If a throw comes at him low his first effort 
 should be to block it at all hazards, his next to catch 
 it. Play it safe. He should know what his reach is 
 to right and left and should not make the mistake of 
 missing a throw by trying to keep a foot on base when 
 by taking a step or two he could make it certain. 
 
 With a runner on first and a hit made into his 
 territory the first-baseman's quandary is whether to 
 field to second and try to put out the man who has 
 just left first or to play for the batsman. In a case of 
 this sort quick judgment is necessary and whatever 
 course is followed there must be no perceptible hesi- 
 tation. All things being equal, the play is to retire the 
 runner nearest home, but if that man has obtained a 
 good start and is a clever base-runner it may be that 
 a throw to second would be futile while a throw to first 
 would put out a man. Think quick and act quick is 
 the rule. 
 
180 BASEBALL 
 
 After a throw get back to first as soon as your 
 legs will let you; there may be a chance of a double 
 play. In the same way, after receiving a throw re- 
 cover instantly and be ready to throw yourself; it may 
 be necessary to spoil an attempt at a steal. 
 
 Second base is perhaps the most important of the 
 infield positions. While the actual physical work per- 
 formed by second-baseman is not greater than that fall- 
 ing to the lot of first-baseman or short-stop, yet he occu- 
 pies a place where coolness and judgment are every 
 moment of the utmost value. He is practically on a 
 line with pitcher and batsman and. can watch the ball 
 from the time it leaves the former's hands- until it 
 reaches the catcher or has been struck. Consequently 
 he is better able to surmise what the hit is to be ; while, 
 after the hit is made, he learns the direction of it before 
 any one else save, possibly, the pitcher. For these rea- 
 sons, and because he has the other infielders and the 
 battery in plain sight every instant, second-baseman 
 should be if possible the infield captain. 
 
 Like the first-baseman, he is better fitted for the po- 
 sition if he has sufficient height and length of arm to 
 enable him to cover a wide territory. Very often he 
 is called on to make a stop while going at good speed 
 and throw the ball to base in almost the same instant. 
 He should ordinarily play a deep field, although with 
 a pitcher who is weak at fielding this is not advisable. 
 If he does play well back of the base-line he is exempt 
 from the hot liners which render the third-baseman's 
 
THE INFIELD 181 
 
 and short-stop's positions difficult, and, because of his 
 nearness to first, is able to handle the ball more care- 
 fully. 
 
 He should work in perfect unison with the short- 
 stop. The two positions depend upon each other for suc- 
 cess, and there should be an absolute understanding as 
 to which is to cover base in every contingency. On a 
 double play with the second-baseman fielding the ball 
 he should toss to short-stop and allow that player to 
 make the put-out at second and the assist to first ; if he 
 holds the ball until he has himself run the distance 
 to second and tagged that base he uses up valuable time 
 and may lose the man at first. 
 
 LST CATCHING A THROW FROM THE PLATE the SeCOnd- 
 
 baseman should take a position to the left of the bag, 
 where he will be able to get at the runner if the latter 
 tries to go back of the base. 
 
 He should field short flies, keeping a close watch 
 for balls coming between his position and the pitcher. 
 He should call every ball of this sort if he is acting 
 as infield captain, but in case of a fly coming back of 
 his position and for which he is trying he should be 
 coached by the outfield captain, who will be in a better 
 position to judge the ball. 
 
 Second-baseman's duties in certain plays are treated 
 of in the chapter on Team-Play. 
 
 Short-stop should be a wide-awake player, quick 
 on his feet and a good strong thrower. He should be 
 able to get away quick, snappy underarm throws as 
 
182 BASEBALL 
 
 well as hard overarm throws. The ability to make 
 long throws to first works to his advantage, since it 
 allows him to play a deeper field, thus getting balls 
 which, were he playing up to the base-line, he would 
 be unable to reach. By playing deep he is also able 
 to get flies to short left field and center. Balls taken 
 on the run should be thrown low to first, as a ball sent 
 away while on the run will naturally rise. Slow 
 grounders should be taken between bounds, the short- 
 stop moving in for them and never waiting for them 
 to come out to him. He should be careful to keep his 
 feet together. 
 
 Short-stop should study the batsman and watch the 
 delivery. He can very often tell what the hit is to be 
 by observing the ball offered by the pitcher; a right- 
 handed batsman, for instance, will usually drive an out 
 curve to the right of second, while a straight ball to 
 the same batsman will generally go to short-stop or 
 third-baseman. On all hits to the second-baseman's left 
 short-stop should instantly dig out for second and cover 
 that base. He should watch for signals between second 
 and catcher and be ready at any moment to take the 
 bag on a throw down from the plate, although save 
 when there are men on both first and third it is not 
 a good plan to require the short-stop to play the base. 
 He can not obtain too much practise at throwing to 
 first or snapping to second. 
 
 The position is dealt with further in the chapter on 
 Team-Play. 
 
THE INFIELD 183 
 
 Third Base. — If there is one infield position more 
 difficult than the others it is probably third base. The 
 man covering that bag has not the advantage possessed 
 by all other infielders of being able to see about what 
 sort of treatment the batsman is getting, unless the 
 batsman happens to be a left-hander. As a usual thing 
 third-baseman doesn't know what's coming until the 
 ball is almost at him. He has. farther to throw to get 
 a ball to first than any of the others and his work in 
 guarding his base from runners is generally harder. 
 
 As a rule third-baseman should play fairly deep, 
 coming in when a bunt is expected. He should cross 
 well into short-stop's " front yard " for slow grounders, 
 as he is in position to get to them quicker than short, 
 and once having them, is able to get them away to first 
 in quick order. In a play of this sort he has not time 
 to get into position before throwing, but must get the 
 ball across the diamond at once. For this reason third- 
 baseman should be a good snap thrower. 
 
 In covering base he needs lots of coolness and judg- 
 ment. With runners coming down on him in every 
 known style — feet first, head first or twisting — the 
 temptation to look after his own safety and get out 
 of the way is strong. It takes a player with genuine 
 pluck to hold his place in the face of a heavy, desperate 
 runner and catch the ball surely. In a case of this sort 
 he should make the play sure; that is, he should be 
 certain that he has the ball and can " squeeze it " be- 
 fore he attempts to tag the runner. A lost ball, with 
 13 
 
184 BASEBALL 
 
 the runner able to recover himself quickly and go on, 
 will usually mean a tally. Nine out of ten runners who 
 steal third collide more or less forcibly with the base- 
 man, and so the ability to hold the ball, and not merely 
 stop it, is of prime importance. 
 
 Third-baseman and short-stop should work well to- 
 gether and know where to find each other in any play. 
 
 When running a man down between bases he should 
 go after him fast, start quickly and stop quickly. He 
 should get the runner going fast before he throws the 
 ball. 
 
 The duties of third-baseman in special plays are 
 dealt with in the chapter on Team-Play. 
 
CHAPTER VIII 
 
 THE POSITIONS (Concluded)— III. THE OUTFIELD 
 
 Of the three outfield positions that of center field 
 is the hardest, not because more balls go into that terri- 
 tory, but because center has more backing up to do than 
 his neighbors. Left-fielder backs up center, and so does 
 right fielder ; center backs up both right-fielder and left- 
 fielder. The outfield positions are popularly supposed 
 to be sinecures, and it is true that inning after inning 
 will very frequently go by in which not a ball gets by 
 the infield. But when the outfielder's work does come 
 it is important. A fly to left field means a man out if 
 caught; if not caught perhaps it means two or even 
 three runs for the opponents. Each fielder has a big 
 territory to cover, and because of their distance from 
 the plate are seldom able to know with any degree of 
 certainty where the hit is to come. They are able to 
 overcome this disadvantage to some extent by studying 
 the batsman and learning from inning to inning what 
 sort 'of a performance he is likely to offer. Sometimes, 
 too, the pitcher can aid them materially by bringing 
 them in or sending them back or to left or right in 
 anticipation of the batter's hit. 
 
 But at all times the outfielder should keep his eyes 
 185 
 
186 BASEBALL 
 
 on the ball and his mind on the game. It is lonesome 
 work sometimes and the temptation to think of other 
 matters is often very strong. But it won't do; the 
 game's the thing to keep the thoughts on. 
 
 Moving In. — When the ball is a grounder, move in 
 for it and trust to getting it near the base. To do this 
 it will often be necessary to " smother " it, that is, get 
 the body over it and spoil the bound. If it gets by you 
 it must be taken care of by the player who is backing 
 you up; if you get it you have saved several moments 
 and are in position to make a shorter and therefore 
 faster throw to base. Waiting for a grounder to come 
 out to you and taking it on the bound is playing it safe, 
 but in the case of an outfielder is not advisable. It is 
 better here to risk a little. And besides if the runner 
 sees you moving in on the ball he will be inclined to 
 take fewer chances and will often be satisfied with one 
 base without watching to see whether the ball has passed 
 you. 
 
 Catching Flies. — On a long fly back of your posi- 
 tion, start the moment the ball leaves the bat; get the 
 direction of the ball first and then try to gauge the dis- 
 tance; run hard, turning once or twice to see that you 
 are going right and are not overrunning; when you stop 
 face about instantly and be ready for the catch. The 
 other outfielders can help you greatly by shouting di- 
 rections, as " Back! Back! " " Kun hard! " " Steady! " 
 and the like. When you start for a ball run your hard- 
 est; very often what seems like an impossibility at first 
 
THE OUTFIELD 187 
 
 will result in a catch. As soon as you are certain of the 
 ball claim it and then take it for granted that it is 
 yours. Attention to this detail will prevent collisions. 
 As soon as the ball is caught field it home if you are 
 far out or run in with it if you are nearer, keeping an 
 eye on the bases. 
 
 In throwing to the plate keep the ball low, recol- 
 lecting that a liner will rise. A ball that strikes some 
 ten feet from the plate and reaches the catcher on a 
 long bound is the safest of all, since, whatever happens, 
 it is not likely to go over his head. And throw inside 
 of the plate — that is, to your left. 
 
 A hard liner into left field from a right-handed 
 batsman will rise perceptibly; look out for that rise 
 and don't run in too far for it. 
 
 The outfielders, left and center especially, since 
 they have more throws to the plate than right-fielder, 
 should practise throwing in constantly. In the begin- 
 ning of the season, however, they can not be too careful 
 about overdoing the practise, for a strain sustained then 
 is likely to handicap them for the remainder of the 
 year. 
 
CHAPTEK IX 
 
 TEAM-PLAY 
 
 Team-play is briefly concerted action by all mem- 
 bers of the nine toward a common purpose, or, as Mr. 
 W. H. Lewis puts it in bis excellent Primer of College 
 Football, it is " every man in every play every time." 
 Team-play is quite as essential in baseball as in foot- 
 ball, although to the spectator it is less in evidence. 
 As in football, there are two kinds of team-play — of- 
 fensive and defensive; the first is team batting and the 
 second team fielding. Neither one has as yet been 
 fully developed ; there are " combinations " in each still 
 unthought of; but to show what possibilities there are 
 the following examples of both offensive and defensive 
 team-play are given. 
 
 Team Batting. — The best-known example of this 
 is what is called the sacrifice hit or " hit-and-run." The 
 first man reaches first. From there it is impossible for 
 him to score on anything less than a three-bagger. 
 Once on second, however, a two-bagger will bring him 
 home with certainty, while, if he is a fast base-runner, 
 he may score on a single. The object, then, is to ad- 
 vance him to second base even at the cost of an out. 
 The man on first makes a fake start — that is, he begins a 
 
 188 
 
TEAM-PLAY 189 
 
 dasli toward second, but returns to first in time to keep 
 from being thrown out. Batsman watclies second base 
 meanwhile and observes whether second-baseman or 
 short-stop runs to cover it. If the former the batsman 
 knows that short right field will be unguarded; if the 
 latter he knows that short left field will be unguarded. 
 As soon as it becomes evident that he is not to be given 
 his base on balls the batsman signals the runner. The 
 latter, on the next delivery, starts with the pitcher's 
 arm and races for second and the batsman drives or 
 tries to drive the ball into right field, in case second- 
 baseman is covering second, or into left field in case 
 short-stop is covering base. The first runner, because 
 of his start, is usually safe on second by the time the 
 ball is fielded, and if he is a speedy man can sometimes 
 make his third while the ball is traveling to first for 
 a put-out there and traveling back to third. 
 
 A variation of this play is made by having the bats- 
 man signal the man on first to run and then hitting 
 at the ball, but not striking it. With an unsteady catcher 
 this often works as well as the sacrifice, especially if 
 the runner is a brilliant base-stealer. It has the added 
 advantage of advancing the man nearest home at no 
 greater cost to the batsman than a strike scored against 
 him. If the play is successful he may still get in his 
 hit and put the runner on third or even home if luck 
 is with him. 
 
 Bunting to Third. — With the score tied or in your 
 opponent's favor and men on first and second you may 
 
190 BASEBALL 
 
 resort to bunting. Here third-baseman is your victim. 
 He knows that the man on second will take third at the 
 first chance and is consequently loath to leave his base. 
 Signal to the runners what to expect. Thereupon the 
 man on second plays well off to show his determination 
 to take third and to make third-baseman hug his base. 
 Find a ball to your liking and bunt it slowly toward 
 third-baseman, keeping it as far from pitcher's territory 
 as possible. The runners should start on the instant. 
 Third-baseman must either field the ball and leave his 
 base unprotected or guard his base and allow pitcher 
 to field the ball. In either case he is likely to hesitate 
 for an instant, and when he does get the ball the chances 
 are that it will reach the base too late. He will usually 
 play it to third in hope of cutting off the runner nearest 
 home, in which case the bases will be filled. If, how- 
 ever, seeing that the runner at third can not be reached 
 in time for an out, he should throw to first or second, 
 the man on third should instantly put out for the plate. 
 With a good coacher back of third to brace him on the 
 turn and to send him on he should stand an excellent 
 chance of scoring. 
 
 Sacrifice Steal. — "With a man on first and a man 
 on third and none out a score may often be secured by 
 having the runner on first start out for second while 
 the ball is in the catcher's hands. If catcher throws 
 down to second the man on third, who has been waiting 
 the moment, starts for home at his best clip and ought 
 to score. As soon as he is safely toward the plate the 
 
TEAM-PLAY 191 
 
 runner from first is at liberty to save himself if lie can 
 do so. If the ball is thrown to the plate, as is likely, 
 he can secure second base. The same play may be 
 tried with the ball in the pitcher's hands. He should 
 sacrifice himself, if necessary, but not otherwise. Plays 
 of this sort involve fast, heady work by those taking 
 part, and so should be brought off, if possible, when the 
 best base-runners can participate. 
 
 The " hit-and-run " play may also be used when 
 there is a man on third and a run is badly needed. 
 The runner should play well off and be ready to go 
 home on the instant. The batsman gives him the sig- 
 nal and hits a hard drive into outfield or a slow bunt 
 toward first base. The runner, who has reached a dis- 
 tance of twenty feet from base with the pitcher's arm, 
 is off like a shot for the plate. He should take the last 
 ten feet on a head-first slide, since the throw to the 
 plate is likely to be hurried and to go high or wild. 
 
 Dash for the Plate. — A play which may be 
 worked when runs are badly needed and when the 
 catcher is unsteady or temporarily rattled is the fol- 
 lowing. There is a runner on second and one on third. 
 The man on second plays almost up to third, being cer- 
 tain that the opponents will not throw to second, while 
 the man on third plays as far toward the plate as he 
 dares; a little bit farther than that helps the play. The 
 batsman gives the signal. At the moment the pitcher's 
 arm moves forward the man on third and the man on 
 second dash for the plate. The pitcher's delivery is like- 
 
192 BASEBALL 
 
 ly to be poor as lie lias seen the start for home before 
 the ball has left his hand. The batsman swings at the 
 ball in such a way as to add to the catcher's discomfiture, 
 but is careful not to strike it. Catcher, having the poor 
 delivery and the swing to contend with and knowing 
 that the runners are racing home, is very likely to be- 
 come sufficiently rattled to drop the ball if not to miss 
 it altogether. The writer has seen this trick tried but 
 twice, but each time it netted two runs. Needless to 
 say it is a risky play and one justified only by desperate 
 circumstances. 
 
 Another thick which will sometimes succeed with 
 the catcher somewhat rattled is the following. There 
 is a man on third and a run is needed. The batsman 
 signals the runner when there is one strike and one or 
 more balls called against him, strikes at the next low 
 delivery, tosses aside his bat and puts out for first. The 
 success of the trick depends upon the catcher being 
 sufficiently rattled to throw to first, in case he has not 
 caught the ball, under the supposition that the strike 
 was really the third instead of the second. If he does 
 throw, first-baseman is not expecting it. The runner 
 starts with the throw and should reach the plate before 
 the ball gets back to it. If catcher does not fall a 
 victim to the conspiracy the runner holds his base and 
 the batsman is called back by the umpire. If the at- 
 tempt has gained nothing it has cost only one strike. 
 With a poor batsman up and two out it is a play worth 
 trying. 
 
TEAM-PLAY 193 
 
 These are only a few of the combinations possible 
 in offensive team-play. 
 
 Team Fielding. — The defense offers fewer oppor- 
 tunities for team-play than the offense, but is still capa- 
 ble of many clever " combinations." In most of them 
 it is necessary that catcher, pitcher and at least one 
 fielder should participate directly and the rest of the 
 team indirectly. There are several " combinations " in 
 which pitcher, catcher and a baseman work together 
 to retire a base-runner. For instance : 
 
 There is a runner on first and a runner on third. 
 The man on first tries to steal second. The second- 
 baseman leaves his bag, which is instantly covered by 
 short-stop, and runs in to a position well in front of the 
 base, keeping his eye on the runner on third and pay- 
 ing no attention to the man on first. The catcher 
 throws to second-baseman. If the man on third tries to 
 go home the second-baseman returns the ball to catcher. 
 If he does not second-baseman sends the ball on to 
 short-stop in an attempt to put out the man from first. 
 
 Throw to Center-Fielder. — A play designed to 
 coax an eager base-runner from first to second and then 
 put him out is that in which center-fielder, second-base- 
 man and catcher are concerned. With a man on first 
 who shows his intention to steal on the slightest provo- 
 cation let the catcher, second-baseman and center- 
 fielder get together on signal. Center-fielder gradual- 
 ly works in toward second without being noticed. 
 Catcher signals for a ball wide of the batsman. Catcher 
 
194 BASEBALL 
 
 throws down to second but puts the ball well over the 
 baseman's head. The runner, who has been playing 
 off from first, sees an opportunity to take second, as he 
 thinks, and makes a run for it. The instant the ball 
 leaves catcher's hand center-fielder races in to a position 
 about thirty or forty feet back of second and catches 
 the throw from the plate, fielding it back to second on 
 the instant and in time to put out the runner. The 
 play is one of the oldest of infield plays and an experi- 
 enced player will not usually be taken in by it. But 
 if tried on a young player it is likely to succeed. 
 
 Forcing the Runner. — There is a way to clear 
 third base of a dangerous runner, supposing there is 
 also a man on second, that will succeed more often than 
 it will fail. There is a runner on third and a runner 
 on second. Let second-baseman play well off to the 
 left of his bag and let short-stop run to the bag several 
 times to make the runner think that he will cover it 
 in case of a throw from the plate. Short-stop then 
 goes back to his position, allowing the runner to take 
 a long lead unchallenged. Second-baseman signals 
 catcher and catcher signals pitcher for a ball wide of 
 the batsman. As soon as the ball leaves the pitcher 
 second-baseman runs for his bag. Catcher throws down 
 instantly. The runner, finding himself cut off from 
 second goes on to third, forcing the man ahead to the 
 plate. Second-baseman throws back there in time to 
 catch him. 
 
 Fundamental Plays. — These are special plays 
 called for by special conditions; there are others 
 
TEAM-PLAY 195 
 
 which may be termed fundamental fielding plays 
 which are of more value and which call for quite as 
 much team-play. For instance, if there is a runner 
 on first and the ball is hit to second base or short-stop 
 the play is to second base and then, if there is still 
 time, to first for a double. If every man on the team 
 knows that this is the play and does his part accord- 
 ingly without hesitation it is a case of team-play; on 
 the other hand if the men have not been drilled in this 
 the throw may go to first, putting the runner out there 
 but allowing the man nearest home, the most dangerous 
 runner, to get to third. In the same way, if, under the 
 same conditions, the ball is hit to first-baseman or to 
 third-baseman, the play is to first. Without a thor- 
 ough knowledge of team-play the ball in this case may 
 go to second too late to retire the runner from first. 
 
 With men on first and third and a hit anywhere 
 save to short infield the play should be to second or 
 first, allowing the man on third to score, since it is 
 probable that he has taken sufficient lead to allow him 
 to beat out the ball if it is thrown to the plate. 
 
 When two men are out the play should be for the 
 batsman, since a run made on a third out does not 
 count. An exception to this is made when the hit goes 
 where an easy toss to base is certain to secure a force- 
 out. In these plays every man on the nine should know 
 instantly where the ball ought to go and govern him- 
 self accordingly. This is common, every-day team- 
 play and the most important of all. Learn this first 
 and acquire signal plays afterward. 
 
196 BASEBALL 
 
 VOCABTJLAKY 
 
 Assist. — The cooperation of one fielder with a second by which a 
 base-runner is or should be retired. 
 
 Bag. — A term applied to either first, second or third base; also 
 called " cushion." 
 
 At Bat. — The side whose turn it is to score or try to score is 
 said to be at bat. The term is applied in the same way to 
 a batsman. 
 
 Balk. — A balk is made when a pitcher with the view of deceiv- 
 ing a batsman or a base-runner motions as if to pitch the 
 ball and fails to do so. 
 
 Ball. — The leather- covered sphere used in playing the game; a 
 pitched ball which does not pass over the plate at an alti- 
 tude higher than the batsman's knee and lower than his 
 shoulder and at which he does not strike. 
 
 Base-Hit. — Any hit so made that, barring an error on the part 
 of the opponent, it can not be fielded in time to prevent the 
 batsman from reaching first base. 
 
 Base-Lines. — The lines leading from one base to another and 
 forming the " diamond." 
 
 Baseman. — A player whose duty it is to guard first, second or 
 third base and to field all balls coming into his territory. 
 
 Base on Balls. — First base accorded the batsman when the 
 pitcher has delivered four balls to him. 
 
 Bases. — The goals located at the four corners of the infield or 
 diamond to which the players run while making or attempt: 
 ing to make a tally. They are four in number, as follows: 
 first base, second base, third base and home base. They are 
 ninety feet distant from each other. The first three are 
 marked by canvas bags, the latter by a rubber plate set flush 
 with the ground. 
 
 Base-Runner. — A batsman who is not put out at the plate be- 
 comes a base-runner; also called runner. 
 
VOCABULARY 197 
 
 Bat. — The wooden implement with which the ball is struck. 
 
 Batting Ordee. — The order in which players of a side take their 
 turns at bat. 
 
 Batsman. — The player whose turn it is to stand at the home 
 base and hit the ball. 
 
 Batsman's Box. — The oblong space six feet by four feet marked 
 out on either side of the home base in which the batsman 
 must stand while striking at the ball. 
 
 Battery. — The pitcher and catcher. 
 
 Block Ball. — A ball touched while it is in play by any person 
 not actively engaged at the time in the game. 
 
 Box. — The space occupied by the pitcher; it applies also to the 
 space occupied by the batsman. 
 
 Bunt. — A short, slow hit. 
 
 Cage. — A mask. 
 
 Called Game. — A game terminated by the umpire. 
 
 Catcher^ — The player whose position is behind the home base 
 and who, with the pitcher, comprises the battery. 
 
 Catcher's Lines. — Lines formed back of home base by a con- 
 tinuation of the foul-lines and running to the limits of the 
 field. 
 
 Center-Fielder. — The player who occupies a position in the out- 
 field between right-fielder and left-fielder. 
 
 Chance. — An opportunity to put out a runner or to assist in 
 putting him out. 
 
 Change of Pace. — The substitution of fast balls for slow ones, 
 or vice versa, on the part of the pitcher. 
 
 Coacher. — A player who advises one of his own side while the 
 game is in progress. 
 
 Coacher's Box. — The space situated back of first and of third 
 base in which the coacher must remain. 
 
 Command. — A pitcher is said to have command of the ball when 
 he is able to put it where he wants it with relation to the 
 plate. 
 
 Curve. — A pitched ball which describes an arc. There are sev- 
 eral curves recognized, such as the out curve, the in curve 
 and the drop curve. 
 
198 BASEBALL 
 
 Dead Ball. — A pitched ball not struck at which touches any 
 portion of the batter's or umpire's person or clothing with- 
 out first passing the catcher. 
 
 Deep Field. — The far outfield; also, an infielder is said to play 
 a deep field when he takes a position well back from the 
 base-lines. 
 
 Diamond. — The field of play; more properly the infield. 
 
 Drop. — A pitched ball which has a descending curve. 
 
 Double Play. — A fielding play by which two of the opponents 
 are retired. 
 
 Earned Run. — A run made without the aid of opponent's errors. 
 
 Error. — A misplay by which the opponent profits; specifically, a 
 misplay which allows a batsman or base-runner to make 
 one or more bases when perfect playing would have insured 
 his retirement. Battery errors are not scored as errors. 
 
 Fair Ball. — A pitched ball passing over the home base not lower 
 than the batsman's knee nor higher than his shoulder. 
 
 Fair Hit. — A batted ball remaining in the territory enclosed by 
 the foul-lines until it has passed first or third base. 
 
 Field. — The place where the game is played; to catch or other- 
 wise recover a batted ball and throw it to a baseman or 
 catcher. 
 
 Fielders. — All members of a team except pitcher and catcher. 
 
 First Base; First-Baseman. — The base to the right of home 
 base and the player whose duty it is to guard it and field all 
 balls in its vicinity. 
 
 Fly Ball. — A ball batted into the air, as opposed to one batted 
 to the ground. 
 
 Forced Out. — A base-runner is forced out, if, when compelled to 
 make room for another runner on a base, he is unable to reach 
 the next base ahead of the ball or is tagged with the ball 
 by an opponent. 
 
 Forfeited Came. — A game called by an umpire and awarded to 
 one team for any violations of the rules by the other team. 
 
 Foul Ball. — A batted ball which goes into foul ground, except in 
 the case of a foul tip. 
 
VOCABULAKY 199 
 
 Foul-Lines. — Lines limiting the fair territory and running from 
 the home base through first and third bases to the extrem- 
 ity of the grounds. 
 
 Foul Strike. — A ball batted while the batsman is out of posi- 
 tion; also a foul-hit ball which under certain conditions is 
 scored a strike. 
 
 Foul Tip. — A foul hit which goes sharp from the bat to the 
 catcher's hands. 
 
 Fumble. — When a player stops a ball but loses time in handling 
 it he is said to have fumbled or " juggled" the ball. 
 
 Game. — The contest becomes a game after five innings have been 
 played or if declared forfeited by the umpire before that 
 time; a complete game consists of nine innings. 
 
 Gbound Hit. — A batted ball striking the ground and continuing 
 along it. 
 
 Home Run. — A complete circuit of the bases made on a hit. 
 
 Inning. — One of the nine periods of play; each inning is divided 
 into halves and each team is at bat for half an inning at a 
 time. 
 
 Infield. — The space ninety feet square bounded by the base- 
 lines. 
 
 Infieldees. — Those playing the infield positions ; i. e., first-base- 
 man, second-baseman, short-stop and third-baseman. 
 
 Inshoot. — An in-curved ball. 
 
 Juggle. — See Fumble. 
 
 Left at Bat. — A player who is at bat when a third out is made 
 at a base is said to have been left at bat; in which case he 
 is the first man at bat for his side in the next inning. 
 
 Left-Fieldee. — The player who occupies a position in the left 
 outfield. 
 
 Left on Base. — A runner holding a base when the third man is 
 put out is said to have been left on base. 
 
 Mask. — The wire protector worn by the catcher and sometimes 
 by the umpire to protect the face. 
 
 Muff. — A fly ball stopped but not caught. 
 
 Nine. — The team of nine players. 
 14 
 
200 BASEBALL 
 
 " No Game." — The ruling of the umpire when the contest is 
 stopped for any reason before five innings have been played. 
 
 Out. — Status of batsman or base-runner after being retired by 
 opponents. 
 
 Out-Shoot. — An out-curved ball. 
 
 Outfielders. — Right, center and left-fielders. 
 
 Passed Ball — A pitched ball passing the catcher and allowing 
 a runner to advance a base. 
 
 Pick-Up. — A fast ball taken from the ground by a fielder. 
 
 Pitches. — The player who delivers the ball to the batsman and 
 who with the catcher comprises the battery. 
 
 Pitcher's Box. — The oblong space from which the pitcher must 
 deliver the ball to the batsman. 
 
 Plate. — The home base. 
 
 Player's Lines. — Lines running parallel with and fifty feet back 
 from the foul-lines, starting at the catcher's lines and con- 
 tinuing to the limits of the grounds. 
 
 Put-Out. — A play by which a batsman or a base-runner is re- 
 tired. 
 
 Right-Fielder. — The player who occupies a position in the right 
 outfield. 
 
 Run Out. — A base-runner caught between bases by two or more 
 opponents and tagged with the ball is said to have been run 
 out. 
 
 Sacrifice Hit. — A hit made by a batsman with a view of ad- 
 vancing a runner on bases at the cost of being put out him- 
 self. 
 
 Second Base; Second-Baseman. — The base intervening between 
 first base and third base, and the player whose duty it is 
 to guard it and to field all balls in its vicinity. 
 
 Score. — A record of the contest; each team has a scorer, whose 
 duty it is to set down an official score as the contest proceeds. 
 
 Scorer. — See above. 
 
 Scratch Hit. — A hit which by fielders' errors or indecision yields 
 a base and which is not truly a base-hit. 
 
 Short Field. — That part of the outfield just back of the in- 
 
VOCABULAEY 201 
 
 field; also, an infielder is said to be playing a short field 
 
 when he takes a position in advance of the base-lines. 
 Short-Stop. — The infielder playing the position between second 
 
 and third bases. 
 Shut-Out. — An inning or a game in which one side prevents the 
 
 other side from scoring. 
 Slide. — A method of reaching a base to avoid being tagged with 
 
 the ball by sliding head first or feet first. 
 Stolen Base. — A base obtained by a runner without aid from 
 
 a hit by a batsman or an error by an opponent. 
 Straight Ball. — A pitched ball without curve. 
 Strike. — A pitcher's delivery which is a fair ball or at which 
 
 the batsman strikes without hitting; also, when not more 
 
 than one strike has been called, a foul-hit ball not caught 
 
 on the fly, a bunt into foul territory and a foul tip caught 
 
 by the batsman while within the lines of his position. 
 Strike-Out. — A strike-out is made when a batsman, with two 
 
 strikes called on him, fails to strike at a fair ball or strikes 
 
 at a ball and does not hit it. 
 Third Base; Third-Baseman. — The base intervening between 
 
 second base and home base, and the player whose duty it is 
 
 to guard it and to field all balls in its vicinity. 
 Thrown Out. — A base-runner is thrown out when the catcher or 
 
 pitcher throws the ball to a baseman in time to retire him. 
 Tie Game. — A game which terminates with the scores even. 
 " Time." — The order of the umpire suspending the play. 
 Time at Bat. — The term spent at the bat by a batsman. 
 Triple Play. — A fielding play by which three of the opponents 
 
 are retired. 
 Umpire. — The official whose duty it is to judge of plays and the 
 
 conduct of the players. 
 Wild Pitch. — A ball pitched out of reach of the catcher which 
 
 allows a base-runner to advance one or more bases. 
 Wild Throw. — A ball thrown out of reach of the player to whom 
 
 it was directed. 
 
202 BASEBALL 
 
 SCOKING 
 
 There are a great many systems of scoring a baseball game, a 
 large proportion of which are much too complicated for ordinary 
 use. For the person who wishes to keep a comprehensive record 
 of the game, and at the same time have enough leisure left to 
 enjoy the playing the following system will answer very well. 
 
 If possible use a regular score-book in which the spaces 
 allotted to each player's turn at bat are divided into five sections, 
 four corner sections and a central section. Begin by numbering 
 the players as follows: Pitcher 1, catcher 2, first-baseman 3, sec- 
 ond-baseman 4, third-baseman 5, short-stop 6, left-fielder 7, cen- 
 ter-fielder 8, right-fielder 9. Let A, B, and C indicate first, sec- 
 ond and third bases respectively. Let b stand for base on balls, 
 K for struck out, T for third strike muffed, L for foul fly caught 
 by catcher, e for drive missed, M for muff and W for wild throw. 
 Let a double cross (XX) signify an unsuccessful attempt to force 
 a runner out and put an s for a stolen base. Make a dot for 
 a run. 
 
 On a base-hit mark a cross in the upper left space, pointing 
 the longer arm of the cross in the direction of the hit. If it 
 is a two-base hit make two short arms to the cross, if a three- 
 base hit three short arms and if a home run four short arms. 
 Always score a hit when the drive is too hard or difficult for the 
 fielder to handle. When in doubt favor the batsman. 
 
 If a runner reaches first on a base-hit mark your single cross 
 in the upper left space. If he steals second put an s in the upper 
 right space. If he reaches third on third-baseman's fumble of 
 short-stop's throw mark 6-M-5 in the lower left space. If he 
 steals home on a wild throw by first baseman to the plate mark 
 W-3-2 in the lower right space and make a large dot in the 
 central space. 
 
 Other examples of scoring by this system are: M-4 muffed 
 fly by second-baseman, e-6 grounder went through short-stop, 9 
 
SCORING 203 
 
 fly to right-fielder, 6-3 out at first, short-stop to first-baseman, 
 6-4 out at second, short-stop to second-baseman, 3-A put out by 
 first-baseman unassisted. If a runner is put out mark the cen- 
 tral space with a 1, 2 or 3 according as he is the first, second or 
 third out. 
 
 If a player is run out between bases an assist as well as a 
 put out should be awarded the fielder, provided he handled the 
 ball previously in the play. Thus, 2-5-1-2 would indicate that 
 catcher had caught a runner off third and had eventually tagged 
 him out at the plate, third-baseman and pitcher assisting in run- 
 ning the man down. 
 
 Assists, put outs and errors should be tallied as the game 
 progresses in the columns for that purpose. 
 
204 
 
 BASEBALL 
 
 BASEBALL RECORDS 
 
 IMPORTANT COLLEGE GAMES OF 1903 
 
 May 2 — Yale, 5; Pennsylvania, 3. 
 May 9 — Pennsylvania, 7; Princeton, 3. 
 May 16 — Harvard, 6; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 May 18 — Cornell, 7 ; Pennsylvania, 5. 
 May 23 — Princeton, 6 ; Harvard, 5. 
 May 30 — Yale, 2 ; Princeton, 1. 
 June 6 — Princeton, 10; Yale, 6. 
 June 13 — Princeton, 7 ; Yale, 6. 
 June 13 — Harvard, 9 ; Pennsylvania, 0. 
 June 18 — Harvard, 5; Yale, 2. 
 June 23— Harvard, 10; Yale, 6. 
 
 1903 STANDING OF PRINCETON, HARVARD AND YALE 
 
 
 Princeton. 
 
 Harvard. 
 
 Yale. 
 
 Won. 
 
 Per Cent. 
 
 Princeton . 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 1 
 
 .750 
 
 Harvard 
 
 Yale 
 
 .667 
 
 .200 
 
 
 
 Lost 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRINCETON-YALE GAMES SINCE 1895" 
 
 1895— Yale, 1; Princeton, 0. 
 
 Yale, 9; Princeton, 8. 
 1896— Princeton, 13; Yale, 0. 
 
 Yale, 7; Princeton, 5. 
 
 Princeton, 5; Yale, 0. 
 
 Yale, 8; Princeton, 4. 
 1897— Yale, 10; Princeton, 9. 
 
 Princeton, 16; Yale, 8. 
 
 Princeton, 4; Yale, 3. 
 
 Princeton, 22; Yale, 8. 
 
BASEBALL RECORDS 205 
 
 1898— Princeton, 12; Yale, 7. 
 
 Yale, 6; Princeton, 4. 
 
 Yale, 8; Princeton, 3. 
 1899— Yale, 8; Princeton, 0. 
 
 Princeton, 6; Yale, 2. 
 
 Princeton, 1 1 ; Yale, 4. 
 1900— Princeton, 9; Yale, 3. 
 
 Princeton, 5; Yale, 4. 
 1901— Yale, 9; Princeton, 8. 
 
 Princeton, 15; Yale, 5. 
 
 Princeton, 5; Yale, 2. 
 1902— Yale, 10; Princeton, 6. 
 
 Princeton, 8; Yale, 5. 
 
 Yale, 5; Princeton, 4. 
 1903— Yale, 2; Princeton, 1. 
 
 Princeton, 10; Yale, 6. 
 
 Princeton, 7 ; Yale, 6. 
 
 PBINCETON-IIARVABD GAMES SINCE 1895 
 
 1895 — Princeton, 7; Harvard, 2. 
 
 Princeton, 14; Harvard, 2. 
 1896— Princeton, 17; Harvard, 9. 
 
 Princeton, 8 ; Harvard, 6. 
 
 Harvard, 8 ; Princeton, 5. 
 
 Princeton, 4; Harvard, 2. 
 1897— Princeton, 6; Harvard, 3. 
 
 Harvard, 7 ; Princeton, 4. 
 
 Princeton, 2; Harvard, 0. 
 1898— Princeton, 12; Harvard, 2. 
 
 Princeton, 9 ; Harvard, 2. 
 1899— Princeton, 10; Harvard, 2. 
 
 Princeton, 12 ; Harvard, 2. 
 1900 — Harvard, 4; Princeton, 0. 
 
 Princeton, 9; Harvard, 2. 
 1902— Princeton, 7; Harvard, 0. 
 1903 — Princeton, 6; Harvard, 5. 
 
206 
 
 BASEBALL 
 
 HABVABD-YALE GAMES SINCE 1895 
 
 1895— Yale, 7; Harvard; 4. 
 
 Yale, 5; Harvard, 0. 
 1896— No game. 
 1897— Harvard, 7; Yale, 5. 
 
 Harvard, 10; Yale 8. 
 1898— Harvard, 9; Yale, 4. 
 
 Yale, 7; Harvard, 0. 
 
 Yale, 3; Harvard, 1. 
 1899— Harvard, 4; Yale, 3. 
 
 Harvard, 13; Yale, 10. 
 1900— Yale, 15; Harvard, 5. 
 
 Harvard, 3; Yale, 0. 
 
 Harvard, 5; Yale, 2. 
 1901— Harvard, 7; Yale, 3. 
 
 Harvard, 3; Yale, 0. 
 1902— Yale, 7; Harvard, 2. 
 
 Harvard, 10; Yale, 4. 
 
 Harvard, 6; Yale, 5. 
 1903— Harvard, 5; Yale, 2. 
 
 Harvard, 10; Yale, 6. 
 
ADDITIONAL RECORDS 
 
BASEBALL KULES 209 
 
 BASEBALL BITLES FOR 1904 
 
 (By permission of the American Sports Publishing Company, owner of the copyright) 
 
 THE BALL-GROUND 
 Rule 1 
 The ball-ground must be enclosed and sufficient in size to 
 permit the players of the team not at bat to be stationed at the 
 positions respectively assigned to them by their captain. To 
 obviate the necessity for ground rules, the shortest distance from 
 a fence or stand on fair territory to the home base should be 235 
 feet, and from home base to the grand stand, 90 feet. 
 
 TO LAY OFF THE FIELD 
 
 Rule 2 • 
 
 To lay off the lines defining the location of the several bases, 
 the catcher's and the pitcher's position, and establishing the 
 boundaries required in playing the game of baseball, proceed 
 as follows: 
 
 DIAMOND OR INFIELD 
 
 From a point, A, within the grounds, project a straight line 
 out into the field, and at a point, B, 154 feet from point A, lay 
 off lines B and B D at right angles to the line A B; then, 
 with B as a center and 63.63945 feet as a radius, describe arcs 
 cutting the lines B A at F and B C at G, B D at H and B E at I. 
 Draw lines F G, G E, E H, and H F, which said lines shall be 
 the containing lines of the diamond or infield. 
 
 THE CATCHER'S LINES 
 
 Rule 3 
 With F as a center and 10 feet radius, describe an arc cutting 
 line F A at L, and draw lines L M and L at right angles to 
 F A, and continue same out from F A not less than 10 feet. 
 
210 BASEBALL 
 
 THE FOUL-LINES 
 
 Rule % 
 
 From the intersection point, F, continue the straight lines 
 F G and F H until they intersect the lines L M and L O, and 
 then from the points G and H in the opposite direction until 
 they reach the boundary-lines of the ground. 
 
 THE PLAYER'S LINES 
 
 Rule 5 
 
 With F as center and 50 feet radius, describe arcs cutting 
 lines F O and F M at P and Q; then, with F as center again 
 and 75 feet radius, describe arcs cutting F G and FHatE and 
 S; then, from the points P, Q, R, and S draw lines at right 
 angles to the lines F O, F M, F G, and F H, and continue the 
 same until they intersect at the points T and W. 
 
 • 
 
 THE COACHER'S LINES 
 
 Rule 6 
 
 With R and S as centers and 15 feet radius, describe arcs 
 cutting the lines R W and S T at X and Y, and from the points 
 X and Y draw lines parallel with the lines F H and F G, and 
 continue same out to the boundary-lines of the ground. 
 
 THE THREE-FOOT LINE 
 
 Rule 7 
 
 With F as a center and 45 feet radius, describe an arc cutting 
 the line F G at 1, and from 1 to the distance of three feet draw a 
 line at right angles to F G, and marked point 2; then from 
 point 2 draw a line parallel with the line F G to a point three 
 feet beyond the point G, marked 3 ; then from the point 3 draw 
 a line at right angles to line 2, 3, back to and intersecting with 
 F G, and from thence back along the line G F to point 1. 
 
BASEBALL KULES 211 
 
 THE BATSMAN'S LINES 
 
 Rule 8 
 
 On either side of the line A F B describe two parallelograms 
 six feet long and four feet wide (marked 8 and 9), their longest 
 side being parallel with the line A F B, their distance apart 
 being six inches added to each end of the length of the diagonal 
 of the square within the angle F, and the center of their length 
 being on said diagonal. 
 
 THE PITCHER'S PLATE 
 
 Rule 9 
 
 Section I. — With point F as centre and 60.5 feet as radius 
 describe an arc cutting the line F B at line 4, and draw a line 
 5, 6, passing through point 4 and extending 12 inches on either 
 side of line F B; then with line 5, 6, as a side, describe a parallel- 
 ogram 24 inches by 6 inches, in which shall be located the pitcher's 
 plate. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The pitcher's plate shall not be more than 15 inches 
 higher than the base-lines or the home plate, which shall be 
 level with the surface of the field, and the slope from the 
 pitcher's plate to every base-line and the home plate shall be 
 gradual. 
 
 THE BASES 
 
 Rule 10 
 
 Section 1. — Within the angle F, describe a five-sided figure, 
 two of the sides of which shall coincide with the lines F G and 
 F H to the extent of 12 inches each, thence parallel with the 
 line F B 8y 2 inches to the points X and Y, a straight line between 
 which, 17 inches, will form the front of the home base or plate. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Within the angles at G, I, and H describe squares, 
 whose sides are 15 inches in length, two of such sides of which 
 squares shall lie along the lines F G and G I, G I and I H, I H 
 and H F, which squares shall be the location of the first, second 
 and third bases respectively. 
 
212 BASEBALL 
 
 Rule 11 
 
 The home base at F and the Pitcher's Plate at 4 must each 
 be of whitened rubber, and so fixed in the ground as to be even 
 with its surface. 
 
 Rule 12 
 
 The first base at G, the second base at E, and the third 
 base at H must each be a white canvas bag 1 filled with soft 
 material and securely fastened in place at the point specified 
 for it in Rule 9. 
 
 Rule 13 
 
 The lines described in Rules 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 must be 
 marked with lime, chalk or other white material, easily dis- 
 tinguishable from the ground or grass. 
 
 THE BALL 
 
 Rule 14 
 
 Section 1. — The ball must weigh not less than five nor more 
 than five and one-quarter ounces avoirdupois, and measure not 
 less than nine nor more than nine and one-quarter inches in 
 circumference. The Spalding National League Ball or the Reach 
 American League Ball must be used in all games played under 
 these rules. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Two regulation balls of the make adopted by the 
 League of which the contesting clubs are members, shall be deliv- 
 ered by the home club to the umpire at or before the hour for 
 the commencement of a championship game. If the ball first 
 placed in play be batted or thrown out of the grounds or into 
 one of the stands for spectators, or, in the judgment of the 
 umpire, become unfit for play from any cause, the umpire shall 
 at once deliver the alternate ball to the pitcher and another 
 legal ball shall be supplied to him, so that he shall at all times 
 have in his control one or more alternate balls to substitute for 
 the ball in play in any of the contingencies above set forth. 
 Provided, however, that all balls batted or thrown out of the 
 
BASEBALL EULES 213 
 
 ground or into a stand, shall, when returned to the field, be 
 given into the custody of the umpire immediately and become 
 alternate balls, and so long as he has in his possession two or 
 more alternate balls, he shall not call for a new ball to replace a 
 ball that has gone out of play. The alternate balls shall become 
 the ball in play in the order in which they were delivered to the 
 umpire. 
 
 Sec. 3. — Immediately upon the delivery to him of the alternate 
 ball by the umpire, the pitcher shall take his position and on 
 the call of "Play," by the umpire, it shall become the ball in 
 play. Provided, however, that play shall not be resumed with 
 the alternate ball when a fair batted ball or a ball thrown by a 
 fielder goes out of the ground or into a stand for spectators 
 until the base-runners have completed the circuit of the bases 
 unless compelled to stop at second or third base in compliance 
 with a ground rule. 
 
 DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED BALLS 
 
 Sec. 4. — The ball in play shall not be intentionally discolored 
 by rubbing it with the soil or otherwise damaged. In the event 
 of a new ball being intentionally discolored, or damaged by a 
 player, the umpire shall, upon appeal by the captain of the 
 opposite side, forthwith demand the return of that ball and 
 substitute for it another legal ball, as hereinbefore described, 
 and impose a fine of $5.00 on the offending player. 
 
 HOME CLUB TO PROVIDE BALLS 
 
 Sec. 5. — In every game the balls played with shall be furnished 
 by the home club, and the last in play shall become the property 
 of the winning club. Each ball shall be enclosed in a paper box, 
 sealed with the seal of the secretary of the League and bearing 
 his certificate that he has examined, measured and weighed it, 
 and that it is of the required standard in all respects. The seal 
 shall not be broken by the umpire except in the presence of the 
 captains of the contesting teams after "Play" has been called. 
 
214 BASEBALL 
 
 RESERVE BALLS ON FIELD 
 
 Sec. 6. — The home club shall have at least a dozen regulation 
 balls on the field during each championship game, ready for use 
 on the call of the umpire. 
 
 UNFIT BALL FOR PLAY 
 
 Sec. 7. — Should the ball become ripped or in any way damaged 
 so as to be, in the opinion of the umpire, unfit for use, he shall, 
 upon appeal by either captain, at once call for a new ball and put 
 the alternate ball into play. 
 
 THE BAT 
 
 Rule 15 
 
 The bat must be round, not over two and three-fourth inches 
 in diameter at the thickest part, nor more than 42 inches in 
 length, and entirely of hardwood, except that, for a distance of 
 18 inches from the end, twine may be wound around or a gran- 
 ulated substance applied to the handle. 
 
 NUMBER OF PLAYERS IN A GAME 
 
 Rule 16 
 
 The players of each club, actively engaged in a game at one 
 time, shall be nine in number, one of whom shall act as captain; 
 and in no case shall more or less than nine men be allowed to 
 play on a side in a game. 
 
 POSITIONS OF THE PLAYERS 
 
 Rule 11 
 
 The players may be stationed at any point of the field their 
 captain may elect, regardless of their respective positions, 
 except that the pitcher, while in the act of delivering the ball to 
 the bat, must take his position as defined in Rules 9 and 30; 
 and the catcher must be within the lines of his position as defined 
 in Rule 3 and within 10 feet of home base, whenever the pitcher 
 delivers the ball to the bat. 
 
BASEBALL KULES 215 
 
 MUST NOT MINGLE WITH SPECTATORS 
 Rule 18 
 
 Players in uniform shall not be permitted to occupy seats in 
 the stands, or to mingle with the spectators. 
 
 UNIFORMS OF PLAYERS 
 Rule 19 
 
 Every club shall adopt two uniforms for its players, one to 
 be worn in games at home and the other in games abroad, and 
 the suits of each of the uniforms of a team shall conform in 
 color and style. No player who shall attach anything to the 
 sole or heel of his shoe other than the ordinary baseball shoe- 
 plate, or who shall appear in a uniform not conforming to the 
 suits of the other members of his team, shall be permitted to 
 take part in a game. 
 
 SIZE AND WEIGHT OF GLOVES 
 
 Rule 20 
 
 The catcher or first baseman may wear a glove or mitt of any 
 size, shape or weight. Every other player is restricted to the 
 use of a glove or mitt weighing not over 10 ounces and measuring 
 not over 14 inches around the palm. 
 
 PLAYERS' BENCHES 
 Rule 21 
 
 Section 1. — Players' benches must be furnished by the home 
 club and placed upon a portion of the ground not less than 
 twenty-five (25) feet outside of the players' lines. One such 
 bench shall be for the exclusive use of the visiting team and the 
 other for the exclusive use of the home team. Each bench must 
 be covered with a roof and closed at the back and each end; a 
 space, however, not more than six (6) inches wide may be left 
 under the roof for ventilation. All players and substitutes of 
 the side at bat must be seated on their team's bench, except the 
 
216 BASEBALL 
 
 batsman, base-runners and such as are legally assigned to coach 
 base-runners. Under no circumstances shall the umpire permit 
 any person except the players and substitutes in uniform and 
 the manager of the team entitled to its exclusive use to be seated 
 on a bench. 
 
 PENALTY FOR VIOLATION 
 
 Sec. 2. — To enforce this rule the captain of the other side 
 may call the attention of the umpire to its violation by his 
 opponents, whereupon the umpire shall immediately order such 
 player or players as have disregarded it to be seated. If the 
 order be not obeyed within one minute the offending player or 
 players shall be fined $5.00 each by the umpire. If the order be 
 not then obeyed within one minute, the offending player or 
 players shall be debarred from further participation in the game, 
 and shall be obliged to forthwith leave the playing-field. 
 
 A REGULATION GAME 
 
 Rule 22 
 
 Every championship game must be commenced not later than 
 two hours before sunset and shall continue until each team has 
 had nine innings, provided, however, that the game shall ter- 
 minate : 
 
 ( 1 ) If the side at bat scores less runs in nine innings than 
 the other side has scored in eight innings. 
 
 (2) If the side last at bat in the ninth inning scored the 
 winning run before the third man was out. 
 
 EXTRA-INNING GAMES 
 
 Rule 23 
 
 If the score be a tie at the end of nine (9) innings for each 
 team, play shall be continued until one side has scored more 
 runs than the other in an equal number of innings, provided, 
 that if the side last at bat score the winning run before the 
 third man is out in any inning after the ninth, the game shall 
 terminate. 
 
BASEBALL RULES 217 
 
 DRAWN GAMES 
 
 Rule 2/f' 
 
 A drawn game shall be declared by the umpire if the score 
 is equal on the last even inning played when he terminates play 
 on account of darkness, rain, fire, panic, or for other cause which 
 puts patrons or players in peril, after five or more equal innings 
 have been played by each team. But if the side that went 
 second to bat is at the bat when the game is terminated, and has 
 scored the same number of runs as the other side, the umpire 
 shall declare the game drawn without regard to the score at the 
 last equal inning. 
 
 CALLED GAMES 
 
 Rule 25 
 
 If the umpire call "Game" on account of darkness, rain, fire, 
 panic, or other cause which puts patrons or players in peril, at 
 any time after five innings have been completed, the score shall 
 be that of the last equal innings played, but if the side second 
 at bat shall have scored in an unequal number of innings, or 
 before the completion of the unfinished inning, one or more runs 
 than the side first at bat, the score of the game shall be the 
 total number of runs each team has made. 
 
 FORFEITED GAMES 
 Rule 26 
 
 A forfeited game shall be declared by the umpire in favor of 
 the club not in fault, at the request of such club, in the following 
 cases : 
 
 Section 1. — If the team of a club fail to appear upon the 
 field, or, being upon the field, refuse to begin a game for which 
 it is scheduled or assigned, within five minutes after the umpire 
 has called "Play" at the hour for the beginning of the game, 
 unless such delay in appearing, or in commencing the game, be 
 unavoidable. 
 
 Sec. 2. — If, after the game has begun, one side refuse to 
 15 
 
218 BASEBALL 
 
 continue to play, unless the game has been suspended or ter- 
 minated by the umpire. 
 
 Sec. 3. — If, after play has been suspended by the umpire, one 
 side fail to resume playing in one minute after the umpire has 
 called "Play." 
 
 Sec. 4. — If a team employ tactics palpably designed to. delay 
 the game. 
 
 Sec. 5. — If, after warning by the umpire, any one of the 
 rules of the game be wilfully and persistently violated. 
 
 Sec. 6. — If the order for the removal of a player, as author- 
 ized by Rules 21, 58 .and 64, be not obeyed within one minute. 
 
 Sec. 7. — If, because of the removal of players from the game 
 by the umpire, or for any cause, there be less than nine players 
 on either team. 
 
 Sec. 8. — If, when two games are scheduled to be played in 
 one afternoon, the second game be not commenced within ten 
 minutes of the time of the completion of the first game. The 
 umpire of the first game shall be the timekeeper. 
 
 Sec. 9. — In case the umpire declare the game forfeited, he 
 shall transmit a written report thereof to the president of the 
 League within twenty-four hours thereafter. However, a failure 
 on the part of the umpire to so notify the president shall not 
 affect the validity of his award of the game by forfeiture. 
 
 NO GAME 
 
 Rule 27 
 
 "No game" shall be declared by the umpire if he terminates 
 play on account of rain or darkness, fire, panic, or any other 
 cause which puts the patrons or players in peril before five 
 innings are completed by each team. Provided, however, that 
 if the club second at bat shall have made more runs at the end 
 of its fourth inning than the club first at bat has made in five 
 completed innings of a game so terminated, the umpire shall 
 award the game to the club having made the greater number 
 of runs, and it shall count as a legal game in the championship 
 record. 
 
BASEBALL KULES 219 
 
 SUBSTITUTES 
 
 Rule 28 
 
 Section 1. — Each side shall be required to have present on 
 the field during a championship game a sufficient number of 
 substitute players in uniform, conforming to the suits worn by 
 their team-mates, to carry out the provisions of this code, which 
 requires that not less than nine players shall occupy the field 
 in any inning of the game. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Any such substitute may at any stage of the game 
 take the place of a player, whose name is in his team's batting 
 order, but the player whom he succeeds shall not thereafter 
 participate in that game. 
 
 Sec. 3. — A base-runner shall not have another player whose 
 name appears in the batting order of his team run for him 
 except by the consent of the captain of the other team. 
 
 CHOICE OF INNINGS— FITNESS OF FIELD FOR PLAY 
 Rule 29 
 
 The choice of innings shall be given to the captain of the 
 home club, who shall be the sole judge of the fitness of the 
 ground for beginning a game after a rain; but, after play has 
 been called by the umpire, he alone shall be the judge as to the 
 fitness of the ground for resuming play after the game has been 
 suspended on account of rain. 
 
 THE PITCHING RULES 
 
 DELIVERY OF THE BALL TO THE BAT 
 
 Rule 30 
 
 Preliminary to pitching, the pitcher shall take his position 
 facing the batsman with both feet squarely on the ground and 
 in front of the pitcher's plate; and in the act of delivering the 
 ball to the bat he must keep one foot in contact with the pitcher's 
 
220 BASEBALL 
 
 plate defined in Rule 9. He shall not raise either foot until in 
 the act of delivering the ball to the bat, nor make more than one 
 step, in such delivery. 
 
 A FAIRLY DELIVERED BALL 
 Rule 31 
 
 A fairly delivered ball is a ball pitched or thrown to the bat 
 by the pitcher while standing in his position and facing the 
 batsman, that passes over any portion of the home base, not 
 lower than the batsman's knee, nor higher than his shoulder. 
 For every such fairly delivered ball, the umpire shall call one 
 strike. 
 
 AN UNFAIRLY DELIVERED BALL 
 
 Rule 32 
 
 An unfairly delivered ball is a ball delivered to the bat by 
 the pitcher while standing in his position and facing the bats- 
 man, that does not pass over any portion of the home base 
 between the batsman's shoulder and knee. For every unfairly 
 delivered ball, the umpire shall call one ball. 
 
 DELAYING THE GAME 
 Rule 33 
 
 Section 1. — If, after the batsman be standing in his proper 
 position ready to strike at a pitched ball, the ball be thrown 
 by the pitcher to any player other than the catcher when in the 
 catcher's lines and within 10 feet of the home base (except in 
 an attempt to retire a base-runner), each ball so thrown shall 
 be called a ball. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The umpire shall call a ball on the pitcher each 
 time he delays the game by failing to deliver the ball to the 
 batsman for a longer period than 20 seconds, excepting that at 
 the commencement of each inning, or when a pitcher relieves 
 another, the pitcher may occupy one minute in delivering not to 
 exceed five balls to the catcher or an infielder, during which 
 time play shall be suspended. 
 
BASEBALL EULES 221 
 
 BALKING 
 
 Rule 8/ t 
 A balk shall be: 
 
 Section 1. — Any motion made by the pitcher while in position 
 to deliver the ball to the bat without delivering it, or to throw 
 to first base when occupied by a base-runner, without com- 
 pleting the throw. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Throwing the ball by the pitcher to any base to 
 catch the base-runner without stepping directly toward such 
 base, in the act of making such throw. 
 
 Sec. 3. — Any delivery of the ball to the bat by the pitcher 
 while either foot is back of the pitcher's plate. 
 
 Sec. 4. — Any delivery of the ball to the bat by the pitcher, 
 while he is not facing the batsman. 
 
 Sec. 5. — Any motion in delivering the ball to the bat by the 
 pitcher while not in the position defined by Rule 30. 
 
 Sec. 6. — Holding of the ball by the pitcher so long as, in the 
 opinion of the umpire, to unnecessarily delay the game. 
 
 Sec. 7. — Making any motion to pitch while standing in his 
 position without having the ball in his possession. 
 
 Sec. 8. — Making any motion of the arm, shoulder, hip, or 
 body the pitcher habitually makes in his method of delivery, 
 without immediately delivering 1 the ball to the bat. 
 
 Sec. 9.— Delivery of the ball to the bat when the catcher 
 is standing outside the lines of the catcher's position as defined 
 in Rule 3. 
 
 If the pitcher shall fail to comply with the requirements 
 of any section of this rule, the umpire shall call a "balk." 
 
 DEAD BALL 
 Rule 35 
 A dead ball is a ball delivered to the bat by the pitcher, not 
 struck at by the batsman, that touches any part of the batsman's 
 person or clothing while standing in his position, or that before 
 passing or getting beyond the control of the catcher touches any 
 part of the clothing or person of the umpire while he is on foul 
 ground. 
 
222 BASEBALL 
 
 BALL NOT IN PLAY 
 
 Rule 36 
 In case of a foul strike, foul-hit ball not legally caught, dead 
 ball, or a fair-hit ball touching a base-runner, the ball shall not 
 be considered in play until it be held by the pitcher standing 
 in his position, and the umpire shall have called "Play." 
 
 BLOCK BALLS 
 Rule 31 
 
 Section 1. — A block is a batted or thrown ball that is 
 touched, stopped or handled by a person not engaged in the game. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Whenever a block occurs the umpire shall declare 
 it, and base-runners may run the bases without liability to be 
 put out until the ball has been returned to and held by the 
 pitcher in his position. 
 
 Sec. 3. — If the person not engaged in the game should retain 
 possession of a blocked ball, or throw or kick it beyond the 
 reach of the fielders, the umpire shall call "Time" and require 
 each base-runner to stop at the base last touched by him until 
 the ball be returned to the pitcher in his position and the 
 umpire shall have called "Play." 
 
 THE BATTING KULES 
 
 THE BATSMAN'S POSITION 
 
 Rule 38 
 
 Each player of the side at bat shall become the batsman 
 
 and must take his position within the batsman's lines (as defined 
 
 in Pule 8) in the order that his name appears in his team's 
 
 batting-list. 
 
 THE ORDER OF BATTING 
 
 Rule 39 
 The batting order of each team must be delivered before the 
 game by its captain to the umpire, who shall submit it to the 
 inspection of the captain of the other side. The batting order 
 
BASEBALL KULES 223 
 
 delivered to the umpire must be followed throughout the game 
 unless a player be substituted for another, in which case the 
 substitute must take the place in the batting order of the retired 
 player. 
 
 THE FIRST BATSMAN IN AN INNING 
 
 Rule 40 
 
 • After the first inning the first striker in each inning shall be 
 the batsman whose name follows that of the last man who com- 
 pleted his "time at bat" in the preceding inning. 
 
 PLAYERS BELONG ON BENCH 
 Rule 41 
 
 When a side goes to the bat its players must immediately 
 seat themselves on the bench assigned to them as defined in 
 Rule 21, and remain there until their side is put out, except 
 when called to the bat or to act as coachers or substitute base- 
 runners. 
 
 RESERVED FOR UMPIRE, CATCHER, AND BATSMAN 
 
 Rule 42 
 
 No player of the side "at bat," except the batsman, shall 
 occupy any portion of the space within the catcher's lines as 
 defined in Rule 3. The triangular space back of the home base 
 is reserved for the exclusive use of the umpire, catcher and 
 batsman, and the umpire must prohibit any player of the side 
 "at bat" from crossing the same at any time while the ball is 
 in the hands of the pitcher or catcher or passing between them 
 while standing in their positions. 
 
 FIELDER HAS RIGHT OF WAY 
 Rule 43 
 
 The players of the side at bat must speedily abandon their 
 bench and hasten to another part of the field when by remaining 
 upon or near it they or any of them would interfere with a 
 fielder in an attempt to catch or handle a thrown ball. 
 
224 BASEBALL 
 
 THE BATTING RULES 
 
 A FAIR HIT 
 
 Rule 44 
 
 A fair hit is a legally batted ball that settles on fair ground 
 between home and first base or between home and third base, or 
 that is on fair ground when bounding to the outfield past first 
 or third base, or that first falls on fair territory beyond first 
 or third base, or that touches the person of the umpire or a 
 player while on fair ground. 
 
 A FOUL HIT 
 Rule 45 
 
 A foul hit is a legally batted ball that settles on foul territory 
 between home and first base or home and third base, or that 
 bounds past first or third base on foul territory, or that falls 
 on foul territory beyond first or third base, or touches the person 
 of the umpire or a player while on foul ground. 
 
 A FOUL TIP 
 Rule 46 
 
 A foul tip is a ball batted by the batsman while standing 
 within the lines of his position, that goes sharp and direct from 
 the bat to the catcher's hands and is legally caught. 
 
 A BUNT HIT 
 
 Rule 47 
 
 A bunt hit is a legally batted ball, not swung at, but met 
 with the bat and tapped slowly within the infield by the batsman 
 with the expectation of reaching first base before the ball can be 
 fielded to that base. If the attempt to bunt result in a foul, 
 a strike shall be called by the umpire. 
 
BASEBALL RULES 225 
 
 BALLS BATTED OUTSIDE THE GROUND 
 Rule J/8 
 
 Section 1. — When a batted ball passes outside the ground 
 or into a stand the umpire shall decide it fair or foul according to 
 whether the point at •which it leaves the playing field is on fair 
 or foul territory. 
 
 Sec. 2. — A fair batted ball that goes over the fence or into a 
 stand shall entitle the batsman to a home run unless it should 
 pass out of the ground or into a stand at a less distance than 
 two hundred and thirty-five (235) feet from the home base, in 
 which case the batsman shall be entitled to two bases only. 
 The point at which a fence or stand is less than 235 feet from 
 the home base shall be plainly indicated by a white or black 
 sign or mark for the umpire's guidance. 
 
 STRIKES 
 
 Rule J f 9 
 
 A strike is : 
 
 Section 1. — A pitched ball struck at by the batsman without 
 its touching his bat; or, 
 
 Sec. 2. — A fair ball legally delivered by the pitcher at which 
 the batsman does not strike. 
 
 Sec. 3. — A foul -hit ball not caught on the fly unless the 
 batsman has two strikes. 
 
 Sec. 4. — An attempt to bunt which results in a foul. 
 
 Sec. 5. — A pitched ball, at which the batsman strikes but 
 misses and which touches any part of his person. 
 
 Sec. 6. — A foul tip, held by the catcher, while standing within 
 the lines of his position. 
 
 FOUL STRIKE 
 
 Rule 50 
 
 A "Foul Strike" is a ball batted by the batsman when either 
 or both of his feet is upon the ground outside the lines of the 
 batsman's position. 
 
226 BASEBALL 
 
 WHEN BATSMAN IS OUT 
 
 Rule 51 
 The batsman is out: 
 
 Section 1. — If he fail to take his position at the bat in the 
 order in which his name is on the batting list unless the error 
 be discovered and the proper batsman replace him before a time 
 " at bat" is recorded, in which case, the balls and strikes called 
 must be counted in the time "at bat" of the proper batsman. 
 But only the proper batsman shall be declared out, and no runs 
 shall be scored or bases run because of any act of the improper 
 batsman. Provided, this rule shall not be enforced unless the 
 out be declared before the ball be delivered to the succeeding 
 batsman. Should the batsman declared out under this section 
 be the third hand out and his side be thereby put out, the proper 
 batsman in the next inning shall be the player who would have 
 come to bat had the players been put out by ordinary play in the 
 preceding inning. 
 
 Sec. 2. — If he fail to take his position within one minute 
 after the umpire has called for the batsman. 
 
 Sec. 3. — If he make. a foul hit other than a foul tip, as 
 defined in Rule 46, and the ball be momentarily held by a fielder 
 before touching the ground; provided, it be not caught in a 
 fielder's cap, protector, pocket or other part of his uniform, or 
 strike some object other than a fielder before being caught. 
 
 Sec. 4. — If be make a foul strike, as denned in Rule 50. 
 
 Sec. 5. — If he attempt to hinder the catcher from fielding 
 or throwing the ball by stepping outside the lines of the bats- 
 man's position, or in any way obstructing or interfering with that 
 player. 
 
 Sec. 6. — If, while first base be occupied by a base-runner, 
 three strikes be called on him by the umpire, unless two men are 
 already out. 
 
 Sec. 7. — If, while attempting a third strike, the ball touch 
 any part of the batsman's person, in which case base-runners 
 occupying bases shall not advance, as prescribed in Rule 55, Sec- 
 tion 5. 
 
BASEBALL BITLES 227 
 
 Sec. 8. — If, before two hands are out, while first and second 
 or first, second and third bases are occupied, he hit a fly-ball, 
 other than a line-drive, that can be handled by an infielder. 
 In such case the umpire shall, as soon as the ball be hit, declare 
 it an infield or outfield hit. 
 
 Sec. 9. — If the third strike be called in accordance with Rule 
 49, Section 5. 
 
 BATSMAN MUST OBEY CALL 
 
 Sec. 10. — The moment a batsman's term at bat ends, the 
 umpire shall call for the batsman next in order to leave his seat 
 on the bench and take his position at the bat, and no player of 
 the batting side shall leave his seat on the bench until so called 
 to bat, except to become a coacher or substitute base-runner, to 
 take the place of a player on his team's batting list, to comply 
 with the umpire's order to leave the field, or to make way for a 
 fielder. 
 
 BASE-RUNNING RULES 
 
 LEGAL ORDER OF BASES 
 Rule 52 
 
 The base-runner must touch each base in legal order, viz., 
 first, second, third and home bases; and when obliged to return 
 while the ball is in play, must retouch the base or bases in 
 reverse order. He can only acquire the right to a base by 
 touching it, before having been put out, and shall then be entitled 
 to hold such base until he has legally touched the next base in 
 order, or has been legally forced to vacate it for a succeeding 
 base-runner. However, no base-runner shall score a run to count 
 in the game, ahead of the base-runner preceding him in the 
 batting order, if there be such preceding base-runner who has 
 not been put out in that inning. 
 
228 BASEBALL 
 
 WHEN THE BATSMAN BECOMES A BASE-RUNNER 
 
 Rule 53 
 
 The batsman becomes a base-runner: 
 
 Section 1. — Instantly after he makes a fair hit. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Instantly after "Four Balls" have been called by the 
 umpire. 
 
 Sec. 3. — Instantly after "Three Strikes" have been declared 
 by the umpire. 
 
 Sec. 4. — If, without making any attempt to strike at the ball, 
 his person or clothing be hit by a pitched ball unless, in the 
 opinion of the umpire, he plainly make no effort to get out of 
 the way of the pitched ball and purposely permit himself to be 
 hit. 
 
 Sec. 5. — If the catcher interfere with him in, or prevent him 
 from, striking at a pitched ball. 
 
 ENTITLED TO BASES 
 
 Rule 5Jf 
 
 The base-runner shall be entitled, without liability to be put 
 out, to advance a base in the following cases: 
 
 Section 1. — If, while the batsman, the umpire calls "Four 
 Balls," or award him first base by being hit by a pitched ball or 
 for being interfered with by the catcher in striking at a pitched 
 ball. 
 
 Sec. 2. — If, while the batsman, a fair-hit ball strike the 
 person or clothing of the umpire or a base-runner on fair ground. 
 
 Sec. 3. — If the umpire award to a succeeding batsman a base 
 on four balls, or for being hit by a pitched ball, or being inter- 
 fered with by the catcher in striking at a pitched ball and the 
 base-runner be thereby forced to vacate the base held by him. 
 
 Sec. 4. — If the umpire call a "Balk." 
 
 Sec. 5. — If a ball delivered by the pitcher pass the catcher 
 and touch the umpire or any fence or building within ninety ( 90 ) 
 feet of the home base. 
 
BASEBALL BULES . 229 
 
 Sec. 6. — If he be prevented from making a base by the ob- 
 struction of a fielder, unless the latter have the ball in his hand 
 ready to touch the base-runner. 
 
 Sec. 7. — If the fielder stop or catch a batted ball with his 
 cap, glove or any part of his uniform, while detached from its 
 proper place on his person. 
 
 RETURNING TO BASES 
 Rule 55 
 
 The base-runner shall return to his base without liability 
 to be put out: 
 
 Section 1. — If the umpire declare a foul tip (as defined in 
 Rule 46) or any other foul hit, not legally caught by a fielder. 
 
 Sec. 2. — If the umpire declare a foul strike. 
 
 Sec. 3. — If the umpire declare a dead ball, unless it be also 
 the fourth unfair ball, and he be thereby forced to take the next 
 base, as provided in Rule 54, Section 3. 
 
 Sec. 4. — If the person or clothing of the umpire interfere 
 with the catcher in an attempt to throw or the umpire be struck 
 by a ball thrown by the catcher or other fielder to intercept a 
 base-runner. 
 
 Sec. 5. — If a pitched ball at which the batsman strikes, but 
 misses, touch any part of the batsman's person. 
 
 Sec. 6. — In any and all of these cases the base-runner is not 
 required to touch the intervening bases in returning to the base 
 he is legally entitled to. 
 
 WHEN BASE-RUNNERS ARE OUT 
 
 Rule 56 
 
 The base-runner is out: 
 
 Section 1. — If, after three strikes have been declared against 
 him while the batsman, the third-strike ball be not legally 
 caught and he plainly attempts to hinder the catcher from fielding 
 the ball. 
 
 Sec. 2. — If, having made a fair hit while batsman, such fair- 
 hit ball be momentarily held by a fielder before touching the 
 ground or any object other than a fielder; provided, if it be not 
 
230 BASEBALL 
 
 caught in a fielder's hat, cap, protector, pocket or other part 
 of his uniform. 
 
 Sec. 3. — If, when the umpire has declared "Three Strikes" 
 on him while the batsman, the third-strike ball be momentarily 
 held by a fielder before touching the ground; provided, if it be 
 not caught in a fielder's cap, protector, pocket or other part 
 of his uniform, or touch some object other than a fielder before 
 being caught. 
 
 Sec. 4. — If, after three strikes or a fair hit, he be touched 
 with the ball in the hand of a fielder before he shall have touched 
 first base. 
 
 Sec. 5. — If, after three strikes or a fair hit, the ball be 
 securely held by a fielder while touching first base with any part 
 of his person before such base-runner touch first base. 
 
 Sec. 6. — If, in running the last half of the distance from 
 home base to first base, while the ball is being fielded to first 
 base, he run outside the three-foot lines, as denned in Rule 7, 
 unless he do so to avoid a fielder attempting to field a batted 
 ball. 
 
 Sec. 7. — If, in running from first to second base, from second 
 to third base, or from third to home base, he run more than 
 three feet from a direct line between a base and the next one 
 in regular or reverse order to avoid being touched by a ball in 
 the hands of a fielder. But in case a field be occupying a base- 
 runner's proper path in attempting to field a batted ball, then 
 the base-runner shall run out of direct line to the next base and 
 behind said fielder and shall not be declared out for so doing. 
 
 Sec. 8. — If he fail to avoid a fielder attempting to field a 
 batted ball, in the manner described in Sections 6 and 7 of this 
 rule, or in any way obstruct a fielder in attempting to field a 
 batted ball, or intentionally interfere with a thrown ball; pro- 
 vided, that if two or more fielders attempt to field a batted ball, 
 and the base-runner come in contact with one or more of them, 
 the umpire shall determine which fielder is entitled to the benefit 
 of this rule, and shall not decide the base-runner out for coming 
 in contact with a fielder other than the one the umpire deter- 
 mines to be entitled to field such batted ball. 
 
BASEBALL KULES 231 
 
 Sec. 9. — If, at any time while the ball is in play, he be touched 
 by the ball in the hands of a fielder, unless some part of his 
 person be touching the base he is entitled to occupy; provided, 
 however, that the ball be held by the fielder after touching him, 
 unless the base-runner deliberately knock it out of his hand. 
 
 Sec. 10. — If, when a fair or foul hit ball (other than a foul 
 tip as denned in Rule 46) be legally caught by a fielder, such 
 ball be legally held by a fielder on the base occupied by the base- 
 runner when such ball was batted, or the base-runner be touched 
 with the ball in the hands of a fielder, before he retouch such 
 base after such fair or foul hit ball was so caught; provided, 
 that the base-runner shall not be out in such case, if, after the 
 ball was legally caught as above, it be delivered to the bat by the 
 pitcher before the fielder hold it on said base, or touch the base- 
 runner out with it; but if the base-runner, in attempting to 
 reach a base, detach it from its fastening before being touched or 
 forced out, he shall be declared safe. 
 
 Sec. II. — If, when the batsman becomes a base-runner, the 
 first base, or the first and second bases, or the first, second and 
 third bases be occupied, any base-runner so occupying a base 
 shall cease to be entitled to hold it, and may be put out at the 
 next base in the same manner as in running to first base, or by 
 being touched with the ball in the hands of a fielder at any time 
 before any base-runner following him in the batting order be put 
 out, unless the umpire should decide the hit of the batsman to 
 be an infield fly. 
 
 Sec. 12. — If a fair-hit ball strike him before touching a 
 fielder, and, in such case, no base shall be run unless necessitated 
 by the batsman becoming a base-runner, but no run shall be 
 scored or any other base-runner put out until the umpire puts 
 the ball back into play. 
 
 Sec. 13. — If, when advancing bases, or forced to return to a 
 base, while the ball is in play, he fail to touch the intervening 
 base or bases, if any, in the regular or reverse order as the case 
 may be, he may be put out by the ball being held by a fielder 
 on any base he failed to touch, or by being touched by the ball 
 in the hands of a fielder in the same manner as in running to 
 
232 BASEBALL 
 
 first base; provided, that the base-runner shall not be out in such 
 case if the ball be delivered to the bat by the pitcher before the 
 fielder hold it on such base or touch the base-runner -with it. 
 
 Sec. 14. — If, when the umpire call "Play," after the suspension 
 of a game, he fail to return to and touch the base he occupied 
 when "Time" was called before touching the next base; provided, 
 the base-runner shall not be out, in such case, if the ball be 
 delivered to the bat by the pitcher, before the fielder hold it on 
 said base or touch the base-runner with it. 
 
 OVERRUNNING FIRST BASE 
 
 Sec. 15. — The base-runner in running to first base may over- 
 run said base after touching it in passing without incurring 
 liability to be out for being off said base, provided he return 
 at once and retouch the base, after which he may be put out 
 as at any other base. If, after overrunning first base, he turn 
 in the direction of or attempt to run to second base, before 
 returning to first base, he shall forfeit such exemption from 
 liability to be put out. 
 
 Sec. 16. — If, before two hands are out and while third base 
 is occupied, the coacher stationed near that base shall run in the 
 direction of home base on or near the base-line while a fielder 
 is making or trying to make a play on a batted ball not caught on 
 the fly, or on a thrown ball, and thereby draws a throw to home 
 base, the base-runner entitled to third base shall be declared out 
 by the umpire for the coacher's interference with and prevention 
 of the legitimate play. 
 
 Sec. 17. — If one or more members of the team at bat stand 
 or collect at or around a base for which a base-runner is trying, 
 thereby confusing the fielding side and adding to the difficulty 
 of making such play, the base-runner shall be declared out for 
 the interference of his team-mate or team-mates. 
 
 Sec. 18. — If he touch home base before a base-runner pre- 
 ceding him in the batting order, if there be such preceding base- 
 runner, lose his right to third base. 
 
BASEBALL KULES 233 
 
 WHEN UMPIRE SHALL DECLARE AN OUT 
 
 Rule 57 
 
 The umpire shall declare the batsman or base-runner out, 
 without waiting for an appeal for such decision, in all cases where 
 such player be put out in accordance with any of these rules, 
 except Sections 13 and 15 of Rule 56. 
 
 COACHING RULES 
 
 Rule 58 
 
 The coacher shall be restricted to coaching the base-runner, 
 and then only in words of assistance and direction in running 
 bases. He shall not, by words or signs, incite or try to incite the 
 spectators to demonstrations, and shall not use language which 
 will in any manner refer to or reflect upon a player of the 
 opposite club, the umpire or the spectators. Not more than two 
 coachers, who must be players in the uniform of the team at bat, 
 shall be allowed to occupy the space between the players' and the 
 coachers' lines, one near first and the other near third base, to 
 coach base-runners. If there be more than the legal number of 
 coachers or this rule be violated in any respect, the captain of 
 the opposite side may call the attention of the umpire to the 
 offense, and thereupon the umpire must order the illegal coacher 
 or coachers to the bench, and if his order be not obeyed within 
 one minute, the umpire shall assess a fine of $5.00 against each 
 offending player, and upon a repetition of the offense, the offend- 
 ing player or players shall be debarred from further participation 
 in the game, and shall leave the playing-field forthwith. 
 
 THE SCORING OF RUNS 
 Rule 59 
 
 One run shall be scored every time a base-runner, after having 
 legally touched the first three bases, shall legally touch the home 
 base before three men are put out; provided, however, that if he 
 16 
 
234 BASEBALL 
 
 reach home on or during a play in which the third man be 
 forced out or be put out before reaching first base, a run shall 
 not count. A force-out can be made only when a base-runner 
 legally loses the right to the base he occupies and is thereby 
 obliged to advance as the result of a fair-hit ball not caught on 
 the fly. 
 
 UMPIKE AND HIS DUTIES 
 
 POWER TO ENFORCE DECISIONS 
 Rule 60 
 
 The umpire is the representative of the League and as such is 
 authorized and required to enforce each section of this code. 
 He shall have the power to order a player, captain or manager 
 to do or omit to do any act which in his judgment is neces- 
 sary to give force and effect to one or all of these rules, and to 
 inflict penalties for violations of the rules as hereinafter pre- 
 scribed. 
 
 Rule 61 
 
 There shall be no appeal from any decision of the umpire on 
 the ground that he was not correct in his conclusion as to 
 whether a batted ball was fair or foul, a base-runner safe or out, 
 a pitched ball a strike or ball, or on any other play involving 
 accuracy of judgment, and no decision rendered by him shall be 
 reversed, except that he be convinced that it is in violation of 
 one of these rules. The captain shall alone have the right to 
 protest against a decision and seek its reversal on a claim that 
 it is in conflict with a section of these rules. 
 
 MUST NOT QUESTION DECISIONS 
 Rule 62 
 
 Under no circumstances shall a captain or player dispute the 
 accuracy of the umpire's judgment and decision on a play. 
 
BASEBALL KULES 235 
 
 CLUBS CAN NOT CHANGE UMPIRE 
 Rule 63 
 The umpire can not be changed during a championship game 
 by the consent of the contesting clubs unless the official in charge 
 of the field be incapacitated from service by injury or illness. 
 
 PENALTIES FOR VIOLATIONS OF THE RULES 
 Rule 6 k 
 In all cases of violation of these rules, by either a player or 
 manager, the penalty for the first offense shall be a fine by the 
 umpire of $5.00, and, for a second offense, prompt removal of the 
 offender from the game or grounds, followed by a period of such 
 suspension from actual service in the club as the president of the 
 League may fix. 
 
 UMPIRE TO REPORT VIOLATIONS OF THE RULES 
 
 Rule 65 
 The umpire shall, within twelve hours after fining or removing 
 a player from the game, forward to the president a report of the 
 penalty inflicted and the cause therefor. 
 
 Rule 66 
 Immediately upon being informed by the umpire that a fine has 
 been imposed upon any manager, captain or player, the president 
 shall notify the person so fined and also the club of which he is 
 a member; and, in the event of the failure of the person so fined 
 to pay to the secretary of the League the amount of said fine 
 within five days after notice, he shall be debarred from partici- 
 pating in any championship game or from sitting on a players' 
 bench during the progress of a championship game until such 
 fine be paid. 
 
 Rule 67 
 
 When the offense of the player debarred from the game be of a 
 flagrant nature, such as the use of obscene language or an assault 
 upon a player or umpire, the umpire shall within four hours 
 thereafter forward to the president of the League full particulars. 
 
236 BASEBALL 
 
 WARNING TO CAPTAINS 
 
 Rule 68 
 
 The umpire shall notify both captains before the game, and in 
 the presence of each other, that all the playing rules will be 
 strictly and impartially enforced, and warn them that failure on 
 their part to cooperate in such enforcement will result in offenders 
 being fined, and, if necessary to preserve discipline, debarred from 
 the game. 
 
 ON GROUND RULES 
 
 Rule 69 
 
 Before the commencement of a game the umpire shall see that 
 the rules governing all the materials of the game are strictly 
 observed. He shall ask the captain of the home club whether 
 there are any special ground rules, and if there be he shall acquaint 
 himself with them, advise the captain of the visiting team of their 
 scope and see that each is duly enforced, provided that it does 
 not conflict with any of these rules. 
 
 OFFICIAL ANNOUNCEMENTS 
 
 Rule 10 
 
 The umpire shall call "Play" at the hour appointed for the 
 beginning of a game, announce "Time" at its legal interruption 
 and declare "Game" at its legal termination. 
 
 SUSPENSION OF PLAY 
 
 Rule 11 
 
 The umpire shall suspend play for the following causes: 
 
 1. If rain fall so heavily as to cause the spectators on the open 
 field and open stands to seek shelter, in which case he shall note 
 the time of suspension, and should rain fall continuously for thirty 
 minutes thereafter he shall terminate the game. 
 
 2. In case of an accident which incapacitates him or a player 
 
BASEBALL RULES 237 
 
 from service in the field, or in order to remove from the grounds 
 any player or spectator who has violated the rules, or in case of 
 fire, panic or other extraordinary circumstances. 
 
 CALL OF TIME 
 
 Rule 72 
 
 In suspending play from any legal cause the umpire shall call 
 "Time"; when he calls "Time," play shall be suspended until he 
 calls "Play" again, and during' the interim no player shall be put 
 out, base be run or run be scored. "Time" shall not be called by 
 the umpire until the ball be held by the pitcher while standing 
 in his position. 
 
 DECISIONS ON BALLS AND STRIKES 
 
 Rule 73 
 
 The umpire shall call and count as a "ball" any unfair ball 
 delivered by the pitcher to the batsman. He shall also call and 
 count as a "strike" any fairly delivered ball which passes over any 
 portion of the home base, and within the batsman's legal range 
 as defined in Rule 31, whether struck at or not by the batsman; 
 or a foul tip which is caught by the catcher standing within the 
 lines of his position, within 10 feet of the home base; or which, 
 after being struck at and not hit, strike the person of the batsman ; 
 or when the ball be bunted foul by the batsman; or any foul-hit 
 ball not caught on the fly unless the batsman has two strikes; 
 provided, however, that a pitched ball shall not be called or 
 counted a "ball" or "strike" by the umpire until it has passed 
 the home plate. 
 
 Rule 74 
 
 If but one umpire be assigned, his duties and jurisdiction shall 
 extend to all points, and he shall be permitted to take his stand 
 in any part of the field that in his opinion will best enable him 
 to discharge his duties. If two umpires be assigned to a game, 
 the assistant umpire shall decide all plays at first and second 
 bases. 
 
238 BASEBALL 
 
 FIELD RULES 
 
 Rule 75 
 
 No person shall be allowed upon any part of the field during 
 the progress of a game except the players in uniform, the manager 
 of each side, the umpire, such officers of the law as may be present 
 in uniform, and such watchmen of the home club as may be 
 necessary to preserve the peace. 
 
 Rule 76 
 
 No manager, captain or player shall address the spectators 
 during a game except in reply to a request for information about 
 the progress or state of the game. 
 
 Rule 77 
 
 Every club shall furnish sufficient police force to preserve 
 order upon its own grounds, and in the event of a crowd entering 
 the field during the progress of a game, and interfering with the 
 play in any manner, the visiting club may refuse to play until the 
 field be cleared. If the field be not cleared within 15 minutes 
 thereafter, the visting club may claim and shall be entitled to 
 the game by a score of nine runs to none (no matter what number 
 of innings has been played). 
 
 GENERAL DEFINITIONS 
 
 Rule 78 
 
 "Play" is the order of the umpire to begin the game or to 
 resume it after its suspension. 
 
 Rule 79 
 
 "Time" is the order of the umpire to suspend play. Such 
 suspension must not extend beyond the day. 
 
 Rule 80 
 
 "Game" is the announcement of the umpire that the game is 
 terminated. 
 
BASEBALL EULES 239 
 
 Rule 81 
 
 "An Inning" is the term at bat of the nine players representing 
 a club in a game and is completed when three of such players have 
 been legally put out. 
 
 Rule 82 
 
 "A Time at Bat" is the term at bat of a batsman. It begins 
 when he takes his position, and continues until he is put out or 
 becomes a base-runner. But a time at bat shall not be charged 
 against a batsman who is awarded first base by the umpire for 
 being hit by a pitched ball or for the illegal delivery of the pitcher 
 or on called balls or when he makes a sacrifice hit. 
 
 Rule 83 
 "Legal" or "Legally" signifies as required by these rules. 
 
 THE SCOKING EULES 
 
 Rule 84 
 
 To promote uniformity in scoring championship games the 
 following instructions are given and suggestions and definitions 
 made for the guidance of scorers, and they are required to make 
 all scores in accordance therewith. 
 
 THE BATSMAN'S RECORD 
 
 Rule 85 
 
 Section 1. — The first item in the tabulated score, after the 
 player's name and position, shall be the number of times he has 
 been at bat during the game, but the exceptions made in Rule 82 
 must not be included. 
 
 Sec. 2. — In the second column shall be set down the runs, if 
 any, made by each player. 
 
 Sec. 3. — In the third column shall be placed the first-base hits, 
 if any, made by each player. 
 
240 BASEBALL 
 
 THE SCORING OF BASE HITS 
 
 Sec. 4. — A base hit shall be scored in the following cases : 
 
 When the ball from the bat strikes the ground on or within 
 the foul lines and out of reach of the fielders. 
 
 When a fair-hit ball is partially or wholly stopped by a fielder 
 in motion, but such player can not recover himself in time to field 
 the ball to first before the striker reaches that base or to force 
 out another base-runner. 
 
 When the ball be hit with such force to an infielder or pitcher 
 that he can not handle it in time to put out the batsman or force 
 out a base-runner. In a case of doubt over this class of hits, a 
 base hit should be scored and the fielder exempted from the charge 
 of an error. 
 
 When the ball is hit so slowly toward a fielder that he cannot 
 handle it in time to put out the batsman or force out a base- 
 runner. 
 
 In all cases where a base-runner is retired by being hit by a 
 batted ball, the batsman should be credited with a base hit. 
 
 When a batted ball hits the person or clothing of the umpire, 
 as defined in Rule 54, Section 2. 
 
 In no case shall a base hit be scored when a base-runner is 
 forced out by the play. 
 
 SACRIFICE HITS 
 
 Sec. 5. — In the fourth column shall be placed the sacrifice hits. 
 
 A sacrifice hit shall be credited to the batsman who, when no 
 one is out or when but one man is out, advances a runner a base 
 by a bunt-hit, which results in the batsman being put out before 
 reaching first, or would so result if it were handled without error. 
 
 FIELDING RECORDS 
 
 Sec. 6. — The number of opponents, if any, put out by each 
 player shall be set down in the fifth column. Where the batsman 
 is given out by the umpire for a foul strike, or fails to bat in 
 proper order, the put-out shall be scored by the catcher. In case 
 of the base-runner being declared "out" for interference, running 
 
BASEBALL EULES 241 
 
 out of line, or on an infield fly, the "out" should be credited to the 
 player who would have made the play but for the action of the 
 base-runner or the announcement of the umpire. 
 
 Sec. 7. — The number of times, if any, each player assists in 
 putting out an opponent shall be set down in the sixth column. 
 An assist should be given to each player who handles the ball in 
 aiding in a run-out or any other play of the kind, except the one 
 who completes it. 
 
 An assist should be given to a player who makes a play in time 
 to put a runner out, even if the player who could complete the 
 play fail, through no fault of the assisting player. 
 
 And generally an assist should be given to each player who 
 handles or assists in any manner in handling the ball from the 
 time it leaves the bat until it reaches the player who makes the 
 put-out, or in case of a thrown ball, to each player who throws 
 or handles it cleanly, and in such a way that a put-out results, or 
 would result if no error were made by a team-mate. 
 
 Assists should be credited to every player who handles the ball 
 in the play which results in a base-runner being called "out" for 
 interference or for running out of line. 
 
 ERRORS 
 
 Sec. 8. — An error shall be given in the seventh column for each 
 misplay which prolongs the time at bat of the batsman or allows 
 a base-runner to make one or more bases when perfect play would 
 have insured his being put out. But a wild pitch, a base on balls, 
 a base awarded to a batsman by being struck by a pitched ball, 
 an illegal pitch, a balk and a passed ball, each of which is a 
 battery and not a fielding error, shall not be included in the 
 seventh column. 
 
 An error shall not be charged against the catcher for a wild 
 throw in an attempt to prevent a stolen base, unless the base- 
 runner advance an extra base because of the error. 
 
 An error shall not be scored against the catcher or an infielder 
 who attempts to complete a double play, unless the throw be so 
 wild that an additional base be gained. 
 
 In case a base-runner advance a base through the failure of a 
 
242 BASEBALL 
 
 baseman to stop or try to stop a ball accurately thrown to his 
 base, he shall be charged with an error and not the player who 
 made such throw, provided there were occasion for it. If such 
 throw be made to second base the scorer shall determine whether 
 the second baseman or shortstop shall be charged with an error. 
 
 STOLEN BASES 
 
 Sec. 9. — A stolen base shall be credited to the base-runner 
 whenever he advances a base unaided by a base hit, a put-out, a 
 fielding or a battery error. 
 
 Rule 86 
 
 The Summary shall contain: 
 
 Section 1. — The score made in each inning of the game and 
 the total runs of each side in the game. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The number of stolen bases, if any, by each player. 
 
 Sec. 3. — The number of two-base hits, if any, made by each 
 player. 
 
 Sec. 4. — The number of three-base hits, if any, made by each 
 player. 
 
 Sec. 5. — The number of home runs, if any, made by each 
 player. 
 
 Sec. 6. — The number of double and triple plays, if any, made 
 by each side, and the names of the players assisting in the same. 
 
 Sec. 7. — The number of innings each pitcher pitched in. 
 
 Sec. 8. — The number of base hits, if any, made off each pitcher. 
 
 Sec. 9. — The number of times, if any, the pitcher strikes out 
 the opposing batsmen. 
 
 Sec. 10. — The number of times, if any, the pitcher gives bases 
 on balls. 
 
 Sec. 11. — The number of wild pitches, if any, charged to the 
 pitcher. 
 
 Sec. 12. — The number of times, if any, the pitcher hits a bats- 
 man with a pitched ball. 
 
 Sec. 13. — The number of passed balls by each catcher. 
 
 Sec. 14. — The time of the game. 
 
 Sec. 15. — The name of the umpire. 
 
TRACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS. 
 
 Edited by W. A. Schick, Jr., Harvard, '05, 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 The schoolboy who goes in for track or field ath- 
 letics should bear in mind at the outset that his future 
 value as an athlete depends very largely on whether 
 or not he overdoes things in the early years of train- 
 ing. Many a promising sprinter, runner or jumper 
 has been spoiled in the making; many a boy whose per- 
 formances on the school track or turf promised great 
 things for his college has fizzled out completely just 
 when he should have attained his greatest power. More 
 often than not it is the athletic trainer who is to blame. 
 Trainers — not all, by any means, but a large propor- 
 tion of them — allow their ambitions to turn out win- 
 ning teams to get the better of their common sense. 
 Schoolboys are capable of a good deal of hard work, 
 but they are not capable of the amount of work that 
 a college man is. Trainers are prone to lose sight of 
 this. A boy that is driven too hard will nine times out 
 of ten completely lose nervous force, and nervous force 
 is the prime factor of athletic success. The age at 
 which a boy may safely begin hard training varies in 
 different cases. Ordinarily a boy under sixteen should 
 
 245 
 
246 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 do very little work if lie hopes to attain success in col- 
 lege. Even at sixteen hard work is harmful unless the 
 muscles and nervous energy have been developed by 
 ordinary light exercise. 
 
 Specialization to be Avoided. — Besides driving 
 their charges too hard many trainers deny them a 
 thorough development of their powers by allowing 
 them to indulge in the form of athletics which they 
 like best to the exclusion of all others. The result is 
 that they are but partially developed physically, a fact 
 which may not trouble them for a while, but which in 
 later life will handicap them greatly. The rightful 
 purpose of physical training in schools is to turn out 
 strong, healthy boys with all-round developments, and 
 not specialists. After a boy has reached his growth 
 and come into the full endowance of power it is time 
 enough for him to put general training aside and go 
 in for some one special form of athletics. 
 
 A remarkable example of the all-around athlete was 
 Alvin C. Kraenzlein, of the University of Pennsylva- 
 nia. At twenty-three years of age he had no equal in 
 the world for excellence in various branches of ath- 
 letics. He was the best broad jumper in the world 
 (24 feet 4^ inches), the best hurdler at all distances, 
 an excellent 100-yards sprinter, and a wonderful per- 
 former with the hammer, shot and discus. He was also 
 proficient at high jumping and pole-vaulting. 
 
 This does not mean that a schoolboy should not 
 select sprinting or long-distance running or some 
 
INTRODUCTION 247 
 
 other specialty and strive to excel at it, but that he 
 should not do so to the detriment of his general all- 
 round physical development. And because trainers 
 are liable to err in this matter it becomes necessary 
 for the boy himself to be on his guard and to a certain 
 extent become his own trainer. The boy who goes in 
 for athletics should try to bring himself forward grad- 
 ually so that the zenith of his athletic powers will be 
 reached not in the last year at school but rather in the 
 second or third year at college. And even if he does 
 not intend to enter college his course should be the 
 same, for a boy whose nervous force has been sapped 
 from him by the time he leaves school is in poor con- 
 dition to enter a career of any sort. 
 
 Diet. — It is not possible to lay down hard and fast 
 rules in the matter of diet for track or field athletes. 
 For various reasons — one of which is the variety of 
 material going to make up a track team — a strict diet is 
 neither feasible nor advisable. In every team there will 
 be fellows on whom a radical change in diet will work 
 harm rather than good. It is well to have the team 
 at a training-table, but ordinarily four weeks prior to 
 the big meet will be time enough to start them there. 
 The things for the trainer to guard against are fast 
 eating and overeating rather than any special food, al- 
 though, of course, dishes such as pies and heavy pastry 
 which are likely to produce biliousness should be left 
 out of the menu. Regularity and good cooking are 
 essential, as are plenty of sleep, fresh air and lots of 
 
248 TRACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 pure water. With these there should be an atmosphere 
 of cheerfulness. 
 
 What to Wear. — The costume for the sprinter, 
 runner or hurdler should consist of a light-weight shirt 
 — mercerized cotton is very satisfactory — without 
 sleeves, trunks of china silk, sateen, cambric or silesia 
 that reach to just above the knees and are sufficiently 
 full everywhere to make binding impossible, and shoes 
 of soft calf or kangaroo leather, with the usual six 
 spikes in the toes. In the case of the hurdler two addi- 
 tional spikes set near the sides of a low heel are neces- 
 sary. For practise a pair of light cotton socks should 
 be worn to render the shoes more snug and keep them 
 from chafing the feet. In competition a pair of cham- 
 ois-leather pushers take the place of the socks. Grips 
 should be made of soft cork, and if elastics are attached 
 to slip over the backs of the hands their usefulness is 
 enhanced. 
 
TRACK ATHLETICS 
 I. Sprinting 
 
 The sprinter and the long-distance runner are as 
 widely apart in make-up as the pole-vault er and the 
 shot-putter. A sprinter must have at the outset a 
 strong heart, quick, supple muscles and lots of will. 
 Agility of body and high nervous force make the suc- 
 cessful sprinter. The long-distance runner requires 
 different qualities. 
 
 The ideal sprinter need be neither long nor short; 
 he may be either, so long as he develops his stride to 
 suit. But he has a broad back, strong abdominal mus- 
 cles and long legs with the muscles small rather than 
 large and very quick. Between B. J. "Wefers and A. F. 
 Duffy there is a difference of eight inches in height 
 and forty-five pounds in weight, TVefers standing 6 feet 
 1 inch and weighing 185 pounds, and Duffy being 5 
 feet 5 inches high and weighing 140 pounds. 
 
 Training for the sprints — and by this is meant the 
 indoor events, the 40-yards dash and the 300-yards run, 
 as well as the outdoor 100- and 220-yards dashes — re- 
 quires long, hard and patient work as compared with 
 training for the distances, although having once learned 
 
 how and reached condition the work is far easier than 
 17 249 
 
250 TRACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 in the latter. Erom the 40 yards to the 300 the re- 
 quirements are the same and the training is so nearly 
 similar that it is not necessary to give separate instruc- 
 tions for each. In all of these events it is the start that 
 counts, and consequently it is not possible for a sprinter 
 to become too proficient at it. 
 
 Prior to 1890 all sprinters stood erect upon their 
 marks with one arm extended. At the sound of the 
 pistol that arm was brought sharply down and the 
 sprinter leaped forward. The start was not greatly dif- 
 ferent from that used for distance running. Nowadays 
 every sprinter uses the college start (also variously 
 known as the " kangaroo," " all-fours," and " crouch- 
 ing " start) or some variation of it. 
 
 The Crouching Start. — This method of starting 
 was discovered by accident in 1890 by Lee, at that time 
 a crack sprinter of the New York Athletic Club and 
 lat^iTchampion of the world. One morning Lee and a 
 number of other sprinters were limbering up at Travers 
 Island. Lee got away so much quicker than the others 
 that the short dashes all resulted in his favor. Finally, 
 merely as a joke, he offered to handicap himself, and 
 got down on his hands and knees, then on knees and 
 toes, and finally hit upon the position as used to-day. 
 The start proved to be anything but a handicap and 
 Lee gained several yards every time he used it. 
 
 After a week spent in perfecting it Lee tried it in 
 public. He lost his race and his companions jeered at 
 what they called his " fool dog start." About a month 
 
TRACK ATHLETICS 251 
 
 later, on June 28, 1890, the " fool dog start " had its 
 vindication, Lee beating Fred Westing for the Eastern 
 Championship in a 220-yard dash at Staten Island. 
 Westing at that time was champion of America, Can- 
 ada and England and practically champion of the world, 
 and was noted far and wide for the quickness of his 
 starts. On this occasion, however, the " fool dog start " 
 got its inventor away fully two yards to the good and 
 Westing was defeated in a close finish. Two years later 
 Lee's start was accepted by experts in this country and 
 Canada as being the fastest known, and in England a 
 few professionals tried it. It was not, however, until 
 1895, when the team of the London Athletic Club 
 visited this country, that British amateurs recognized 
 the value of the start and adopted it. Lee himself ex- 
 plained the value of it as follows: 
 
 " The beauty of this start is that there can be no 
 false motion, no backward. step when the pistol cracks. 
 You dig your holes for your feet, and place your fingers 
 on the mark and lean all your weight upon them, with 
 your upper body out over the mark. The instant you 
 lift your fingers from the mark you begin to fall for- 
 ward, and you must run, and run hard, or you will fall 
 on your face. That it is the natural and proper way to 
 start its universal use proves." 
 
 How to Start. — The college start should be used 
 for all distances from thirty to three hundred yards. 
 The left foot is placed about six inches back of the 
 mark, the other foot about two feet back of that. Get 
 
252 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 a firm hold for each foot by digging deep depressions 
 in the track. The arms shuld be straight and the 
 finger-tips should rest on the mark with the thumbs 
 in line with the toes of the forward foot. Some 
 sprinters put their knuckles to the ground, but the fin- 
 gers supply more spring. If the running corks are sup- 
 plied with elastics to slip over the backs of the hands 
 it will not be necessary to keep hold of them. While 
 waiting for the command to get set let yourself down 
 comfortably on the knee of the rear leg. 
 
 At the word " Set! " the runner throws his weight 
 forward as far as he can without toppling over, keeping 
 his head back so that he has a clear view of the track. 
 The weight of the body should now be shared about 
 equally by the front leg and the hands. In this position 
 a strong steady balance can be maintained for some 
 time. At the sound of the pistol the hands are raised, 
 the rear foot pushes off with all possible force and the 
 weight of the body is thrown suddenly on to the front 
 leg. The runner is now falling forward, and if he makes 
 no further effort will land prone on his face. But the 
 back leg is brought quickly to the front and the runner 
 takes two or three strides in a crouching position, grad- 
 ually bringing himself erect as he recovers his equilib- 
 rium. Any attempt to straighten up at once will undo 
 the work. Dive forward and put every effort into the 
 first five or six strides in order to get into pace as soon 
 as possible. Much depends upon this; a quick start is 
 good, but , it is possible for a runner to lose what advan- 
 
TKACK ATHLETICS 253 
 
 tage lie has gained from the start by neglecting to sum- 
 mon every muscle to his aid in the first few strides. 
 Endeavor to run straight, putting one foot directly in 
 front of the other as far as possible. The feet should 
 meet the ground pointing straight forward and not at 
 an angle, as in walking. The arms should be left to 
 take care of themselves, as they will at once adjust 
 themselves to the motion of the body. The start is 
 more than half the battle and should be practised fre- 
 quently, taking care, however, not to overdo it. Too 
 many starts, especially at the commencement of prac- 
 tise, will render the muscles of the legs sore and stiff, 
 and the runner will find that instead of increasing his 
 speed he has lessened it. Early in the season four or 
 five starts a day will in most cases prove as much as 
 the runner can stand. He should get off his mark at 
 the report of a pistol and go fifteen yards or so at his 
 best speed, being careful always to work in good form. 
 
 The Pace. — Five or six strides should bring the 
 runner into his pace, body erect save for a slight for- 
 ward inclination and chin held well in. The arms will 
 look after themselves until the pace is found, and as a 
 general thing after that. But occasionally it is -neces- 
 sary to correct a disposition on their part to swing back 
 of the body. This serves in a measure to retard the 
 speed. The arms should swing from the elbows rather 
 than from the shoulders and always in advance of the 
 body rather than alongside. 
 
 The Stride. — Every runner must find his own 
 
254 TEACK AND . FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 stride; what it is to be depends on the length of leg. 
 To a certain extent the runner with long legs has an 
 advantage over the one with short legs, yet the latter 
 by a rapid succession of shorter strides can often equal- 
 ize matters, since a long stride must of necessity be 
 slower. Don't strain after a long stride. If you can 
 accomplish it naturally well and good; if you can not, 
 use the stride nature intended you should. Eorm is 
 what counts in sprinting, and a short stride may be in 
 just as good form as a long one. 
 
 Be sure to land on the front of the foot, that is, the 
 toes and the ball, and not on the toes alone. The foot 
 should come down very nearly flat to the track, but the 
 heel should not touch. Never kick your heels up be- 
 hind, as by so doing you cause loss of locomotion and 
 speed by making the legs trail through a greater space 
 than is necessary. Care should be taken to come down 
 upon the ground lightly at every step. This is some- 
 thing that may be easily learned in practise and is far 
 more important than it sounds, since much jarring soon 
 tires the muscles and nerves. 
 
 Training. —As has been said, the training necessary 
 for the four events which are grouped under the gen- 
 eral title of sprints, i. e., the 40-yards, the 100-yards, the 
 220-yards and the 300-yards dashes, is much the same ; 
 yet there must of necessity be some difference between 
 preparing for a 40-yards dash indoors and a 220-yards 
 dash on the cinders. Whatever the event or events to 
 be trained for the runner should not undertake serious 
 
TKACK ATHLETICS 255 
 
 work until by preliminary training of a general sort 
 he has hardened and quickened his muscles and brought 
 his body as a whole to a condition where moderately 
 hard work will not exhaust it. The 40-yards dash is 
 just a dash and no more, a wild scramble of some twenty 
 odd strides consuming from start to finish but four and 
 a half or five seconds. In short, it is a prolonged start, 
 and in it more than in any other event the start is the 
 principal thing. In training for it it is best to run the 
 entire distance at every attempt, using every effort to 
 start quickly and get the pace not later than the fourth 
 stride. After that there is no possibility for the slight- 
 est let up; in point of fact, the 40-yards man should 
 increase his speed all the way to the tape and finish at 
 the best speed he is capable of. 
 
 The 100-yards man should begin his active training 
 by practising three or four starts and then going on 
 for about 50 yards at three-quarters speed. Increase 
 the severity of the work very gradually and stop the 
 moment fatigue comes. After a few days make a point 
 of running the entire 100 yards at three-quarters speed, 
 but only do that distance at full speed once a week. 
 The three days preceding the contest should be days of 
 rest. On the first two take some slow work in order to 
 keep the muscles in good condition and on the last lay 
 off entirely. 
 
 All this applies to the 220 yards in a general way, 
 though of course the runner must accustom himself to 
 longer trials in this case. For ordinary work from 150 
 
256 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 to 175 yards is a good distance to cover, reserving the 
 full 220 for a special once-a-week effort. The 300-yards 
 man should substitute 200 yards for every-day trials. 
 It is an excellent general rule that a runner should not 
 run a trial for more than two-thirds of his distance save 
 once a week. Never start a race without first warming 
 up thoroughly and never slow up suddenly afterward. 
 A sprained tendon or a torn muscle may result in either 
 case. This is important. 
 
 When running never look behind and never allow 
 the actions of the other competitors to worry you. Pay 
 no heed to them, but give all thought and effort to your 
 race. Breathe naturally — that is, through the mouth. 
 When you near the finish-line don't let up in your 
 speed no matter how sure of the race you may feel. 
 Try to keep the body well forward at the finish. There 
 is always a tendency to draw back the head and shoul- 
 ders when tired, which greatly retards the speed. Fin- 
 ish hard. It is better to throw the chest forward and 
 allow the arms to swing naturally than to throw the 
 latter into the air. Slow down by degrees. 
 
 II. Middle-distance Running 
 
 The middle distances include the quarter-mile run 
 (440-yards dash), the 600-yards run (an indoor event), 
 the half-mile run (880-yards dash) and the 1,000-yards 
 run (an indoor event). In each of these speed must 
 be reenforced by endurance. The quarter-mile as run 
 
TKACK ATHLETICS 257 
 
 nowadays usually consists of a first 100 yards at a speed 
 as near ten seconds as possible followed by 340 yards 
 in something about forty seconds. In other words, it is 
 necessary to do the first hundred yards at top speed and 
 then have staying power sufficient to enable you to keep 
 up a speed very little short of that to the end. This is 
 true also of the 600 yards. In the half-mile event en- 
 durance comes to the fore and speed — such speed, at 
 least, as we associate with the sprinter — is of second- 
 ary consideration. The 1,000-yards run, since it is an 
 indoor event and performed on a short track with raised 
 turns, is naturally a comparatively slow performance. 
 
 Preliminary Work. — The candidate for any of the 
 middle distances should begin his work as soon as the 
 snow is off the ground in the spring. Daily walks and 
 jogs covering from two to three miles across country 
 should be followed by baths and brisk rub-downs. 
 From a fortnight to a month of this preparation should 
 put the runner in hard physical condition and give him 
 a very considerable lung power. 
 
 The Quarter-Mile. — As soon as it is possible to 
 get on to the track begin by running two 220-yard dis- 
 tances at three-quarters speed, resting between. On 
 the following day do a moderate mile. In a similar way 
 alternate long and short distances for the next six 
 weeks, doing a fast 100 yards now and then to develop 
 sprinting ability and not oftener than once in two weeks 
 going the quarter-mile at top speed. Two or three 
 times a week the crouching start should be practised. 
 
258 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 The first part of a quarter-mile race is usually a short 
 dash to secure the pole, which is a decided advantage, 
 and consequently much may depend upon the runner's 
 ability to get off his mark quickly. 
 
 This should bring you to about the first week in 
 May, when speed trials may become more frequent and 
 when it will be well to pay more attention to sprinting. 
 It is very important that you should be able to tell 
 accurately how fast you are running. This is a dim- 
 cult trick to learn, but by having some one hold a watch 
 on you two or three times a week for various distances, 
 such as the 100, 150, and 300 yards, you will soon be 
 able to judge your pace very accurately. As in the 
 sprints, no work other than mere muscular exercise 
 should be performed during the three days preceding 
 the contest and no speed trial should be held later than 
 a week before the meet. 
 
 The pace is the same as for the sprints. The form 
 too is identical save that possibly the body should be 
 kept more nearly erect. 
 
 The quarter-mile affords little opportunity for strat- 
 egy and the best rule is, Get the lead and hold it. After 
 that keep well within yourself in order to finish as 
 strong as possible. As in the sprints, don't worry about 
 the others, but keep your eyes ahead and your mind 
 on the contest. 
 
 The Half-Mile. — There is not much to say of the 
 half-mile that has not been said of the quarter. The 
 early spring work should be the same, while the track 
 
TKACK ATHLETICS 259 
 
 preparation may be conducted on the same general 
 lines; alternate long and short runs, an occasional sprint 
 to develop the ability to spurt when necessary — ob- 
 serving care here lest sprained muscles result — and a 
 fortnightly speed trial over the full distance. The half- 
 miler is even more dependent for success on his ability 
 to judge his pace than is the quarter-miler, and this 
 ability should be one of the first things gained. The 
 start for. the half-mile is usually the standing-start, 
 though of course there is no reason why the college 
 start should not be used if desired. At least the half- 
 miler should know how to start from the crouching posi- 
 tion quickly since it will sometimes happen that his 
 success will depend to some extent on his being able 
 to get the pole at the beginning of the race. 
 
 Generalship. — The half-mile, like the mile and 
 two-mile runs, and unlike the sprints and the quarter, 
 affords an excellent chance for generalship, individual 
 and team. A runner who is trained to run the first 
 half of the distance at high speed in the hope of being 
 able to distance the field and then by sheer dogged 
 endurance hold his place will often fall victim to the 
 runner who is trained to let some one else set the pace 
 and then show a wonderful burst of speed on the last 
 half lap. When there are two or more entries from 
 the same team the race should be planned beforehand. 
 Things don't always happen just as they are supposed 
 to, but in almost every case a little planning will help, 
 while more often than not it will save the day. Study 
 
260 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 your opponent's work and study the performances of 
 the best men at your distance. And stick to your dis- 
 tance; if you are a half-miler do not in competition 
 try for the quarter or the mile. There is glory enough 
 in being a good half-miler and unless you are much 
 above the ordinary that will give you all the work you 
 can stand. 
 
 III. Long-distance Running 
 
 Long-distance running is the antithesis of sprinting. 
 In the sprint speed is everything; in the mile and two- 
 mile runs endurance is the first requirement. 
 
 Training should begin early in the winter with 
 calisthenics in the gymnasium to strengthen the back 
 and abdominal muscles. As soon as the runner can 
 get outdoors he should start to work strengthening the 
 heart and lungs by jogging slowly over a half mile the 
 first day, a mile the second and then, if he does not 
 find himself fatigued, going the next day two, three 
 or four miles at an easy pace. Perseverance is what 
 counts, and that and a cheerful willingness to work 
 will win out in the end, for long-distance running is one 
 of the things one does not have to be born to; with 
 health, patience and perseverance any boy may develop 
 himself into a creditable miler. 
 
 A long, comfortable stride should be sought for. 
 This does not mean that you are to exhaust yourself 
 day after day trying to attain a length of stride which 
 your build naturally prohibits; only that you should 
 
TRACK ATHLETICS 261 
 
 seek to lengthen your stride by just that little which 
 is probably within your power to attain and which may 
 mean a good deal in the contest. 
 
 Do not get it into your head that because you are 
 training for the distances you are not required to do 
 any fast work. Mr. Malcolm Ford has laid down the 
 following schedule for a man who is training for the 
 mile run : 
 
 " Monday, three-quarters of a mile. 
 
 " Tuesday, a fairly fast 600 yards, followed by a 
 few sprints of 50 or 100 yards. 
 
 " Wednesday, a steady one mile. 
 
 " Thursday, one-half mile at an easy pace. 
 
 " Saturday, some sprinting ranging up to 440 
 yards." 
 
 It may be seen from this that the distance man 
 should practise sprinting in order that he may be able 
 to show a burst of speed at the finish if necessary. 
 
 It is well for the runner to train slightly over his 
 distance; if he can do a mile and a half in practise so 
 much the better, even if he is to do only the mile in 
 competition. Endurance is the thing to work for, and 
 endurance means strength of heart and lungs and mus- 
 cles. By running over his distance the miler or two- 
 miler will not only strengthen these but will also learn 
 to regulate his breathing — a difficult feat at first 
 — and accumulate sufficient energy in reserve to en- 
 able him to increase his speed in the last 100 yards of 
 the race. 
 
262 TEACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 It is possible, however, to overdo this and to 
 weaken rather than strengthen the heart and to wear 
 down the system by doing excessive distances in train- 
 ing. Running over your distance does not mean doub- 
 ling or tripling it. 
 
 The milee and two-mileb, like the half-miler, 
 should know how fast he can run the quarter, half, three- 
 quarters and distance. He must be a good judge of pace. 
 In a contest he should hold himself down to his speed 
 no matter what efforts his competitors may make to 
 draw him out. He should run on his own time and 
 pay no heed to what the others are doing. On the last 
 quarter he should resist all temptation to shorten his 
 stride and run out of form. The temptation to do so 
 will be strong to the inexperienced runner; he is be- 
 coming tired, the field is going by him and the main 
 thing seems to him to be to hurry up at any cost. But 
 don't do it. Keep your form every minute and don't 
 clip your stride. If you have been running over your 
 distance in practise perhaps you will be able in the last 
 hundred yards to alter your gait to the quarter-miler's 
 and finish in a hard sprint. 
 
 Be wary always of overwork while training; one 
 day's overexertion will often counteract a whole week's 
 progress. 
 
TEACK ATHLETICS 263 
 
 IV. Hurdling 
 
 The hurdling events are as follows: 
 
 High Hurdles— 120 yards; 10 hurdles 3 feet 6 
 inches high placed 10 yards apart with 15 yards clear 
 at start and finish. 
 
 Low Hurdles — 220 yards; 10 hurdles 2 feet 6 
 inches high placed 20 yards apart with 20 yards clear 
 at start and finish. 
 
 Indoor Hurdles — 45 yards; 4 hurdles 2 feet 6 
 inches high placed 10 yards apart. 
 
 The boy who goes in for the hurdles must be will- 
 ing to work hard and progress slowly. It has been 
 said that sprinters are born and not made. If true of 
 sprinters it is doubly so of hurdlers. The hurdler re- 
 quires all the attributes belonging to the sprinter, and 
 others beside. He must be strong, exceptionally supple 
 and must possess skill, nerve, dash and a cool head. To 
 excel in his line he must devote several years of hard 
 and patient practise to it. This may sound discour- 
 aging, and to offset it the reader is reminded that the 
 hurdler who succeeds accomplishes as much as it is pos- 
 sible to accomplish by devoting oneself to a single form 
 of athletics, and gains an all-round physical develop- 
 ment which few other forms supply. 
 
 Preliminary Training. — The hurdler's education 
 begins in the gymnasium with calisthenics to develop 
 the muscles of the body, and more especially those be- 
 low the waist. Rising alternately on toes and heels 
 
264 TRACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 and doing the double jump on the former are exercises 
 which should be practised daily. Raising the legs al- 
 ternately until the knees are level with the armpits; 
 throwing one leg, bent at the knee, forward and up 
 and the other, bent at the knee, backward and up; and 
 moving the body from the waist upward from left to 
 right and from right to left without moving the feet 
 are exercises especially beneficial to the hurdler. An 
 easy jog on the running track or out of doors when 
 the weather permits should be indulged in at least every 
 other day during the preliminary training. 
 
 Outdoor Work. — As soon as the ground is in con- 
 dition for outdoor work get on to the cinders every 
 day for a week. Begin by jogging and follow that up 
 with spirited sprints for short distances, lifting the 
 knees high and looking carefully after form, which 
 should be that of the 100-yard sprinter. Practise the 
 college start until you can get away sharply with the 
 crack of the pistol. 
 
 Whether you are going in for the high hurdles or 
 the low hurdles you must display no hesitation, but 
 take the rails at a dash. Therefore one of the very 
 first things to do is to overcome all nervousness. To 
 do this put up one hurdle at its proper distance from 
 the mark and practise taking it three or four times 
 daily until all hesitation is gone. Always start with a 
 pistol. When you are able to go over the first hurdle 
 without any let-up at the take-off put up two more and 
 try those until the pace between hurdles is fairly well 
 
TEACK ATHLETICS 265 
 
 mastered. Don't be in a hurry to negotiate the entire 
 flight and don't go over the hurdles more than four 
 times in a day; if four times is too much for your 
 strength cut it down to three or two. Four days of 
 hurdling and two of starting and sprinting should com- 
 pose the week. After you have advanced to the point 
 where you can take the full flight at a moderate pace 
 be careful not to overdo things, and lay off from all 
 work at the first indication of staleness. Take the full 
 flight at top speed not more than once a week, no matter 
 how strong you may feel nor how proficient you think 
 yourself. And do not go near the hurdles for three 
 days before a contest. 
 
 Aside from the hurdle work the training for the 
 hurdler is similar to that of the sprinter. Sprints of 
 from 40 to 130 yards on the flat if training for the high 
 hurdles, or from 80 to 230 yards if training for the 
 low, starts, occasional one- or two-mile walks across 
 country on days when there is no track work to 
 strengthen the heart and lungs are all necessary. Ex- 
 tremely long walks should, however, be avoided, as they 
 tend to bind the leg and thigh muscles. 
 
 At the Hurdles. — In the high hurdles the first 
 hurdle is 15 yards from the mark. The hurdler should 
 use the crouching or college start, get away with the 
 pistol and find his pace by the time the fourth stride 
 has been taken. How long his take-off is to be is of 
 course governed by his length of leg. Usually the first 
 
 hurdle is taken from about 6 feet 6 inches distant. 
 
 18 
 
266 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 There must be no lessening of the pace; the hurdler 
 should go at the jump with speed and dash. Most 
 hurdlers take off from the right foot. 
 
 Remember that it is better to top the bar than to 
 go too high; every unnecessary inch above the hurdle 
 is an inch wasted. On the take-off the body should be 
 well doubled as the first leg clears the bar. If the 
 right leg goes over first the right arm should be thrown 
 smartly forward; the left arm is then brought quickly 
 forward as the other leg goes over; on landing the 
 hurdler is in a natural position to take up the running 
 again. Speed between hurdles is everything. The dis- 
 tance between the high hurdles is 30 feet. In taking 
 the first hurdle the hurdler will consume about 6 feet 
 of that distance. His take-off for the next hurdle 
 should be 6 feet 6 inches away from it. There re- 
 mains therefore 17 feet to be covered by running. This 
 distance must be taken, if possible, in three strides. The 
 hurdler who has to use four will find himself taking off 
 for the first hurdle on one foot and for the second on 
 the other, and so on for the entire flight, and unless 
 he is as clever on one as on the other he is at a great 
 disadvantage with the man who uses but three strides 
 and takes off from the same foot each time. 
 
 Care should be taken in landing from the jump to 
 come down not on the toes alone but on the hall and 
 toes. The necessary spring is then obtained by throw- 
 ing the weight from the ball to the toes. When the 
 first foot touches the ground the other should be in 
 
TEACK ATHLETICS 267 
 
 position to swing forward for a first stride of moderate 
 length. 
 
 Between Hurdles. — Practise alone will determine 
 how best to divide the territory between jumps. If the 
 first stride is about 5 feet 4 inches, the second about 
 7 feet and the third about 4 feet 8 inches, the hurdler 
 will usually reach the next take-off in good shape for 
 the jump. He should guard against making the first 
 stride too long. There is always a strong temptation 
 to do this with the idea of covering the distance. But 
 the first must be comparatively short and taken with the 
 next two in mind. It is by the first stride that impetus 
 for the others is obtained. A stride of about 5 feet 
 4 inches will bring the hurdler to the next step with 
 plenty of rush to carry him easily the 7 feet. On the 
 third stride the effort should be toward shortening the 
 length without lessening the speed, as a certain amount 
 of impetus must be retained for the take-off of the 
 jump. 
 
 There are two highly important things to bear in 
 mind. When taking the hurdle the body should face 
 it squarely. The body acts as a lever, and unless it is 
 straight when jumping the legs can not be brought 
 entirely around, but instead each jump will leave the 
 hurdler in a position oblique to his course. When land- 
 ing thrust the head sharply forward and hold it so; do 
 not allow it to fall backward. This is especially neces- 
 sary after the final hurdle, as it is a great assistance in 
 the sprint for the finish. 
 
268 TEACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 The word jump lias been used throughout this article 
 merely for want of a better one t to describe the motion 
 used in surmounting the hurdles. As a matter of fact 
 the motion is not a jump in the general sense of the 
 word. The effort is and always should be to " cut " 
 over the hurdle without any perceptible glide through 
 the air. This is especially so of the low hurdles. 
 
 The Low Hurdles. — In these the bars are 2 feet 
 6 inches from the ground and should be taken in the 
 stride without any special spring into the air and with 
 as little lateral movement of the legs as possible. The 
 motion used should in reality be a heightened stride 
 in which the first foot is thrown a few inches higher 
 than in the stride on the flat. The less it resembles a 
 glide the less time it wastes. It is not an easy perform- 
 ance to attain to; it means the hardest and most faith- 
 ful practise; but when once perfected it is well worth 
 the trouble it has cost. 
 
 The low hurdles are 60 feet apart. Seven or nine 
 strides should be taken; seven is the ideal number. 
 Some hurdlers who are unable to cover the distance 
 in seven prides use eight instead of nine, taking the 
 jumps from alternate feet. This, however, is a difficult 
 accomplishment and one best avoided by young hur- 
 dlers. 
 
FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 I. Pole-Vaulting 
 
 The pole-vaulter's work begins at the commence- 
 ment of the winter. The muscles of the arms, shoul- 
 ders and back must be developed before actual work 
 with the pole is taken up. As soon as the weather per- 
 mits out-of-door work should begin with sprinting prac- 
 tise, taking short distances at good speed. 
 
 There are two methods of obtaining the propulsion 
 necessary to throw the body over the bar. One is to 
 take a long run and rely upon the impetus so gained 
 to put the body over and the other is to make the run 
 much shorter and put all the force into the leap. Each 
 method has its advocates and perhaps each is equally 
 good. On the whole, however, the young pole-vaulter 
 will probably obtain best results from steering a middle 
 course and relying about equally on sprint and leap. 
 
 The first thing to do is to find out the starting-point 
 
 and the take-off. Only experimenting will discover these 
 
 spots for you. When found mark them plainly. Then 
 
 place your pole against the bar, lower end on the 
 
 ground where it will be in the vault and observe at 
 
 what point on the pole the bar touches. Let the pole 
 
 fall toward you and grasp it a foot under that point 
 
 269 
 
270 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 with the hand which is to be lowest. If you take 
 off with the left foot this hand will be the left one. 
 ]STow grasp the pole with the upper hand — in this case 
 the right one — from 2^ to 3 feet farther toward the 
 top. The thumbs should be held up. 
 
 On the Maek. — Standing on your starting-mark, 
 face to the right and hold your pole in front of you. 
 When you start bring the forward end up until it points, 
 at a distance of 50 yards, to about the height of the 
 bar. Eix your eyes on the handkerchief suspended from 
 the middle of the bar and don't look at anything else 
 until you have raised your body to it. You must learn 
 to know where the take-off is without really seeing it, 
 for it is fatal to success to let the gaze wander from 
 the goal. Neither is it necessary to look where the 
 pole is going; the end will find its place and the pole 
 will take care of itself. 
 
 The Spkint. — A good deal depends on the sprint 
 down the runway. It must be fast and the strides should 
 be well opened out without, however, any of the " gal- 
 loping " which beginners so often affect. When the 
 take-off is reached the foremost end of the pole should 
 be brought down sharply into the depression in front of 
 the sill. At the same instant spring forward and 
 up for the bar with all your might, using all the mus- 
 cles of legs, back and arms. If your sprint has been 
 hard and fast you will find yourself describing an arc 
 whose chord is an angle of aboirt 55 degrees. Your 
 impetus will be sufficient to carry you over the bar 
 
FIELD ATHLETICS 271 
 
 unless you have made your sprint too slow or have 
 eased up at the take-off. In the latter case your flight 
 will either stop before you have reached the bar or 
 lessen to such a degree that you will not be able to 
 drop over without taking the bar with you. It is nec- 
 essary therefore to get plenty of " rush " into the sprint. 
 
 The Vault. — As the body leaves the ground it 
 must be controlled and guided by the arms and pole. 
 The right or upper arm should be stretched taut, the 
 legs thrown up and out and the body turned so that it 
 faces the bar. As the bar is reached the arms must 
 accept the weight of the entire body and lift it so that 
 it is held at right angles to the pole, or a little better. 
 The back is straightened and all efforts given to the 
 task. Additional lifting power is found if at the mo- 
 ment of reaching the bar the lower hand is raised to a 
 point on the pole just under the upper hand. The upper 
 hand, however, must not be raised, as the rules pro- 
 hibit it. The lifting process consists of pulling with 
 the upper arm and pushing with the lower. This gives 
 at the same time the peculiar twist to the body that 
 drops it over the bar. At the moment the downward 
 motion is begun a hard push against the pole gives the 
 vaulter a further impetus past the bar. When the 
 fall has fully begun the pole is abandoned. The twist 
 which has swung the body during the vault continues 
 after the fall begins and the descent is made with the 
 back to the bar. 
 
 Only experience will teach you at what height to 
 
272 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 grasp the pole for various heights of the bar. Much 
 depends upon the power of the lift and of the impetus 
 of the spring. 
 
 Attire. — The pole-vaulter's costume should consist 
 of a sleeveless shirt similar to that worn by runners, 
 a pair of easy-fitting light-weight pants reaching to a 
 point well above the knees and a pair of kangaroo 
 leather shoes such as described for hurdlers, with both 
 toe and heel spikes. 
 
 A satisfactory pole is that made of selected spruce. 
 This pole costs from $3 to $6, according to length. A 
 good length is 14 feet, although for the highest vaults 
 a 16-foot length is necessary. A better pole is made of 
 hollow spruce with the interior filled with a prepara- 
 tion which adds to the strength of the pole without in- 
 creasing its weight. A pole of this sort costs $9.50. 
 
 II. Broad Jumping 
 
 The broad jumper must first of all learn what form 
 is. Every boy not a cripple can broad jump, but to 
 jump well is something requiring study and practise, 
 and much of the latter. 
 
 The preliminary training must contain a good 
 amount of sprinting practise, for on the speed attained 
 at the take-off depends how great an effort of the body 
 may be made. Sprints of from 50 to 100 yards are 
 therefore a necessary part of the broad jumper's edu- 
 cation. A deal of practise is necessary if you would 
 
FIELD ATHLETICS 273 
 
 excel in this event, but at the same time care must be 
 taken not to attempt too much at one time, for broad 
 jumping quickly tires the leg muscles and a strained 
 tendon may result from too sustained efforts. After 
 the form has been acquired a half dozen jumps on alter- 
 nate days is all that should be indulged in. In com- 
 petition be careful to limber your muscles well by short 
 jogs, sprints and easy jumps before beginning. On the 
 first attempt try less for distance than for form and be 
 certain that the take-off is reached perfectly. 
 
 The Marks. — The broad jumper must determine 
 the location of his take-off and the place where he is 
 to get into his stride before he can hope to do any 
 successful jumping. The location of these marks can 
 be determined only by experiment. Find your second 
 mark, or mark nearest the take-off, first. This mark 
 will ordinarily be either seven or nine strides from the 
 take-off. If you reach your second mark squarely with 
 the foot your jump from that foot should come just as 
 squarely to the take-off. The second mark therefore 
 is a means of finally regulating your pace. The first 
 mark may be any desired number of paces from the sec- 
 ond and is used for the same purpose. Theoretically 
 the jumper comes into his stride at the first mark and 
 perfects it at the second. ISTo effort made in finding 
 the take-off is wasted, for without a good take-off it is 
 not possible to get the best results. 
 
 The start for the broad jump is the standing start 
 used for distance running. The jumper should get 
 
274 TEACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 away from the starting-place without hesitation, but 
 much speed is not advisable until the stride has been 
 found. The highest speed should be reached about 4 
 yards from the take-off and at the moment when the 
 body is to be gathered for the jump. Unless the speed 
 is considerable the jumper can not throw forward his 
 legs to the full limit, or, if he does, he will only fall 
 back and spoil the effort. 
 
 The Jump. — Get up good speed, reach the take-off 
 squarely with the jumping foot and strive to go up and 
 forward into the air at an angle of 45 or 50 degrees. 
 Without elevation there can be no distance. A good 
 method to attain height in practise is to place a hurdle 
 from 8 to 10 feet from the take-off and jump over it. 
 Throw the arms up and out and fix the eyes on a point 
 considerably higher than the probable landing-place. 
 After the take-off the legs come forward until the knees 
 are well up under the chin and the closed hands are 
 thrust out at arms' length, balancing the body and 
 throwing the center of gravity forward. The legs now 
 undouble and the feet are stretched as far forward as 
 experience has shown to be possible without upsetting 
 the body. The upper part of the body again follows 
 the legs forward until the whole is again doubled over 
 like a jack-knife. In this position the feet come to 
 earth. The momentum straightens the body again and 
 brings it erect. On landing the feet should be thrust 
 as far forward as safety will allow in order to gain every 
 possible inch of territory and at the same time the 
 
FIELD ATHLETICS 275 
 
 upper body, head and arms must be kept forward as 
 well so as not to fall backward. Do not allow the feet 
 to spread, but land with them side by side. 
 
 In competition if you find in the sprint that you 
 have lost your stride, slow up before the take-off is 
 reached and try over. If you can help it do not make 
 the jump unless you are certain of losing no territory 
 at the take-off. 
 
 The jumper's costume is the same as the runner's. 
 
 III. High Jumping 
 
 Preparation for the running high jump should be- 
 gin in the gymnasium with exercises for the develop- 
 ment of the muscles of the chest, back and legs. With- 
 out such development it is not possible to excel over 
 the high bar. Outdoor training should begin with easy 
 runs of from 200 to 300 yards in which special atten- 
 tion is paid to the exercising of the leg muscles. The 
 first attempts at the jump should be made with the bar 
 not over 3 feet high. After the muscles of the legs and 
 upper body have become fairly supple and a certain 
 degree of form has been gained raise the bar to 4 feet 
 or thereabouts and from that height work upward by 
 degrees, always being careful to keep on jumping at 
 one height until you have learned to take that height 
 quickly, easily and gracefully. 
 
 Form is the first thing for consideration after the 
 preliminary training of the muscles has been attended 
 
276 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 to. The old-fashioned method of going at the bar side- 
 wise and " cutting " the legs over one after another 
 has been done away with. Nowadays the jump is made 
 from a position facing or very nearly facing the bar. 
 After leaving the ground a half twist of the body is 
 made, bringing the jumper's side to the bar. At the 
 rise the forward leg, preferably the right, is thrown 
 high up, the shoulders are thrown back and the arms 
 up and forward. At the same time the other foot, the 
 one from which the jump was made, is brought sharply 
 up. The forward leg passes over the bar about parallel 
 to the ground and practically at right angles to the bar. 
 The left leg follows while partly doubled up, the foot 
 being about in front of the crotch as it goes over. The 
 upper body passes the bar almost as soon as the left 
 leg, the twist still operating and bringing the body side- 
 to as the bar is surmounted and face to the bar as the 
 feet land in the pit. 
 
 As in the running broad jump the place where the 
 stride is reached and the take-off must be determined 
 by experiment. It is usual to locate the mark three 
 long strides from the take-off, while the latter will be 
 approximately the same distance from the sill between 
 the standards as the bar is from the sill. A run of 75 
 or 80 feet at a slow pace brings the jumper to his mark. 
 He should reach it with his right foot, take the next 
 three strides at a fast rush, bearing well toward the 
 left side of the path, and so reach the take-off on his 
 left foot, which gives the body twist necessary. A 
 
FIELD ATHLETICS 277 
 
 jumper who takes off on his right foot will, of course, 
 bear to the right of the path instead. 
 
 This twist is one of the first things the jumper 
 should master. A sharp backward pull of the left 
 shoulder, if the take-off is from the left foot, is half 
 the secret. In learning to manage the legs it should 
 be realized that if each leg be brought up with a force- 
 ful jerking motion the body will be thrown farther 
 into the air than if the legs are raised more gradually. 
 The severest strain on the muscles comes when the 
 effort to raise the left leg to clear the bar is made. 
 Here the arms and torso bear the work, and it is in 
 the perfecting of this part of the jump that the most 
 time will be required. The jumper should keep his 
 gaze on the middle of the bar from the time he leaves 
 his mark until he is passing over. 
 
 Attire. — The high jumper's costume is similar to 
 the broad jumper's save in the matter of footwear. It 
 is customary to wear on the jumping foot a shoe some- 
 what heavier than that on the other foot. Many vault- 
 ers and jumpers have a piece of rubber either inside 
 or outside of the shoe on the heel. This gives more 
 spring and saves the jar upon the heel. The jumping- 
 foot shoe should be fitted with two heel spikes as well 
 as the usual six spikes in the toe. The other shoe should 
 have the toe spikes only. 
 
 Before entering a competition the jumper should 
 read and understand the rules of high jumping, espe- 
 cially as regards balks and declining the jump. 
 
278 TRACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 IV. Hammer Throwing 
 
 This is one of the oldest of present-day field sports 
 and had its origin in the roth-cleas or wheel feat of the 
 first Tailtin games held in County Meath, Ireland, in 
 1370. Various forms of weight throwing followed un- 
 til in the last century casting the sledge became an 
 established event of athletic games in Great Britain 
 and Ireland. In 1866 the weight of the hammer was 
 fixed at 16 pounds, but the length of handle was left a 
 matter of individual taste. Under these conditions a 
 throw of 120 feet was made in 1873 by S. S. Brown, 
 of Oxford University. In 1875 further restrictions 
 were laid down; the length of the handle was limited 
 to 3J feet and the circle from which the throw was 
 made was required to be 7 feet in circumference. In 
 the English Championships of that year the hammer- 
 throwing event was won by C. H. Hales with a throw 
 of 96 feet. The following year he increased this to 
 110 feet, and then, using the old rules and with no 
 restrictions as to run or follow, made the remarkable 
 throw of 138 feet. 
 
 In this country the 7-foot circle was not adopted 
 until 1888. 
 
 James S. Mitchell held the world's championship 
 for many years, throwing the hammer with a single 
 turn of the body and getting a record of 148 feet in 
 
MELD ATHLETICS 279 
 
 this style. Flannagan came into the field with a double 
 turn of the body and bested Mitchell's record by 2 feet. 
 In 1900 Plaw of California appeared with a triple turn 
 and added 10 feet more to the record. Elannagan added 
 another turn to his style and again went to the front. 
 
 Training. — Skill, muscle and quickness on the feet 
 in about equal proportions go to make up the successful 
 hammer thrower. Both may be attained by determined 
 and assiduous practise. Gymnasium work should con- 
 sist of all such exercises as tend to strengthen and de- 
 velop the muscles of the arms and torso. Outdoor work 
 should begin as soon as the ground is in condition; 
 weather conditions have little interest for those train- 
 ing for the weight events. The boy who has weight 
 to start with is at an advantage, all other things being 
 equal, over the boy who is light. The boy of 150 
 pounds with a nice development of arm and back mus- 
 cles has the possibilities of a good hammer thrower 
 in him. 
 
 At interscholastic meetings the 12-pound hammer 
 is usually made use of, while the 16-pound hammer 
 is used by college men. Practise should always be be- 
 gun with the lighter weight. A very satisfactory 12- 
 pound hammer may be bought for $3 and the best for 
 $4.25. These are respectively of iron and lead with 
 wire handles. 
 
 The throw is made from a ring 7 feet in diameter, 
 outside of which the thrower may not step. In com- 
 petition each contestant is given three tries, the best 
 
280 TEACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 to. count. Eor the finals the three best men in the first 
 trial are selected and are allowed three tries more each. 
 Reference to the rules will give a clearer understanding 
 in this matter. The first thing to learn is how to make 
 the turns. Since the advent of the Pacific Coast Cham- 
 pion, Plaw, these turns have been three in number. 
 The philosophy of the hammer throw is clearly ex- 
 plained by Mitchell as follows : " A very slight grasp 
 of mechanical principles will show that the hammer- 
 head is, as it were, attached to the circumference of a 
 revolving circle, the motive power being supplied by 
 the spinning human body at the center. At the mo- 
 ment of delivery the centrifugal force causes the ham- 
 mer to fly off in a straight line. It follows that the 
 hammer will fly farthest when the greatest momentum 
 can be produced." 
 
 The Swings. — After entering the circle the thrower 
 should stand near the back and grasp the handle of the 
 hammer firmly with both hands, the head of the ham- 
 mer resting as far outside of the circle as the reach 
 will permit. Leaning well over with feet spread suffi- 
 ciently to obtain a perfect equilibrium, he should bring 
 the hammer around in front of him. The motion is 
 at first slow, but by the time the hammer has com- 
 pleted the first circuit it should be swinging straight 
 out from the shoulders and revolving at good speed. 
 Usually three swings about the head are made, the 
 utmost speed being secured at the completion of the 
 third. During these swings the feet maintain their 
 
FIELD ATHLETICS 281 
 
 positions and the arms do the work. With the com- 
 pletion of the last swing comes the beginning of the 
 first turn. 
 
 The Turns. — The effort now must be to move the 
 body faster than the swinging hammer in order to still 
 further increase the momentum of the latter. The 
 body turn must be commenced while the head of the 
 hammer is yet well behind the body ; otherwise, instead 
 of the thrower pulling the hammer around the hammer 
 will pull the thrower around — and ultimately throw 
 him off his feet. The hammer, then, must always be 
 kept well behind the motion of the body. With every 
 turn the speed of the revolving body should be increased 
 until at the end of the third turn the motion is a veri- 
 table whirl. 
 
 The management of the feet during this perform- 
 ance is a trick to be learned only by practise and is 
 beyond the scope of written explanation. The three 
 turns are not to be made in the same place; each suc- 
 cessive one should bring the body nearer to the rim 
 of the circle opposite from where it first stood, so that 
 when the last turn is completed the thrower's feet are 
 as near the mark as safety will permit. If the turns 
 are made to the left, as is usually the case, the left foot 
 becomes a pivot on which the most of the weight of the 
 body rests, the pivot moving gradually across the circle. 
 The hammer, while it should move around the head in 
 a generally horizontal position, should describe a turn 
 half perpendicular so that when it is released it will 
 
 19 
 
282 TEACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 fly forward with a good elevation, which is necessary 
 for distance. 
 
 The Release. — When the hammer is released the 
 thrower does not face the direction in which the ham- 
 mer is to go, but faces from half to three-quarters to 
 the rear. That is, if the turns have been made toward 
 the left the hammer flies away over the thrower's left 
 shoulder or a little to the rear of it. At the moment 
 of releasing all the weight and effort should be put 
 into the throw, but there should be no jerk to retard 
 the flight. After the hands have left the handle the 
 only duty remaining to the thrower is to force his body 
 away from the edge of the circle so as not to step out- 
 side and invalidate the throw. In leaving the circle 
 after a trial the thrower must leave by the rear half. 
 
 V. Shot Putting 
 
 Like the hammer thrower, the shot putter begins 
 his preparation in the gymnasium in the early winter. 
 Particular attention must be given by him to the de- 
 velopment of the muscles of the arms. Eor this paral- 
 lel-bar exercise and bag punching are especially valu- 
 able. As soon as the muscles have received some at- 
 tention he should begin work with the leather-covered 
 shot on the gymnasium floor. In spring sprinting work 
 on the cinders will develop quickness, which is - one of 
 the most important things that the shotman can possess. 
 
 The Position. — As in the hammer throw, a 7-foot 
 
FIELD ATHLETICS 283 
 
 circle is used. Stand at the rear of the circle, lift the shot 
 with both hands from the ground and hold it in the 
 left if you are to make the right-handed throw. Stand 
 with your left side to the front of the circle, change 
 the shot to the right hand and bring that hand back 
 of and above the shoulder, throwing the other forward 
 and upward in the general direction in which the shot 
 is to go. Your weight should now be almost entirely 
 on your right leg, the left leg steadying the body and 
 the outstretched left arm helping in the maintaining 
 of the balance. Both legs are bent at the knees and 
 the position is a slightly crouching one. The muscles 
 of the right arm should next be limbered and stretched 
 by raising and lowering the weight several times. 
 
 The First Step.— Now take the first step forward. 
 This step is variously made. Some shot putters raise 
 the left leg high and make what is practically a hop; 
 others perform something very much like a glide, the 
 knees remaining well bent and the body retaining the 
 crouching attitude. The latter method is generally con- 
 ceded to be the better form; at all events, it is less 
 likely to disturb the balance of the body. The glide 
 should bring the thrower past the center of the circle 
 with his left foot close to the stop-board, which is set 
 in the front of the ring. During the glide the shot 
 should rest easily in the palm of the right hand and 
 the elbow should be kept as close to the body as pos- 
 sible. 
 
 Changing the Feet. — ISTow comes what is in real- 
 
284 TRACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 it j the only difficult feature of the event, and it is this 
 feature which will require lots of practise. The mo- 
 ment the ground is felt under the left foot that foot 
 is brought backward again and the entire right side of 
 the body is thrown forward, the right shoulder point- 
 ing toward where the shot is to go. It is just this quick 
 transposition of the feet and change of balance which 
 many shot putters find impossible to thoroughly master. 
 There must be no stop from start to finish; the motion 
 from the moment the body moves in the first step for- 
 ward until the shot leaves the hand must be con- 
 tinuous. 
 
 The Put. — As the right side of the body comes 
 to the front the right arm must be thrown straight out- 
 ward at an angle of about 50 degrees with much the 
 same motion used in delivering a direct punch at a bag 
 hanging about level with the head. Put all your arm 
 power into it and remember that the movement is a 
 hard, sharp thrust rather than a throw. The impetus 
 is given not so much by the power of the arm as by the 
 weight of the body, which must be behind the put at 
 the right instant. This body weight is in turn given 
 by the movement across the circle and the quick half 
 turn, and it is in the " getting the weight on " that such 
 shot putters as Sheldon excel. The shot when it leaves 
 the hand should not be sped forward by any movement 
 of the fingers, but should leave the palms easily over 
 the side. 
 
 In shot putting as in broad jumping the gaze should 
 
FIELD ATHLETICS 285 
 
 be fixed upon a point well above the probable goal and 
 held there until the trial has been made in order to 
 secure elevation, which is essential to distance. 
 
 The eight ankle is subjected to a good deal of 
 exertion and should be protected and strengthened by 
 the wearing of an elastic anklet or bandage. Some 
 shot putters have found it advisable to wear a high 
 shoe furnished with an ankle brace on this foot. 
 
 Foulixg. — As in the hammer-throwing event, the 
 trial becomes a foul if any part of the body touches 
 any part of the field in front of the circle or touches the 
 top of the stop-board. It is very easy to let the foot 
 touch the latter and the beginner should learn to control 
 the impetus of the body in time to avoid this kind of a 
 foul. 
 
 Form is the first thing to acquire in this event, and 
 the acquiring of it is a matter of patient and steady 
 work. Don't hope to become a crack shot putter in 
 one year; don't be disappointed if it takes two; don't 
 be discouraged if it takes three. Don't continue to 
 work after you have become tired; practise beyond that 
 point will benefit you very little. After you have mas- 
 tered the art of the event practise three times a week 
 will be all required. 
 
286 TRACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 ATHLETIC RECORDS 
 
 PRINCIPAL EVENTS OF 1903 
 
 Massachusetts Interscholastic A. A. track meet at Amherst, 
 Mass., June 20: Springfield High won with 86 points; Westfield, 
 24; Holyoke, 13; Amherst, 10. 
 
 Wesleyan Interscholastic track meet at Middletown, Conn., 
 May 30: Springfield High, 48J; Hartford, 30J; Westfield, 24J; 
 New Britain, 10; Meriden, 4. 
 
 New Jersey Interscholastic A. A. meet at Elizabeth, N. J., 
 June 6: Newark Academy, 57£; Montclair High, 30; Newark 
 High and Stevens Prep, 22; East Orange, 16; Montclair Mili- 
 tary Academy, 6J. 
 
 Cornell-Pennsylvania dual meet at Ithaca, N. Y., May 16: 
 won by Cornell, 66^; Pennsylvania, 50£. 
 
 Princeton-Columbia dual meet at New York city, June 16: 
 won by Columbia, 58 \; Princeton, 45£. 
 
 New York and Trinity (Hartford) dual meet at New York, 
 May 9: won by New York, 85; Trinity, 27. 
 
 At St. Louis, Mo., May 30: Interscholastic meet won by St. 
 Louis High, 46; Bliss Military Academy, 2d, 31. 
 
 At Orange, N. J., May 2: Pratt Institute, 24; Horace Mann, 
 2d; Erasmus Hall, 3d. 
 
 Maryland Interscholastic meet, Baltimore, May 12: Baltimore 
 City College won, 40J. 
 
 Detroit Interscholastic League Championships at Detroit, May 
 9: Detroit University School won, 70. 
 
 Indiana Interscholastic meet at Bloomington, May 16: Indi- 
 anapolis Manual-Training won. 
 
 Chicago-Wisconsin dual meet at Madison, Wis., May 23: Chi- 
 cago won, 72§; Wisconsin, 43£. 
 
 Purdue and Oberlin dual meet at Oberlin, Ohio, May 23: tied; 
 56 each. 
 
 Princeton and Yale dual meet at Princeton, N. J., May 9: 
 Yale won, 75; Princeton, 29. 
 
ATHLETIC RECORDS 287 
 
 Princeton University Interscholastic Athletic Association meet 
 at Princeton, N. J., May 2 : Mercersburg, 42 ; Lawrenceville, 2d ; 
 Hill, 3d. 
 
 Chicago-Illinois dual meet at Chicago, 111., May 9: Chicago 
 won, 74; Illinois, 52. 
 
 Stanford-California dual meet, April 18: Stanford won, 63$; 
 California, 58|. 
 
 Rhode Island Interscholastic League meet at Providence, R. I., 
 June 6: Hope, 50; Classical, 46; Woonsocket, 3. 
 
 Dartmouth-Massachusetts Institute of Technology dual meet 
 at Hanover, N. H., May 8: won by M. I. T., 94; Dartmouth, 71. 
 
 Southern Michigan Interscholastic meet at Albion, Mich., May 
 30: Ann Arbor, 48; Battle Creek, 26; Muskegon, 12. 
 
 Johns Hopkins- Virginia dual meet at Baltimore, Md., May 7: 
 Johns Hopkins won, 55; Virginia, 33. 
 
 Dartmouth Interscholastic invitation meet at Hanover, N. H., 
 June 3: Kimball Union Academy, 41; Williston, 26; Concord 
 High, 12J; Dummer, 10. 
 
 New Hampshire Interscholastic meet at Concord, May 29: 
 Kimball Union Academy, 55; Concord, 40; Manchester High, 31; 
 Pinkerton, 6; Richards High, 5; Holderness, 3. 
 
 Carlisle-Bucknell dual meet at Carlisle, Pa., May 16: won by 
 Carlisle, 61 J; Bucknell, 42£. 
 
 Syracuse- Williams dual meet at Syracuse, N. Y., May 16: 
 won by Syracuse, 75J; Williams, 41£. 
 
 Pennsylvania-Columbia dual meet at Philadelphia, May 8: 
 Pennsylvania won, 68; Columbia, 49. 
 
 Virginia-North Carolina dual meet at Charlottesville, Va., 
 May 15: Virginia won, 56; North Carolina, 45. 
 
 Purdue-Northwestern dual meet at Evanston, 111., May 16: 
 Purdue won, 67; Northwestern, 45. 
 
 Washington (St. Louis ) -Missouri dual meet at Columbus, 
 Mo., May 25: won by Washington, 71; Missouri, 25. 
 
 Annual Interscholastic meet at Elizabeth, N. J., May 16: won 
 by Pratt Institute, 35. 
 
 Williams Interscholastic meet at Williamstown, Mass., May 
 9: won by Adams High, 31. 
 
288 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 Long Island Interscholastic Championships at Long Island 
 City, N. Y., May 23: won by Brooklyn High, 44£. 
 
 New York-Rutgers dual meet at New York city, May 16: 
 won by New York, 37 ; Rutgers, 35. 
 
 Northwestern Interscholastic meet at Evanston, 111.: won by 
 Hyde Park, 23; Lewis Institute, 20. 
 
 Phillips Andover-Phillips Exeter dual meet at Andover, Mass., 
 May 30: won by Andover, 58£; Exeter, 37§. 
 
 Michigan- Chicago dual meet at Ann Arbor, Mich., May 16: 
 won by Michigan, 83£; Chicago, 42 J. 
 
 New England Intercollegiate meet at Worcester, Mass., May 
 23: won by Amherst, 51; Williams, 31; M. I. T., 30; Dartmouth, 
 15; Bowdoin and Wesleyan, each 13; Brown, 7; Trinity (Hart- 
 ford), 3; Vermont, 2. 
 
 Michigan- Cornell dual meet at Ann Arbor, Mich,, March 28 : 
 won by Michigan, 42 J; Cornell, 29£. 
 
 Harvard Interscholastic meet at Cambridge, Mass., June 6: 
 won by Phillips Andover, 47; Phillips Exeter, 30£; Worcester 
 Academy, 23|; Stone's, 10; Dummer, 6; Dedham High, 5; Low- 
 ell High, 5; Springfield High, 3; Mechanic Arts High, 2. 
 
 Harvard-Yale dual meet at New Haven, Conn., May 23: won 
 by Yale, 58; Harvard, 46. 
 
 Cornell-Princeton dual meet at Albany, N. Y., May 23: won 
 by Cornell, 67; Princeton, 50. 
 
 Hamilton- Wesleyan dual meet at Albany, N. Y., May 16: won 
 by Hamilton, 60^; Wesleyan, 56 J. 
 
 Iowa High-School meet at Grinnell, Iowa, May 23: won by 
 Grinnell, 33. 
 
 Maine Interscholastic championships at Orono, May 23: won 
 by Bangor High, 35. 
 
 Northwestern-Indiana dual meet at Evanston, 111., May 23: 
 won by Northwestern, 72; Indiana, 40. 
 
 Intercollegiate A. A. A. A. Annual Championships at New 
 York, May 30: won by Yale, 41£; Harvard, 41; Yale's victory 
 secured her the permanent possession of the cup. 
 
 Intercollegiate Conference meet at Chicago, May 30: Michigan 
 won, 49. 
 
ATHLETIC RECORDS 289 
 
 COLLEGIATE RECORDS OF THE UNITED STATES 
 Corrected to June 1, 1903 
 
 100 yards — 9§s., A. F. Duffey, Georgetown. 
 
 220 yards — 21£s., B. J. Wefers, Georgetown. 
 
 Quarter-mile run — 47fs., W. Baker, Harvard. 
 
 Half-mile run — lm. 53|s., C. H. Kilpatrick, Union. 
 
 1-mile run — 4m. 23§s., G. W. Orton, Pennsylvania. 
 
 2-mile run— 9m. 40s., W. E. Schutt, Cornell. 
 
 1-mile walk — 6m. 42|s., W. B. Fetterman, Jr., Pennsylvania. 
 
 120-yards hurdle — 15§s., S. Chase, Dartmouth; A. C. Kraenz- 
 lein, Pennsylvania. 
 
 220-yards hurdle — 23|s., A. C. Kraenzlein, Pennsylvania. 
 
 Running high jump — Oft. 4in., W. B. Page, Pennsylvania. 
 
 Running broad jump — 24ft. 4^in., A. C. Kraenzlein, Pennsyl- 
 vania. 
 
 Pole-vault — lift. 7in., D. S. Horton, Princeton; H. L. Gard- 
 ner, Syracuse. 
 
 Throwing 161b. hammer — 165ft. iin., A. Plaw, California. 
 
 Putting 161b. shot— 46ft., F. Beck, Yale. 
 
 SOUTHERN INTERCOLLEGIATE A. A. RECORDS 
 
 100-yards dash — 10£s., Selden, Sewanee, and Osborne, North 
 Carolina. 220-yards dash — 23is., Ehleman, Tulane. 440-yards 
 dash — 50§s., Jones, Vanderbilt. 880-yards run — 2m. 5|s., Van 
 Ness, Alabama Polytechnic Institute. 1-mile run — 4m. 48s., Har- 
 vey, Alabama Polytechnic Institute. 120-yards hurdles — 16|s., 
 Buchanan, Sewanee. 220-yards hurdles — 27|s., Whiteman, Van- 
 derbilt. Putting 16-pound shot — 40ft. 7in., Crutchfield, Vander- 
 bilt. Throwing 16-pound hammer — 114ft. lOiin., Parrish, Uni- 
 versity of Texas. Running high jump — 5ft. 9in., Cowan, Georgia 
 Technology. Running broad jump — 21ft. lfin., Edwards, Uni- 
 versity of Tennessee. 
 
290 TEACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 BEST INTERSCHOLASTIO RECORDS OF THE UNITED 
 
 STATES 
 
 Compiled by J. E. Sullivan, Secretary of the Amateur Athletic 
 
 Union 
 
 100-yards dash— 10s., T. Bigelow, 1894; H. Loomis, 1895; J. 
 McCulloch, 1897; T. McDonald, 1899; A. Duffy, 1899; C. Pierce, 
 1900; W. Schick, 1901; C. Blair, 1901. 
 
 220-yards dash— 21 §s., W. Schick, 1900-01. 
 
 440-yards dash— 50£s., C. Long, 1901. 
 
 880-yards run — lm. 59fs., L. Adsit. 
 
 1-mile run — 4m. 32fs., W. Zanzig, 1894. 
 
 220-yards hurdle— 25s., F. Scheuber, 1901. 
 
 Running high jump — 6ft. lin., A. Henley, 1898. 
 
 Running broad jump — 22ft. 6Jin., B. Chapin. 
 
 Pole-vault— 10ft. 10in., E. Weir. 
 
 Putting 12-pound shot — 52 ft. 22 T fajin., Ralph Rose, San Fran- 
 cisco, Cal., May 2, 1903. 
 
 Putting 16-pound shot — 45ft. 6Jin., Ralph Rose, San Fran- 
 cisco, Cal., May 2, 1903. 
 
 Throwing 12-pound hammer — 171ft., F. Estes. 
 
 BEST RECORDS OF THE NEW ENGLAND INTER- 
 COLLEGIATE A. A. 
 
 100-yards run — 10s., A. E. Curtenius, Amherst, May 21, 1898; 
 H. H. Cloudman, Bowdoin, May 18, 1901. 
 
 120-yards hurdle — 15|s., Stephen Chase, Dartmouth, May 18, 
 1896. 
 
 440-yards run— 50£s., G. B. Shattuck, Amherst, May 27, 1892. 
 
 880-yards run— lm. 59£s., H. S. Baker, M. I. T., May 24, 1903. 
 
 1-mile run — 4m. 25|s., A. L. Wright, Brown, May 21, 1898. 
 
 2-mile run— 10m. 3fs., O. N. Bean, Brown, May 21, 1898. 
 
 220-yards run — 22|s., H. H. Cloudman, Bowdoin, May 19, 
 1900. 
 
 2-mile bicycle— 4m. 17f s., R. Murray, M. I. T., May 19, 1900. 
 
 Putting 16-pound shot — 42ft. 6£in., S. R. E. Rollins, Amherst, 
 May 24, 1903. 
 
ATHLETIC RECORDS 291 
 
 Throwing 16-pound hammer — 134ft. 2Jin., A. C. Denning, Bow- 
 doin, May 24, 1903. 
 
 Running high jump — 5ft. 92in., I. K. Baxter, Trinity, May 
 
 23, 1896. 
 
 Running broad jump — 22ft. 5£in., H. C. Van Weelden, Trinity, 
 May 24, 1903. 
 
 Pole-vault — lift. 6 Jin., J. L. Hurlburt, Jr., Wesleyan, May 
 
 24, 1898. 
 
 Throwing discus — 116ft., A. M. Watson, Univ. of Maine, May 
 24, 1903. 
 
 220-yards hurdle— 25£s., G. P. Burch, M.I.T., May 21, 1898; 
 P. P. Edson, Dartmouth, May 18, 1901. 
 
 NEW YORK INTERSCHOLASTIC ATHLETIC ASSOCIA- 
 TION OFFICIAL RECORDS 
 
 Corrected to June, 1903 
 
 100-yards run — 10is., P. Dalsheimer, Columbia Grammar, 
 1901. 
 
 100-yards run, junior — 10fs., H. N. Kahn, Sachs, 1901. 
 
 220-yards run— 22§s., L. T. Sheffield, Berkeley, 1903. 
 
 220-yards run, junior — 23|s., H. Moeller, Columbia Grammar, 
 1894. 
 
 440-yards run— 52|s., C. E. I. Martin, Berkeley, 1895; H. S. 
 Washburn, Barnard, 1896. 
 
 880-yards run — 2m. 3s., W. S. Hippie, Barnard, 1897. 
 
 1-mile run — 4m. 38s., P. H. Christensen, Berkeley, 1898. 
 
 120-yards hurdle— 3ft. 6in— 16§s., C. A. O'Rourke, Jr., Trin- 
 ity, 1897. 
 
 220-yards hurdle— 2ft. 6in— 26|s., S. A. Syme, Barnard, 1895„ 
 
 High jump— 6ft. l^in., J. S. Spraker, Berkeley, 1899. 
 
 Broad jump— 21ft. lUin., J. S. Spraker, Berkeley, 1899. 
 
 Hammer — 128ft. 9in., E. Flammer, Columbia Grammar, 1900. 
 
 Shot— 43ft., R. W. Rogers, Trinity, 1899. 
 
 Discus — 97ft. 8|in., H. Connoly, De La Salle, 1900. 
 
 Pole-vault— 10ft. 7fin., J. H. Hurlburt, Berkeley, 1896. 
 
292 TRACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 BEST INDOOR RECORDS OF THE NEW ENGLAND INTER- 
 SCHOLASTIC A. A. 
 
 40-yard dash — 4§s., H. C. Kennington, English High School, 
 1897; A. F. Duffey, Worcester Academy, 1898; F. B. Scheuber, 
 Hopkinson School, 1901; R. J. Leonard, Newton High School, 
 1902; N. M. Van Amringe, Mechanic Arts High School, 1902; 
 C. R. Leonard, Newton High School, 1903. 
 
 300-yard run — 35s., M. Williams, Noble & Greenough's School, 
 1902. 
 
 600-yard run — lm. 20s., A. C. Perry, Worcester High School, 
 1901. 
 
 1000-yard run — 2m. 28£s., H. T. Murphy, Worcester High 
 School, 1903. 
 
 1-mile run — 4m. 45|s., J. J. Butler, Worcester High School. 
 
 45 -yard low hurdles — 5|s., F. B. Scheuber, Worcester Acadamy, 
 1899; H. H. Freeman, Worcester High School, 1902; J. F. Doyle, 
 Worcester Academy, 1903. 
 
 Running high jump — 5ft. lOgin., H. S. Gardner, Worcester 
 Academy, 1899. 
 
 Putting 16-pound shot — 45ft. 9Jin., H. Le Moyne, Stone's 
 School, 1903. 
 
 Pole vault — 10ft. 7|in., H. S. Gardner, Worcester Academy, 
 1899. 
 
 Team race — 3m. 18fs., D. C. Noyes, W. Minot, B. L. Young, Jr., 
 M. Williams, Noble & Greenough's School, 1902. 
 
 RECORDS ALLOWED 
 
 At the National Convention of the Amateur Athletic Union 
 in November the following records were officially passed upon 
 and allowed: 70-yard hurdle, five hurdles, 2ft. 6in. — L. G. Black- 
 mer, New York, February 28, 1903. Time— 0:8|. 75-yard hur- 
 dle, six hurdles, 3ft. 6in. — M. Bockman, Milwaukee A. C, March 
 7, 1903. Time— 0:10. 120-yard hurdle, ten hurdles, 3ft. 6in.— 
 E. J. Clapp, Berkeley Oval, May 30, 1903. Time— 0:15|. 
 
ATHLETIC EECOKDS 293 
 
 70-yard run — W. A. Schick, Jr., New York, February 28, 
 1903. Time— 0:07£. 
 
 2-mile run — Alexander Grant, Travers Island, New York, Sep- 
 tember 26, 1903. Time— 9:27f. 
 
 3-legged race, GO yards — W. S. Edwards and P. A. Sayles, New 
 York, January 15, 1903. Time— 0:07|. 
 
 3-legged race, 100 yards — W. S. Edwards and P. A. Sayles, 
 Bergen Beach, August 11, 1903. Time— 0:12. 
 
 Throwing 50-pound weight, unlimited run and follow — J. S. 
 Mitchell, New York A. C, Celtic Park, New York, September 7, 
 1903. Distance— 38ft. 5in. 
 
 CROSS-COUNTRY CHAMPIONSHIP 
 
 The Fifth Annual Championship of the Intercollegiate Cross- 
 country Association was run over the Travers Island Course, 
 November 25th; distance, a little over six miles. Cornell, Har- 
 vard, Yale, Princeton, Pennsylvania and Columbia were repre- 
 sented and finished in that order for team honors. There were 
 thirty-nine starters and thirty-three finished, the first, W. E. 
 Schutt, Individual Champion ( Cornell ) , in 33m. 15s.; the last 
 in 38m. lis. Only the first four in each team counted, and the 
 first twelve men were: W. E. Schutt (Cornell), 33m. 15s.; K. W. 
 Woodward (Cornell), 33m. 18s.; W. J. Hail (Yale), 33m. 26s.; 
 T. M. Foster (Cornell), 33m. 42s.; C. T. McGoffin (Cornell), 33m. 
 48s.; E. T. Newman (Cornell), 33m. 56s.; A. King (Harvard), 
 34m.; D. C. Munson (Cornell), 34m. 5s.; W. E. Colwell (Har- 
 vard), 34m. 8s.; S. Curtis (Harvard), 34m. 22s.; W. G. Howard 
 (Harvard), 34m. 28s.; R. S. Trott (Cornell), 34m. 40s. 
 
 INTERCOLLEGIATE TEAM CROSS-COUNTRY CHAM- 
 PIONS 
 
 1899 — Cornell University, 24 points, Morris Park, N. Y. 
 1900 — Cornell University, 26 points, Morris Park, N. Y. 
 1901 — Yale University, 22 points, Morris Park, N. Y. 
 1902 — Cornell University, 24 points, Morris Park, N. Y. 
 1903 — Cornell University, 12 points, Travers Island, N. Y. 
 
294 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 INTERCOLLEGIATE INDIVIDUAL CROSS-COUNTRY 
 CHAMPIONS 
 
 1899 — John F. Cregan, Princeton University, 34m. 5fs. 
 1900 — Alexander Grant, University of Pennsylvania, 34m. 17s. 
 1901— D. W. Franchot, Yale University, 34m. 20s. 
 1902 — A. C. Bowen, University of Pennsylvania, 35m. 
 1903— W. E. Schutt, Cornell University, 33m. 15s. 
 
ADDITIONAL RECORDS 
 
LAWS OF ATHLETICS 29. 
 
 LAWS OF ATHLETICS 
 
 AS ADOPTED BY THE INTERCOLLEGIATE ASSOCIATION 
 OF AMATEUR ATHLETES OF AMERICA 
 
 (By permission of the American Sports Publishing Company, owner of the copyright). 
 
 I.— OFFICERS 
 
 The officers of an athletic meeting shall be: 
 One Referee. 
 
 Four Inspectors to assist Referee. 
 One Scorer. 
 Five Assistant Scorers. 
 One Clerk of the Course. 
 Five Assistant Clerks of the Course. 
 One Reporter. 
 One Announcer, with Assistants, if necessary. 
 
 1. For Track Events : 
 
 Four Judges at the finish. 
 Three Time-keepers. 
 One Starter. 
 
 2. For Field Events : 
 
 Eight Field Judges or Measurers. 
 
 II.— REFEREE 
 
 He shall, when appealed to, decide all questions whose settle- 
 ment is not otherwise provided for in these rules. His decision 
 shall be final and without appeal. 
 
 In case a race has been drawn into heats, and no more con- 
 testants appear than enough to make one heat, the referee shall 
 be empowered to see that the race is run in one heat; but in all 
 races requiring more than one heat he shall see that no second 
 man shall be debarred from a chance to qualify in the finals. 
 
298 TRACK AND HELD ATHLETICS 
 
 III.— JUDGES AT THE FINISH 
 
 Two shall stand at one end of the tape, and two at the other. 
 One shall take the winner, another the second man, another the 
 third man, and the other the fourth. In case of disagreement 
 the majority shall decide. Their decision as to the order in which 
 the men finished shall be final and without appeal. 
 
 IV.— FIELD JUDGES OR MEASURERS 
 
 They shall measure, judge and record each trial of each com- 
 petitor in all games whose record is of distance or height. Their 
 decision as to the performance of each man shall be final and 
 without appeal. There shall be eight measurers: two for the 
 hammer-throwing and shot-putting events, two for the high jump, 
 two for the broad jump, and two for the pole-vault. These meas- 
 urers shall be responsible for commencing their respective events 
 promptly at 2 p. M. on each afternoon of the meet, and for their 
 continuance without unnecessary delays. They shall excuse a 
 contestant from a field event in which he is taking part, for a 
 period long enough to contest in a heat in a track event, and 
 allow said contestant to take his missed turn or turns in said 
 field event within a reasonable time after the track heat. They 
 shall see that reasonable opportunities are given to contestants 
 who desire to try in two field events that are being contested at 
 the same time. 
 
 V— JUDGE OF WALKING 
 
 He shall have entire control of competitors during the race, 
 and his decision as to unfair walking shall be final and without 
 appeal. 
 
 The assistants shall do such portions of his work as he may 
 assign to them. 
 
 VI.— TIME-KEEPERS 
 
 Each of the three time-keepers shall time every event; and 
 in case two watches agree, and the third disagrees, the time 
 
LAWS OF ATHLETICS 299 
 
 marked by the two shall be official time; and if all watches dis- 
 agree, the time marked by the watch giving the middle time shall 
 be the official time; if there be but two time-keepers, and their 
 watches do not agree, the time marked by the slowest watch shall 
 be the official time. Time shall be taken from the flash of the 
 pistol. 
 
 VII.— CLERK OF THE COURSE 
 He shall record the name of each competitor who shall report 
 to him, and shall give him his number for each event in which 
 he is entered, and notify him before the start of every event in 
 which he is engaged. He shall be responsible for getting out at 
 the proper time the contestants for each event. 
 
 The assistants shall do such work as he may assign to them. 
 
 VIII.— SCORER 
 
 He shall keep a record of the starters and point winners in 
 each event, together with their respective places. He shall record 
 the laps made by each competitor, and call them aloud, when tal- 
 lied, for the benefit of the contestants. 
 
 The assistants shall do such portions of his work as he may 
 assign to them. 
 
 IX.— STARTER 
 He shall have entire control of competitors at marks, and 
 shall be the sole judge of fact as to whether or not any man has 
 gone over his mark. He shall be responsible for starting the 
 track events promptly at 2 p. m. on each afternoon of the meet. 
 He shall also be responsible for any unnecessary delay in the con- 
 tinuance of the said events. 
 
 X.— COMPETITORS 
 Immediately on arriving at the grounds, each competitor shall 
 report to the clerk of the course and obtain his number for the 
 game in which he is entered. He shall inform himself of the 
 times at which he must compete, and shall report promptly at the 
 start, without waiting to be notified. No competitor shall be 
 allowed to start without his proper number. 
 20 
 
300 TEACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 XI.— PROTESTS 
 Verbal protests may be made at or before any athletic meet- 
 ing, against a competitor or team, by any competitor or college 
 competing; but such protest must be subsequently, and before 
 action thereon, made in writing and duly presented to the Asso- 
 ciation. 
 
 XII.— INNER GROUNDS 
 
 No person whatever shall be allowed inside the track, except 
 the officials and properly accredited representatives of the press. 
 Authorized persons shall wear a badge. Competitors not en- 
 gaged in the game actually taking place shall not be allowed 
 inside or upon the track. 
 
 XIII.— TRACK 
 The measurement of tracks shall be 18 inches from the inner 
 edge, which edge shall be a solid curb raised 3 inches above the 
 level of the track. 
 
 XIV.— ATTENDANTS 
 No attendant shall accompany a competitor on the scratch or 
 in the race. 
 
 XV.— STARTING SIGNALS 
 All races (except time handicaps) shall be started by the 
 report of a pistol, the pistol to be fired so that its flash may be 
 visible to the time-keepers. A snap cap shall be no start. There 
 shall be no recall after the pistol is fired. Time handicaps shall 
 be started by the word " Go." 
 
 XVI.— STARTING 
 When the starter receives a signal from the judge at the 
 finish that everything is in readiness, he shall direct the com- 
 petitors to get on their marks. Any competitor starting before 
 the signal shall be put back one yard, for the second offense an- 
 other yard and for the third shall be disqualified. He shall be 
 held to have started when any portion of his body touches the 
 ground in front of his mark. Stations count from the inside. 
 
LAWS OF ATHLETICS 301 
 
 XVII.— KEEPING PROPER COURSE 
 
 In all races on a straight track each competitor shall keep 
 his own position on the course from start to finish. In the 100- 
 and 220-yards dashes, courses for contestants shall be marked out 
 by stakes protruding 18 inches from the ground, and connected 
 at the top by a cord or wire plainly marked. 
 
 XVIII.— CHANGE OF COURSE 
 
 In all races other than on a straight track, a competitor may 
 change toward the inside whenever he is two strides ahead of 
 the man whose path he crosses. 
 
 XIX.— FOULING 
 
 Any competitor may be disqualified by the referee for jostling, 
 running across, or in any way impeding another. 
 
 XX.— FINISH 
 
 A thread shall be stretched across the track at the finish, 4 
 feet above the ground. It shall not be held by the judges, but 
 fastened to the finish posts on either side, so that it may always 
 be at right angles to the course and parallel to the ground. The 
 finish line is not this thread, but the line on the ground drawn 
 across the track from post to post, and the thread is intended 
 merely to assist the judges in their decision. The thread must, 
 however, be " breasted " by each competitor finishing first, and 
 no competitor shall be allowed to seize the thread with his hands. 
 The men shall be placed in the order in which they cross the 
 finish line. 
 
 XXL— WALKING 
 
 The judge shall caution for any unfair walking, and the 
 third caution shall disqualify the offender. On the last one-eighth 
 (220 yards) of a mile, an unfair walker shall be disqualified 
 without previous caution. 
 
302 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 XXII.— HURDLES 
 120-yards hurdle race shall be over ten hurdles, each 3 feet 
 6 inches high. The first hurdle shall be placed 15 yards from 
 the scratch, and there shall be 10 yards between each hurdle. 
 220-yards hurdle race shall be over ten hurdles, each 2 feet 6 
 inches high. The first hurdle shall be placed 20 yards from the 
 scratch, and there shall be 20 yards between each hurdle. Hurdle 
 races of different number and height of hurdles may be given. 
 No record shall be made in a hurdle race unless each of the hur- 
 dles, at the time the competitor jumps the same, is standing. 
 
 XXIII.— JUMPING 
 No weights or artificial aid will be allowed in any jumping 
 contest except by special agreement or announcement. When 
 weights are allowed, there shall be no restrictions as to size, 
 shape or material. 
 
 XXIV.— RUNNING HIGH JUMP AND POLE-VAULT 
 
 The height of the bar at starting and at each successive ele- 
 vation shall be determined by the measurers. Three tries allowed 
 at each height. Each competitor shall make one attempt in the 
 order of his name on the program; then those who have failed 
 (if any) shall have a second trial in regular order, and those 
 failing on this trial shall take their final trial. A competitor 
 may omit his trials at any height, but if he fail at the next 
 height he shall not be allowed to go back and try the height he 
 omitted. Each competitor shall be credited with the best of all 
 his jumps or vaults. 
 
 High Jump — A line shall be drawn 3 feet in front of the bar 
 and parallel therewith, and stepping over such line, to be known 
 as the balk-line, in any attempt, shall count as a balk. Three 
 balks shall count as a " try." Displacing the bar shall count 
 as a " try." 
 
 Pole- Vault — A line shall be drawn 15 feet in front of the 
 pole and parallel therewith, and stepping over such line, to be 
 known as the balk-line, in any attempt, shall count as a balk. 
 
LAWS OF ATHLETICS 303 
 
 Two balks to count as a " try." Displacing the bar or leaving 
 the ground in an attempt shall count as a " try." The poles 
 shall be unlimited as to size and weight, but shall have no 
 assisting devices, except that they may be wound or wrapped 
 with any substance for the purpose of affording a firmer grasp, 
 and may have one prong at the lower end. 
 
 No competitor shall, during his vault, raise the hand which 
 was uppermost when he left the ground to a higher point of the 
 pole, nor shall he raise the hand which was undermost when he 
 left the ground to any point on the pole above the other hand. 
 
 Any competitor who uses a pole without a spike shall be 
 allowed to dig a hole not more than 1 foot in diameter at the 
 take-off in which to plant his pole. 
 
 XXV.— RUNNING BROAD JUMP 
 The competitors shall have unlimited run, but must take off 
 from or behind the scratch. The scratch line shall be a joist 5 
 inches wide, the ground in front of which shall be removed to the 
 depth of 3 and the width of 6 inches. Stepping over the scratch 
 in an attempt shall be no jump, but shall count as a " try." 
 Each competitor shall be allowed three trials, and the best four 
 men shall have three more trials each. Each competitor shall 
 be credited with the best of all his jumps. The measurement 
 shall be from the outer edge of the joist to the nearest break 
 of the ground made by any part of his person. A line shall be 
 drawn 6 feet in front of the scratch line, and stepping over such 
 line in an attempt shall count as a balk ; three balks count as a 
 " try." 
 
 XXVI.— PUTTING THE SHOT 
 The shot shall be a metal sphere weighing 16 pounds. It 
 shall be put from the shoulder with one hand, and during the 
 attempt it shall not pass behind nor below the shoulder. It 
 shall be put from a circle 7 feet in diameter, 4 feet of whose cir- 
 cumference shall be a toe board, 4 inches in height. Foul puts, 
 which shall not be measured, but which shall count as puts, are 
 as follows: 
 
304 TKACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 1. Letting go of the shot in an attempt. 
 
 2. Touching the ground outside the circle with any portion 
 of the body while the shot is in hand. 
 
 3. Touching the ground forward of the front half of the cir- 
 cle with any portion of the body before the put is measured. 
 
 Each competitor shall be allowed three puts, and the best four 
 men shall each be allowed three more puts. Each competitor 
 shall be credited with the best of all his puts. The measure- 
 ment of the put shall be from the nearest edge of the first mark 
 made by the shot to the point of the circumference of the circle 
 nearest such mark. 
 
 XXVII.— THROWING THE HAMMER 
 The hammer head shall be a metal sphere. The handle may 
 be of any material, and the combined length of the head and han- 
 dle shall not be more than 4 feet, and the combined weight shall 
 not be less than 16 pounds. 
 
 The hammer shall be thrown from a circle 7 feet in diam- 
 eter. In making an attempt a competitor may assume any posi- 
 tion he pleases. Foul throws, which shall not be measured but 
 which shall count as throws, are as follows: 
 
 1. Letting go of the hammer in an attempt. 
 
 2. Touching the ground outside the circle with any portion 
 of the body while the hammer is in hand. 
 
 3. Touching the ground forward of the front half of the circle 
 with any portion of the body before the throw is measured. 
 
 Each competitor shall be allowed three throws, and the best 
 four men shall each be allowed three more throws. Each com- 
 petitor shall be credited with the best of all his throws. The 
 measurement of the throw shall be from the nearest edge of the 
 first mark made by the head of the hammer to the point of the 
 circumference of the circle nearest such mark. 
 
 XXVIII 
 
 Associate clubs shall have entire charge of the entries of their 
 own members in athletic meetings, provided, always, that no 
 member shall enter, compete or take part in any event at any 
 
LAWS OF ATHLETICS 305 
 
 athletic meeting, the entries to which event shall not be limited 
 to amateur athletics. This rule, however, shall not prevent this 
 Association or its Executive Committee from prohibiting entries 
 to any event or events. 
 
 XXIX 
 
 In all classes of limit events, competitors shall not be debarred 
 by reason of having made a better record after the closing of 
 entries for such event. 
 
 XXX 
 
 All cases of dispute and any question that may arise not pro- 
 vided for in these laws, and in the interpretation of these laws, 
 shall be referred to the Executive Committee of the Association. 
 
 XXXI 
 
 An intercollegiate record is any record made at the annual 
 meeting of the I. C. A. A. A. A. 
 
 A collegiate record is one made at any meet held by a member 
 of the I. C. A. A. A. A. 
 
 The I. C. A. A. A. A. shall keep a list of all intercollegiate 
 records, and another of all collegiate records. 
 
 XXXII 
 
 This Association shall from time to time give its approval 
 to all records made in standard " collegiate " games, and when 
 so desired shall in its discretion inquire into and give its approval 
 to all other (collegiate) athletic records and games. 
 
 No record in running or walking shall be given, unless the 
 same shall be timed by at least two official time-keepers, or by 
 assistant time-keepers appointed by the referee. 
 
 Xo record shall be given in the high, standing or broad jump, 
 pole-vaulting, putting the shot or throwing the hammer, unless 
 the same shall be measured by at least two official measurers. 
 
 Said timers and measurers shall be regularly approved by the 
 " club " or association giving games, or by the referee. 
 
306 TRACK AND FIELD ATHLETICS 
 
 RULES TO GOVERN THE AWARDING OF THE CHAM- 
 PIONSHIP CUP OF THE I. C. A. A. A. A. . 
 
 RULE I 
 
 This cup shall be awarded to that college of the Intercol- 
 legiate Association of Amateur Athletes of America which shall 
 be champion from one field meeting to the next. 
 
 RULE II 
 
 Section 1. — That college shall be champion which shall score 
 a plurality of points. 
 
 Sec. 2.^-Points shall be counted as follows: 
 
 A first place shall count five points. 
 
 A second place shall count three points. 
 
 A third place shall count two points. 
 
 A fourth place shall count one point. 
 
 In case of a tie the points shall be divided. 
 Sec. 3. — In the case of two or more colleges scoring an equal 
 number of points, then if one of these colleges shall have been 
 champion for the previous year, that college shall continue to 
 hold the championship and cup for the ensuing year. 
 
 Sec. 4. — But in case the champion of the previous year be 
 not of those colleges described under Section 3 of Rule II, and 
 that two or more colleges shall score an equal number of points, 
 then for the ensuing year the championship shall be held in abey- 
 ance, and merely the names of the colleges that make the tie, 
 together with the date and place of performance, shall be in- 
 scribed on the cup, and the cup shall be kept for the year by the 
 Association. 
 
 RULE III 
 
 All disputes in regard to the possession of the cup shall be 
 referred to the Association. 
 
LACROSSE 
 
 Edited by Ronald Taylor Abercrombie, Johns Hopkins, 1900. 
 
EDITOR'S PREFACE 
 
 Lackosse, like any other game of skill, must be 
 played by each individual according to his own ideas 
 at the moment of play. But there are certain under- 
 lying principles — certain things from the experience 
 of those who have played the game — that every man 
 who expects to take up lacrosse should know before 
 he even takes a stick in his hands. These the editor 
 feels are brought out in the following pages. Any one 
 with a desire to learn and a good brain, and no other 
 should essay to learn lacrosse, can glean from these 
 pages much that will be of value. 
 
 Lacrosse in the United States is still in its infancy, 
 and as a consequence no distinctive system has been 
 generally adopted. So that the system here presented 
 lays no claim to being a generally accepted one. It is 
 merely a compilation, a patchwork if you will, from 
 the systems of various teams, ISTorth and South. It has 
 the weakness of any compilation, lack of coherence, 
 and the strength of any combination, a variety of points 
 of view. The principles underlying it all are the great 
 principles of lacrosse, and upon it it is believed that 
 a consistent effective team-play can be built. 
 
 The editor hopes that it may be of value to the 
 progress of the game in America. 
 
 R. T. A. 
 
 309 
 
CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE GAME AS IT WAS AND IS 
 
 A great many years ago — just how many history 
 doesn't reveal — a member of one of the tribes inhab- 
 iting the northern part of this continent discovered that 
 a small sphere could be made to travel much farther if 
 hurled from the end of a short pole than if thrown from 
 the hand. The name of this aboriginal Isaac Newton 
 is lost in the mists of ages, but his works endure. From 
 that discovery came the modern game of lacrosse. 
 
 Sixty years ago more than fifty tribes of American 
 Indians were playing lacrosse. The manner of playing 
 was similar throughout the country, but the different 
 tribes had different names for the game. The Ojib- 
 ways called it " Baggataway " ; the Algonquins " Tei- 
 ontsesiksahcks." The present name of lacrosse was con- 
 ferred by the French-Canadian settlers, who saw in im- 
 agination a resemblance between the stick and a bish- 
 op's crozier. 
 
 The original " ball " was either fashioned by wind- 
 ing thongs of rawhide into the semblance of a sphere 
 or made of deerskin and filled with hair. The crosse 
 was at first a three-foot wand with the tip bent back 
 and held in place by a rawhide cord, the space so formed 
 
 310 
 
THE GAME AS IT WAS AXD IS 311 
 
 being netted with the same material. The resulting 
 " spoon " was abont four inches in diameter. Upon two 
 such sticks, one held in each hand, the ball was deftly 
 caught and carried, and from them thrown remarkable 
 distances, if the tales we hear of olden games may be 
 credited. It is said that Tullock-chish-ko, the greatest 
 player of the Choctaw tribe, could throw a ball 220 
 yards. This is remarkable if so, for with our modern 
 crosse only 1G0 yards have been attained. 
 
 As played by the Indians of the Xorth, lacrosse 
 was a grand melee, a battle royal, participated in by 
 whole villages and often lasting from sunrise until noon, 
 the wearied and disabled players dropping out and re- 
 entering as the spirit moved them. Xo restriction was 
 placed on the number of contestants nor upon the size 
 of the battle-ground: often from four hundred to a 
 thousand warriors took part, and the goals were any- 
 where from a quarter of a mile to a mile distant from 
 each other. The object of the contending sides was to 
 put the ball past the opposite goal and they were not 
 particular as to how that feat was accomplished. It was 
 a brutal game, a supreme test of physical endurance. 
 In it the young bucks won their spurs and the " star " 
 player was as greatly honored in his village as was the 
 hero of many battles. Each side was under the direc- 
 tion of a chief, usually the most skilful player, while 
 medicine-men acted as referees and umpires. The 
 squaws, armed with rawhide whips, followed the game, 
 inciting their braves with shrieks and yells, and sound- 
 
312 LACROSSE 
 
 ly lashing the flagging players to renewed exertions, 
 thereby enacting the part of an aboriginal cheering 
 section. 
 
 For extraordinary contests, such as games between 
 rival tribes, the players, who had been preparing them- 
 selves for weeks by fasting, were selected a month be- 
 forehand and put in rigorous training to develop their 
 wind and speed and render their muscles supple. On 
 the night preceding the game the Great Spirit was in- 
 vocated for victory at a wild dance about a huge fire 
 during which the players, armed with their playing 
 sticks, leaped and chanted until far into the night: not 
 what we would nowadays consider an ideal preparation 
 for a contest. The next morning the braves painted 
 their faces and bodies and donned festoons of horse- 
 hair or porcupine quills which, in the game, streamed 
 from their backs like gorgeous tails. 
 
 A match usually lasted for several days and con- 
 sisted of from forty to a hundred games, a game being 
 terminated when the ball was put past a goal or had 
 struck a tree or other obstacle selected as a goal. Play 
 began in the early morning and lasted well into the 
 afternoon. 
 
 When the sport was taken up by the Canadian whites 
 many changes in the manner of playing were made. 
 The length of the field was fixed — eventually at 125 
 yards — the number of players on each side was restrict- 
 ed to twelve, and the time of the game became from one 
 hour to one hour and a half, a ten-minute intermission 
 
POSITION OF BALL IN CROSSE. 
 
 The ball is well up in the body of the netting and the hands are well 
 apart for a "sure" grip. 
 
THE GAME AS IT WAS AND IS 313 
 
 dividing the periods. One stick was used instead of 
 two, rubber was substituted for raw-hide in the com- 
 position of the ball and the netting of the crosse was 
 increased in area. A space about each goal was marked 
 out and called the " crease," and into this attacking 
 players were prohibited from entering to interfere with 
 the goal-keeper so long as the ball was outside it. 
 
 The first Canadian club of prominence was the Mon- 
 treal. In 1885 the National Amateur Lacrosse Asso- 
 ciation was formed. From Canada to the United States 
 was an easy step, and soon the game was making friends 
 on this side of the border. However, as early as 1882, 
 on Washington's Birthday, the United States Intercol- 
 legiate Lacrosse Association was formed. For a time 
 the sport gave every indication of becoming very popu- 
 lar. Interest died out, nevertheless, and in 1889 in 
 New York the Association was reorganized with Prince- 
 ton, Harvard, Lehigh and Johns Hopkins represented. 
 Unfortunately for the prosperity of the game in this 
 country the game died at Princeton and Harvard with 
 the graduation of the men composing the first teams. 
 Thus in 1891 only Lehigh, Stevens Institute and Johns 
 Hopkins continued the organization. In 1902 Swarth- 
 more was admitted. By the instigation of the enthusi- 
 asts at Baltimore and the influence of the original league, 
 in 1898 and 1899 interest was revived in the game at 
 some of the leading universities and a few preparatory 
 schools. An organization was effected in 1899 by Cor- 
 nell, Harvard and Columbia, and in 1901, with the addi- 
 
314 LACKOSSE 
 
 tion of Pennsylvania, the Inter-University Lacrosse 
 Association was formed. These two leagues coexist at 
 present, but the supremacy has remained with the older 
 organization. While for reasons of convenience these 
 two leagues are separate and distinct, the most cordial 
 relations exist, and games between the different teams 
 comprising the leagues decide each year the collegiate 
 championship of the country. Every season many well- 
 played and interesting contests take place. The past few 
 years have shown an increase in interest in the sport that 
 is encouraging. Now that the preparatory schools are 
 adopting the game, another year or so will see it in a 
 most flourishing condition. Recently the visits of repre- 
 sentative Canadian University teams, and in June, 
 1903, the visit of the English team, composed of Oxford 
 and Cambridge players, have lent a healthy stimulus to 
 the sport. 
 
 The merits of lacrosse are many and its faults are 
 few. It is a healthful, vigorous sport, interesting and 
 exciting to players and onlookers alike. It is refresh- 
 ingly simple, requiring a minimum of paraphernalia 
 and devoid of the dozens of technicalities which render 
 both football and baseball difficult of enjoyment to the 
 uninitiated. Bearing out this statement is the fact that 
 the rules of lacrosse occupy four pages, the rules of 
 football ten and those of baseball fourteen. 
 
 As a game for the schoolboy it recommends itself 
 at once. The outlay necessary for the formation of a 
 team is slight; the clothing, a sleeveless or quarter- 
 
THE GAME AS IT WAS AND IS 315 
 
 sleeve shirt, a pair of running pants, canvas shoes with 
 either rubber or leather soles, can be purchased for 
 somewhat under three dollars. A good stick may be 
 had for two dollars, and balls, bought singly, cost fifty 
 cents. With these and four poles which when in the 
 ground shall measure 6 feet to their tops, you have 
 everything necessary save the field; and that should 
 not be hard to find. One hundred and twenty-five yards 
 is the indicated distance from goal to goal, but a far 
 shorter field will answer, especially if, as may happen, 
 your team numbers nine or ten players instead of twelve. 
 And there are those who think lacrosse would gain by 
 the elimination of two players from the dozen. 
 
 Lacrosse requires, however, something more than 
 sticks and apparel. Cool judgment, speed and endur- 
 ance are the most important requisites; skill may come 
 later. ISTot even in football is team-play more essential, 
 and the youth who goes into a lacrosse game with the 
 intention of " doing it all himself " is destined to a rude 
 awakening and, probably, a salutary defeat. Individual 
 playing must be subordinated to team-work. The day 
 of long runs the length of the field through the ranks 
 of the enemy is over and it is skilful passing that wins 
 the most goals. Each player is assigned a position at 
 the commencement of the game, and that position he 
 must relatively maintain until the final whistle has 
 blown. This does not mean that he is not at liberty 
 to leave it temporarily when play requires; he may 
 
 adventure into the next man's territory as often as is 
 21 
 
316 
 
 LACROSSE 
 
 NORTH 
 
 Qny width* a-b 
 
 -18 ft. 
 
 —*-bft-4»~ 
 
 0&°al 
 
 Point (3w Insidellome 
 Cover Point Q A Outside flome 
 l lf Defense O© l sr Atta.cK 
 2 d Defeose O© £°AttacK 
 ^Defense Q £ 3 d AfctracK 
 
 (±Q) Csnceir - 
 
 Center ^j>£ [R-D=l2Ft.) 
 
 3 d Attack O© 3 ^ 6 ^" 56 
 
 ^AttacK (3^ ^"Defense 
 
 l sC AtfacK O^ 1 st Defense 
 
 Outside Home O^ Cover Point 
 
 InsideHome Ow Point 
 
 Crease 
 
 {&% 
 
 iQ-oal 
 
 tboal* 
 
 CREASE 
 
 SOVTtl 
 
 Diagram M. — Lacrosse field and positions of players.. 
 
THE GAME AS IT WAS AND IS 317 
 
 necessary to advance the ball; lie may sometimes leave 
 half the field between him and his post; but, and this 
 is a fundamental rule, he must get back to it the in- 
 stant he is free to do so; and while he is away it must 
 be filled by the next player of his side farthest from 
 the ball. Any one who has played basket-ball will read- 
 ily understand why this is so. The accompanying dia- 
 gram shows the plan of the field and the players' posi- 
 tions. 
 
 There is no arbitrary rule governing the placing of 
 the players, but the system shown (Diagram M) is the 
 most satisfactory and the one most in vogue. Particu- 
 larly, should the attack line straight up and down the 
 mid-line of the field, and so their opponents, the de- 
 fense, do the same. The nearer the play approaches 
 to being in a straight line, the better it is for the at- 
 tacking side, and the harder it is for the defense to stop. 
 This way of " lining up " allows the attack the best 
 possible chance of uncovering at the same time lessen- 
 ing the distance to goal. "When the attack plays out, 
 nothing pleases the defense man more, for it is defense's 
 duty then simply to keep the attack man out, or at 
 least be between him and the goal. 
 
 Let us suppose that both teams have passed the in- 
 spection of the referee as to spiked shoes and lawful 
 sticks and have taken their positions. Behind each goal 
 is an umpire whose duty it is to decide whether a goal 
 has been fairly taken. The opposing centers in the 
 middle of the field prepare for the " draw." They 
 
318 LACROSSE 
 
 stoop, each facing the attacking goal, and lay the backs 
 of their sticks flat on the ground so that the backs of 
 the gut are against each other. The ball — made of 
 sponge rubber and two inches in diameter — is placed 
 between and at a signal from the referee the sticks are 
 drawn sharply past each other, releasing the ball, and 
 play begins. The North center is successful in the 
 " draw " and the ball goes to the third attack, who 
 picks it up on his stick and starts toward the South 
 goal. But his opponent, the South third defense, is 
 not idle. He may, by the rules, strive to obtain pos- 
 session of the ball either by " stick-checking " or " shoul- 
 dering " ; that is, he may strike his opponent's crosse 
 with his own, and push it up, down or to the side, and 
 so possibly dislodge the ball, or he may charge the 
 opponent from the side or front with shoulder and hip. 
 We will presume, however, that his efforts are vain, 
 and that the North third attack still has the ball. 
 
 A try for goal from where he is would only be 
 advisable as a last resort; he can not hope to win 
 through the field that is crowding about him; his play, 
 therefore, is to pass to some other of his own side who 
 is uncovered; i. e., away from the opponent playing 
 opposite him. In the present case that player is prob- 
 ably the second attack. And to him, with a quick jerk 
 of his crosse, third attack sends the ball, over the heads 
 or beyond the reach of the enemy and in front of second 
 attack, who speedily picks it up on the bound or, if he 
 has been carefully watching events, takes it in the air. 
 
 
THE GAME AS IT WAS AND IS 319 
 
 He in turn is besieged by the defense, and again the 
 ball is passed, this time, possibly, to outside home. The 
 latter, if successful on the catch, gets it high in the air 
 and with a quick turn " shoots " it downward for a point 
 near the ground between the goal-poles. But the south 
 players are close about the goal and the try is blocked, 
 the ball rolling to one side. 
 
 The south cover point is after it quickly, scoops it 
 into his stick, turns and sends it far down the field. 
 There his own second attack and the north second de- 
 fense strive to get possession of it. They are running 
 nearly even. As they approach the ball the south player 
 closes up with the other and, when the ball is some ten 
 feet distant, " body checks " him. That is, he swings 
 his hip sidewise suddenly and forcibly just at the mo- 
 ment when the other's nearest leg is behind him. The 
 thrust throws the north player to the side and his rear 
 leg, swinging forward again, drops behind the other 
 and he goes down. 
 
 South scoops the ball up, turns, dodges successfully 
 past the first of the defense and passes the ball across 
 to the first attack. The latter gets it, sees his chance, 
 and, as he swings about, throws overhand at goal. 
 Cover point reaches him too late; inside home checks 
 the north goal's stick; point sees the danger and tries 
 to avert it; but the throw is swift and true and the ball 
 shoots knee-high to the left of the goal-keeper and south 
 scores. The teams change goals and the ball is again 
 faced in the middle of the field. 
 
320 LACEOSSE 
 
 In lacrosse everything is done on the run, picking 
 up, catching, passing, long throwing and checking, and 
 the player must have his wits about him every moment 
 of the time. Like ice hockey, it is a game in which a 
 plan of action must often be formulated and begun 
 while the body turns around — between the securing 
 of the ball and recovery; and this may explain why the 
 lacrosse-player takes to hockey when winter comes, and 
 vice versa. There is little time for posing. With an 
 opponent striking at your stick — and the possibility of 
 a blow on your head, shoulder, elbow or hands — you 
 must decide quickly what is to be done and then do it 
 just as speedily as you know how. Lacrosse oilers good 
 training for the wits as well as for the muscles. It is 
 not a substitute for baseball or football, but a sport 
 wholly worthy to take its place beside them; deserving 
 of popularity if for no other reason than that it is the 
 one outdoor game of American inception. 
 
CHAPTEK II. 
 
 HOW TO PLAY 
 
 Training. — Good physical condition is quite as es- 
 sential for lacrosse as for football or any other form 
 of athletics. Endurance and nervous force are of first 
 importance. Tobacco and liquors should be avoided, 
 a plain, nourishing diet should be held to and regular 
 hours should be kept. As in football, overtraining 
 must be guarded against; an undertrained player is of 
 more value than one who is overtrained. 
 
 Early practise should begin in the fall and be 
 kept up until cold weather comes. The fall season ought 
 to be long enough for the novice to learn the funda- 
 mentals of the game. 
 
 Fundamentals. — The use of the stick is the first 
 thing to learn. Become proficient at picking up the 
 ball before you essay catching or throwing. There are 
 two methods of picking up. These are first and all im- 
 portant, with both hands, and second, with one hand 
 on the crosse. Learn with two hands first, and only 
 use one hand in exceptional cases. A beginner should 
 always keep two hands on his crosse. 
 
 In picking up the ball on the run carry the stick at 
 
 your side (to prevent a jab into the stomach), holding 
 
 321 
 
322 LACROSSE 
 
 it with one hand just at the butt. As you near the 
 ball lower the net end until it is about two inches from 
 the ground, bring the hand holding the stick to the 
 side of the hip and increase your speed. Stiffen the 
 arm, lower the stick farther and scoop the ball over 
 the end of the net by a quick forward motion of the 
 arm. Do not slouch on the right side ; it is not necessary 
 to lower the shoulder at all; it is the speed at which 
 the stick strikes the ball that throws the latter into the 
 net. If the ball instead of being motionless or rolling 
 away from you is coming toward you, slacken your 
 speed if the pursuit is not too near. Otherwise raise 
 the butt end of the stick to keep the ball from climbing 
 the net and falling out over the back. Avoid reaching 
 so far ahead of you that the ball enters the net only to 
 leap out again at the first effort to raise it. One hand 
 picking up enables you to use the other hand to ward 
 off blows at your stick. 
 
 In a scrimmage always use both hands to pick up. 
 Here it is necessary to place the net over the ball and 
 by pulling it sharply back roll the ball toward you, then 
 placing the edge in front of its path so that its momen- 
 tum will carry it into the net. To use but one hand 
 on the stick when doing this is practically impossible. 
 
 Throwing. — There are two ways to throw the ball, 
 the overhand throw and the underhand throw. The 
 overhand throw is the simplest, and should be learned 
 first. The only way to learn is to get a stick and a 
 ball and practise, at first against a wall or fence. In 
 
HOW TO PLAY 323 
 
 the overhand throw the stick is held with the net to 
 the left * of the body and above the shoulders, the left 
 hand grasping the stick just above the end of the net 
 and the right hand holding it at the extreme end. The 
 ball should be against the rim about one-third way up 
 the net when the stick is in position to throw. The 
 throw is then made by bringing the net downward past 
 the body to the right. The same throw is made to the 
 left by facing that direction and taking position accord- 
 ingly. 
 
 The underhand throw is made with the net below 
 the waist, the hands placed as for the overhand throw 
 and the body bent. At the throw the body is straight- 
 ened and the stick is brought upward with a quick 
 scooping motion across the front of the body and to the 
 left. This throw may, of course, be also made to the 
 right. Side throws are made with the stick held across 
 the body and more or less parallel to the ground, and 
 are modifications of the overhand and underhand. For 
 short, sharp passing the side throw is usually the best. 
 In any of these throws an essential requirement is to 
 direct the gaze to the point where the ball is to go at 
 
 * It is immaterial over which shoulder a person learns to use his 
 crosse. In this country the great majority use the right-handed crosse 
 over the left shoulder. That is, the right hand is on the butt of the 
 crosse and the left just at the end of the netting while the wood ridge 
 is toward the side — outside to the left. It is more natural to use the 
 right-handed stick over the right shoulder. This brings the wood ridge 
 on the inside and thus the usefulness of the stick is increased. For 
 an older player it is advisable to learn both ways. However, it is not 
 advisable to use a left-handed stick in any event. A left-handed stick 
 is never allowed in facing. 
 
324 LACKOSSE 
 
 the moment the throw begins. Otherwise certainty of 
 direction is impossible. 
 
 Catching. — In catching the stick may be held in 
 a number of positions. The knack of the catch con- 
 sists of " giving " with the stick so that the ball instead 
 of meeting a motionless object, from which it would 
 bounce back, encounters an object moving in the same 
 general direction in which it is itself moving, and so 
 has its flight stopped gradually. 
 
 In catching a long throw the entire net end of the 
 stick should give to the impetus of the ball, otherwise, 
 as has been said, the ball will bounce away from the 
 gut. In catching short passes, however, it is only nec- 
 essary to give the net a peculiar dip or twist from the 
 wrists to accomplish the same result. For short pass- 
 ing the side catch is best, but naturally what the catch 
 is to be depends on what the throw is. A side catch 
 will answer for a ball coming anywhere between the 
 shoulder and knee, but for a ball reaching you outside 
 of that radius or coming directly at you from the front 
 it will be necessary to use the stick in some other 
 manner. 
 
 In practising passing do not stand at one end of 
 a ten-acre field and throw the ball to a companion at 
 the other end. A long throw is very beautiful to watch 
 and, if done well, quite an accomplishment. But now- 
 adays the game is won by short quick passing and long 
 throwing enters into it but little. If you are a captain 
 or a coach get your men together at distances from each 
 
HOW TO PLAY 325 
 
 other of from 15 to 30 feet and let them keep the ball 
 or balls going at good speed, catching at all elevations 
 and angles, using the side throws, keeping the ball in 
 the lower end of the stick, and getting it out again 
 without a moment's hesitation. 
 
 Pass to right or left of your man and never straight 
 in front of him and try to put the ball at a height 
 between knee and head. " Snap " the ball from the 
 stick quickly. Remember that when you are in a con- 
 test you will have no time to poise your body or make 
 any other preparations for a throw. So learn quick 
 thinking and quick acting in practise. 
 
 Running — or sprinting, as it really is — forms a large 
 part of lacrosse, and men who can start quickly and run 
 hard are the kind that, all other things being equal, 
 make the best players. Training in this branch of the 
 game may be had during the winter on the gymnasium 
 track; the arrival of spring ought to see the lacrosse 
 candidate well supplied with speed and endurance. Too 
 much emphasis can not be laid upon the latter require- 
 ment, and when it is considered that during an average 
 contest lasting over one hour few players are motion- 
 less for more than a few seconds at a time the reason 
 is apparent. 
 
 Passing. — In the early season, before the goals are 
 set up, a form of practise which admits of most of the 
 plays appearing in a regular contest is that in which the 
 candidates are divided into two sides but are not re- 
 quired to play any positions. The ball is given to one 
 
326 LACKOSSE 
 
 side and its players are to prevent the securing of it 
 by the opponents. This is called " tag." It teaches 
 catching, passing, dodging and checking, and as there 
 are no pauses such as occur in a contest after a try at 
 goal or when the ball is being brought in and faced, it 
 is an excellent form of practise for the chilly days of 
 early spring. The object, if your side has the ball, is 
 to " uncover " — that is, throw off the man playing 
 opposite you, so that it can be safely passed to you. If 
 you secure it it is then your duty to find another of 
 your side uncovered and pass it in turn to him before 
 an opponent has knocked it from your stick. Needless 
 to say, with the ball once in your possession it is fatal 
 to stand still; you must keep on running, guard your 
 stick from the assaults of the opponent, dodge when 
 necessary and all the time be on the lookout for a 
 chance to pass. Be discreet about dodging, for by 
 dodging you invite checks. In passing to one of your 
 side never throw the ball directly at him, but always 
 try to place it ahead of him and where he will be able 
 to make a good catch without pausing in his run. If 
 he is comparatively uncovered you will have time to 
 make a slow, safe pass. If, on the other hand, he is 
 closely followed by his opponent you will be required 
 to pass the ball to him before the opponent gets where 
 he can intercept it or spoil the catch. In any case if 
 you pass the ball directly at him he will have to slow 
 down so that it will not pass behind him, whereas if you 
 aim ahead of him, in distance according to the pace he 
 

 S s "5 
 
 
HOW TO PLAY 327 
 
 is going, lie will be able to keep on running — perhaps 
 even increase bis speed — and catcb tbe ball in front of 
 him, with his stick probably out of reach of his oppo- 
 nent's. 
 
 Above all, avoid throwing over his head. Perhaps 
 he will catch it, but it is more probable that he won't, 
 for his opponent's stick will very likely be striking at 
 his own, which, being above his head, is within easy 
 reach. If the ball does go by him, the elevation means 
 a long chase with the possibility of the other man get- 
 ting there first. Of two evils choose the lesser and 
 pass too low rather than too high. 
 
 Candidates for the position of goal-keeper should 
 not neglect the general catching and passing practise. 
 The goal should be- an all-around player and should 
 equal if not excel any other member of his team in 
 stick work. Practise at goal tending may be had by 
 him in a small way before the goals are set up by mark- 
 ing a 6-by-6 square on a wall or side of a building and 
 defending it against the attack of another goal-keeper 
 candidate, later changing places with him. 
 
 Goal-shooting. — Excellent practise at shooting 
 goals may be had during the winter in the gymnasium. 
 A goal may be set up or a square may be marked off 
 on the wall. If possible, have a player defend the goal ; 
 if not, place an obstruction about equal to a man in 
 height and breadth in front of it and try to shoot past 
 it. Shooting at an undefended goal, while better than 
 no practise at all, is not of very great value, since in a 
 
328 LACROSSE 
 
 contest you will find some ten square feet of goal-keeper 
 moving back and forth across your target. In shooting 
 for a goal always try first for direction and next for 
 speed. The fastest ball in the world will not better 
 your score unless it is aimed at the goal. Of all shots 
 which the ingenuity of the goal-keeper is taxed to stop 
 the most difficult is the shot made with a hard down- 
 ward slash of the stick and which lands the ball just in 
 front of the goal, 3 to 6 feet, from where it bounces in. 
 This is a hard shot to judge, as the rebound is dependent 
 not only on the angle at which it strikes the ground, 
 but on inequalities of the turf and the twist in the ball 
 itself. 
 
 One of the first lessons to learn is not to aim at the 
 goal-keeper. The beginner finds an almost irresistible 
 attraction in the goal-keeper, and time after time, in- 
 stead of aiming at some point to the right or left of 
 him, slams the ball directly at his breast as though a 
 bull's-eye was to be scored by striking the letters on 
 his shirt. 
 
 Standing directly in front of goal, you have 36 
 square feet at which to aim, less the size of the goal- 
 keeper. As you draw away toward either side what may 
 be termed the shooting surface is decreased until, when 
 you have reached a point even with the front line of 
 the goal, it has utterly disappeared. Hence, if you 
 shoot from in front of the goal your chance of scoring 
 is greater than if you try from an angle. So don't 
 shoot from the side as long as there is a chance to get 
 
HOW TO PLAY 329 
 
 in front. But if there is no chance to better your posi- 
 tion, shoot anyhow. Remember that you can't score a 
 goal until you shoot, and shoot whenever you have a 
 good opportunity. Ill-judged attempts are exasperating 
 enough, but not nearly so exasperating as wasted oppor- 
 tunities. The team which gets the ball within shooting 
 distance and then loses it while indulging in a lot of 
 unnecessary passing in the hope of making the shot abso- 
 lutely certain exhibits a weak attack. There is a funda- 
 mental rule which says you shall not pass in front of 
 your own goal; there ought to be a rule prohibiting 
 more than two passes in front of the opponent's goal. 
 
 Checking. — There are two ways of preventing the 
 securing of the ball by an opponent which are not pro- 
 hibited. One is called " stick-checking " and the other 
 " body-checking." " Stick-checking " consists of strik- 
 ing the opponent's stick with your own and pushing it 
 to one side or up or down and, it may be, holding it 
 there until one of your side has secured the ball. 
 " Body-checking " consists of putting the opponent out 
 of the way by striking him forcibly with your body. 
 One way to do this is to run into him with the shoulder ; 
 another way, and the more effective, is to swing against 
 him with your hip, choosing as the time for doing so 
 the moment when his leg nearest you is behind him. 
 Practise will render you capable of delivering a blow 
 of great force with your hip. The idea of checking 
 when the opponent's nearest leg is behind him is that 
 the blow will throw him away from you and the rear 
 
330 LACEOSSE 
 
 leg in swinging forward again will bear up behind the 
 other and topple him over. Yon will not be able to do 
 this perfectly the first time; it will require practise to 
 learn just the moment at which to swing the hip out- 
 ward. 
 
 To meet a " body-check " of this sort, run with your 
 feet well apart and shorten your stride sufficiently to 
 allow yourself a certain control over your body. If 
 you are a light-weight stiffen the frame and give to 
 the blow so that while you will be thrown out of your 
 course you will not go down. Then recover as quickly 
 as possible. If you are a heavy-weight throw all your 
 resistance against the check and chance the result; it is 
 probable that unless your opponent has as much weight 
 as you he will go farther out of his course. If you are 
 tall make your body flexible and yield instantly to the 
 blow. The opponent, not finding the expected resist- 
 ance, will probably go down himself. At least he will 
 fare quite as badly as you. 
 
 The " body-check " should be used in running into 
 an opponent who is about to throw for goal. Striking 
 with the elbow may do the work, but the hip blow will 
 usually prove more disconcerting and is harder to avoid, j 
 Of course the " body-check " can only be used when 
 approaching the opponent from the side or front. How- 
 ever, if you are obliged to go at him from the front to 
 spoil a shot at goal use the " stick-check." Kun at him 
 and slam the flat of your stick against his as the latter 
 comes down from over his shoulder. Use the flat and 
 
HOW TO PLAY 331 
 
 not the edge, as the former will hold nine times out of 
 ten while the latter "will often slip off. Moreover, you 
 "cover" better this way. Never allow an opponent 
 an undisturbed try for a goal. 
 
 "When pursuing an opponent who has the ball don't 
 waste your strength and retard your speed by slashing 
 wildly at his stick with your own in the overhand fash- 
 ion. Your blows may make his shoulder and elbow 
 rather uncomfortable, but there's very little chance of 
 their reaching his stick. Besides their futility they are 
 liable to operate against you by throwing you out of 
 balance. If you have ever tried to deal a hard over- 
 hand blow with a crosse while running at full speed 
 you will appreciate this fact. Your opponent can ward 
 off almost every blow of this sort with his arm or upper 
 body. So let overhand checking alone when in pursuit 
 and use the underhand. Trail your stick behind you 
 with right or left hand some four inches from the butt 
 until stick and arm are stretched well back. Then 
 bring both around sharp and hard with a rising swing. 
 This upward check will almost always reach his stick, 
 as there is no certain way for him to guard against it, 
 and very often it will dislodge the ball. 
 
 When your opponent is running away from you, 
 "stick-checking" is your only course. But if the op- 
 ponent is coming toward you for a try at goal and is 
 still too far distant to shoot " body-checking " is what 
 is called for. Don't wait for him to come up to you, 
 but go down to him and try conclusions as far from 
 
332 LACEOSSE 
 
 goal as possible. Don't waste your chance by whacking 
 blindly at his stick with your own. If he is a good 
 dodger he will fool you as sure as fate. He will prob- 
 ably hold his crosse out very invitingly in the hope that 
 you will strike at it; if you do he will double around 
 you before you have recovered and will be yards to the 
 good before you have turned. Use the " body-check " 
 against him. If you are going fast he will find it easy 
 to feint to one side and go past on the other, so slow 
 up when a few yards away and wait for him. Then 
 watch and be on your toes. When he starts to go to 
 one side of you step into his path, brace yourself and 
 give him hip and shoulder. His momentum will put 
 him out of your way. If instead of giving you this 
 chance he starts to circle, keep alongside, running wa- 
 rily and only fast enough to keep him moving away from 
 the center line of the field. Never mind where he puts 
 his stick nor how tempting it may look; play for the 
 man and not the stick. Watch him every instant and 
 at the first chance to " body-check " him, go in hard. 
 
 Positions. — A captain may place his men on a la- 
 crosse field in any fashion that pleases his fancy, but 
 the arrangement shown in the accompanying diagram 
 is most in favor in this country. The duties of the vari- 
 ous members of a team are what their locations on the 
 field would indicate. 
 
 Goal-keeper should be an excellent all-around 
 player and one whose stick-work is of the cleverest. 
 He should be an adept at stopping balls with stick or 
 
HOW TO PLAY 333 
 
 body; the really fine goal appears to know by in- 
 stinct where the ball is coming and the way in which 
 he throws up his crosse, thrusts out a leg or turns the 
 body to meet it is precision itself. He must be able to 
 pick out the man of his side who will use the ball most 
 advantageously and send it to him, and he must do this 
 in the twinkling of an eye. Infrequently he will be 
 required to go out and spoil a shot, and so must be a 
 good checker. 
 
 Point and Cover Point have for first duties the 
 checking of the attack of inside home and outside home. 
 Close shots at goal are their especial prey, but they must 
 at all times be ready to aid the goal-keeper and should 
 be hard, strong players and able to throw well under 
 all sorts of conditions. 
 
 The Defenses have a wider range of action than 
 the points. Primarily they must check their men, the 
 opposing attacks, but beside that duty they must play 
 the part of advance guards, be ready to repel the in- 
 cursions of the center and quick to fall back and form 
 into a defensive cordon about the goal. First defense 
 should not adventure so far from home as the other 
 two when he has the ball, nor, as a general thing, should 
 he be expected to go far to the sides of the field in 
 case of balls falling there; this duty is better attended 
 to by second and third defense. 
 
 Center's first duty is to feed the attack. Beyond 
 that he has a larger range than any other man on the 
 team and must make himself generally useful as often 
 
334 LACROSSE 
 
 as he can afford to uncover his opponent. Above all, 
 he should be second to none as an accurate thrower and 
 ought to excel all others as a sure catcher. 
 
 The Attacks should be hard players, fast runners 
 and dodgers and good goal-shooters. And they must 
 have a little more than their share of endurance. With 
 the ball once among them they should set a fast pace, 
 pass quickly and shoot when the opportunity presents 
 itself. 
 
 Outside and Inside Home are supposed to be, first 
 of all, goal-shooters, and for this reason they ought to 
 excel in this accomplishment. But frequently their 
 duty will consist of checking the points while an attack 
 tries for goal. But whether shooting or checking, their 
 work should be fast and their attack fierce; the home 
 positions are no places for slow or overcautious players. 
 
 Team-play is what counts in lacrosse as in football 
 or baseball. The young player when starting out should 
 disabuse his mind of the idea that what is required of 
 him are " grand-stand " plays such as long runs and 
 long throws. He is part of a machine and must keep his 
 place. Each player on a lacrosse team may be likened 
 to a cog-wheel which, revolving in its place, mashes 
 into other wheels on either side of it. Just so long as 
 the twelve cog-wheels maintain their positions they 
 must revolve in unison; but the disarrangement of one 
 of them will stop the others. 
 
 It is scarcely possible to lay too much emphasis on 
 the necessity for every player keeping the position as- 
 
HOW TO PLAY 335 
 
 signed to him at the beginning of a period of play. 
 But by " keeping the position " is not meant that the 
 player must stand in the same spot all the time or even 
 move in a space a few yards in area. Each player is 
 allowed a movement up and down the field practically 
 equal to the distance of the nearest players of his team 
 on either side of him. That is, third attack, for in- 
 stance, may advance as far as the position of second 
 attack and retreat as far as the position of center. It 
 is the relative position that each man should preserve, 
 for in every game the entire team save the goal-keeper 
 moves up or down the field. But once having taken part 
 in any disarrangement of the field regain your own 
 position as soon as may be; go back to it on the run and 
 don't loiter back; there is no telling how soon you may 
 be needed just there. 
 
 The effort must always be toward having as many 
 players as possible where the ball is; numbers represent 
 strength. On the attack with the ball near the oppo- 
 nent's goal, the entire team save the goal-keeper and 
 close defense should move toward the scene of opera- 
 tions, each man advancing one position. In the same 
 way, on the defense, with the ball near your own goal, 
 the team as a whole retreats toward the point of the 
 enemy's attack, each player, as before, moving to the 
 next player's position. The advantages of this can be 
 readily seen. For instance, in the first case, on the at- 
 tack, you have massed your men closer together in the 
 region of the opponent's goal, and so can make your 
 
336 LACEOSSE 
 
 passes shorter and more rapid. In the second case, on 
 defense, if the try at goal fails and the ball goes back 
 of goal you can spare a fielder to assist the goal-keeper 
 or point in gaining possession of it. 
 
 Before the Game. — Unlike football or baseball, 
 lacrosse is not a game which may be planned before- 
 hand save as to a general system. ~No matter what 
 sort of an attack was mapped out when play started, 
 one minute later all plans would be worse than use- 
 less. In lacrosse the situation changes every instant, 
 and it is for this reason that cool, quick judgment is the 
 player's most valuable asset. But what the captain can 
 do is to decide how certain emergencies shall be met 
 when they arise and what players shall do in certain 
 cases. For instance, problems like the following can 
 and should be solved before the game and drilled into 
 the players: 
 
 On defense; a shot at goal has failed and the ball 
 has gone out. Inside home and goal-keeper have gone 
 after it. Where is point's position? Where is cover- 
 point's position? 
 
 On defense; second attack gets the ball on the side 
 of field, eludes second defense and runs in. Who goes 
 out to meet him? What is first defense's play? If 
 cover-point meets second attack who covers his man? 
 
 On defense; outside home has failed at goal and 
 goal-keeper has swept the ball toward the corner of the 
 field. Inside home goes after it. Where is cover-point's 
 position? Where is first attack's position? 
 
<f - ^ - /* A 
 
 ^ 
 
 &i£jfc» 
 
 fig* BB<S»^^^ J^^t 
 
 ^••••■'* 
 
 » ,4j|l«— .^^PWl^li^i 
 
 i 
 
 >• 
 
 ff . 
 j 
 
 GOAL WATCHING PLAY COMING IN FROM BEHIND THE 
 GOAL-LINE. 
 
 FACING OFF. 
 
 Backs of both crosses are on the ground with the ball between. 
 The centers are on their feet ready for a spurt after "play." 
 
HOW TO PLAY 337 
 
 There are many other situations occurring in an 
 average game which may be provided for previously. 
 If the men have been taught what to do in such con- 
 tingencies they will not only know instantly what their 
 own play is but what the other men are doing and 
 where they are placed. The result will be precision of 
 movement and strength of position. 
 
 Points. — There are one or two general points which 
 it is well to know and remember. When an attack at 
 goal is made attack players must be careful not to crowd 
 too close to the goal and so block their own efforts. 
 Overeagerness very often causes players to get in the 
 way of the shots of their own side. Wait until the shot 
 has been made and then rush for the goal. If goal- 
 keeper stops the throw with his body the ball is liable 
 to drop right in front of goal, and if the attack is thick 
 thereabouts it will not be a difficult thing to force it in 
 either by the stick or by kicking. 
 
 It also frequently happens that an attacking player 
 can find none of his side uncovered, and so is unable to 
 pass. In that case he should toss the ball high so that 
 it will land just in front of goal. Then if the attack 
 closes in and strives to slash it through as it comes down 
 or kick it through afterward a score is likely to result. 
 
 Bear in mind that the man who has just passed the 
 ball to you is the one of all most likely to be uncov- 
 ered. Very frequently you will be able to pass back to 
 him for a long gain, and sometimes you will be able to 
 do this not once only, but several times in succession. 
 
338 LACKOSSE 
 
 In an attack at goal it should be inside home's duty 
 to check point's stick the moment the throw is made 
 and then instantly give his attention to goal-keeper. 
 
 Don't talk to your opponent. Keep your mind on 
 the game every minute. 
 
 Don't come out on the field looking like a tramp. 
 Wear clean togs and see that they are in good repair. 
 Look well to shoes and stick. 
 
 Always know where you are. In the pauses of the 
 game locate yourself with relation to the goal and your 
 nearest neighbors. "When the ball is coming to you 
 size up the situation while the ball is on the way so that 
 as soon as it is in your crosse you can light out. 
 
 Keep cool,' use your brain all the time and watch 
 the ball. 
 
 Finally, play hard, but don't " slug." Play for the 
 love of the game and not merely to win. In short, play 
 like a gentleman. 
 
LACROSSE RECORDS 339 
 LACROSSE RECORDS 
 
 GAMES OF 1903. 
 
 Swarthmore beat Hobart 9-1 ; College of the City of New 
 York 11-1; Stevens 9-5; Columbia 14-1; Lehigh 10-6; tied Penn- 
 sylvania; lost to Crescent A. C. 4-10; Johns Hopkins 4-6. 
 
 University of Pennsylvania beat College of the City of New 
 York 5-1, 7-3; Harvard 5-1; tied Swarthmore 1-1; Hobart 2-2; 
 lost to Lehigh 4-5; Cornell 3-4; Columbia 2-3; Toronto 3-9; Ox- 
 ford-Cambridge 1-7. 
 
 Johns Hopkins beat Pennsylvania 6-0 (forfeited) ; Hobart 
 8-1; All-Baltimore 7-0; Stevens 13-1; Lehigh 17-4; Swarthmore 
 6-4; lost to Crescent A. C. 3-10; Toronto 6-9. 
 
 Harvard beat College of the City of New York 6-2; lost to 
 Pennsylvania 1-5; Crescent A. C. 3-12; Cornell 3-4; Hobart 1-4; 
 Oxford-Cambridge 5-7. 
 
 Columbia beat G. N. Y. T. A. A. 4-0; College of the City of 
 New York 5-2; Pennsylvania 3-2; Cornell 5-1; lost to Crescent 
 A. C. 2-7; Swarthmore 1-14; Stevens 1-5. 
 
ADDITIONAL RECORDS 
 
LACEOSSE EULES 343 
 
 KULES OF LACEOSSE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 INTERCOLLEGIATE LACROSSE ASSOCIATION 
 (Adopted November 30, 1901) 
 
 Rule 1 
 
 Section 1. — Each player must be a student of some depart- 
 ment of his university or college, and must have attended, for 
 three months previous to the match, courses to the extent of at 
 least five hours a week, and have been regularly examined in such 
 course or courses. No player shall play in the games of the In- 
 tercollegiate Lacrosse Association of the United States for more 
 than a total of four years. 
 
 Sec. 2. — No player who shall have represented any collegiate 
 institution or institutions for . a total of four years shall be 
 allowed to play in the games of the Intercollegiate Lacrosse Asso- 
 ciation of the United States. 
 
 Sec. 3. — At least ten days before each match the contesting 
 teams shall furnish each other with a list of the men from which 
 their team is to be selected. 
 
 Sec. 4. — No player shall be allowed to wear metal stripped, 
 heeled or spiked shoes, nor shall there be any projecting metal 
 on the shoes, and any player attempting to evade this law shall 
 be immediately ruled out of the match. 
 
 Rule 2 
 
 Section 1. — Twelve players shall constitute a full team. 
 Sec. 2. — If, however, one team is unavoidably short of men, 
 the other team shall, if it see fit, drop men until the number of 
 
344 LACROSSE 
 
 the two teams is equal. But no match shall count in which both 
 sides begin the game with less than nine men each. 
 
 Sec. 3. — Should any player be compelled to leave the field dur- 
 ing the match through illness or injury, the opponents shall drop 
 a player to equalize the sides. 
 
 Sec. 4. — The players on each side shall be designated as fol- 
 lows: 
 
 Goal-Keeper. 
 
 Inside Home Point 
 
 Outside Home Cover-Point 
 
 First Attack First Defense 
 
 Second Attack Second Defense 
 
 Third Attack Third Defense 
 
 Center Center 
 
 Third Defense Third Attack 
 
 Second Defense Second Attack 
 
 First Defense First Attack 
 
 Cover-Point Outside Home 
 
 Point Inside Home 
 
 Goal-Keeper. 
 
 Rule 3 
 
 captains 
 
 Section 1. — The captain of each side must be one of the play- 
 ers. The captain shall toss for choice of goals, and shall report 
 any infringement of the rules during a match to the referee. 
 
 Rule 4 
 
 GOALS 
 
 Section 1. — Each goal shall consist of two poles six feet apart, 
 and six feet above the level of the ground, joined by a right top 
 cross-bar. The poles must be fitted with a pyramid-shaped net- 
 ting of not more than one-half inch mesh, which pyramid shall 
 extend and be fastened to a stake in the ground at a point seven 
 (7) feet back of the center of the goal, and said netting shall 
 
LACROSSE EULES 345 
 
 be so made as to prevent the passage of the ball put through 
 the goal from the front, and the bottom of the netting must be 
 held close to the ground with pegs or staples or bars.. They 
 shall be placed at least 110 yards, and if the ground will per- 
 mit, 125 yards from each other. In matches, they must be fur- ' 
 nished by the home club. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The goal shall be a marked line, twelve by eighteen 
 feet, and the goal-posts shall be placed six feet from the front 
 and back lines and six feet from the side lines. 
 
 Rule 5 
 the crosse 
 
 Section 1. — The crosse may be of any length to suit the 
 player; woven with catgut, which must not be bagged. (Catgut 
 is intended to mean rawhide gut or clock-string, not cord or soft 
 leather). The netting must be flat when the ball is not on it. 
 In its widest part the crosse shall not exceed one foot. A string 
 must be brought through a hole at the side of the tip at the turn, 
 to prevent the point of the stick catching an opponent's crosse. 
 A leading string resting upon the top of the stick may be used, 
 but must not be fastened so as to form a pocket lower down 
 the stick than the end of the length strings. A bumper or stop 
 can not be used. 
 
 Sec. 2. — No kind of metal, either in wire or sheet, nor screws 
 or nails, shall be allowed upon the crosse. Splices must be made 
 either with string or gut. 
 
 Rule 6 
 
 THE BALL 
 
 Section 1. — The ball to be used in all match games must be 
 of sponge rubber, and marked " Regulation Lacrosse Ball," and 
 weigh about five and three-quarter ounces. In each match a 
 new ball, furnished by the home team, must be used. It shall 
 become the property of the winning team. 
 
346 LACROSSE 
 
 Rule 7 
 officials 
 
 Section 1. — The referees who are to act in the games on the 
 official schedule shall be agreed upon at the annual convention, 
 and alternates shall be chosen at the same time. Such referees 
 and alternates shall be men of recognized ability; but shall not 
 be students, alumni or partisans to the college contesting. 
 
 Sec. 2. — The umpires who are to act in the games on the offi- 
 cial schedule shall be agreed upon either at the annual conven- 
 tion, or by the referee and captains before the game. 
 
 Sec. 3. — Two timekeepers shall be appointed, one by each 
 captain, before the beginning of the match. Their duties to be to 
 keep an accurate account of the time of the match, deducting 
 time for stoppages in the actual play, resulting from injuries 
 to players, ball out of bounds, or disputes. 
 
 Sec. 4. — In case principals and alternates fail to appear, the 
 captains of the contesting teams shall settle upon the referee and 
 umpires. 
 
 Sec. 5.— In the settlement of any dispute, whether by the um- 
 pires or the referee, it must be distinctly understood that the 
 captains alone have the right to speak on behalf of their respect- 
 ive clubs, and any propositions or facts that any player may wish 
 brought before the referee must come through the captain. 
 
 Rule 8 
 
 REFEREE 
 
 Section 1. — Before play the referee shall see that the field is 
 cleared of all obstacles which may in any way interfere with the 
 players. 
 
 Sec. 2. — Before the match begins the referee shall draw the 
 players up in line and see that the regulations respecting the ball, 
 crosses and shoes are complied with. Disputed points whereon 
 the captains disagree shall be left to his decision. He shall have 
 the power to suspend, at any time during the match, for not less 
 than five, nor more than fifteen minutes, any player persisting 
 
LACROSSE RULES 347 
 
 in infringing upon these rules, the game to go on during such 
 suspension. He shall immediately call " time " when " foul " has 
 been claimed by either captain or the player by him appointed, 
 or when a goal has been taken. He shall also have power to 
 call "time" when he observes a "foul" and to enforce the 
 penalty. 
 
 ,Sec. 3. — The jurisdiction of the referee shall not extend be- 
 yond the day for which he is appointed, and he shall not decide in 
 any matter involving the continuance of a match beyond the day 
 it is played. The referee must be on the ground at the commence- 
 ment of each match and after " fouls " and " balls out of bounds " 
 he shall see that the ball is properly put in play, and shall call 
 " play " when both sides are ready. He shall not express an opin- 
 ion until he has taken the evidence on both sides; after taking 
 the evidence his decision in all cases must be final. Any side re- 
 jecting his decision by refusing to continue the match shall be 
 declared the losers. 
 
 RULE 9 
 
 Section 1. — There must be one umpire at each goal. He shall 
 stand behind the net while the ball is in play. He shall decide 
 whether or not the ball has fairly passed through the goal, and 
 his decision shall be final. If a goal be taken he shall raise his 
 hand above his head and call " goal." The umpires must each be 
 assigned to a goal before the captains toss for sides; such goal 
 to be kept through the entire match. They must see that the 
 rules respecting goals are adhered to and shall be judges of all 
 fouls committed within the crease. 
 
 Rule 10 
 
 THE GAME 
 
 Section 1. — A match shall consist of two thirty-minute halves, 
 unless otherwise decided by both captains, with an intermission 
 of ten minutes between the halves, and the side scoring the 
 
348 LACROSSE 
 
 greater number of goals shall be declared the winner. Time to 
 be taken out whenever time is called. In event of a tie, playing 
 shall be continued after an intermission of fifteen minutes, for 
 fifteen minutes, and the side having scored the greater number 
 of goals at the end of this time shall be declared the winner. In 
 the event of a tie at the end of this time, the captains shall de- 
 cide whether the game be postponed, or that it remain a tie. 
 
 Sec. 2. — A goal shall be scored when in the opinion of the 
 umpire the ball has been fairly passed between the posts and be- 
 low the level of their tops by any other method than that of 
 being carried through in the stick of an attacking player. Should 
 the ball be accidentally put through a goal by one of- the players 
 defending it, it shall count a goal for the side attacking that goal. 
 Should it be put through by any one not actually a player, it 
 shall not count. (In that event the ball must be put in play at 
 center field.) 
 
 Sec. 3. — If the ball goes out of bounds the referee shall call 
 " time." The ball is then to be brought back to the place where 
 it left bounds and faced ten yards within bounds by the two 
 nearest opponents, the other players retaining their positions from 
 that moment when time was called. The captains must settle 
 the bounds before the match begins. Should the ball catch in 
 the netting the crosse must immediately be struck on the ground 
 to dislodge it. 
 
 Sec. 4. — In case the ball should hit the umpire, time must be 
 called, and the ball shall then be put in play at a distance of ten 
 (10) yards behind the goal. 
 
 Sec. 5. — In the event of a goal pole being knocked down dur- 
 ing a match, and the ball put through what would be the goal 
 if the pole were standing, it should count a goal for the attack- 
 ing side; such cases to be decided as usual by the umpire. 
 
 Sec. 6. — The ball must not be. touched with the hand save in 
 Sections 7 and 8, Rule 10. 
 
 Sec. 7. — The goal-keeper, while defending goal within the goal 
 crease, may knock the ball away with his hand, or block it in 
 any manner with his crosse or body. 
 
 Sec. 8. — Should the ball lodge in a place inaccessible to the 
 
LACROSSE RULES 349 
 
 crosse, it may be taken out with the hand and the player picking 
 it up must face for it ten feet within plaj'ing limits with his near- 
 est opponent. In case either used a left-handed crosse the ref- 
 eree shall toss up the ball between them, and call play when both 
 are ready. 
 
 Sec. 9. — At the beginning of each half the ball shall be faced 
 midway between the goals. The referee shall ascertain if both 
 captains are ready, and place the ball on the ground between the 
 crosses of the two center players. He shall then withdraw at 
 least ten feet and call " play." The crosses must be placed back 
 to back and overlap about two-thirds the length of the netting, 
 and each be drawn straight back toward the player holding it 
 when the referee calls " play." 
 
 Sec. 10. — No player shall be allowed within six feet of those 
 facing the ball until it is in play. 
 
 Sec. 11. — After each goal the players must change goals and 
 the ball again be put in play by facing it in the center of the 
 field. 
 
 Sec. 12. — Only the captain of either side, and one other player 
 by him appointed, shall have the right to claim a " foul," and the 
 referee shall not stop the game when " foul " is claimed by any 
 one else. 
 
 Sec. 13. — When a " foul " has been claimed, the referee shall 
 call " time " by blowing a whistle, after which the ball must not 
 be touched by either club, nor shall the players move from the 
 positions in which they happened to be at the moment, until the 
 referee has called " play." If a player should be in possession of 
 the ball when "time" has been called, he must drop it on the 
 ground. If the ball shall enter goal after "time" has been called, 
 it shall not count. If a goal is made after the play on which 
 a "foul" is claimed, and before "time" is called, that goal shall 
 count if the foul claimed is not allowed. 
 
 Sec. 14. — In case of rain, either before or during the match, 
 the game shall be postponed or delayed only by consent of both 
 captains. 
 
 Sec. 15. — If postponed and resumed on the same day, there 
 shall be no change of players on either side. 
 23 
 
350 LACKOSSE 
 
 Sec. 16. — When a foul is allowed by the referee, the player 
 fouled shall be allowed a " free throw or free run " with the ball 
 from the place where the foul occurred. For this purpose all 
 players within ten feet of said player shall move away to that 
 distance, all others retaining their positions. But if a "foul " is 
 allowed within twenty yards of a goal, the man fouled shall be 
 granted a " free throw or free run " on moving away to that 
 distance from the goal. 
 
 Sec. 17. — If a " foul " is claimed and time called, and the 
 " foul " then not allowed, the player accused of fouling shall be 
 granted a " free throw or free run " under the conditions above 
 mentioned. 
 
 Rule 11 
 
 The following shall constitute fouls and shall be punished as 
 such by the referee: 
 
 Section 1. — No player shall grasp an opponent's crosse with 
 his hands, hold it with his arms, or between his legs; nor shall 
 any player, six feet from the ball, hold his opponent's crosse with 
 his crosse in any way to keep him from the ball until another 
 player reaches it. 
 
 Sec. 2. — No player shall, with his crosse or otherwise, hold, 
 purposely strike or trip another, nor push with the hand, nor 
 wrestle with the legs so as to throw an opponent. 
 
 Sec. 3. — No player shall throw his crosse at a player or at the 
 ball under any circumstances. 
 
 Sec. 4. — No player shall hold the ball in his crosse with his 
 hand or person. \ 
 
 Sec. 5. — No player shall charge into another after he has 
 thrown the ball. 
 
 Sec. 6. — The crosse or square check, which consists of one 
 player charging into another with both hands on the crosse so 
 as to make the crosse strike the body of his opponent, is strictly 
 forbidden. 
 
LACROSSE RULES 351 
 
 Sec. 7. — No player shall interfere in any way with another 
 who is in pursuit of an opponent in possession of the ball. 
 
 Sec. 8. — " Shouldering " is allowed only when the players are 
 within six feet of the ball, and then from the front and side only. 
 No player shall under any circumstances run into or " shoulder " 
 an opponent from behind. 
 
 Sec. 9. — No attacking player shall be allowed within the 
 crease unless the ball is within the crease. 
 
 Sec. 10. — No player shall check the goal-keeper from behind 
 the poles while the latter is in position. 
 
 Rule 12 
 
 Section 1. — Any amendment or alteration proposed to be made 
 in any part of these rules shall be made only at the annual con- 
 vention of the Association, and by two-thirds vote of the mem- 
 bers present. 
 
 Sec. 2. — These rules take effect from the date of their adop- 
 tion. 
 
ICE HOCKEY 
 
CHAPTEK I 
 THE GAME 
 
 Origin. — Like most other games ice hockey can be 
 traced back to the ancient Romans, who, with a sphere 
 filled with feathers and a bent stick played the game 
 in its original form. The more recent precursors 
 of ice hockey, however, were the Scottish game of shinty, 
 the Irish hurley and the English shinny or hockey. All 
 of these games were played on the ground, but from 
 hitting a knob or block of wood about over a frozen field 
 to doing the same thing on a sheet of ice was a natural 
 step. Even then, however, the pastime had but a gen- 
 eral resemblance to the present game; the number of 
 contestants was practically unlimited and the rules were 
 few; in fact, just so long as the players " shinnied on 
 their own side " and didn't hit one another over the head 
 with malice aforethought there was no necessity for 
 bothering about rules. 
 
 The fostering and development of the game on this 
 side of the water was principally done in Canada. As 
 a result it has a strong resemblance to that other excel- 
 lent northern sport, lacrosse. About 1880 two ice hockey 
 
 clubs were formed in Montreal. These were the McGill 
 
 355 
 
356 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 University and Victoria Clubs, and to them most of the 
 credit for the perfecting of the game is due. Rules were 
 adopted and in 1884 half a dozen teams were playing the 
 game. Three years later the Amateur Hockey Associa- 
 tion of Canada came into existence with five clubs regis- 
 tered: the Victorias, Montreals, Crystals, Quebecs, and 
 Ottawas. Froni eastern to western Canada the sport 
 traveled, and in the Province of Ontario the Ontario 
 Hockey Association was formed in 1890 with a member- 
 ship of nine clubs. And that was only the beginning 
 of things; to-day the city of Toronto alone holds fifteen 
 hockey clubs, while every good-sized town in Ontario 
 supports at least one team. Manitoba took up the game 
 in course of time, and at present her players are equal 
 in skill to those of Quebec Province. 
 
 The honor of having introduced the game into the 
 United States is variously conferred on representatives 
 of Brown, Johns Hopkins, Harvard, Yale and Cornell 
 Universities. In the winter of 18 94-' 9 5 a team made 
 up of players from several of the colleges visited Canada 
 and played a series of games with Quebec and Ontario 
 clubs. They returned with a large number of defeats 
 to their credit, but had gained valuable experience and 
 much enthusiasm. Erom this tentative organization 
 were evolved the leading clubs of the United States. 
 Of these the St. Nicholas Skating Club of New York 
 was the first, and was followed very soon after by the 
 New York Hockey Club. Brooklyn and Baltimore es- 
 tablished clubs, and in the latter city especially hockey 
 
THE GAME 357 
 
 flourished for several seasons. The colleges took up the 
 sport in earnest, Brown, Yale, Columbia and Pennsyl- 
 vania being followed closely by Harvard, Princeton, 
 Michigan and Cornell. As usual the schools followed the 
 lead of the colleges, and to-day ice hockey is at last 
 firmly established in favor. 
 
 The first requisite is a clear sheet of ice not less 
 than 112 feet long by 58 feet wide. A boundary of 
 boards is necessary, since caroming the puck against the 
 sides of the rink is an important feature of the game. 
 This barrier may be anywhere from 6 to 36 inches high, 
 the latter height being preferable. Goals are placed at 
 least 10 feet from the edge of the ice in the center of 
 either end of the rink and are 6 feet wide and 4 feet 
 high. A pair of poles will answer for practise, but a goal 
 similar to a lacrosse goal, made of iron piping with a net, 
 is required by the American Amateur Hockey League 
 rules. These goals cost $15 a pair. The implements 
 consist of a vulcanized rubber disk 1 inch thick and 3 
 inches in diameter called a " puck," and sticks, varying 
 in length according to their use by forward or defense 
 players, terminating in a blade set at an angle of about 
 45 degrees with the haft. The average length of a stick 
 used by a forward is 4 feet from heel to top of haft. 
 The blade is usually 2-| inches at the widest part and 
 must not exceed 3 inches. The better sticks are made 
 of rock elm and cost from 50 to 75 cents each. Pucks 
 cost 50 cents each. A skate especially designed for 
 hockey has an absolutely straight blade, especially 
 
358 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 adapted for quick starting, stopping and turning, and is 
 screwed into the heel and sole of the shoe, additional 
 security being obtained by straps. 
 
 The object of the game is to pass the puck between 
 the opponent's goal-posts, thus securing a goal. The 
 rules, a not overbrilliant production, use the word game 
 to signify a goal scored. This is a term borrowed from 
 the Canadians and is decidedly misleading, since in this 
 country a game is an entire contest, the English word 
 match being seldom employed. In this article a goal 
 scored will be called a goal. The game consists of halves 
 of twenty minutes each divided by a ten-minute intermis- 
 sion, the teams changing goals at the beginning of the 
 second half. The side having the most goals to its credit 
 at the end of the game is declared the winner. In case 
 of a tie a third period of play is begun and is continued 
 until one side has secured the deciding goal. The puck 
 is not struck with the stick, but is advanced by being 
 pushed forward and from side to side, which is called 
 " dribbling," by being slid and by being " lifted " with 
 the blade of the stick and sent through the air. The 
 rules are few and simple. The puck may be advanced 
 in any way with the stick, but may not be carried with 
 the hand nor thrown. The stick may not be lifted above 
 the shoulder save after having " lifted " the puck. Pen- 
 alties are provided for foul tactics and for off-side play- 
 ing. Off-side play occurs when, after a player touches 
 the puck, any player of the same side, who at the moment 
 of touching was nearer the opponent's goal-line, touches 
 
THE GAME 359 
 
 the puck himself or interferes with an opponent, until 
 the opposing side has played the puck. 
 
 The players of a team are seven in number and are 
 known as the goal-tender, the point, the cover-point, 
 right end, right center, left center, and left end. The 
 first three players are known as the defense, the last four 
 as the forward. The relative positions of the players are 
 as shown in Diagram JST. 
 
 Apparel is a matter of some importance. The pos- 
 session of a stick and a pair of skates does not imply pre- 
 paredness for hockey. The usual, and best costume con- 
 sists of a full-fashioned worsted jersey with full-length 
 sleeves and medium high collar, knee pants of gray or 
 khaki-colored canvas with hips and knees well padded 
 and having cane strips at the thighs, warm woolen stock- 
 ings, shoes at once strong, warm and comfortable, a 
 knitted cap, and a woolen sweater for use when not play- 
 ing or until warmed up. The defense players require 
 clothing slightly different from that of the forwards. 
 Goal-tender, for instance, should be more warmly dressed 
 than the more active forwards. His trousers may be of 
 moleskin instead of canvas with good effect, while as a 
 general thing a medium-weight sweater will be worn by 
 him throughout the game. Goal's trousers should be 
 extra well padded and should have cane strips liberally 
 distributed at the thighs. Forwards, on the other hand, 
 are best appareled when their trousers are rather loose, 
 allowing absolute ease of movement, and are only 
 slightly padded at hips and knees. The rapid, continued 
 
360 
 
 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 a 
 
 58 ft. on over • (2-1? 
 
 Croal 
 
 OQoqI 
 O P °'wt 
 
 Q Cover Pofof 
 ( Riqbfc-End Riqbt Center Le/tEod 
 
 o o o 
 
 <0 
 
 ^)U/tCe 
 
 .enceT 
 RiqhtCenKT 
 Le/tEwd Le/lrCeoter RiqbtEbd 
 
 • • • 
 
 i 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 «\2 
 
 Covet Point 
 
 Pom IT 
 
 d-e=6ft 
 
 doal 
 
 Goal 
 1£ 
 
 Diagram N. — Hockey rink and positions of players. 
 
THE GAME 361 
 
 playing required of them precludes the necessity for 
 sweaters during the game. Leg-guards are required by 
 the goal-tender and shin-guards by point and cover-point. 
 A curled-hair pad at either elbow, stitched on to each 
 player's jersey, is advisable as a preventive against 
 bruises. 
 
 In selecting a stick look out for flaws and knots. 
 A proper stick is of Canadian rock elm, free from in- 
 equalities, rather light in weight for its size, with close, 
 hard grain running straight with the haft and- curving 
 with the blade. Such a stick will stand ordinary blows 
 and will not fray at the sole where it comes in contact 
 with the ice. A heavy-feeling stick is usually one which 
 is not thoroughly dried and seasoned and which may 
 warp when subjected to sudden extremes of heat and 
 cold. 
 
CHAPTER II 
 
 HOW TO PLAY 
 
 Qualifications. — Naturally the first qualification 
 necessary for a hockey player is the ability to skate well. 
 A player without much speed may perhaps capture the 
 position of goal-tender or point, for speed there is not so 
 necessary as a perfect command of the body. To skate 
 down the rink at extraordinary speed will accomplish 
 little if the slightest collision throws you on your back. 
 Ability to keep the balance, therefore, is of prime im- 
 portance. Keeping the balance means, among other 
 things, skating low — that is, with the weight as near the 
 ice as possible. After you have learned to skate low 
 leam to skate hard. In case you are body checked it is 
 just as well for the other man to go down instead of you. 
 If you skate hard he will. If you don't it will be you 
 who will scrape the ice. 
 
 With the ability to keep the feet under the ordinary 
 circumstances of a fast game will come the ability to 
 dodge and handle the stick so that, at least, you will not 
 fall over it. When you have taken part in a game or 
 two and have watched a few more you will have learned 
 what is required of you in the way of skating; after that 
 practise is all that is necessary. Don't start out with the 
 
 362 
 
HOW TO PLAY 363 
 
 idea of being a " fancy " player; leaping over an oppo- 
 nent's stick is pretty to look at once in a while and is a 
 useful accomplishment, but, generally speaking, " it but- 
 ters no parsnips." Set out with the intention of becom- 
 ing a " common or garden variety " of player, one who 
 will skate hard and fast, keep his feet under him and be 
 close up to the puck all the time. If you do that you 
 will stand an excellent show of playing all around the 
 " fancy " man. 
 
 The trick skater makes an undesirable candidate for 
 the hockey team for the reason that he has sacrificed 
 the qualities necessary in a hockey player — speed, dash 
 and force — for grace and intricacy of movement. 
 " Backward rolls " and " grapevines " have little prac- 
 tical use of the hockey rink. In the same way the speed 
 skater per se, while more promising than the trick skater, 
 is not the best of material. In short, what is wanted 
 when it comes to building a hockey team is a number of 
 plain, every-day skaters, fellows who can go hard and 
 fast without much attention to style, who can start like a 
 flash and stop as quickly, who can dodge like a rabbit and 
 who can fall on the back of their heads and be up smiling 
 before the referee's watch has ticked twice. 
 
 The usual playing time is forty minutes. This means 
 that the players — more especially the forwards — must 
 have good lungs and hearts; endurance is half the game. 
 The average college hockey team contains at least one or 
 two lacrosse players, for among similarities the games are 
 alike in that they each test the endurance of the players 
 
364 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 very heavily, and a man who has played during the 
 spring and fall on the lacrosse field gravitates quite natu- 
 rally to the hockey rink. The hockey player, then, 
 should be strong physically and constitutionally. A for- 
 ward is put to such extremes of exertion at times that 
 only a perfect condition of health can stand the strain 
 without injury. 
 
 There are mental requirements as well as physical. 
 A player without a little more than his share of pluck 
 is a poor player no matter how well he may skate, dodge 
 and handle his stick. And pluck contains a seasoning of 
 recklessness, for the calculating man who strives to make 
 his plays without putting his legs and arms in danger is 
 better fitted for lawn bowls. But recklessness does not 
 necessarily imply any lack of coolness ; it is the cool reck- 
 lessness that counts. The player who has a clear idea of 
 what he is going to do and how he intends to do it, and 
 who then dives into the melee at the risk of hard knocks 
 and does it, is the player who makes goals for his team 
 and a name for himself. And, just as in football or any 
 other game, it is not the daring player who gets hurt 
 the oftenest, but the careful chap who tries to save his 
 body. Daring denotes confidence, and confidence wins. 
 But there is a difference between confidence and over- 
 confidence. One wins games and the other loses them. 
 A confident team is one to back, an overconfident team 
 is one to anticipate defeat for. 
 
 Training for hockey should begin at the commence- 
 ment of the season — usually about the first week in De- 
 
HOW TO PLAY 365 
 
 ceinber — with a general course of gymnastics, since as 
 the game calls into play practically every muscle of the 
 body a preliminary conditioning of them is advanta- 
 geous. Aside from the heavy weights every appliance 
 contained in the gymnasium may be used, paying, how- 
 ever, special attention to such exercises as will develop 
 the muscles of the arms, back and chest. The lower 
 limbs and the stomach muscles need not be neglected 
 indoors, but they will very soon be brought into condi- 
 tion by the early days of practise. The punching-bag 
 oilers a valuable means of developing the lungs. 
 
 Diet. — A plain, wholesome and well-cooked diet is 
 necessary to success. Pastry is, of course, barred. If 
 possible the team and substitutes should go to a training 
 table at least a week before the first game of the season. 
 
 Practise. — As in everything else, practise is what 
 counts. There can not be too much of it just so long as 
 there is no overexertion. Practise should begin in early 
 December, on the ice if there is any, on the gymnasium 
 floor if not. The coach can give a deal of instruction in 
 stick-handling, blocking-off and team-play in the gym- 
 nasium. He can also set up one or more goals and give 
 valuable practise in shooting and guarding. From the 
 time the team first assembles until the season ends there 
 should be daily practise at shooting goals, either on the 
 ice or in the gymnasium; and this aside from whatever 
 other general practise is possible. 
 
 Stick-Haxdlixg. — It is not possible to teach stick- 
 handling in this article. It comes with practise — in fact, 
 24 
 
366 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 teaches itself. But there is one law which may be given 
 here and which is the basis of successful stick work: 
 hold the stick in both hands. Grasp it at the end of the 
 haft with the right hand and put the left hand as low 
 down as experiment shows to be advisable; where the 
 left hand is to go depends upon the player's reach. With 
 both hands upon it the stick is a help in skating; with one 
 hand on it it is a hindrance. Held in the proper way it 
 will aid the player in maintaining his balance and in 
 dodging. With both hands upon it it can not get behind 
 the player, and consequently is always in position to 
 check stick, to body check, to resist checks, to stop the 
 puck and to shoot. Once in a while it becomes necessary 
 to take the left hand from the haft. In this case if the 
 right is at the end of the haft the stick is still under excel- 
 lent control. Stick-handling is one of the essentials of 
 hockey and proficiency in it comes with practise. 
 
 The face begins the game. This play is similar to 
 the method by which the ball is put in play in lacrosse. 
 The puck is placed in the center of the rink between the 
 sticks of two opposing forwards, usually center men, and 
 at the whistle of the referee each tries to get possession 
 of it and pass it back to a player of his own side.* The 
 side gaining the disk then begins its charge down the ice, 
 
 * In the Canadian game three forwards constitute the line, while a 
 fourth man, known as the "rover," takes a position generally behind 
 it, keeping a sharp watch for pucks getting by the line, and, in short, 
 " backing up." The practise of playing one man back during the rush 
 is sometimes followed in this country, but the name of "rover "is 
 never applied to him. 
 
HOW TO PLAY 367 
 
 that is, the four forwards spread across the rink in a 
 practically straight line and advance the puck toward 
 the opponent's goal by dribbling and passing, while the 
 cover-point moves up to a position near the center of the 
 field. Goal-tend, of course, does not leave his position, 
 nor does point. 
 
 In the forwards' advance they first meet repulse from 
 the opposing forwards. These once evaded by skilful 
 dodging and passing only the opposing defense remains 
 between them and the goal, although the opposing for- 
 wards are of course harassing them from the rear. The 
 opposing cover-point is the first of the defense to evade. 
 A pass from a center to an end will usually accomplish 
 this-, and cover is left behind and is for the moment out 
 of the running. Next point confronts them. If point 
 can be evaded and the shoot at goal made before the 
 forwards and cover-point can rally to the defense the 
 chance of scoring is bright. Naturally the thing to do 
 is to deceive point by seeming to attack from one part 
 of the line and then, by a quick pass, attack from another. 
 For instance, if right end has the puck he skates in 
 near goal and as point starts to check him he passes to 
 right center, wlic* shoots. By this time the entire oppos- 
 ing team has rallied to the defense of their goal and if 
 the shoot is unsuccessful close fighting ensues until the 
 goal is won or the opponent captures the puck and plays 
 it out of danger. 
 
 Team-play is essential to success in hockey as in 
 football. For one forward to take the puck down the 
 
368 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 rink himself and shoot the goal is seldom possible. It 
 is the clever passing from one forward to another that 
 nets points. The theory is that of the uncovered man 
 as applied in lacrosse and basket-ball. The forward who 
 is attacked, to avoid losing the puck for his side, sacri- 
 fices individual play for team-play and passes the disk to 
 another man of his side who is " uncovered." In this 
 way one opponent after another is thrown off and a 
 chance at goal secured. In order to make this combina- 
 tion or team-play successful it is necessary that each 
 player should keep his relative position, as in lacrosse. 
 That is, a center should not get out on to the sides of the 
 rink and an end player should not be drawn into the 
 center. There are times, however — exceptions proving 
 the rule — when in a scrimmage near the opponent's goal 
 this rule must of necessity be disregarded. But in such 
 a case each player should return to his position as soon 
 as possible. In the advance of the forwards it is neces- 
 sary for each one to have his place and keep it. It is not 
 always possible — often far from advisable — for a for- 
 ward who is attacked to look across the rink to make sure 
 that a certain player is there before passing the puck. It 
 is necessary for him to act quickly, and lae sends the puck 
 where the other player ought to be. If the latter is 
 playing the game well and good, but if he is straggling 
 toward the next position or has fallen to the rear the 
 advance is probably wasted and the opponent has the 
 ball. In the same way, cover-point, although he may at 
 times play the part of a forward by having his position 
 
HOW TO PLAY 369 
 
 taken for the moment by another player, has a place 
 relative to the sides of the rink, his own goal and the 
 locality of the puck which he must stick to. Cover- 
 points are often severe infringers of the position law. 
 Point is less likely to offend by adventuring afield. 
 Every man should keep his relative position so that his 
 fellow players may without looking put the puck to him 
 with the certainty that he will be there to take it. 
 
 Passing. — When the forwards are rushing the puck 
 abreast one or other of the center men should carry the 
 disk until cover-point is reached. Cover is then in a 
 quandary, as it is impossible for him to know whether the 
 puck is to be passed to the right or to the left. On the 
 other hand, if one of the ends has it cover knows cer- 
 tainly where the pass is to go, and so covers center. The 
 puck, then, should be dribbled by a center man until 
 cover-point interferes and then passed either to the other 
 center or to an end, as cover's position makes advisable. 
 Past cover, point engages attention. If the puck is with 
 an end man a short pass back to a center should be made 
 if possible, as, of course, the chance of scoring from in 
 front of the goal is greater than from one side. If the 
 puck is with a center man the best possible strategy to 
 elude point — providing always the opponent allows it — is 
 to make a quick double pass; for instance, if right center 
 has the rubber he passes it across to left center while 
 point is still too far off to check sticks or steal the disk. 
 Point's attention is instantly transferred to left center, 
 who at once passes back to right center, who tries for 
 goal. 
 
370 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 When the pass during a rush is made from one end 
 across to the other the puck should be sent swiftly to the 
 boards so that it will carom back well in front of the 
 other player. This is a surer and a faster play than 
 merely sending the rubber as far as the other player. 
 The distance to be covered by the puck in the latter case 
 is about 50 feet, and with passer and passee — to coin a 
 word — skating at top speed accuracy is practically impos- 
 sible. 
 
 In a scrimmage about the opponent's goal, when no 
 opening presents for a shoot, it is a good plan for one for- 
 ward to drop back a short distance, have the puck passed 
 to him and try a lift shoot. Or cover-point may move up 
 and make the play instead of the forward. With the 
 puck once back of the opponent's goal-line but one for- 
 ward should go after it. The others should take positions 
 where in case the puck is sent out to them they will have 
 a fair chance at the goal. Eor the forward who goes 
 back of goal to merely shoot the puck out in front in the 
 hope that in some way or other one of his side will secure 
 it and put it into the net is poor policy. Let there be a 
 prearranged play for such cases, the puck going to a 
 player who by playing away from goal a short distance 
 manages to get himself uncovered. 
 
 In scrimmages in front of goal off-side play is very 
 likely to occur, in which case, if the referee is doing his 
 part, play is stopped and the puck is again faced. As 
 while the rubber is in front of goal you have a chance to 
 score, whereas in case of a face the opponent is quite as 
 
HOW TO PLAY 371 
 
 likely to gain possession as you are, it is good policy to 
 guard against off-side work. 
 
 Never pass the puck so that it will reach the player 
 at his feet. Put it well in front of him, so that it will 
 not be necessary for him to slow down to get it. It is 
 better to err in passing too far ahead than too far back, 
 for in the former case a spurt on the other man's part 
 will probably get the disk, while in the latter case it is 
 likely to happen that he will have to stop or turn and 
 skate back to recover it, in which case, even if he is suc- 
 cessful, he has lost time and the other players are thrown 
 off-side. 
 
 Always slide the puck in passing it unless, as may 
 sometimes happen, an opponent's stick or some other 
 obstacle intervenes in the line of flight. In this case a 
 lifted puck may go over the obstacle. This rule does not 
 apply to the defense when returning the puck clown the 
 rink. Then a lift is good play, since it is not in clanger of 
 being stopped near goal. 
 
 Using the boards, or caroming, is a highly useful ac- 
 complishment and should be perfected by the wings espe- 
 cially. Caroming to elude an opponent is only possible 
 when the puck is being taken down the side of the rink. 
 In such case the puck is dribbled close to the stick until 
 the opponent attacks. It is then lifted sideways at an 
 angle against the boards so that it will pass inside of the 
 opponent while you turn quickly and dodge him to the 
 outside, recovering the puck again farther on. Of course 
 to always carom in such a case is a mistake, since your 
 
372 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 opponent is, naturally, expecting it, and it is therefore 
 sometimes better to sweep the puck toward the middle 
 of the rink and pass him without a carom. In caroming 
 always lift the puck, since a sliding puck may be more 
 easily stopped by stick or skate. 
 
 Shooting. — The hardest puck for a goal-tender to 
 stop is one which reaches him at about the height of his 
 knees. In this case his stick is of no use to him, he can 
 not interpose his body and it is almost equally impossible 
 for him to use his hands. Lifting the puck is done by 
 catching the edge of the blade against the bottom of the 
 disk and then twisting the blade upward and forward. 
 The motion is a peculiar one and can be only mastered by 
 experiment and perfected by practise. At any height a 
 lifted puck is harder to stop than a sliding one. With- 
 out the friction of the ice, which after a few minutes of 
 play becomes sprinkled with snow as a result of the cut- 
 ting done by the skates and then presents added resist- 
 ance to a sliding disk, the puck travels faster and farther, 
 and is more difficult to judge. Therefore whenever pos- 
 sible lift the rubber in shooting at goal. In learning the 
 knack of lifting remember that it is a knack and not 
 something depending upon force. After you have dis- 
 covered how it is done get arm and body into it to develop 
 force. 
 
 A player should be able to shoot as well from one 
 side as from the other. This is particularly true of the 
 centers and right end. 
 
 Do not waste a try-at-goal by shooting while too far 
 
HOW TO PLAY 373 
 
 distant. And do not attempt to shoot from an extreme 
 angle save when you know the goal to be unguarded or 
 when it is a case of either shooting or losing the puck to 
 the opponent. 
 
 Checking. — Body checking consists of striking the 
 opponent with your hip or shoulder and is a feature of 
 the game borrowed from lacrosse. There are two opin- 
 ions as to the wisdom of permitting body checking. It 
 is undoubtedly accountable for almost all of the serious 
 injuries sustained by hockey players. The rules, how- 
 ever, permit it, under certain restrictions, and as long as 
 this is so body checking is a legal feature of the game. 
 Body checking by forwards, however, has no excuse. It 
 is at once dangerous and unnecessary ; dangerous because 
 of the fact that the man who is checking and the man 
 who is checked are each skating at high speed and the 
 impact must of necessity be violent; unnecessary because 
 the forward who makes the check sacrifices more energy 
 than he can afford to lose, and because nine times out 
 of ten he accomplishes no more than might be accom- 
 plished by stick checking. In the case of the defense, 
 however, body checking is far less dangerous and really 
 accomplishes an end which, perhaps, no other means 
 could. In this case the point or the cover-point is prac- 
 tically motionless, or at the most is advancing but slowly 
 up the ice, and the impact is far less severe than that 
 resulting from the collision of two bodies moving rapidly. 
 A defense man, because of his greater inactivity, has a 
 surplus of energy which he may use in body checking. 
 
374 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 When all is said, however, body checking is still a ques- 
 tionable feature of the game, one which is accountable 
 for most of the roughness that mars an otherwise clean, 
 sound sport and one which will probably in time be 
 wiped out. 
 
 The style of body check most effective is that in 
 which the hip is used to deliver a blow against the oppo- 
 nent's hip. The hip is practically the center of gravity 
 and a well-delivered blow there will usually put the oppo- 
 nent off of his balance and for the moment out of the 
 playing. With an opposing forward rushing down upon 
 him the point or cover-point, by skating slowly forward 
 until in the forward's path and then "'throwing" himself 
 at the opponent, either taking him with hip or shoulder, 
 can usually put his man down. 
 
 The best position in which to resist the body check is 
 that in which the body assumes a well-balanced crouch- 
 ing posture, with the weight as near the ice as possible, 
 and the upper body limber, so as to offer the least possi- 
 ble resistance to the impact. 
 
 A kind of body checking which is utterly wrong is 
 that by which one player " bodies " another against the 
 side of the rink or the boards. More often than not this 
 is an infringement of the rule which prohibits charging 
 from the rear and as such should be severely dealt with 
 by the referee. 
 
 Stick-checking is a perfectly legitimate feature. It 
 consists of knocking, pushing or holding aside an oppo- 
 nent's stick. However you do it, " make it good." 
 
CHAPTER III 
 
 THE POSITIONS 
 
 The Forwards 
 
 The forwards are players whose duties are so nearly 
 alike that their positions may very well be treated 
 together instead of singly. It should always be possible 
 — although it is seldom practicable — for any forward to 
 exchange positions with any other forward. But this 
 should be done only when the lack of a satisfactory man 
 among the substitutes to take the place of a disabled or 
 absent player makes a change in the line positions advi- 
 sable. 
 
 In placing the forwards see that the surest goal-shoot- 
 ers occupy the center positions and the hardest and fastest 
 skaters the wings. The centers are the men who, in the 
 natural order of things, have the bulk of the shooting to 
 do; the ends are the players who are not only required 
 to skate over more territory, but, for the reason that they 
 are each unsupported on one side, are more often attacked 
 by opposing forwards and must rush fast and fiercely to 
 keep the puck. The wing men should not only be able to 
 skate fast but should be thoroughly at home on their 
 blades ; able to spring forward from a motionless position, 
 to stop as quickly, to dodge sharply and to get over rotten 
 
 375 
 
376 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 ice — such as frequently lies along the boards on the 
 sunny side of an outdoor rink — on the points of their 
 skates. 
 
 A wing man can help his stick work vastly by a clever 
 use of his feet when attacked along the boards. The 
 rules prohibit kicking or in any way advancing the puck 
 with the foot or skate, but they do not prohibit using the 
 skate to stop the puck or to hold it. When a player at 
 the boards finds himself in danger of losing the puck 
 during a scrimmage, his stick being checked by the oppo- 
 nent so that he can not make use of it, it is often possible 
 for him to pocket the puck with his skates until a player 
 of his side comes to his assistance. 
 
 Weight is of course an advantage to a forward, but 
 other qualities should not be sacrificed to weight alone 
 when the men for the forward positions are chosen. Sci- 
 ence, cool judgment, speed and physical endurance are 
 the more important requisites, and the sight of a small, 
 " brainy " forward playing all around a larger and heav- 
 ier man is not infrequent. In meeting a body check by 
 a cover-point or point the forward should push the puck 
 to one side where it will be handy to his stick in case he 
 succeeds in avoiding or recovering quickly from the 
 check. He should skate low and hard, limbering the 
 upper part of his body so that it will give to the impact 
 of the blow. Forwards should, when the goal is neared, 
 be careful to keep their relative positions and not bunch 
 up about the rubber. Close interference or, to use a 
 football phrase, mass-plays about the goal are often sue- 
 
THE POSITIONS 377 
 
 cessful against a lighter team but are scarcely good 
 hockey. These plays are designed to keep the opponents 
 away from the puck by forming closely about it and then 
 reaching the goal by brute force. If such tactics were 
 logically developed the open work of the present-day 
 game would disappear and we would see six players 
 charging down the rink in wedge or some similar forma- 
 tion only to be met midway by an opposing mass and a 
 grand melee precipitated. Science would give way to 
 beef and brawn and instead of the graceful exhibition 
 of to-day we should have a gladiatorial mix-up resem- 
 bling hockey to about the same extent that a sewing-bee 
 resembles a prize-fight. Undoubtedly, however, a change 
 in rules will make its appearance before that pass is 
 reached. 
 
 A forward's dress should be as light as the weather 
 will permit and his skates should be as light as is consist- 
 ent with "strength. Having once found a style of stick 
 which suits him he should either lay in a supply of that 
 sort or observe it so carefully that he will be able to dupli- 
 cate it when necessary. 
 
 Cover-Point 
 
 The cover-point is a member of the defense, but at 
 times he is called upon to take part in offensive work. 
 His position is practically half-way between goal and 
 the center of the rink, but his territory extends from 
 barrier to barrier across the rink and from his own goal 
 
378 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 to the opponent's, but never back of it. The occasions, 
 however, when the cover is entitled to take the puck up 
 to the opponent's goal are very few. Ordinarily he 
 should feed to a forward, but it sometimes happens that 
 the puck comes into his position when a safe pass is 
 impossible and a rush feasible. In that case his position 
 should be at once covered by one of the forwards, and as 
 soon as the goal has been tried or his usefulness near goal 
 ends cover should at once regain his place. In the sec- 
 ond half, when the opposing forwards show signs of 
 weakening, the cover may increase his offensive work 
 greatly since in such a case the play is bound to be largely 
 in the opponent's territory and it is wise policy to sacri- 
 fice defensive strength for aggression. 
 
 When the puck is near the opponent's goal cover 
 should go forward to a position near the center of the 
 rink so as to be able to quickly return the puck if it comes 
 back to him. When the occasion presents itself for a 
 try-at-goal he should seize it at once, being careful, how- 
 ever, not to let his ambition to shine as a scorer mislead 
 his judgment. With the puck in his own territory cov- 
 er's place is near his own goal when once the rush has 
 passed him. He should never pass the puck in front of 
 his own goal. Having got possession of it there his play 
 is to either send it to one side of the rink and at a safe 
 distance away or skate toward opponent's goal and only 
 pass it when it can be done with certainty. 
 
 Remember that when a forward is skating down upon 
 you he will try first to save the puck. So watch the puck 
 
THE POSITIONS 379 
 
 and not the man. If lie sends the puck aside in order to 
 find it again after meeting you, swing out of his path and 
 go after the puck. Otherwise watch his legs and feet. 
 Never mind where his upper body swings; he can't go 
 far without his feet. When they turn, turn with them. 
 When you check, check hard; a half check is worse than 
 useless. 
 
 In returning the puck to his forwards when the latter 
 are near the opponent's goal cover should, unless he is 
 playing well into opponent's territory, lift the disk back ; 
 a lift is harder for the opponent to stop than a slide and 
 as soon as he has stopped it it is fair game for the oppos- 
 ing forwards. 
 
 In stopping a lifted puck cover should always use his 
 hand and never rely upon stopping it with his stick. 
 Cover's stick should be heavy and the blade should be 
 thin enough at the sole to enable him to lift readily. He 
 may dress a trifle heavier than the forwards. 
 
 Point 
 
 Point is entirely a defensive position. The player's 
 territory is limited strictly to the immediate neighbor- 
 hood of his goal. He should never adventure farther 
 afield than cover's position. Point and cover should 
 work together like two cog-wheels and point and goal 
 should work together like two more. Team-play in the 
 defense is highly necessary and is capable of being devel- 
 oped to a high state of efficiency. Point should always 
 
380 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 take a position relative to cover where lie can watch the 
 play in opponent's territory. If cover stands to the left 
 of a line running lengthwise through the center of the 
 rink from end to end, point should take his stand to the 
 right of that line. And such positions should be main- 
 tained relatively during an attack since it is harder for 
 a forward to dodge two men standing apart than two 
 men one behind another. In an attack cover's duty is 
 to block or check the man with the puck while point 
 should put every effort into intercepting the pass. In 
 other words, cover plays for the man and point for the 
 puck. 
 
 When the puck goes back of or to one side of the net 
 in a scrimmage point may go after it, in which case cover 
 plays nearer to goal. But both point and cover should 
 never leave their positions at the same time. If possible 
 point should leave all back of goal work to a forward. If, 
 as sometimes happens, goal leaves the net for an instant 
 point should instantly slip into his position and stay there 
 until goal has fully regained it. 
 
 In the face of a combined attack by all the opposing 
 forwards both cover and point should fall back nearer 
 goal, trusting rather to spoiling a shoot than to gaining 
 possession of the puck, until their own forwards come to 
 their support. 
 
 Goal 
 
 Goal-tender holds what is probably the most respon- 
 sible position on the team. When he fails in his endeav- 
 
THE POSITIONS 381 
 
 ors it means that the opponent lias scored a point, while 
 other members of his side may fail repeatedly with re- 
 sults comparatively unimportant or, at least, far less de- 
 cisive. Goal, then, should be chosen for coolness, pluck, 
 quickness and knowledge of the game. Physical quali- 
 ties count for less in the goal than in any other player, 
 although the larger he is the more space he fills at the 
 net and the less undefended place remains. Quickness 
 is an important essential, and by quickness is meant 
 quickness of mind, of eye and of body. He must be 
 quick to see a shoot at goal, quick to judge the puck and 
 quick to put himself into position to stop it. He need 
 not be a more than average good skater or an expert 
 stick-handler. He should use well-padded leg-guards 
 and have thighs and elbows thoroughly protected. It is 
 well to remember that the more padding a goal wears the 
 greater his bulk is and the harder it is to put the puck 
 by him. 
 
 A goal should not attempt stops with his stick alone, 
 but should use that implement chiefly to play the puck 
 away after a stop. A goal who has had baseball experi- 
 ence will be able to judge a lifted puck accurately and 
 so stop with his hands many a high shoot that might 
 otherwise score for the opponent. As has been already 
 said, the hardest puck to stop is one coining at goal about 
 knee-high. The hands and upper part of the body can 
 not be brought into use and the goal-tender must depend 
 on his legs alone. With generous leg-guards — and so 
 
 far the rules have not limited the size of these articles — 
 25 
 
382 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 the goal can, however, by bringing both legs together 
 and turning sideways, present quite a respectable sur- 
 face. But goal does not always have time to get into 
 position for shoots of this sort and quick passes in front 
 of goal followed by sharp lifts frequently score. Keep- 
 ing his eyes on the puck every instant is the goal's only 
 salvation. 
 
 A high shoot is more easily stopped than a low one ; 
 consequently when there is a scrimmage near goal goal- 
 tender should take a crouching position in order to put 
 as much of his bulk as possible near the ice, being care- 
 ful, however, not to infringe the rule prohibiting lying, 
 kneeling or sitting. With the puck in play at one side 
 he should take a position with one knee steadying against 
 the goal-post at that side. When the play is in front he 
 should occupy the middle of the goal, being careful to 
 favor neither side. 
 
 There is but one rule regarding a goal-tender's right 
 to leave goal; do so only when the play is absolutely sure. 
 It sometimes happens that he can reach the puck before 
 an opponent when none of his own side are at hand. In 
 such a case to leave goal is allowable. But skating out 
 to meet one forward, even if he keeps between the for- 
 ward and the goal, is the riskiest sort of business and is 
 indulged in principally by goals who are momentarily 
 unnerved. Goal should never go back of goal for a puck 
 unless the play is well at the other end of the rink. His 
 place is in front of the net. 
 
 Goal should dress warmly, wear large well-padded 
 
THE POSITIONS 383 
 
 gloves and use a short-hafted, broad-bladed stick. His 
 skates should be long enough in the blade to aid as much 
 as possible in stopping slides and need not be sharply- 
 ground, since they are used to stand on rather than to 
 skate on. 
 
384 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 ICE HOCKEY EECOEDS 
 
 SEASON OF 1903-04 
 
 INTERCOLLEGIATE HOCKEY LEAGUE 
 
 January 9 — Princeton, 1; Brown, 0. 
 
 January 16 — Yale, 5; Columbia, 3. 
 
 January 23 — Harvard won from Princeton by default. 
 
 January 27 — Yale, 10; Brown, 0. 
 
 January 30 — Harvard, 2; Columbia, 0. 
 
 February 3 — Harvard, 7 ; Brown, 0. 
 
 February 6 — Columbia, 3; Brown, 0. 
 
 February 13 — Columbia, 2; Princeton, 1. 
 
 February 17 — Yale, 4; Princeton, 3. 
 
 February 20 — Harvard, 5; Yale, 2. 
 
 February 27 — Harvard, 4; Yale, 3. 
 
 Intercollegiate championships have been won as follows: 1899- 
 1900, 1900-'01, and 1901-'02, by Yale; 1902-'03, and 1903-'04, by 
 Harvard. 
 
 American Hockey League championships have been won as 
 follows: 1896-'97 and 1897-'98, by New York Athletic Club; 
 1898-'99, by Brooklyn Skating Club; 1899-1900, 1900-'01, 
 1901-'02, and 1902-'03, by Crescent Athletic Club. 
 
ADDITIONAL EECOEDS 
 
ICE HOCKEY KULES 387 
 
 ICE HOCKEY KULES 
 
 (By permission of the American Sports Publishing Company, owner of the 
 Copyright.) 
 
 Section 1. A team shall be composed of seven players who 
 shall be bona fide members of the clubs they represent. No player 
 shall be allowed to play on more than one team in the same series 
 during the season. 
 
 Sec. 2. The game shall be commenced and renewed by a face 
 in the center of the rink. Rink must be at least 112 feet by 58 
 feet. Nets shall be 6 feet wide and 4 feet high. 
 
 DEFINITION OF A FACE 
 
 The puck shall be faced by being placed between the sticks of 
 two opponents and the referee then calling " play." 
 
 The goals shall be placed at least ten feet from the edge of 
 the ice. 
 
 Sec. 3. Two twenty-minute halves, with an intermission of 
 ten minutes between, will be the time alloAved for matches; but 
 no stops of more than five minutes shall be allowed. A match 
 will be decided by the team winning the greatest number of 
 games during that time. In case of a tie after playing the speci- 
 fied two twenty-minute halves, play will continue until one side 
 secures a game, unless otherwise agreed upon between the cap- 
 tains before a match. Goals shall be changed after each half. 
 
 Sec. 4. No change of players shall be made after a match has 
 commenced, except for reasons of accidents or injuries during the 
 game. 
 
 Sec. 5. Should any player be injured during the first half of 
 the match and compelled to leave the ice, his side shall be al- 
 lowed to put on a spare man from the reserve to equalize the 
 teams; should any player be injured during the second half of 
 the match, the captain of the opposing team shall have the option 
 of dropping a player to equalize the teams or allow his oppo- 
 
388 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 nents to put on a man from the reserve. In the event of any 
 dispute between the captains as to the injured player's fitness 
 to continue the game, the matter shall at once be decided by the 
 referee. 
 
 Sec. 6. Should the game be temporarily stopped by the in- 
 fringement of any of the rules, the captain of the opposing team 
 may claim that the puck be taken back and a " face " take place 
 where it last was played from before such infringement occurred. 
 
 Sec. 7. When a player hits the puck, any one of the same side, 
 who at such moment of hitting is nearer the opponent's goal-line 
 is out of play, and may not touch the puck himself or in any 
 way whatever prevent any other player from doing so, until the 
 puck has been played. A player should always be on his own 
 side of the puck. 
 
 Sec. 8. The puck may be stopped, but not carried or knocked 
 on, by any part of the body, nor shall any player close his hand 
 on, or carry the puck to the ice in his hand. No player shall raise 
 the stick above his shoulder, except in lifting the puck. Charg- 
 ing from behind, tripping, collaring, kicking or shinning shall 
 not be allowed, and for any infringement of these rules, the 
 referee may rule the offending player off the ice for that match 
 or for such portion of actual playing time as he may see fit. 
 
 Sec. 9. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs 
 behind the goals, it shall be taken by the referee to five yards at 
 right angles from the goal-line and there faced. When the puck 
 goes off the ice at the sides, it shall be taken by the referee to 
 five yards at right angles from the boundary-line and there faced. 
 
 Sec. 10. The goal-keeper must not, during the play, lie, kneel 
 or sit upon the ice, but must maintain a standing position. 
 
 Sec. 11. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have 
 passed between the goal-posts from in front. 
 
 Sec. 12. Hockey-sticks shall not be more than three inches 
 wide at any part. 
 
 Sec. 13. The puck must be made of rubber, one inch thick all 
 through and three inches in diameter. 
 
 Sec. 14. The captains of the contesting teams shall agree upon 
 a referee, two umpires (one to be stationed behind each goal, 
 
 
ICE HOCKEY KULES 389 
 
 which positions shall not he changed during a match) and two 
 time-keepers. In the event of the captains failing to agree on 
 umpires and time-keepers, the referee shall appoint same. 
 
 Sec. 15. All disputes during the match shall be decided by 
 the referee, and he shall have full control of all players and offi- 
 cials from commencement to finish of matches, inclusive of stops, 
 arid his decision shall be final. 
 
 Sec. 16. All questions as to games shall be settled by the 
 umpires, and their decision shall be final. 
 
 Sec. 17. In the event of any dispute as to the decision of an 
 umpire or time-keeper, the referee shall have the power to remove 
 and replace him. 
 
 Sec. 18. Any player guilty of using profane or abusive lan- 
 guage to any official or other players shall be liable to be ruled 
 off by the referee as per Section 8. 
 
 Sec. 19. A goal-net shall be used. 
 
 CHAMPIONSHIP RULES AS ADOPTED BY THE AMATEUB HOCKEY 
 LEAGUE OF NEW YORK 
 
 Section 1. The season shall be from the 15th of December 
 to the 15th of March, both days inclusive. 
 
 Sec. 2. The championship shall be decided by a series of 
 games, a schedule of which shall be drawn up by one delegate 
 from each club at the annual convention. The club winning the 
 most matches shall be declared champion. 
 
 Sec. 3. All championship matches shall be played on rinks 
 arranged for by the home club, subject to the jurisdiction of the 
 League. 
 
 Sec. 4. The League shall offer a championship tropin', the 
 winning club to hold same and be recognized as champions of 
 the United States. The trophy shall be delivered to the winning 
 club within seven days after the close of the season. 
 
 Sec. 5. Any club holding the championship for three years in 
 succession shall become absolute owners of the championship 
 trophy. 
 
 Sec. 6. Any team making default shall forfeit its right to 
 compete for the championship for that season, and be liable to a 
 
390 ICE HOCKEY 
 
 fine of $100 unless good reasons can be given for defaulting. All 
 matches played by defaulting teams shall be counted and future 
 matches be awarded to opposing teams. 
 
 Sec. 7. In the event of any two clubs failing to agree upon a 
 referee four days before the match, the Governing Committee 
 shall appoint a referee on receiving notice from either club that 
 an agreement is impossible. 
 
 Sec. 8. It shall be the duty of the captains of the contesting 
 teams to hand to the referee the names of the players, for each 
 match, previous to the start, on forms supplied by the Secretary 
 of the League. The referee shall then fill in the date of the 
 match, names of contesting clubs, the score at the finish, with 
 names of umpires and time-keepers, the whole duly signed by 
 himself and forwarded to the Secretary of the League. 
 
 Sec. 9. A player must be a bona fide member of the club he 
 represents at least thirty (30) days before he is eligible to com- 
 pete in championship games. No player shall play in an Ama- 
 teur Hockey League scheduled game who, during the then cur- 
 rent season, has played with another club in a recognized Hockey. 
 Association, without special permission of the Executive. 
 
LAWN TENNIS 
 
CHAPTER I 
 
 THE GAME AND HOW IT IS PLAYED 
 
 A Brief History of Lawn Tennis 
 
 In its present form lawn tennis is a game of recent 
 origin, dating back, as it does, only to 1874. But in 
 the middle ages the French and Italian courts played 
 a game containing the essential points of modern ten- 
 nis. Major Wingfield, a British army officer, gave the 
 present game to the world in 1874, devising a court 
 which was 60 feet in length, 30 feet broad at the base 
 lines and 20 feet across at the center, and which pre- 
 sented the appearance of a stout-waisted hour-glass. 
 The game was taken up by a few persons and the fol- 
 lowing year the Marylebone Cricket Club adopted it, 
 a committee being appointed to formulate rules. 
 Changes were made in the dimensions of the court, but 
 the hour-glass form was retained. The game gained 
 friends so rapidly that in 1877 the first All-England 
 championship tournament was held at Wimbledon. In 
 1888 the English Lawn Tennis Association was formed 
 and has continued up to the present. This association 
 assumed an authority which has never been questioned, 
 and is responsible for the rules governing the game 
 
 to-day. 
 
 393 
 
394 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 Lawn tennis in America, strange to say, dates back 
 to the same year as does the English game. In 1874 
 it was seen in England by a visiting Bostonian and by 
 him was brought to this country and first played on this 
 side of the water at Nahant, Mass. As in England, its 
 success was instantaneous, and by the following summer 
 hundreds were playing it. Courts appeared in Boston, 
 New York, Philadelphia and Newport. It was not 
 until six years afterward, however, that the present 
 United States National Lawn Tennis Association was 
 formed in New York and uniform rules were adopted. 
 The annual championship tournaments at Newport 
 had their inception at the first meeting of the Asso- 
 ciation. 
 
 The early American champions were James 
 Dwight and Richard D. Sears, of Boston. Sears main- 
 tained his position at the head of the ranking list for 
 seven years, giving way at last by default to H. W. 
 Slocum at Newport in 1888. Slocum reigned two years 
 and was followed by O. S. Campbell, who held the cham- 
 pionship in 1890, 1891 and 1892. From that time to 
 the present the championship has been the property re- 
 spectively of B. D. Wrenn, F. H. Hovey, M. D. Whit- 
 man and W. A. Earned. In 1894 Wrenn met and de- 
 feated M. F. Goodbody of Ireland, after the latter had 
 successfully encountered F. H. Hovey, C. Hobart and 
 W. A. Earned. Again, in 1897, Wrenn was called upon 
 to protect the American claim to supremacy and did so 
 successfully by defeating W. V. Eaves. 
 
THE GAME AND HOW IT IS PLAYED 395 
 
 The International Challenge Cup was put up by 
 D. F. Davis in 1900 and a trio of challengers appeared 
 from England in the persons of A. W. Gore, E. D. 
 Black and H. R. Barrett. They were easily defeated. 
 
 The Waterloo of our players came in 1903 when 
 the Davis Challenge Cup as well as the American sin- 
 gles and doubles national championships were captured 
 by the Doherty brothers, of England, whose form was 
 so much better in almost all departments of the game 
 as to be a revelation of the possibilities of tennis to fol- 
 lowers of the game on this side of the water. 
 
 Lawn tennis in this country has had its " boom 
 days " and has now settled down to a condition of natu- 
 ral and healthy prosperity. The game as a fad has 
 passed, bSt the game as a sport remains and finds new 
 devotees each year. 
 
 How the Game is Played 
 
 The court, as the playing territory is called, may 
 be marked out on a lawn, on dirt, on asphalt, on con- 
 crete or on boards, the chief essential being a level sur- 
 face. The best outdoor court is that made on a firmly 
 packed soil composed of sand and clay. The dimen- 
 sions are, length, 78 feet, width, 36 feet. This width 
 is for a double court; for a single court the width is 
 27 feet. The court is marked out with white lines of 
 lime or of cotton tape. A net 3 feet in height crosses 
 the court in the center. Beside the boundary-lines 
 
396 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 other lines divide the playing space as shown in Dia- 
 gram O. (See Rules.) 
 
 The implements are a racket and one or more felt- 
 covered hollow rubber balls filled with compressed air. 
 The racket consists of an oval spoon, filled in with a net- 
 work of catgut, to which a handle some 15 inches in 
 length is attached. The ball is 2-| inches in diameter. 
 
 The game may be played by two, three, or four per- 
 sons. When two play the game is called singles and the 
 single court is used. When three persons play the game 
 is said to be three-handed, and when four persons play 
 the game is called doubles. With more than two per- 
 sons participating the double court is used. 
 
 The object or the game is, briefly, to knock the 
 ball with the racket over the net into the Opponent's 
 court in such a manner that he can not return it. The 
 players take positions on opposite sides of the net. The 
 man first playing the ball is called the server. Standing 
 behind his base-line to the right of the center line he 
 tosses the ball into the air and hits it with his racket 
 as it descends, sending it across the net on the fly and 
 into the opponent's right-hand service court, that is, in 
 a slightly diagonal direction. The opponent, who is 
 called the striker-out, waits for the ball to bound and 
 then returns it to the server, who tries to again put it 
 into the striker-out's court. 
 
 After the service has been returned either player has 
 the choice of hitting the ball in the air (volleying) or 
 on the first bound. The service must be made into the 
 
THE GAME AND HOW IT IS PLAYED 397 
 
 striker-out's right or left-service court, as the case may 
 be, but after that the* ball may be played anywhere 
 inside the boundaries. The server has two chances on 
 each point — that is, if the first serve does not go into the 
 right court it is called a fault and he may serve again. 
 Two failures constitute a double fault and the server 
 loses a point to his opponent. If the ball is served fairly 
 and the striker-out fails to return it on the bound the 
 point goes to the server. If the striker-out returns the 
 service the server then tries to play it back to him, and 
 the opponents alternately strike the ball back and forth 
 until one or the other fails, the point then being scored 
 against the player so failing. 
 
 Scoring.— The first point won is called 15. If A, 
 who is serving, wins the first stroke the score stands 15 — 
 love (written 15 — 0). If B wins the second stroke the 
 score becomes 15 all. If A wins the third stroke the 
 score becomes 30 — 15. If B wins the fourth stroke the 
 score becomes 30 all. If A wins the fifth stroke the 
 score becomes 40 — 30. If A wins the sixth stroke the 
 score becomes 50 — 30. Eifty is game and A conse- 
 quently wins. 
 
 A Deuce Game. — If when A leads at 40 — 30, B 
 captures the next stroke the score becomes 40 all, but 
 is called deuce. It is now necessary for a player to win 
 two successive strokes in order to win the game. If A 
 makes the next stroke the score becomes vantage in; 
 if B makes it the score is vantage out. With vantage 
 in his favor either player may win the game by captur- 
 
398 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 ing the next stroke. If he does not the score is again 
 deuce. 
 
 A Deuce Set. — The same idea is also applied to 
 games, in this manner: Ordinarily the player first win- 
 ning six games wins the set, but when each player has 
 earned five games the score becomes games all or deuce 
 and it is necessary for a player to win the next 2 games 
 in order to win the set. If when the score is games all 
 (5 all) A wins the next game (6 — 5) and B wins the 
 next (6 all) the score again becomes games all. If A wins 
 the next two games he captures the set, 8 — 6. Play- 
 ers may, however, dispense with the vantage feature by 
 mutual agreement. The best two sets out of three usu- 
 ally constitute a match; in championship meetings, 
 however, a match sometimes consists of three sets out 
 of five. 
 
 The opponents change courts after each set, save in 
 championship meetings, when in the concluding set they 
 change after the first, third and each subsequent alter- 
 nate game. 
 
CHAPTER II 
 USING THE RACKET 
 
 The first thing for the beginner is to accustom him- 
 self to the use of the implements. lie should learn how 
 to hold and swing the racket and discover by experi- 
 ence how hard it is necessary to hit the ball in order to 
 send it a certain distance. If the beginner can find a 
 high wall or side of a building against which he can 
 hit the ball from different distances it will be an aid 
 to him. 
 
 The choice of a racket should be left to some one 
 who has played the game. The principal things to 
 consider are weight and balance, providing you are pur- 
 chasing from a reputable house. For the ordinary 
 player the racket should weigh not less than 13 nor 
 more than 14^ ounces. Fast work, without plenty of 
 weight in the racket is impossible, while too much weight 
 will tire the wrist. Find a racket which feels right and 
 which swings comfortably. Details of manufacture 
 need not trouble you so long as you are buying from a 
 house with a reputation for honest goods and fair treat- 
 ment. 
 
 Rackets vary greatly in price. Practical rackets may 
 be bought for as little as two dollars, while the finest 
 cost as high as eight. A good serviceable racket may 
 26 399 
 
400 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 be had for four dollars. There are several brands of 
 balls any of which are satisfactory so long as they are 
 new; never purchase a last season's ball, since rubber 
 very quickly loses its life. A ball, irrespective of maker, 
 which sells for four dollars a dozen will be found gen- 
 erally satisfactory. 
 
 How to Hold the Racket. — No matter whether 
 you are serving or returning the serve, no matter what 
 kind of a stroke you are making, always hold the racket 
 firmly. A loose grip on the handle is a fault which, once 
 acquired, is almost impossible to recover from. There- 
 fore start right. Take the handle at the extreme end, 
 the butt working against the palm of the hand. A 
 forehand stroke is made when the ball is to the right of 
 the body. In this case the hand grasps the handle some- 
 what diagonally, the forefinger being a trifle separated 
 from the others but not laid stiffly along the handle. 
 A backhand stroke is used when the ball is to the left 
 of the body. In this case the fingers should be wrapped 
 tightly around the handle, with the thumb at full length 
 at the back as an aid to direction and force. This grip 
 is also the proper one to use when making an overhand 
 serve. It is, of course, necessary to alter the grip fre- 
 quently during play, but the ability to do this comes 
 readily until, with experience, the changing of the grip 
 requires no thought. When at rest the racket should 
 be held not hanging at arm's length but across the front 
 of the body, the right hand retaining its firm grip on 
 the butt and the left hand lightly supporting it at the 
 
USING THE KACKET 401 
 
 fork or splice. From here it may be readily brought 
 into any desired position. 
 
 The Stroke. — Another bad habit easily acquired 
 and difficult to shake off is that of hitting the ball with a 
 short, nervous jerk in which the arm alone is concerned. 
 Such a stroke is deficient in accuracy and speed. Prac- 
 tise until you have developed a long swinging stroke 
 not of the arm alone but of the whole body from the 
 knees upward. The racket should start at the limit of 
 your reach behind you, come forward with an easy, free 
 motion from the shoulder and swing as far beyond you 
 after the ball is hit as your reach will permit. This fol- 
 low-through is just as essential in tennis as in golf, and is 
 one of the secrets of success of most first-rank players. 
 In the forehand stroke the racket comes up in front of the 
 body and finishes over the left shoulder; in the back- 
 hand stroke it starts over that shoulder and finishes at the 
 extreme limit of the outward reach. In the overhand 
 serve the racket should not stop its descent in front of 
 the shoulder, but should be brought on down until it 
 swings back of the body. Practise these strokes until 
 the muscles perform their work smoothly and there is no 
 hitch from start to finish. 
 
 Managing the Body. — Getting into position for the 
 ball, poising the body for the stroke and recovering the 
 balance are important points. In the first place, keep 
 your feet under you. Never try a stroke when you are at 
 such a distance from the ball that you are obliged to 
 overbalance to reach it. Have your balance perfect 
 
402 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 when you hit, and then overbalance in the direc- 
 tion of the stroke, adding the weight of the body 
 to the impulse and recovering by advancing the feet. 
 While awaiting a serve divide the weight evenly on both 
 feet, throw the balance slightly forward from the waist 
 and face the opponent squarely. From this position you 
 can start quickly in any direction. In making a forehand 
 drive step forward with the left foot, start the racket well 
 back, sweep it forward hard and fast, throw the weight 
 on to the left foot as the stroke is made and recover the 
 balance by advancing the right foot. 
 
 Meet the ball ; that is, advance toward it instead of 
 remaining motionless or moving backward. Do not make 
 the common mistake of getting too close to it and so 
 cramping the stroke. This is especially likely to happen 
 with the novice when trying backhand strokes. It is bet- 
 ter to start the stroke too far away and trust to being 
 able to move up while making it than to get too close and 
 have to move back. In the latter case neither speed nor 
 accuracy of direction are possible. 
 
 Extend' the arm; do not make a stroke with the el- 
 bow bent. If you do you will " chop " the ball. Do not 
 overwork the wrist. The wrist performs its part at the 
 beginning and end of the stroke, not during the swing. 
 
 Keep the eyes ojst the ball from the instant it 
 leaves the opponent's racket until it meets your own. 
 Discover at a glance while getting your position for the 
 stroke where your opponent is and decide instantly 
 where to put the ball, but do not " give away " the play 
 by looking toward that part of the court. 
 
CHAPTER III 
 
 SERVING 
 
 In serving the player must make the ball travel a dis- 
 tance of 39 feet before it crosses the net; the net is 3 feet 
 high at the center, increasing to 3 feet 6 inches at the 
 ends; and after crossing the net the ball must fall within 
 a space 21 feet by 13^ feet in area. At first thought the 
 server's task is not difficult; it is merely necessary for 
 him to send the ball away in an arching flight so that it 
 will go over the net and drop into the court beyond. But 
 a ball which arches to any extent is slow, and on the other 
 side of the net is an opponent waiting to receive it and 
 put it back into the server's court where the latter will 
 have difficulty in getting it. A slow ball with an easy 
 bound is just what will please him most. Therefore it 
 becomes necessary for the server to send a swift ball, one 
 which will bound at a slight angle and render the striker- 
 out's work as difficult as possible. 
 
 So the server stands back of his line, tosses the ball 
 up and swings down hard with his racket. The ball goes 
 away with plenty of speed but slams into the net. The 
 server tries it again, resolved this time to get it over the 
 canvas. He succeeds. The ball, going like a shot, gets 
 into no difficulties with the net, but lands four feet back 
 
 403 
 
404 LAWK TENNIS 
 
 of the opponent's service-line; double fault for the server; 
 a point for the other chap. The server tries again. He 
 thinks he sees his mistake. So he gets up on to his toes, 
 tosses his ball far into the air and lets drive. Unfortu- 
 nately, he is overbalanced and the stroke sends the ball 
 into the back net, the opponent dodging it as it sings 
 by his head. The server becomes suddenly cautious. 
 No double fault for him again. He sends the next ball 
 away with a nice slow arch. It bounds high and true 
 and the opponent drives it back into the extreme left 
 corner of the server's court, where it is impossible for the 
 latter to get it. Another point for the striker-out. After 
 that set, if the server is possessed of good sense he finds 
 some one who knows how to serve and takes a few les- 
 sons. 
 
 The Undeehand Seevice. — In the infancy of ten- 
 nis the serve most used was the underhand cut or twist, in 
 which the ball was made to bound from the ground in as 
 erratic a manner as possible. All sorts of angles were 
 possible; in some cases there was almost no bound, the 
 ball trickling along the ground after striking as though 
 insane. But with the advent of fast return strokes, no- 
 tably the Lawford drive, the underhand service went 
 out of fashion. To-day it is practically never used, and 
 the hard overhand service, with or without twist, has 
 taken its place. 
 
 The Ovebhand Seevice. — The best service for the 
 beginner to learn is the straight overhand with a trifle of 
 cut to the right. Start the ball at top reach, getting up 
 
SERVING 405 
 
 on the right toe if necessary, and bring the racket to it 
 so that it is struck slightly from above and slightly on the 
 right side. The spin resulting is one to the server's right 
 and downward, which puts a certain amount of cut on 
 the ball and forces it to the opponent's right, as well as 
 enough drop to bring it into the court when, without the 
 impulse from the top, it would naturally land back of 
 the service-line. This is not a difficult serve to learn and 
 when once mastered may be made at the greatest speed 
 of which you are capable. In practising it, however, it 
 is best to learn the principle of the stroke thoroughly be- 
 fore trying to combine speed with it. If you find it neces- 
 sary to get up on the toe of your right foot in order to 
 attain sufficient elevation use the left foot to maintain 
 your balance ; without perfect balance until after the ball 
 has been struck no success in this or any other service is 
 possible. 
 
 The reverse service is somewhat more difficult to 
 acquire any great amount of proficiency in. But hav- 
 ing once learned the above, the reverse will come with 
 practise, and when mastered is of much value. It is 
 merely the opposite of the right-side cut, the racket being 
 drawn past the ball from right to left. By using both 
 serves you can diversify your delivery so as to keep the 
 opponent generally ignorant as to what is going to hap- 
 pen to him. 
 
 The American twist service, which popped into 
 prominence a few years ago at the international meetings, 
 is merely the service above described perfected. The 
 
406 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 ball is struck well on top and at the same time the en- 
 tire face of the racket is drawn sharply across it from left 
 to right, or vice versa. The roughness of the felt cover 
 here serves a double purpose; it engages the strings of 
 the racket so that a rapid spin is created, and, after leav- 
 ing the racket, it offers great resistance to the air. The 
 ball is sent away, say, with a left-to-right spin; conse- 
 quently the right side of the ball travels faster than the 
 left, creates more friction with the air than does the oth- 
 er, and so, following the line of least resistance, bears 
 constantly to the left. At the same time, however, be- 
 cause of the fact that the impulse has been given largely 
 from above, the line of least resistance is beneath as well 
 as to the right, and the consequence is that a ball well 
 delivered with this stroke cuts to the server's left and 
 also drops quickly after passing the net. To those who 
 understand the art of curving a baseball this curving of 
 a tennis-ball offers no puzzling features. 
 
 The ball sent across the net with the left-to-right spin 
 naturally bounds smartly to the right after landing, 
 while a ball sent with the reverse spin bounds to the left ; 
 in each case the bound is in the direction opposite to the 
 curve. It is not a service for the beginner to attempt, 
 but is possible of mastery by any player who has ac- 
 quired speed and dexterity in the use of the racket. At 
 first it tells greatly on the muscles of the abdomen be- 
 cause in making the stroke it is necessary to lean back- 
 ward and start the racket from a point as low as possible 
 behind you, bringing it up and forward with a hard 
 
SERVING 407 
 
 sweep of the arm. There is a knack to the quick, sharp 
 side-to-side motion, however, which can only be solved 
 by repeated experiments. 
 
 The second service, no matter what the first has 
 been, should be kept as long and low as is consistent with 
 safety. The fault of many beginners is that they at- 
 tempt a fast, slashing first service, and when that fails, 
 as it does more often than not, pop over a slow service 
 that bounds so high that the opponent easily " kills " it 
 with a hard drive. It is far better tennis to put the first 
 service over, even if it is necessary to reduce its speed, 
 than to lose it entirely and have to depend on the second. 
 A fairly fast ball that is certain of success eight times 
 out of ten is of far more value than an extremely fast 
 one that is only occasionally successful. 
 
CHAPTER IV 
 
 RETURNING 
 
 By returning is meant here the act of playing the 
 ball in any way save by service. The term includes the 
 Ground-stroke, the Yolley and the Lob. 
 
 The Ground-Stroke 
 
 By this is meant the stroke used in playing a ball 
 that has struck the ground. Fully two out of three 
 strokes are ground-strokes, although the rules require 
 that only the return of the service shall be such. No 
 game can be won by service and volleying only, and the 
 ground-stroke is the first and the most important thing 
 to learn. The ground-stroke may be made in several 
 ways, as by the straight side-stroke, the drop-stroke and 
 the chop-stroke. All have their uses. 
 
 At what part of the bound from which to play the 
 ground-stroke is a matter of opinion. Theoretically at 
 least the player who moves in on the ball and takes it 
 just as it rises from the ground is playing a faster game 
 and a harder game than the one who waits for the ball 
 to descend from the top of the bound. But to do this suc- 
 cessfully every time is a difficult matter, and until the 
 
 408 
 
KETUKNING 409 
 
 beginner lias acquired certainty in judging the ball it is 
 better for him to make the stroke after the ball has 
 reached the top of its arc and has begun to drop. x\s to 
 holding the racket, remember what has been already 
 said as to keeping a tight grip. A loosely held racket 
 will turn in the hand unless the ball strikes the center 
 of it, and even when it does not turn is incapable of de- 
 livering a sharp, firm blow. 
 
 Keep the backet horizontal; that is to say, play 
 every stroke with the head practically no lower than 
 the butt. To do this it often becomes necessary to bend 
 the body, but the habit is easily acquired and by it ac- 
 curacy and steadiness are insured. The player who 
 makes his strokes with the racket in a perpendicular po- 
 sition can never become more than a mediocre player, 
 no matter how brilliant he may be at serving or cover- 
 ing court. 
 
 The Side-Stroke. — The twist is an important feat- 
 ure of the side-stroke. A fast ball ordinarily bounds 
 low, perhaps no higher than the knee, and if returned 
 without any twist will usually go out of court. 
 Therefore a certain amount of down twist is necessary. 
 Use a long, clean swing, starting the racket well back of 
 the body, meet the ball as it starts to drop from the top 
 of the arc, give a slight twist of the wrist so that the 
 upper edge of the racket will be in advance of the lower 
 as the ball is struck and. carry the racket well through. 
 Get the weight of the body into the stroke. The ball will 
 get away with a downward spin that will cause it to 
 
410 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 drop sharply after crossing the net. When necessary to 
 get by an opponent who is playing close up in the ex- 
 pectation of volleying, this stroke is far more service- 
 able than a slow, high ball which could be easily killed. 
 The harder the ball is struck the sharper will be the 
 drop ; it is not so much the amount of twist that regu- 
 lates the drop as it is the amount of impetus. There- 
 fore, do not fall into the error of jerking the wrist and 
 so making two distinct movements of the stroke where 
 there should be but one. 
 
 Do not Sacrifice Steadiness for Speed. — Learn 
 first to put the ball where it will do the most good and 
 then increase the speed of your strokes; but do not go 
 beyond the point where certainty ceases. Hard, slashing 
 strokes that send the ball into the net or out of court 
 may look formidable but are of small value — save to the 
 opponent. 
 
 The drop-stroke is an exaggeration of the side- 
 stroke, and when first used was known as the " Law- 
 ford." The slight, imperceptible twist used for the side- 
 stroke becomes an upward glancing sweep of the racket, 
 which gives the ball a sharp top-to-bottom spin and causes 
 it to drop erratically from its original line of flight. 
 When well performed the drop-stroke is more diificult to 
 volley than any other. As in the side-stroke, of which 
 this is merely a variation, a full, long sweep of the racket 
 is necessary, and the follow-through should not be 
 slighted. 
 
 The chop-stroke is made by meeting the ball with 
 
AT THE NET. 
 A forehand volley. (Narragansett Pier, E. I.) 
 
RETURNING 411 
 
 the racket with an underneath glancing blow, which 
 causes the ball to stay up instead of drop, the spin being 
 a backward one and just the reverse of that given by the 
 drop-stroke. The stroke is necessarily a slower one, but 
 partially atones for that by reason of its increased accu- 
 racy. To play a ball that is less than hip-high with this 
 stroke and keep it from going out of court is a difficult 
 feat; plenty of elevation at the time the ball is struck 
 is necessary for the success of the chop-stroke. 
 
 The backhand chop-stroke is the commonest of all 
 strokes made to the left of. the body, and the easiest. 
 
 The backhand side-stroke, if it can be acquired, is 
 far more valuable than the chop-stroke, but it is extreme- 
 ly difficult and utterly worthless unless properly played. 
 To use the drop-stroke in backhand playing is, of course, 
 out of the question. 
 
 The Volley 
 
 Elsewhere the rule has been laid down that all strokes 
 should be made with the arm extended and the elbow 
 practically unbent. Like every good rule, this one pos- 
 sesses its exception. In certain backhand strokes it is 
 necessary to bend the elbow in order to obtain leverage ; 
 this is especially so of strokes made when the ball is 
 volleyed in front of the body, as is often necessary when 
 playing up to the net. But with this exception the 
 volley, like the ground-stroke, should be made with a 
 full arm. 
 
412 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 Sometimes it is only necessary in volleying a hard-hit 
 ball to place the racket in its path, keeping the grasp on 
 the handle rigid. Generally, however, it is necessary to 
 strike the ball forcibly. If the player is well away from 
 the net he usually has time to prepare for the stroke by 
 swinging his racket back and then meeting the ball as in 
 a ground-stroke, only with less force. Avoid underhand 
 volleying; if it is not possible to volley with the racket 
 in a horizontal position retreat and take the ball with a 
 ground-stroke. Volleying is primarily a net play. Get 
 the racket in the path of the ball, move it back only a 
 few inches, and then, as the ball strikes it, move it for- 
 ward again, not attempting to hit the ball, but rather 
 pushing it, a slight twist of the wrist giving the direction. 
 This is the usual play for an ordinary ball coming at you 
 from ordinary elevation. But there is besides what is 
 called the stop-volley, which is also useful for this sort 
 of ball. 
 
 The stop-volley is made from a position close up 
 to the net. The racket is held where the ball will strike 
 it and the grasp on the handle relaxed so that the impact 
 is deadened and the ball, instead of springing away from 
 the racket, merely drops to the ground on the other side 
 of the net with practically no bound. In effect this 
 strike corresponds to the bunt used in baseball. It is 
 possible of success only when the ball is coming swiftly. 
 
 Overhead volleying or smashing is valuable when 
 the player at the net has a dropping ball to dispose of. 
 The player, in order to make this stroke successful, must 
 
RETURNING 413 
 
 first of all get into the right position. This position is 
 directly in the path of the descending ball, not in front 
 of it nor behind it. If the player will place himself 
 where, if he does not guard himself, the ball will strike 
 his face he will be in the correct position to " kill " it. 
 Start the racket well back of the right shoulder, with 
 the end nearly touching the ground, and bring it up and 
 forward with a full-arm swing, coming down on the ball 
 with the face of the racket squarely toward it. As the 
 blow is struck throw the weight of the body into it, re- 
 covering the balance by bringing the right foot forward. 
 Never attempt a smash from a point farther back from 
 the net than the service-line and always try to put the 
 ball away from the center of the opponent's court. 
 
 The half-volley is sometimes necessary; when it 
 is it is because the player has unwittingly placed himself 
 in poor position. The stroke is uncertain at the best 
 and should be avoided. 
 
 The Lob 
 
 This stroke is of great defensive value, and, in the 
 hands of some players, becomes also a highly successful 
 method of attack. As a defensive play the lob is made 
 to get the ball past an opponent at the net who is waiting 
 to smash it or to gain time in which to recover a lost posi- 
 tion. Thus, if you find yourself near the service-line and 
 well over to the side of the court, with the opponent play- 
 ing up to the net, a lob will accomplish two things: 
 
414 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 it will give you time in which to regain a position in the 
 center of the court and it will cheat the opponent of a 
 chance to " kill " the hall by a swift, well-placed volley. 
 The lob has the merit of being difficult to take by a 
 volley, the players who can " kill " a lobbed ball- being 
 few and far between. It is this that renders the stroke 
 of value as offense. If the opponent has gained an advan- 
 tageous position at the net from where he can volley into 
 almost any part of your court the lob may save you the 
 point. Send the ball over his head and as near the base- 
 line as possible. In this case to give the ball extreme 
 height is a mistake, as the more height there is the more 
 time the opponent has in which to get back and prepare 
 for the return. The aim, then, is to put the ball safely 
 out of his reach and as far toward the back of his court 
 as possible. When he goes after it take the net yourself. 
 Wnether the lob is used defensively or offensively, never 
 put the ball short of the service-line. From the service- 
 line to the base-line lies the territory for lobs. To attempt 
 to put the ball near the side-line is extremely risky, for 
 a high-hit ball encounters various currents of air which 
 it is impossible to take into consideration in making 
 the stroke and which may deflect the ball sufficiently 
 to bring it down out of court. In making the stroke get 
 the racket well under the ball and sweep it upward 
 with a movement of the arm; do not trust to the wrist 
 alone. Except when there is much wind do not be afraid 
 of letting yourself out and sending the ball high; the 
 high lob is nearly always more successful than the short 
 
RETURNING 415 
 
 one. After you have become somewhat expert at the 
 stroke even a fair wind need not deter you from hitting 
 up pretty well, for by taking the wind into consideration 
 and sending the ball aloft at an oblique, you will be able 
 to make with safety a play that will worry the opponent 
 considerably. Practise the stroke until it comes as easy 
 as any other. 
 
 27 
 
CHAPTER V 
 
 TACTICS 
 
 In serving take a position near the center of the base- 
 line. There are several reasons for this. One of them 
 is that the ball will have a less distance to travel, and so 
 will be in better command both as to speed and direction. 
 Another is that from this position it is possible to send 
 the ball to any part of the opponent's service court with 
 more certainty. Still another is that after the service 
 you are in a position to protect your own court. Study 
 the opponent's position. If he is standing well over to 
 the left of his court it is fair to assume that he is weak 
 on backhand strokes and is striving to protect himself 
 against them. If he has left the extreme right of the 
 court unguarded place the serve there; if he has not 
 put the ball where a backhand return will be almost 
 imperative. If he shows weakness in backhand work 
 see that he has plenty of it. Rely on placing first, then 
 on speed; combine the two, but don't sacrifice direction to 
 swiftness. 
 
 Position after Service. — If you have served from 
 what is practically the center of the base-line you are in 
 the best possible position from which to go after the op- 
 
 416 
 
TACTICS 417 
 
 ponent's return. Don't follow the ball and run into the 
 middle of the court, but stay where you are, watch the 
 opponent first, then his racket and finally the ball, and 
 keep on your toes, ready to start for whatever part of 
 your court the ball is coming to. It is a fact that the 
 strongest position you can occupy is " at the net," i. e., 
 about midway between the net and the service-line, but 
 don't be in too big a hurry to get there. The time to 
 run up to the net is after you have made a stroke which 
 the opponent will have difficulty in returning; go up 
 then and volley the ball. But do not go up after you 
 have played the ball weakly; your position then is in 
 deep court. If by lobbing or by swift drives to the 
 opponent's deep court you have driven the latter back to 
 or beyond his base-line, get to the net by all means and 
 volley. The net position then is the winning one. 
 Whenever during the game you can drive the opponent 
 back and get the net, do so; but do not dispute that 
 position with him after a weak play on your part. 
 
 In eeceiving your position so far as the distance 
 back of the service-line is concerned depends upon the 
 speed of the opponent's service. If he sends swift balls 
 they will strike near the service-line and bound low. 
 Your place then is well back where you can take them 
 at the instant they begin their drop, unless, of course, 
 you have perfected your playing to a point where you 
 can with certainty take the ball on the rise. Wherever 
 you stand recollect that you should move up on the ball 
 and not allow the ball to come back to you. As regards 
 
418 LAWK TENNIS 
 
 the side-line and center-line your position should be a 
 normal one, giving the opponent no hint of any weakness 
 of backhand play should such weakness exist. 
 
 In returning aim to put the ball as close as possible 
 to the opponent's base-line, using speed only as far as 
 certainty accompanies it. At the same time play for the 
 side-lines. If you can get the ball into the extreme cor- 
 ner you are doing as well as possible. In such case run 
 up to the net and be prepared to volley by the time the 
 ball comes back to you. If, however, you have returned 
 weakly, either as regards placing or speed of stroke, keep 
 away from the net. You have given the opponent a 
 chance to do his best and your whole court is his terri- 
 tory for attack. Get back to center deep court and be 
 prepared to move in any direction. In short, beware 
 of the net when it is evident to you that the opponent 
 can " pass " you — that is, get the ball by you on either 
 side. 
 
 If the opponent runs up immediately after the serv- 
 ice there are two plays possible which should win you 
 the point. If the opponent runs up through the center 
 of the court put a slow ball down the nearest side-line. 
 If he comes up on that side of his court play the ball 
 across the court in front of him so that it will strike near 
 the other boundary. Beside these plays there is another 
 which you may or may not be able to make, everything 
 depending on the kind of service you have to return; 
 I refer to a lob into deep court. This play if successful 
 will drive the opponent back again on the run and will 
 
TACTICS 419 
 
 give you the net. But there are many services which 
 it is impossible to convert into successful lobs. 
 
 In net play don't be too violent. To attempt to 
 smash everything isn't the best playing. Use your head 
 at the net if you ever use it at all. To smash a ball 
 while the opponent is playing back in expectation of 
 just such a play isn't always advisable. Try a stop-volley 
 sometimes. Place the ball sometimes where the oppo- 
 nent will have to race and work hard to get it ; if he does 
 get it the return will be so labored as to be easily handled ; 
 and whether he gets it or doesn't get it the exertion will 
 tell on him. The smash should be used discriminately ; 
 it's a good play but is often abused. 
 
 Change your play now and then ; it will bother the 
 adversary. Find out what he likes least of all and give 
 him a full dose of it. If he loses his temper — or rather 
 whether he does or not — keep your own. 
 
CHAPTER VI 
 
 THE COURT; HOW TO MAKE AND MAINTAIN IT 
 
 The best all-purpose court which can be made at me- 
 dium expense in this country is what is known as the 
 clay court. Turf courts are extensively used and are 
 pleasant to play on, but they are considerably slower 
 than clay courts and do not stand continued usage well. 
 Concrete, cement and asphalt courts are open to many 
 objections, the greatest of which is their liability to crack 
 or flake under the action of frost, and the least of which 
 is their effect on balls and shoe-soles. Cinder courts 
 answer fairly well so long as they are carefully tended, 
 but they are hard on the player's feet because of their 
 loose, gritty surface, and will soon wear the cover off of 
 a ball. The plain, e very-day " dirt " court is preferable 
 to the cinder affair, and, on the whole, makes a satisfac- 
 tory surface so long as it is kept well rolled and drained. 
 But the clay court will repay for the trouble and expendi- 
 ture necessary for its construction by its lasting qualities 
 and by the ease with which it may be kept in condition. 
 
 In selecting a site beware of low ground which 
 
 shows a disposition to hold moisture, as perfect drainage 
 
 is essential. Trees should not be near enough to throw 
 
 shade on the playing territory. The size of the double 
 
 court is 78 by 36 feet, but you should allow for a margin 
 
 420 
 
THE COITKT 421 
 
 of not less than 12 feet on each side, and one of at least 
 20 feet at each end. Lay the court north and south, or 
 approximately so, in order that the late afternoon sun 
 will not shine into the players' eyes. 
 
 Dig away the soil to the depth of one foot and level 
 the exposed surface carefully, allowing a drop of from 
 four to six inches from each end toward the center. 
 Then roll it hard. On it place a six-inch layer of broken 
 rock or slag, and pound and roll thoroughly until it is 
 compact and smooth but loose enough to allow water 
 thrown upon it to percolate readily. If convenient lay 
 a line of terra-cotta drain-pipe, such as is used for drain- 
 ing fields, across the court in the middle under where 
 the net is to hang, allowing the top of it to lie not more 
 than four inches from the final surface of the court and 
 giving it a slight slope to one side of the court where the 
 water should be allowed to waste away into a bed of 
 broken rock or a sunken barrel. This drain constitutes 
 an excellent feature, but is not ordinarily absolutely 
 necessary. The next layer of filling should be about 
 three inches thick when thoroughly firmed down, and 
 may be of fairly coarse gravel and sand or of coarse cin- 
 ders. The latter has two advantages over the former; 
 it is more resilient and can not be pierced by grass or 
 weeds should the roots of such remain below. This 
 layer, like the preceding one and the one following, 
 should be carefully graded toward the center. It should 
 be watered copiously and rolled thoroughly; three days 
 is not too much time to spend on this stage of the work. 
 
422 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 Foe the sueface dkessing use equal parts of coarse 
 beach sand or builder's sand and clay. Mix it thor- 
 oughly in piles, turning it over and over again, and 
 finally spread on the court until it is well above the pro- 
 posed surface. All that now remains to be done is to 
 pound and roll it hard and firm, sprinkling with hose or 
 watering-can as the work progresses, and to fill in all de- 
 pressions. If, when completed, the surface proves too 
 sticky sprinkle with more sand. During the next week 
 water and roll the surface each day and watch for depres- 
 sions; any spot on which the water stands should be 
 filled in. A hard rain will put your work to a very thor- 
 ough test, and after it is over you will probably find 
 some washes and pools, resulting from the settling of the 
 earth, which will need attention. 
 
 Maintaining a clay couet, after it is once in good 
 condition, is not difficult. It should be lightly swept 
 free of clods and rubbish every day and should be well 
 sprinkled at least thrice a week — the best time to do this 
 is in the evening unless the weather is particularly dry 
 with no dew — and rolled while still moist the next morn- 
 ing. It will be necessary to remove an occasional pebble, 
 to fill in a depression now and then and to keep weeds 
 and grass from the margins. The court should have a 
 thorough going over each spring before it is wanted 
 for use. 
 
 To mark out the couet, first find the center of the 
 space at your disposal. From this measure 13| feet each 
 way toward the sides of the space and set stakes. The 
 
THE COUKT 423 
 
 line between these stakes represents the position of the 
 net, and should be 27 feet long, and should run at right 
 angles with the sides of the space. To one net stake 
 attach a measuring tape 39 feet long and to the other a 
 tape 47 feet 5 inches long. Draw each one taut and 
 bring the ends together until they meet, at which point 
 set a stake indicating the junction of base-line and the 
 side-line. Measure 21 feet from the net stake along the 
 line to the corner stake, and so find one end of the serv- 
 ice-line. Now interchange the tapes, and by the same 
 method find the junction of the base-line and the op- 
 posite side-line, and as before put a stake down 21 feet 
 from the net stake to indicate the other end of the serv- 
 ice-line. You have now secured the boundaries of one 
 court. The same process on the other side of the net 
 stakes will find the corresponding boundaries. 
 
 Xext, by finding the middle point of the two service- 
 lines and connecting them you have the center-line, and 
 your single court is complete. 
 
 To enlarge it into a double court extend each base- 
 line 4 feet 6 inches and from the points so secured run 
 new lines parallel to the single-court side-lines. Place 
 your net posts three feet out from the double-court side- 
 lines. 
 
424 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 LAWN-TENNIS KECOKDS 
 
 THE SEASON OF 1903 
 
 The tennis season of 1903 was a remarkably prosperous, as 
 well as an extremely interesting one in this country. It wit- 
 nessed a large increase in the number of minor tournaments and 
 saw the best American talent go down before the superior playing 
 of the Doherty brothers, champions of England. They won the 
 Davis International Challenge Cup at Longwood, Mass., on Au- 
 gust 7th, by defeating the Wrenn brothers, 7-5, 9-7, 2-6, 6-3. On 
 August 8th, on the same courts, H. L. Doherty defeated Larned, 
 American champion, in singles, 6-3, 6-8, 6-0, 2-6, 7-5. R. F. 
 Doherty won from R. D. Wrenn, 6-4, 6-3, 8-6. 
 
 At Newport the Englishmen won the American championship 
 in doubles by defeating Waldner and Collins, 7-3, 6-3, 6-3, after 
 those players, Western champions, had earned the right to meet 
 the challengers by winning from the Eastern champions, Ware and 
 Ward. H. L. Doherty subsequently won the singles championship 
 by defeating W. J. Clothier. 
 
 In Philadelphia, on June 27th, Miss Elizabeth Moore defeated 
 the former champion, Miss Marion Jones, and captured the Wom- 
 an's National Championship. 
 
 LAWN-TENNIS RANKING FOR 1903 
 
 SINGLES 
 
 Class 1. Owe 3-6 of 15 — William A. Larned, Annapolis, Md. 
 
 Class 2. Owe 2-6 of 15 — Holcombe Ward, South Orange, N. J. ; 
 William J. Clothier, Philadelphia, Pa.; Beals C. Wright, Boston, 
 Mass. 
 
 Class 3. Owe 1-6 of 15 — Kreigh Collins, Chicago, 111. 
 
 Class 4. Scratch — Edwin P. Larned, Summit, N. J. ; Harry F. 
 Allen, Philadelphia, Pa.; Edgar W. Leonard, Boston, Mass.; 
 R. H. Carleton, New York, N. Y. 
 
LAWN-TENNIS RECORDS 425 
 
 Class 5. Receive 2-6 of 15 — C. Seaver, Boston, Mass.; Kenneth 
 Horton, Nahant, Mass.; Robert Huntington, Stotesburg, N. Y. ; 
 Stephen C. Millett, New York, N. Y. ; Louis H. Waidner, Chicago, 
 111.; J. E. D. Jones, Providence, R. I. 
 
 Class 6. Receive 3-6 of 15— Robert Le Roy, New York, N. Y. ; 
 R. Hunt, Alameda, Gal.; J. Neely, Chicago, 111.; I. C. Wright, 
 Boston, Mass. ; C. F. Watson, Jr., South Orange, N. J. ; F. Geohc- 
 gan, Washington, D. C. 
 
 Class 7. Receive 4-6 of 15 — S. Warland, Cambridge, Mass.; 
 A. S. Pier, Boston, Mass.; Ross Burchard, New York, N. Y. ; 
 Wylie C. Grant, New York, N. Y. 
 
 Class 8. Receive 5-6 of 15 — John C. Davidson, Washington, 
 D. C. ; Frederick G. Anderson, Brooklyn, N. Y.; Harry W. Mollen- 
 hauer, Brooklyn, N. Y. ; H. H. Whitman, Boston, Mass.; Robert 
 M. Miles, South Orange, N. J. ; R. Bishop, Boston, Mass. ; H. Holt, 
 Boston, Mass.; Oviedio M. Bostwick, New York, N. Y. ; H. Tor- 
 rence, Tenafly, N. J. ; W. P. Blagden, New York, N. Y. 
 
 Glass 9. Receive 15 — Theodore Roosevelt Pell, New York, 
 N. Y.; Samuel C. Westfall, Brooklyn, N. Y. ; A. Fuller, Boston, 
 Mass.; Louis E. Mahan, New York, N. Y. ; B. S. Prentice, New 
 York, N. Y. ; A. Hoskins, Philadelphia, Pa. ; B. F. Merrill, Boston, 
 Mass.; J. B. Read, Boston, Mass.; Dr. L. W. Glazebrook, Wash- 
 ington, D. C. ; F. Colket, Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
 Class 10. Receive 15 and 2-6 — Harry E. Avery, New York, 
 N. Y. 
 
 Class 1. Scratch — William A. Larned and Beals C. Wright, 
 Holcombe Ward and Leonard E. Ware, Robert D. Wrenn and 
 George L. Wrenn, Jr., Kreigh Collins and Louis H. Waidner. 
 
 Class 2. Receive 2-6 of 15 — William A. Larned and Malcolm 
 D. Whitman. 
 
 Class 3. Receive 4-6 of 15 — William J. Clothier and Edgar W. 
 Leonard, Beals C. Wright and Irving C. Wright. 
 
 Class 4. Receive 15 — Harry F. Allen and Robert Le Roy, Irv- 
 ing C. Wright and Edgar W. Leonard, and Wylie C. Grant and 
 Robert Le Roy. 
 
426 
 
 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 OFFICIAL RANKING LISTS SINCE 1895 
 
 1895. 
 
 F. H. Hovey. 
 W. A. Lamed. 
 M. G. Chase. 
 John Howland. 
 R. D. Wrenn. 
 C. B. Neel. 
 
 C. Hobart. 
 Richard Stevens. 
 
 A. E. Foote. 
 
 C. R. Budlong. 
 
 1898. 
 M. D. Whitman. 
 L. E. Ware. 
 W. S. Bond. 
 
 D. F. Davis. 
 
 C. R. Budlong. 
 
 E. P. Fischer. 
 
 G. L. Wrenn. 
 Richard Stevens. 
 S. C. Millett. 
 
 G. K. Belden. 
 1901. 
 W. A. Lamed. 
 
 B. C. Wright. 
 
 D. F. Davis. 
 L. E. Ware. 
 Clarence Hobart. 
 R. D. Little. 
 Holcombe Ward. 
 Kreigh Collins. 
 
 E. P. Fischer. 
 W. J. Clothier. 
 
 1896. 
 R. D. Wrenn. 
 W. A. Larned. 
 
 C. B. Neel. 
 
 F. H. Hovey. 
 E. P. Fischer. 
 
 G. L. Wrenn, Jr. 
 R. Stevens. 
 
 M. D. Whitman. 
 
 L. E. Ware. 
 
 G. P. Sheldon, Jr. 
 
 1899. 
 M. D. Whitman. 
 
 D. F. Davis. 
 W. A. Larned. 
 J. P. Paret. 
 Kreigh Collins. 
 George Wrenn, Jr. 
 L. E. Ware. 
 
 B. C. Wright. 
 
 Holcombe Ward. 
 
 R. P. Huntington, Jr, 
 
 1902. 
 W. A. Larned. 
 M. D. Whitman. 
 B. C. Wright. 
 Holcombe Ward. 
 W. J. Clothier. 
 L. E. Ware. 
 R. D. Little. 
 H. H. Hackett. 
 Clarence Hobart. 
 Kreigh Collins. 
 
 1897. 
 
 D. D. Wrenn. 
 W. A. Larned. 
 W. V. Eaves. 
 H. A. Nesbit. 
 H. S. Mahoney. 
 G. L. Wrenn. 
 M. D. Whitman. 
 Kreigh Collins. 
 
 E. P. Fischer. 
 W. S. Bond. 
 
 1900. 
 M. D. Whitman. 
 
 D. F. Davis. 
 W. A. Lamed. 
 B. C. Wright. 
 Kreigh Collins. 
 G. L. Wrenn, Jr. 
 Holcombe Ward. 
 L. E. Ware. 
 
 J. L. Allen. 
 R. D. Little. 
 
 1903. 
 W. A. Lamed. 
 Holcombe Ward. 
 W. J. Clothier. 
 
 B. C. Wright. 
 Kreigh Collins. 
 
 E. P. Larned. 
 H. F. Allen. 
 E. W. Leonard. 
 R. H. Carleton. 
 
 C. Seaver. 
 
LAWN-TENNIS RULES 
 
 427 
 
 RULES OE LAWN TENNIS 
 
 (By permission of the American Sports Publishing Company, owner of the copyright. ) 
 THE COURT 
 
 ^1 
 
 78 
 B 
 
 G 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 L E 
 
 18 
 
 
 21 
 
 18 
 
 21 
 
 
 F 
 
 
 b 
 
 /I 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 39 
 
 39 
 
 Diagram O. — Double tennis court. 
 
 1. The court is 78 feet long and 27 feet wide. It is divided 
 across the middle by a net, the ends of which are attached to two 
 posts, A and B, standing 3 feet outside of the court on either side. 
 The height of the net is 3 feet 6 inches at the posts, and 3 feet in 
 the middle. At each end of the court, parallel with the net and 
 39 feet from it, are drawn the base-lines D E and F G, the ends of 
 which are connected by the side-lines D F and E G. Half-way 
 between the side-lines, and parallel with them, is drawn the half- 
 court line I H, dividing the space on each side of the net into two 
 equal parts, the right and left courts. On each side of the net, at 
 a distance of 21 feet from it, and parallel with it, are drawn the 
 service-lines K L and M N. 
 
 THE BALLS 
 
 2. The Balls shall measure not less than 2i inches nor more 
 than 2-> a o inches in diameter; and shall weigh not less than ljf 
 ounces, nor more than 2 ounces. 
 
428 LAWN" TENNis 
 
 THE GAME 
 
 3. The choice of sides, and the right to serve in the first 
 game, shall be decided by toss ; provided that, if the winner of 
 the toss choose the right to serve the other player shall have 
 choice of sides, and vice versa, or the winner of the toss may 
 insist upon a choice by his opponent. If one player choose the 
 court the other may elect not to serve. 
 
 4. The players shall stand on opposite sides of the net; the 
 player who first delivers the ball shall be called the server, and 
 the other the striker-out. 
 
 5. At the end of the first game the striker-out shall become 
 server, and the server shall become striker-out; and so on alter- 
 nately in all the subsequent games of the set, and following sets. 
 
 6. The seiwer shall serve with both feet behind, i. e., farther 
 from the net than the base-line, and within the limits of the 
 imaginary continuation of the center service and the side-lines. 
 It is not a fault if only one of the server's feet do not touch 
 the ground at the moment at which the service is delivered. He 
 shall place both feet upon the ground immediately before serving, 
 and shall not take a running nor a walking start. He shall deliver 
 the service from the right and left courts alternately, beginning 
 from the right, in each of his service games, even though odds 
 be given or owed. 
 
 7. The ball served must drop between the service-line, half- 
 court line, and side-line of the court, diagonally opposite to 
 that from which it was served. 
 
 8. It is a fault if the ball served drop in the net beyond the 
 service-line, or out of court, or in the wrong court; or if the 
 server do not stand as directed by law 6. If the server, in at- 
 tempting to serve, miss the ball altogether, it does not count a 
 fault, but if the ball be touched, no matter how slightly, by the 
 racket, a service is thereby delivered, and the laws governing the 
 service at once apply. 
 
 9. A fault can not be taken. 
 
 10. After a fault the server shall serve again from the same 
 
LAWST-TENNIS RULES 429 
 
 court from which he served that fault, unless it was a fault 
 because he served from the wrong court. 
 
 11. A fault can not be claimed after the next service is deliv- 
 ered. 
 
 12. The server shall not serve till the striker-out is ready. 
 If the latter attempt to return the service he shall be deemed 
 ready. 
 
 13. A service or fault delivered when the striker-out is not 
 ready counts for nothing. 
 
 14. The service shall not be volleyed — that is, taken before it 
 has touched the ground. 
 
 15. A ball is in play on leaving the server's racket, except as 
 provided for in law 8, and remains in play till the stroke is de- 
 cided. 
 
 16. It is a good return, although the ball touch the net; but 
 a service, otherwise good, which touches the net shall count for 
 nothing. 
 
 17. The server wins a stroke if the striker-out volley the serv- 
 ice, or if he fail to return the service or the ball in play; or if 
 he return the service or the ball in play so that it drops outside 
 of his opponent's court; or if he otherwise lose a stroke, as pro- 
 vided by law 20. 
 
 18. The striker-out wins a stroke if the server serve two con- 
 secutive faults ; or if he fail to return the ball in play ; or if he 
 return the ball in play so that it drops outside of his opponent's 
 court, or if he otherwise lose a stroke, as provided by law 20. 
 
 19. A ball falling on a line is regarded as falling in the court 
 bounded by that line. 
 
 20. Either player loses a stroke if the ball touch him, or any- 
 thing that he wears or carries, except his racket in the act of 
 striking ; or if he touch the ball with his racket more than once ; 
 or if he touch the net or any of its supports while the ball is in 
 play ; or if he volley the ball before it has passed the net. 
 
 21. In case a player is obstructed by any accident not within 
 his control, the ball shall be considered a " let." But where a 
 permanent fixture of the court is the cause of the accident, the 
 point shall be counted. The benches and chairs placed around 
 
430 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 the court shall be considered permanent fixtures. If, however, a 
 ball in play strike a permanent fixture of the court (other than 
 the net or posts) before it touches the ground, the point is lost; 
 if after it has touched the ground, the point shall be counted. 
 
 22. On either player winning his first stroke, the score is called 
 15 for that player; on either player winning his second stroke, 
 the score is called 30 for that player; on either player winning his 
 third stroke, the score is called 40 for that player ; and the fourth 
 stroke won by either player is scored game for that player, except 
 as below: If both players have won three strokes, the score is 
 called deuce; and the next stroke won by either player is scored 
 advantage for that player. If the same player win the next stroke, 
 he wins the game ; if he lose the next stroke the score returns to 
 deuce, and so on until one player wins the two strokes immediately 
 following the score of deuce, when game is scored for that player. 
 
 23. The player who first wins six games wins the set; except 
 as below: If both players win five games the score is called games 
 all; and the next game won by either player is scored advantage 
 game for that player. If the same player win the next game, he 
 wins the set ; if he lose the next game, the score returns to games 
 all ; and so on, until either player wins the two games immediately 
 following the score of games all, when he wins the set. But the 
 committee having charge of any tournament may in their discre- 
 tion modify this rule by the omission of advantage sets. 
 
 24. The players shall change sides at the end of the first, third, 
 and every subsequent alternate game of each set, and at the end 
 of each set, unless the number of games in such set be even. It 
 shall, however, be open to the players, by mutual consent and 
 notification to the umpire before the opening of the second game 
 of the match, to change sides instead at the end of every set until 
 the odd and concluding set, in which they shall change sides at 
 the end of the first, third, and every subsequent alternate game 
 of such set. 
 
 *25. In all contests the play shall be continuous from the first 
 
 *AU matches in which women take part in tournaments held under the aus- 
 pices of the United States National Lawn Tenuis Association shall be the best two 
 sets, with a rest not exceeding seven minutes after the second set. 
 
LAWX-TENNIS RULES 431 
 
 service till the match be concluded ; provided, however, that at the 
 end of the third set either player is entitled to a rest, which shall 
 not exceed seven minutes; and provided, further, that in case of 
 an unavoidable accident, not within the control of the contestants, 
 a cessation of play which shall not exceed two minutes may be 
 allowed between points; but this proviso shall be strictly con- 
 strued, and the privilege never granted for the purpose of allow- 
 ing a player to recover his strength or wind. The referee in his 
 discretion may at any time postpone the match on account of dark- 
 ness or condition of the ground or weather. In any case of post- 
 ponement the previous score shall hold good. When the play has 
 ceased for more than an hour the player, who at the cessation 
 thereof was in the court first chosen, shall have the choice of 
 courts on the recommencement of play. He shall stay in the court 
 he chooses for the remainder of the set. The last two sentences 
 of this rule do not apply when the players change every alternate 
 game as provided by law 24. 
 
 26. If a player serve out of his turn the umpire, as soon as 
 the mistake is discovered, shall direct the player to serve who 
 ought to have served. But all strokes scored before such discovery 
 shall be counted. If a game shall have been completed before 
 such discovery, then the service in the next alternate game shall 
 be delivered by the player who did not serve out of his turn, 
 and so on in regular rotation. 
 
 27. The above laws shall apply to the three-handed and four- 
 handed games, except as below: 
 
 THE THKEE-HANDED AND FOUR-HANDED GAMES 
 
 28. For the three-handed and four-handed games the court 
 shall be 36 feet in width ; 41 feet inside the side-lines, and 
 parallel with them, are drawn the service side-lines K M and L N. 
 The service-lines are not drawn beyond the point at which they 
 meet the service side-lines, as shown in the diagram. 
 
 29. In the three-handed game the single player shall serve in 
 every alternate game. 
 
 30. In the four-handed game, the pair who have the right to 
 
 28 
 
432 
 
 LAWN TENNIS 
 
 serve in the first game shall decide which partner shall do so; 
 and the opposing pair shall decide in like manner for the second 
 game. The partner of the player who served in the first game 
 shall serve in the third, and the partner of the player who served 
 in the second game shall serve in the fourth, and the same order 
 shall be maintained in all the subsequent games of the set. 
 
 D 
 
 
 / 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 L 
 
 N 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 Diagram P. — Single tennis court. 
 
 31. At the beginning of the next set, either partner of the pair 
 which struck out in the last game of the last set may serve; and 
 the same privilege is given to their opponents in second game of 
 new set. 
 
 32. The players shall take the service alternately throughout 
 the game; a player can not receive a service delivered to his 
 partner; and the order of service and striking out once established 
 shall not be altered, nor shall the striker-out change courts to 
 receive the service, till the end of the set. 
 
 33. It is a fault if the ball served do not drop between the serv- 
 ice-line, half-court line, and service side-line of the court, diago- 
 nally opposite to that from which it was served. 
 
 34. It is a fault if the ball served do not drop as provided in 
 law 33, or if it touch the server's partner or anything he wears 
 or carries. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 Harvard -Yale Athletic Agreement: in effect 
 March 15, 1903 
 
 The two universities herewith enter into the follow- 
 ing agreement for contests in the four main branches of 
 sport — football, baseball, rowing and track athletics — 
 under the following conditions, the agreement to con- 
 tinue for two years, and thereafter to continue for suc- 
 cessive two-year periods, except upon notice to the con- 
 trary by properly constituted authorities not less than 
 six weeks before the termination of the previous period 
 of two years. Agreement to take effect March 15, 1903. 
 The following rules are to take effect for all students who 
 enter the universities after the summer of 1903. The 
 eligibility of students who are now in the universities 
 shall be determined under the rules now in force. 
 
 Any cases of disagreement as to the construction or 
 meaning of this agreement, and of both the existing 
 rules and the rules herewith adopted, shall be referred 
 to an arbitration committee consisting of Mr. William 
 R. Meikleham, of New York city, a graduate of Colum- 
 bia University; Mr. E. D. Wrenn, representing Har- 
 vard; and Otto T. Bannard, representing Yale, whose 
 
 decisions shall be final. 
 
 435 
 
436 ATHLETIC AGREEMENT 
 
 The captain at each university shall be held finally 
 responsible for the eligibility of the list of candidates he 
 submits, except in matters determined in college standing 
 and scholarship. 
 
 At each university a committee of reference shall be 
 appointed before October 1 of each year, this committee 
 to include three graduates and the name of the committee 
 to be published, with whom the captain shall confer as 
 to the eligibility of his list of men. 
 
 In case of disagreement between the captain and his 
 committee the case must be thus stated when submitting 
 his list of names to the opposing captain, who may then 
 refer it to the arbitration committee provided for in the 
 preamble, whose decision shall be final. But even in 
 case the captain and his own committee agree a case may 
 still be referred by the opposing captain to the arbitration 
 committee. 
 
 Rule 1. — No student shall be eligible unless he is, 
 and intends to be throughout the academic year, bona 
 fide a member of the university, taking a full year's work 
 in courses leading to a degree. His name must have been 
 presented at least two weeks in advance to the dean or 
 director of the department in which he is enrolled and 
 be declared by him to be in satisfactory standing. 
 
 Note (A). — No student shall be deemed to be in sat- 
 isfactory standing within the meaning of this rule if he 
 has been dropped from his class to a lower class, or from 
 a first-year class out of the university, or if he is on proba- 
 tion. In case he has been dropped he must have com- 
 
APPENDIX 437 
 
 pleted satisfactorily one year's work before he shall be 
 eligible, unless he shall in the meantime have made up 
 all of the deficiencies which stand in the way of his 
 restoration to his class. 
 
 (B). — A student whose college work is satisfactory, 
 but who has been declared by the dean to have been 
 dropped on account of sickness or entrance condition, 
 shall be considered eligible under this rule. 
 
 (C). — A student who by reason of his probation or 
 deficiency in his studies is not eligible will not become 
 eligible by entering another department of the university 
 until after he has completed satisfactorily one entire 
 year's work. 
 
 Rule 2. — No student shall be eligible for a univer- 
 sity team unless he is an undergraduate, or has been in 
 attendance one full academic year at the university. 
 
 Rule 3. — No undergraduate who has ever played in 
 an intercollegiate contest upon a university team of an- 
 other college shall play upon a university team until he 
 has resided one academic year at the university and 
 passed the annual examination upon a full year's work. 
 
 Rule 4. — No student who has not passed an entrance 
 examination shall be eligible until he has resided a year 
 at the university and has passed satisfactorily in a course 
 equivalent to that required of candidates for a degree in 
 the department of which he is a member. 
 
 Rule 5. — No student shall represent one or more 
 universities or colleges in athletic contests for more than 
 four academic years; a student shall be considered to 
 
438 ATHLETIC AGREEMENT 
 
 have represented his university if he has taken part on a 
 university team in any intercollegiate contest which was 
 on the official schedule or regularly advertised, or where 
 gate money was charged. ISTote. — In this rule the term 
 college includes all institutions named in the list of col- 
 leges and technological schools in the last report of the 
 United States Commissioner of Education as revised by 
 the committees. 
 
 Rule 6. — !No student shall be eligible who shall have 
 received, in order to enable him to take part in or for 
 participation in or for teaching any form of athletics, any 
 pecuniary gain or emolument whatever, with the single 
 exception that he may have received from his college 
 organization or from any permanent amateur association 
 of which he was at the time a regular member the amount 
 by which the expenses incurred by him in representing 
 his organization in athletic contests exceeded his ordinary 
 expenses. 
 
 Rule 7. — No student shall be a member of the fresh- 
 man team or crew except one who has never before 
 attended another college or university and who is a mem- 
 ber of the first-year class and in his first year of residence 
 and in satisfactory standing. 
 
 Rule 8. — Each captain shall submit to the other cap- 
 tain in writing, at least three weeks before the contest, 
 a list of his men. No protest against any man shall be 
 considered unless sent by registered mail at least two 
 weeks before the contest in which the man is to take part. 
 
AN OUTDOOR BOOK FOR WOMEN. 
 
 The Woman's Book of Sports. 
 
 A Practical Guide to Physical Development and Outdoor Recrea- 
 tion. By J. Parmly Paret. i 2mo. With many Illustrations. 
 Cloth, $1.00 net; postage, 8 cents additional. 
 
 This is a practical guide by a practical writer for the amateur 
 sportswoman. Golf, lawn-tennis, sailing, swimming, bicycling, 
 and basket-ball have each their chapters, and the devotee of any 
 of these sports will find here much that will be instructive. The 
 book is an invaluable guide for the feminine novice in sports, for 
 each game is treated from the elementary standpoint, the first 
 rudiments of skill in all being explained in a simple and direct 
 manner for practical use. Here will be found the condensed 
 teachings of the best professional instructors, and any woman 
 should quickly learn any of the games by studying its chapters. 
 
 A unique feature of this book is the chapter on men's sports 
 from a woman's point of view — from the view-point of the spec- 
 tator. Football, baseball, yacht racing, rowing, and athletics are 
 all fully explained, so that the uninitiated spectator, either man or 
 woman, may learn enough of any of these sports in a half-hour's 
 reading of its chapters to appreciate the game to be seen. The 
 yachting chapter has been specially prepared with an eye to the 
 coming international races for the America's Cup. 
 
 It is thoroughly illustrated with half-tone reproductions (all 
 full-page size, with large figures) of instantaneous photographs 
 showing the correct and incorrect methods in the different sports. 
 In illustrating the drive in golf, for instance, three illustrations 
 show the beginning, the middle, and the end of the swing as it 
 should be made, while a fourth shows the incorrect finish of 
 the swing, without the all-important "carry through." Other 
 sports are treated in the same way. 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. 
 
BY WILLIAM O. STODDARD. 
 
 The Spy of Yorktown. 
 
 Illustrated. Colored Frontispiece. $1.25 net ; postage, 12 cents 
 additional. 
 
 The story deals with the interesting epoch of our Revolutionary history when 
 Benedict Arnold, as a reward of his treachery, was in charge of the English forces 
 in Virginia. The spy of Yorktown himself is a brave lad who runs the gamut of 
 adventure following upon his selection by Governor Thomas Jefferson to report tc 
 him the numbers and designs of the invading army. 
 
 OTHER BOOKS BY MR. STODDARD. 
 With the Black Prince. 
 
 A Story of Adventure in the Fourteenth Century. Illustrated by 
 B. West Clinedinst. 
 
 The absorbing interest of this stirring historical romance will appeal to all young 
 readers. 
 
 Success Against Odds ; or, How an American Boy made his 
 Way. 
 
 Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst. 
 
 In this spirited and interesting story Mr. Stoddard tells the adventures of a 
 plucky boy who fought his own battles, and made his way upward from poverty in 
 a Long Island seashore town. It is a tale of pluck and self-reliance capitally told. 
 
 The Red Patriot. 
 
 A Story of the American Revolution. Illustrated by B. West 
 Clinedinst. 
 
 The Windfall ; or, After the Flood. 
 
 Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst. 
 
 Chris, the Model-Maker. 
 
 A Story of New York. With 6 full-page Illustrations by B. West 
 Clinedinst. 
 
 On the Old Frontier. 
 
 With 10 full-page Illustrations. 
 
 The Battle of New York. 
 
 With 11 full page Illustrations and colored Frontispiece. 
 
 Little Smoke. 
 
 A Story of the Sioux Indians. With 12 full-page Illustrations by 
 F. S. Dellenbaugh, portraits of Sitting Bull, Red Cloud, and other 
 chiefs, and 72 head and tail pieces representing the various imple- 
 ments and surroundings of Indian life. 
 
 Crowded Out o' Crofield. 
 
 The Story of a country boy who fought his way to success in the 
 great metropolis. With 23 Illustrations by C. T. Hill. 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. 
 
STORIES FOR YOUNG READERS. 
 
 The Exploits of Myles Standish. 
 
 By Henry Johnson (Muirhead Robertson), Author of 
 "From Scrooby to Plymouth Rock," etc. Illustrated. 
 i2mo. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 The story of " The Exploits of Myles Standish " throws a clearer light upon 
 a heroic figure in our earliest history, and it has an epic quality which will 
 appeal to old and young. While the facts of history are presented, the author 
 has adroitly reconstructed the little-known earlier years of Standish's life, 
 basing his imaginative work upon the probabilities of history. 
 
 John Boyd's Adventures. 
 
 By Thomas W. Knox, Author of "The Boy Travelers," 
 etc. With 12 full-page Illustrations by W. S. Stacey. i2mo. 
 Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 John was a hero of the days when American sailors manned American 
 ships, and the ships went everywhere, in spite of pirates and hostile Frenchmen 
 and Englishmen. He went to sea in the early part of the century, and his 
 adventures as an Algerine slave, a man-of-war's-man, an intended victim of 
 Chinese pirates, and as a young hero in other stirring scenes, almost encircle 
 the globe, and enable the author to eonvey much information regarding strange 
 peoples and countries and the history of. troublous times. 
 
 The Crystal Hunters. 
 
 A Boy's Adventures in the Higher Alps. By G. Man- 
 ville Fenn. Profusely Illustrated. i2tno. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 This is an animated account of the experience of a boy who explored the 
 crevasses and caves of the Alps in search of crystals. The story has a well- 
 sustained interest throughout, and is replete with anecdotes and information of 
 a most fascinating and picturesque country. 
 
 Syd Belton, the Boy who would not go to Sea. 
 
 By G. Manville Fenn. i2mo. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 A thrilling story of adventure that cannot fail to interest and instruct the 
 youthful readers whose tastes the author so well understands. An excellent 
 book to place in a boy's hands. 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. 
 
YOUNG HEROES OF OUR NAVY. 
 
 NEW VOLUME. 
 
 With the Flag in the Channel. 
 
 The Adventures of Captain Gustavus Conyngham. By James 
 Barnes. Illustrated. 80 cents net ; postage, 10 cents additional. 
 
 OTHER VOLUMES IN THE SERIES. 
 
 Illustrated. i2mo. Each, $ 1.00. 
 
 Reuben James. 
 
 A Hero of the Forecastle. By Cyrus Townsend Brady, Author 
 of " Paul Jones." Illustrated by George Gibbs and others. 
 
 The Hero of Manila. 
 
 Dewey on the Mississippi and the Pacific. By Rossiter Johnson. 
 Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst and others. 
 
 The Hero of Erie {Commodore Perry). 
 
 By James Barnes, Author of " Midshipman Farragut," "Commo- 
 dore Bainbridge," etc. With 10 full-page Illustrations. 
 
 Commodore Bainbridge. 
 
 From the Gunroom to the Quarter-deck. By James Barnes. 
 Illustrated by George Gibbs and others. 
 
 Midshipman Farragut. 
 
 By James Barnes. Illustrated by Carlton F. Chapman. 
 
 Decatur and Somers. 
 
 By Molly Elliot Seawell. With 6 full-page Illustrations by 
 J. O. Davidson and others. 
 
 Paul Jones. 
 
 By Molly Elliot Seawell. With 8 full-page Illustrations. 
 
 Midshipman Paulding. 
 
 A True Story of the War of 18 12. By Molly Elliot Seawell. 
 With 6 full page Illustrations. 
 
 Little Jarvis. 
 
 The Story of the Heroic Midshipman of the Frigate Constellation. 
 By Molly Elliot Seawell. With 6 full-page Illustrations. 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. 
 
NEW BOOKS FOR YOUNG READERS. 
 
 BY JAMES BARNES. 
 
 The Giant of Three Wars. 
 
 (Heroes of Our Army Series.) Illustrated. i2mo. Cloth, $1.00 
 net; postage, 10 cents additional. 
 
 This life of General Winfield Scott makes the first volume in the new 
 Series to be known as " Heroes of Our Army." It possesses a colored frontis 
 piece and other illustrations. 
 
 BY MARION AMES TAGGART. 
 
 At Aunt Anna's. 
 
 Colored Frontispiece and other Illustrations by • William L. 
 Jacobs. i2mo. Cloth, $1.00 net ; postage, 10 cents additional. 
 
 The story of Ted and Dolly, who are twins, while staying one summer in 
 the country at Aunt Anna's. This is a tale for children of ten or twelve years 
 of age, being illustrated, and having an illustrative cover. It is a dainty book 
 for dainty children, but has the charm that interests the grown person, who 
 may read it aloud to those for whom it was written. 
 
 BY KATE DICKINSON SWEETSER. 
 
 Micky of the Alley and Other Youngsters. 
 
 With Illustrations by George Alfred Williams. i2mo. Cloth, 
 $1.00 net ; postage, 10 cents additional. 
 
 A collection of tales for children of ten to twelve years of age. The subjects 
 are widely varied. That one giving its title to the book, together with " James 
 Barkerding, Knight, " are of life in the tenement districts of New York. 
 "Teddy Baird's Luck" tells how a boy finds, when he least expects it, the 
 adventure he has been looking for ; " Marooned" is the story of a boy who 
 finds that a boy may be just as much scared as a girl ; ' ' Othello, Jr. , " de- 
 cribes how a little negro played Othello in a juvenile company of actors ; "A 
 Millinery Opening " and ' ' The Boys' Ball " are Christmas stories ; and " Sal " 
 is the pathetic story of a little girl who follows a hand-organ and coughs for 
 pennies. 
 
 BY GABRIELLE E. JACKSON. 
 
 Three Graces. 
 
 Illustrated in Colors by C. M. Relyea. i2mo. Cloth, $1.25 net; 
 postage, 12 cents additional. 
 
 A story for girls of boarding-school life, full of incident and wholesome char- 
 acterization, with delightfully cozy scenes of indoor enjoyment and an exciting 
 description of a Hallowe'en escapade. The Three Graces are interesting girls 
 who may count upon finding among youthful readers many who will follow 
 their school experiences with a sense of making new friends. 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. 
 
BY HEZEKIAH BUTTERWORTH, 
 
 Brother Jonathan ; or, The Alarm Post in the Cedars. 
 
 A Tale of Early Connecticut. Illustrated. Colored Frontispiece. $1.25 
 net ; postage, 12 cents additional. 
 
 A stirring tale of the early days of Connecticut, dominated by the forceful per- 
 sonality of Jonathan Trumbull, whose name, through its affectionate use by George 
 Washington, has become the familiar nickname of the nation that he helped to make. 
 
 OTHER BOOKS BY MR. BUTTERWORTH. 
 
 In the Days of Audubon. 
 
 A Tale of the " Protector of Birds." Illustrated by B West Clinedinst 
 and others. $1.20 net ; postage, 14 cents additional. 
 
 In the Days of Jefferson ; or, The Six Golden Horseshoes. 
 
 A Tale of Republican Simplicity. Illustrated by F. T. Merrill. $1.50. 
 
 The Story of Magellan. 
 
 A Tale of the Discovery of the Philippines. Illustrated by F. T. Merrill 
 and others. $1.50. 
 
 The Treasure Ship. 
 
 A Story of Sir William Phipps and the Inter-Charter Period in Massa- 
 chusetts. Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst and others. $1.50. 
 
 The Pilot of the Mayflower. 
 
 Illustrated by H. Winthrop Peirce and others. $1.50. 
 
 True to his Home. 
 
 A Tale of the Boyhood of Franklin. Illustrated by H. Winthrop Peirce. 
 $1.50. 
 
 The Wampum Belt ; or, The Fairest Page of History. 
 
 A Tale of William Penn's Treaty with the Indians. With 6 full-page 
 Illustrations. $1.50. 
 
 The Knight of Liberty. 
 
 A Tale of the Fortunes of Lafayette. With 6 full-page Illustrations. 
 
 $1.50. 
 
 The Patriot Schoolmaster. 
 
 A Tale of the Minutemen and the Sons of Liberty. With 6 full-page 
 Illustrations by H. Winthrop Peirce. $1.50. 
 
 In the Boyhood of Lincoln, 
 
 A Story of the Black Hawk War and the Tunker Schoolmaster. With 
 12 Illustrations and colored Frontispiece. $1.50. 
 
 The Boys of Greenway Court. 
 
 A Story of the Early Years of Washington. With 10 full-page Illustra- 
 tions. $1.50. 
 
 The Log School-House on the Columbia. 
 
 With 13 full-page Illustrations by J. Carter Beard, E. J. Austen, and 
 others. $1.50. 
 
 D. APPLE TON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. 
 
ILLUSTRATED JUVENILE STORIES. 
 
 Jacks of All Trades. 
 
 A Story for Girls and Boys. By Katharine N. 
 
 Birdsall. Illustrated in two colors by Walter Russell, 
 
 with many text cuts. i2mo. Cloth, $1.20 net ; postage, 
 
 12 cents additional. 
 
 Here is a story that shows conclusively that " the child is father of the 
 man." Miss Birdsall has written a book that should be read by every boy 
 and girl who has any ambition or purpose to develop the best that is in 
 them. The author has taken nobility of character as the key-note for a 
 most wholesome and inspiriting story, the plot of which is of absorbing 
 interest. 
 
 Along the Florida Reef. 
 
 3y C. F. Holder. Illustrated. i2mo. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 The story of camping and fishing adventures in company with a 
 naturalist in Florida. The author combines entertainment with instruc- 
 tion, and his book is filled with illustrations which will be prized by 
 every young reader who has ever visited the sea-shore, or cares for 
 information regarding fishes, shells, and the various forms of marine life. 
 
 Christine's Career. 
 
 A Story for Girls. By Pauline King. Illustrated. 
 
 8vo. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 This book tells of an American girl who has been raised in France, 
 with her father, who is an artist. She comes to America with her aunt, 
 and the girls and customs of the two countries afford scope for agreeable 
 elements of contrast. 
 
 Stories of American History. 
 
 By Charlotte M. Yonge (Aunt Charlotte) and H. H. 
 
 Weld, D.D. Illustrated. i2mo. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 A book for young people just beyond the elementary histories of the 
 United States, and able to enter in some degree into the real spirit of 
 events. 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. 
 
ILLUSTRATED JUVENILE STORIES. 
 
 Hermine's Triumphs. 
 
 A Story for Girls and Boys. By Mme. Colomb. With ioo 
 Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 The popularity of this charming story of French home-life, which has 
 passed through many editions in Paris, has been earned by the sustained 
 interest of the narrative, the sympathetic presentation of character, and 
 the wholesomeness of the lessons which are suggested. One of the 
 most delightful books for girls published in recent years. 
 
 Madeleine's Rescue. 
 
 A Story for Girls and Boys. By Jeanne Schultz, 
 Author of "The Story of Colette," "Straight On," etc. 
 With Illustrations by Tofani. 8vo. Cloth, $1.00. 
 
 The charmingly sympathetic quality and refined humor of the author 
 of "Colette" has never been more happily illustra ed than in this 
 picturesque story of a girl and her boy friends — a story which grown 
 people as well as children will read with keen delight. 
 
 King Tom and the Runaways. 
 
 By Louis Pendleton, Author of " In the Wire Grass." 
 Illustrated. i2mo. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 A tale of the strange experiences of two boys in the forests and 
 swamps of Georgia, in which are described some remarkable adventures 
 in a little-known region. 
 
 Little Peter. 
 
 A Christmas Morality for Children of any Age. By 
 Lucas Malet, Author of " Colonel Enderby's Wife," etc. 
 With numerous Illustrations by Paul Hardy. i2mo. Cloth, 
 $1.25. 
 
 The story of a little boy and his cat, his friend, a misshapen charcoal 
 burner, and life in the pine forest, with the myths and legends, the 
 superstitions and quaint fancies of an earlier day. A book that will 
 delight the little folk of a winter's evening. 
 
 We All. 
 
 A Story of Outdoor Life and Adventure in Arkansas. 
 By Octave Thanet. With 12 full-page Illustrations by 
 E. J. Austin and others. 8vo. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK. 
 
o 
 
 
 
 \ v 
 
 V 
 
 
 i '<o 
 
 
 
 -/ V 
 
 
I s 
 
 x° r L 
 
 v 
 
 *W 
 
 ,** 
 
 rf\ 
 
 vV^-. 
 
 
 v ■<-,, 
 
 
 
 ~*» 
 
 
 ^r r 
 
 <5> 
 
 >s> 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 1 ,, 
 
 ^ 
 
 .>, 
 
 
 
 
 
 +, 
 
 Z* .0' 
 
 
 
 
 .* 
 
 
 $ r, 
 
 
 
 ' O^ S S * * T. *>- \ V 
 
 tf 
 
 VA. 
 
 
 •<-v 
 
 
 
 0' 
 
 A 
 
 
 L ,\ 
 
 ■> 
 
 >° 
 
 
 %,^ v 
 
 '^ & 
 
 £? 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 V- 
 
 
 .* x